.^!.//.^,:^...
THE
BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA
THE
BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA
A TRUE ACCOUNT OF THE MOST REMARKABLE ASSAULTS
COMMITTED OF LATE YEARS UPON THE COASTS OF
THE WEST INDIES BY THE BUCCANEERS OF JAMAICA
AND TORTUGA (BOTH ENGLISH AND FRENCH)
Wherein are contained more especially the Unparalleled Exploits of
Sir Henry Morgan, our English /a?naican Hero, who
sacked Porto Bello, burnt Panama, etc.
BY
JOHN ESOUEMELING
One of the Buccaneers who was presciii at those tragedies
Mow taitbtuUi^ rcn^ere^ into Enolisb. Mitb jfacsimilcs
of all tbe ©dijinal JEnoravniujs, etc.
LONDON
SWAN SONNENSCHEIN & CO
New York: CHARLES SCRIBXER'S SONS
1893
Reprinted from the Edition of 1684, to luhich is added a reprint of the
very scarce Fourth Part, by Basil Ringrose (1685), containini^
the " Da7igerous Voyage and Bold Attempts of CAPTAIN
Bartholomew Sharp ajtd others"
Edited, with an Introduction, by Henry Powell
CONTENTS.
Introduction v
The Translator to thk Reader xxix
CHAPTER PART I.
I. The Author sets forth towards the Western Islands, in the Service of the
West India Company of France. They meet with an English frigate,
and arrive at the Island of Tortuga i
II. Description of the Island of Tortuga : of the fruits and plants there grow-
ing : how the French settled there, at two several times, and cast out
the Spaniards, first masters thereof. The Author of this book was twice
sold in the said Island 6
III. Description of the great and famous Island of Hispaniola . . . i6
IV. Of the Fruits, Trees and Animals that are found at Hispaniola . . 21
V. Of all sorts of quadruped Animals and Birds that are found in this island.
As also a relation of the French Buccaneers ..... 34
VI. Of the Origin of the most famous Pirates of the coasts of America. A
notable exploit of Pierre le Grand 53
VII. After what manner the Pirates arm their vessels, and how they regulate
their voyages ........... 58
PART 11.
I. Origin of Francis L'OUonais, and beginning of his robberies ... 79
II. L'OUonais equips a fleet to land upon the Spanish islands of America, with
intent to rob, sack and burn whatever he met . . . • .84
III. L'OUonais makes new preparations to take the city of St. James de Leon ;
as also that of Nicaragua, where he miserably perishes . . . loi
IV. Of the Origin and Descent of Captain Henry Morgan— his Exploits and
a continuation of the most remarkable actions of his life . . .120
V. Some account of the Island of Cuba. Captain Morgan attempts to preserve
the Isle of St. Catharine as a refuge and nest to Pirates ; but fails of his
designs. He arrives at and takes the village of El Puerto del Principe 130
VI. Captain Morgan resolveth to attack and plunder the city of Porto Bello.
To this effect he equips a fleet, and with little expense and small forces,
takes the said place .......... 140
VII. Captain Morgan taketh the city of Maracaibo, on the coast of New Vene-
zuela. Piracies committed in those Seas. Kuin of three Spanish ships,
that were set forth to hinder the robberies of the Pirates . . • ' 5°
PART HI.
I. Captain Morgan goes to the Isle of Hispaniola to equip a new fleet, with
intent to pillage again upon the coasts .of the West Indies . . .183
II. What happened in the river De la Hacha . . . • . . iSó
III. Captain Morgan leaves the Island of Hispaniola, and goes to that of St.
Catharine, which he takes . . . . . • • • .191
IV. Captain Morgan takes the Castle of Chagre, with four hundred men sent
for this purpose from the Isle of St. Catharine 198
V. Captain Morgan departs from the Castle of Chagre, at the head of one
thousand two hundred men, with design to take the city of Panama . 206
VI. Captain Morgan sends several canoes and boats to the South Sea. He
sets fire to the city of Panama. Robberies and cruelties committed
there by the Pirates till their return to the Castle of Chagre . . ^2^
VII. Of a voyage made by the Author, along the coasts of Costa Rica, at his
return towards Jamaica. What happened most remarkable in the said
voyage. Some observations made by him at that time . . • 239
Vlll. The Author departs towards the Cape of Gracias a Dios. Ol the Com-
merce which here the Pirates exercise with the Indians. Ilis arrival
at the Island De los Pinos ; and finally, iiis return to Jamaica . .249
IX. The Relation of the shipwreck, which Monsieur Bertram Ogeron,
Governor of the Isle of Tortuga, sufl"ered near the Isles of GuadanilLis.
How both he and his companions fell into the hands of the Spaniards.
By what arts he escaped their hands, and preserved his liic. 1 he
enterprise which he undertook against Porto Rico, to deliver his people.
The unfortunate success of that design ....••• 259
i a
2043390
CONTENTS.
HAGE
X. A relation of what encounters lately happened at the Islands of Cayana
and Tobago, between the Count de Estres, Admiral of Fiance, in
America, and the Heer Jacob Binkes, Vice-Admiral of the United
Provinces, in tlie same parts ........ 267
PART IV,
I. Captain Coxon, Sawkins, Sharp and others set forth in a fleet towards
the province of Darien, upon the continent of America. Their designs
to pillage and plunder in tliose parts. Number of their ships, and
strength of their forces by sea and land ...... 275,
II. They march towards the town of Santa Maria with design to take it.
The Indian King of Darien meets them by the way. Difficulties of
this march, with other occurrences till they arrive at the place . . 279
III. They take the town of Santa Marip. with no loss of men, and but small
booty of what they fought for. Description of the place, country and
river adjacent. They resolve to go and plunder for the second time
the city of Panama . . ........ 285
IV. The Buccaneers leave the town of Santa Maria, and proceed by sea to
take Panama. Extreme difficulties, with sundry accidents and dangers
of that voyage . .......... 289
V. Shipwreck of \\x. Ringrose, the author of this narrative. He is taken by
the Spaniards and miraculously by them preserved. Several other
accidents and disasters which befel him after the loss of his companions
till he found them again. Description of the Gulf of Vallona . . 293
VI. The Buccaneers prosecute their voyage, till they come within sight of
Panama. They take several barks and prisoners by the way. Are
descried by the Spaniards before their arrival. They order the Indians
to kill the prisoners . ......... 300
VII. They arrive within sight of Panama. Are encountered by three small
men-of-war. They fight them with only sixty-eight men, and utterly
defeat them, taking two of the said vessels. Description of that bloody
fight. They take several ships at the Isle of Perico before Panama . 304
VIII. Description of the state and condition of Panama, and the parts adjacent.
What vessels they took while they blocked up the said Port. Captain
Coxon with seventy more returns home. Sawkins is chosen in chief . 31 1
IX. Captain Sawkins, ciiief commander of the Buccaneers, is killed before
Puebla Nueva. They are repulsed from the said place. Captain
Sharp chosen to be their leader. Many more of their company leave
them and return home overland ........ 318
X. They depart from the Island of Cayboa to the Island of Gorgona, where
they careen their vessels. Description of this Isle. They resolve to
go and plunder Arica, leaving their design of Guayaquil . . . 323
XI. The Buccaneers depart from the Isle of Gorgona, with design to plunder
Arica. They lose one another by the way. They touch at the Isle of
Plate, or Drake's Isle, where they meet again. Description of this
Isle. Some memoirs of Sir Francis Drake. An account of this
voyage, and the coasts all along. They sail as far in a fortnight, as the
Spaniards usually do in three months . . . . . . -331
XII. Captain .Sharp and his company depart from the Isle of Plate, in prosecu-
tion of their voyage towards Arica. They take two Spanish vessels
by the way, and learn intelligence from the enemy. Eight of their
company destroyed at the Isle of Gallo. Tediousness of this voyage,
and great hardships they endured. Description of the coast all along,
and their sailings 342
XIII. A continuation of their long and tedious voyage to Arica, with a descrip-
tion of the coasts and sailings thereunto. Great hardship they endured
for want of water and other provisions. They are descried at Arica,
and dare not land there ; the country being all in arms before them.
They retire from thence, and go to Puerto de Hilo, close by Arica.
Here they land, take the town with little or no loss on their side, refresh
themselves with provisions ; but in the end are cheated by the Spaniards,
and forced shamefully to retreat from thence 358
XI\'. The Buccaneers depart from the Port of Hilo, and sail to that of Co-
quimbo. They are descried before their arrival. NotwUhstanding
they land : are encountered by the Spaniards, and put them to flight.
They take, plunder, and fire the City of la Serena. A description
CONTENTS. iii
CHAl'TKi; ('AGE
thereof. A Stratagem of the Spaniards in endeavouring to fire tiieir
ship, discovered and prevented. They are deceived again by the
Spaniards, and forced to retire from Coquimbo, without any ransom
for the City, or considerable pillage. They release several of their
chief Prisoners ........... 375
X\'. The Buccaneers depart from Coquimbo for the Isle of Juan Fernandez.
An exact account of this voyage. Misery they endure, and great
dangers they escape very narrowly there. They mutiny among
themselves, and choose Watling to be their chief commander. De-
scription of the island. Tliree Spanish men-of-war meet with the
buccaneers, at the said island ; but these outbrave them on the one
side, and give them the slip on the other ...... 38}^
XVI. The Buccaneers depart from the Isle of Juan Fernandez to that of
Iquique. Here they take several prisoners, and learn intelligence of
the posture of affairs at Arica. Cruelty committed upon one of the
said prisoners, who had rightly informed them. They attempt Arica
the second time, and take the town, but are beaten out of it again
l)efore they could plunder, with great loss of men, many of them
being killed, wounded, and made prisoners. Captain Watling, their
chief Commander, is killed in this attack, and Captain Sharp
])resently chosen again, who leads them off, and through mountains
of difficulties, makes a bold retreat to the ship 40J
XVII. A description of the Bay of Arica. They sail hence to the Port of
Guasco, where they get provisions. A draft of the said port. They
land again at Hilo to revenge the former affronts, and take what they
could find . . . . 4 '4
XVIII. They depart from the Port of Hilo to the Gulf of Nicoya, where they
take down their decks and mend the sailing of their ship. Forty-
seven of their companions leave them, and go home <jver land. .\
description of the Gulf of Nicoya. They take two barks and some
prisoners there. Several other remarks belonging to this voyage . 424
XI.V. They depart from the Gulf of Nicoya to Golfo Dulce, where they
careen their vessel. An account of their sailings along the coast.
Also a description of Golfo Dulce. The Spaniards force the Indians
of Darien to a peace, by a stratagem contrived in the name of the
English • • 434
X.\. They depart from Golfo Dulce, to go and cruise under the Ecjuinoctial.
Here they take a rich Spanish vessel with 37,000 Pieces of Eight, besides
plate and other goods. They take also a Packet-boat bound from
Panama to Lima. An account of their sailings and the coasts along 442
X.\I. They take another Spanish ship richly laden under the Equinoctial.
They make several dividends of their booty among themselves. They
arrive at the Isle of Plate, where they are in danger of being all
massacred by their slaves and prisoners. Their departure thence for
the port and bay of Paita, with design to plunder the said place • 44'*^
XXII. They arrive at Paita, where they are disappointed of their expectations,
as not daring to land, seeing all the country alarmed before them.
They bear away for the Strait of Magellan. Description of the bay
and port of Paita, and Colan. An account of their Sailings towards
the Strait afore-mentioned . . • • • • • -454
.Win. The Buccaneers arrive at a place incognito, to which they give the name
of the Duke of York's Islands. A description of the said islands,
and of the gulf, or lagoon, wherein they lie, so far as it was searched.
They remain there many days by stress of weather, not without great
danger of being lost. An account of some other remarkable things
that happened there 4"S
XXIV. They depart from the English Gulf in cpiest of the Straits of Magellan,
which they cannot find. They return home by an unknown way,
never navigated before ....••••• 47'^
.\X\'. The Buccaneers continue their navigation, without .seeing any land, tdl
they arrive at the Caribbean Islands in the West Indies. They give
away their ship to some of their companions that were poor, and
disperse for several countries. The author of this Journal arrives in
England •*'^'
LIST OF ENGRAVED PLATES,
Sir Henry Morgan to face Title page
Bartholomew Portugues to face page 65
Rock Brasiliano n, 69
Francis Lolonois ,- 79
The Cruelty of Lolonois ,. 104
The Town of Puerto del Principe taken and sacked „ 155
The Spanish Armada destroyed by Captaine Morgan „ 171
Map of the South Sea and Coasts of America
275
INTRODUCTION.
The term Buccaneer, in French Boucanier, is usually
applied to certain pirates who during the seventeenth
century committed great ravages upon the Spanish
settlements in the West Indies, the adjacent main land,
and the coast of Chili and Peru, and whose exploits it
will be our province to describe in the following pages.
Such term was, however, more accurately applied to a
body of cattle hunters of all nations, but mainly French,
who pursued their avocations in the forests of the Western
and North Western districts of the Island of Hispaniola
— circumstances to be described hereafter caused these
hunters to combine the trade in cattle with that of piracy,
and the name, in consequence, lost its first significance of
hunter and acquired its modern and better known one of
pirate.
Our readers living in the present age of highly or-
ganized communications with all parts of the globe,
cannot sufficiently realize the magnitude of the task un-
dertaken by the first explorers and colonisers of the New
Continent, still less the extraordinary rapidity with which
the work of exploration and colonisation was carried on
by the Spanish and Portuguese, upon means that to us
would appear ludicrously inadequate to the enormous
extent of the newly discovered territories. Scant justice
has been done by posterity to the enthusiastic energy and
perseverance of the natives of the Iberian peninsula, who
during the first half of the sixteenth century, at least fifty
years in advance of any other European nation, estab-
b
vi INTRODUCTION.
lished their rule over the West India Islands, Central and
South America, subdued the great and powerful empires
of Mexico and Peru, and filled the conquered territories
with numerous and flourishing settlements, extending
from Florida to the River Plate on the one side, and
from California to Chili on the other. Nor does the
enormous emigration consequent on the conquests and
occupation the less appeal to the imagination, when we
come to consider that it took place simultaneously with
large discoveries and settlements in the East Indies, and
v/ith prolonged warfare upon a very large scale against the
principal nations of Europe. Rapid and striking as was
the success of the Spanish and Portuguese conquerors and
colonists, it has in the long run proved to be ephemeral,
and other nations, who entered the field many years later
with inferior advantages in soil and climate, have achieved
greater and more enduring results, as must be manifest
upon a comparison of the United States and Canada
with the Central and South American Republics. This
failure, apart from religious and racial causes, must be
attributed to the commercial policy (conspicuous for its
selfishness in an age of extreme selfishness) adopted by
the mother country, Spain, in its relations with its colonies.
Even at the present day much useful experience may
be gained by the colonial ministers of the greatest powers
from a study of a fiscal system specially constructed to
protect the interests of a few merchants at the expense
and in disregard of the expressed wishes of the colonists.
Soon after the discovery of America, with a view to
settle disputes between Spain and Portugal as to their
title to the newly found regions, Pope Alexander the
Sixth issued his famous donation by which he gave to
Spain the whole of America, except the Brazils, which
was assigned to Portugal, and under which the Kings
of Spain claimed to exclude not merely foreigners but
also their own subjects not Spanish from access to the
American continent and islands, and for a time practi-
INTRODUCTION.
cally succeeded in preventing all other nations from
trading or even landing in the New World. This exclu-
sion could not however be kept up, and we find traders
from the Netherlands and England visiting the islands
at a very early period, followed by Hawkins, Drake, and
others in their capacity of slavers and merchant adven-
turers, the French appearing later still. It stands to
reason that the foreign traders would not have under-
taken voyages so long and hazardous without consider-
able encouragement from the colonists, who, dependent
otherwise on the fleets annually despatched to Europe,
found no doubt their advantage in evading the fiscal
regulations of their own government, to obtain not
merely European goods at low prices, but also what was
to them of paramount importance, a supply of labour m
the shape of negro slaves from Africa.
To put down the foreign traders or interlopers the
Spanish government employed armed revenue cruisers,
or giiarda castas, and were accustomed to instruct
their officers to destroy every strange ship they met
with, and to take no prisoners ; and in the case of
foreign setdements on unoccupied lands, soldiers were
sent to destroy the buildings and plantations and
massacre the inhabitants. Harsh measures like these
produced their natural effect, and in no long time the
interlopers learnt to meet force by force, to combine for
mutual defence, and to treat every Spaniard as an enemy.
Not unnaturally the foreign seamen, traders and colonists
drifted into a state of perpetual warfare with the various
local governments, and in comparatively a short tmie the
marine carrying trade between the various colonies, ex-
cepting the annual fleets, which were usually strongly
manned and heavily armed, was either annihilated or
passed into the hands of the foreign interlopers.
To applications addressed to the various European
princes for redress of injuries committed by their subjects
in American waters, the usual answer was to the effect
viii INTRODUCTION.
that the King of Spain was at liberty to proceed as he
pleased against all persons acting without their com-
mission. Elizabeth of England, with greater frankness,
replied that the Spaniards themselves were to blame for
the depredations complained of, which were brought on
\ solely by their own severe and unjust dealing. She did
not understand why her subjects should be debarred
from traffic in America, nor would she acknowledge titles
given by the Bishop of Rome to lands of which Spain
was not in actual possession. This unsatisfactory state
of affairs (further aggravated by religious differences)
lasted from the early visits of Hawkins, Drake, and
others, to the end of the Thirty Years' War, during which
period the interlopers were continually reinforced, first by
the buccaneers proper from Hispaniola, and secondly by
corsairs of all nations serving under the Protestant flag,
such as the Gucitx de la Mer, or sea beggars, from the
revolted Netherlands, PVench Huguenots, etc.
The island of Hispaniola, or Hayti, was described by
the original discoverers in glowing terms, as being of
great beauty and fertility, and containing a population of
at least a million, but twenty years of Spanish govern-
ment (so miscalled) reduced the aboriginal inhabitants to
less than sixty thousand in number, and the land (beyond
the limits of a few small towns and scattered plantations)
to a state of primeval forest tenanted only by wild cattle
and a few wandering Indian hunters. The foreign traders
soon began to appreciate the attractions offered by the
seclusion of these districts, and by the facility of vic-
tualling and obtaining wood and water. Among other
articles of food supplied by the Indians, beef and pork
cured by the boucan process obtained a high repute,
and many of the sailors finding it to their interest to
adopt the hunters' life, a large trade in boitcancd meat soon
sprang up. The charm of the wild life attracted to the
region increasing numbers of Europeans, who pursued
indifferently the trade of hunters and corsairs. Many
/X TR O D UC TIO\. ix
also became planters, and the latter (among whom the
French element predominated) spread over the western
portion of the island. Eventually this district became en-
tirely French, and for a long time was the most flourish-
ing colonial possession of the crown of France, its pros-
perity lasting until the . Revolution of 1789, when the
negro inhabitants, under Toussaint L'Ouverture, revolted,
and having massacred or expelled the whites, established
a republic ; this gave way to an empire, and again to a
republic ; fmally the French and Spanish negroes each
established republican governments of their own, which
have lasted down to the present day.
A few words will not be here out of place by way of
description of the manners and customs of the buccaneers,
and of illustration of the simple yet effective means by
which they organized victory over a nation which at
that period enjoyed the highest military reputation.
The term buccaneer is the English version of the
French word boiic aider [i.e., one who cures meat by the
boucan process). It is curious that the English pirates
should have adopted the term from their French com-
rades and made it their own, while the latter simul-
taneously took the title of Flibustier, which is the
English word "freebooter" pronounced in the French
manner. Another and very common appellation by
which they were known was Brethren of the Coast, and
by these rude warriors of all races, w ho were accustomed
to work together irrespective of nationality, this last title
was deemed peculiarly appropriate and expressive.
For the pursuit of the wild oxen and swine that pas-
tured in the Haytian forests the hunters used to form
parties of five or six in number, each member provided
with musket, bullet-bag. powder-horn, and knife, and
dressed in garments made out of the skin, and stained
with the blood of the slain animals ; horses were never
used, the tangled nature of the country rendering a ])ur-
suit on foot more practicable. The flesh, when obtained.
X INTRODUCTION.
was cut into long strips (sometimes salted, when required
for a long voyage). The special feature of the process
consisted in laying the meat upon boucans or barbecues
{i.e., gratings constructed of green sticks), and exposing
it to the smoke of wood, fed with the fat, bones and
offal of the carcass, and the trimmings of the hide. By
this means a very appetising flavour was imparted to
the flesh, which, when cured, was usually of a bright red
colour, and kept good for a long time. Pork was gener-
ally considered the best of the boucaned meats, except by
the savage Caribs of the Lesser Antilles, to whom the
barbecued flesh of an enemy was thought to be the food
most grateful to a warrior. The charqui or jerked beef,
so frequently alluded to in contemporary accounts, was
prepared by cutting the meat into strips and drying it in
the sun — this process being better suited to a dry climate
was chiefly made use of in Peru, Chili, and the River
Plate.
Analogous in their habits to the buccaneers of His-
paniola were the logwood cutters and cattle hunters in
the peninsula of Yucatan or Honduras. Like them they
were used to vary the monotony of timber-felling and
bullock-driving by an occasional foray upon the Spanish
settlements in the immediate neighbourhood. It must,
however, in justice to the logwood cutters be admitted
that they were not the original aggressors, but for the
molestation inflicted upon them by the Spanish forces
they would have been content to pursue their avocation
in obscurity and peace. The colony of British Honduras
was founded by their descendants, who still carry on the
trade in logwood and mahogany. It would be unjust to
omit allusion to the Mosquito Indians, the attached friends
and allies of the buccaneers, who, from their strong affec-
tion to the English, their knowledge of pilotage, and
their extraordinary dexterity in the arts of the fisherman,
particularly in the use of the fish spear, were almost in-
dispensable members of every expedition to the South
INTRODUCTION.
Sea. Their chief Cacique usually received a kind of in-
vestiture from the governors of Jamaica, and numerous
English planters settled among them, mosdy in the
neighbourhood of Blewfields. The territory has for
some time past been absorbed into the adjacent republic
of Honduras.
Previous to embarking upon an expedition it was
the universal custom of these freebooters to hold a pre-
liminary meeting to determine the object of attack, to
raise funds, to elect officers, and generally to discuss all
minor details. The next step was to draw up articles
of association for signature by the adventurers, binding
them to contribute a fixed minimum sum to the common
fund, to observe due order and discipline, and to allot the
spoil in the manner pointed out in the articles. A certain
number of shares, from two to eight according to rank,
was assigned to each officer, and one to each adventurer,
but before apportioning the plunder among individuals
preferential shares were almost invariably set aside as
compensation for wounds, and losses of eyes and limbs ;
the representatives of the slain were not forgotten, and
generally received the share that the adventurer would
have taken if he had survived. It was not an uncommon
practice for two buccaneers to swear brotherhood, to
stand by each other during life, and each to make the
other his heir, and these curious partnerships once
entered into were observed with a fidelity almost touch-
ing. Rewards were also given to the first man who
sighted the chase, to the first who boarded an enemy,
and for other services of distinction.
Great honesty and integrity usually characterized their
dealings with each other, and with the Indians with
whom they were frequently brought into contact ; to
their prisoners also they behaved with much greater
humanity than was usual at the period, and from their
considerate treatment of Indians and captives they fre-
quently derived much information and advantage m war.
xii IXTRODUCTIOX.
To this rule, however, a few marked exceptions, such as
Montbars and L'Ollonais, must be made, and it must
also be admitted that towards the end of their career a
great change for the worse took place in this respect,
the ferocity and -bad faith characteristic of the vulgar
pirate becoming painfully conspicuous. The earlier free-
booters were content to wage war against Spain only,
but their successors evinced no such nice discrimination,
and impartially plundered and burnt the ships of all
nations whenever a favourable opportunity occurred.
Offensive operations were carried on for the most part
in the following manner. In the early days of bucca-
neering notice of an intended expedition, naming a ren-
dezvous, would be sent to the principal resorts of the
pirates, and if the suggested commanders were popular
the summons would be freely responded to. The usual
place of meeting was the west end of the island of
Tortuga, off the northern coast of Hayti, but after the
capture of Jamaica in 1654 by Cromwell's forces, the
English pirates generally made that island their centre,
while the French remained constant to Tortuga, their
old place of resort. Nor were the Dutch, French, and
English colonies in the West Indies afflicted with many
scruples as to the propriety of allowing filibusters to
build, fit out, and repair in their ports armed vessels
intended to cruise against their Spanish neighbours,
with whom their respective mother countries were
nominally at peace. The traders and planters of Mar-
tinique, Curacoa, St. Kitts, Barbados, and especially
Jamaica, greatly encouraged the trade, on account of the
large profits made on the purchase of plunder from the
pirates and the prodigality with which the successful
adventurers scattered their hardly won spoils— to such
cause doubtless was owing much of the early prosperity
of these colonies. In many cases even the precise and
pious New Englanders did not disdain to participate in
the gains of the atrocious Blackbeard and his associates,
IX TROD UC TI ox. xiii
who flourished in the first quarter of the eighteenth
century.
But to return to the early clays of buccaneering, when
the aspirations of the pirates were more modest, and caj)-
tains were content to start in business in a very humble
way. The mode of procedure was — mutatis mutandis —
nearly always the same, irrespective of the numbers en-
gaged. A party, varying in number from twenty to
fifty men, would meet to discuss ways and means, to
sio^n agreements, and to choose officers ; this done, they
would put to sea in canoes or small vessels, and cruise
on the usual trade routes. If fortunate enough to
discover a Spanish vessel, the pirates were not likely
to be deterred from the attack by any disparity in force,
however great, apparendy trusting by superior seamanship
and discipline to place themselves at least on an equality
with the enemy. Their first approach was generally
made with great judgment, their tiny craft being so
steered as to avoid the direct fire of the heavy artillery,
while their picked marksmen attempted to strike down
the helmsman first, and next the men attending to the
sails. This effected, they would get under the stern, or
other part of the ship where the guns could not be
sufficiendy depressed to reach them, the crew of one ol
the boats would proceed to wedge up the rudder, while
the others would keep up a fire of musketry directed at
the portholes and bulwarks, so accurately aimed as to
prevent any of the Spanish crew from showing them-
selves.^
When the e:uns had been thus silenced, and the crew
1 It will be within the memory of our readers that during the Crimean
War the forts at Bomarsund, in the Baltic, were captured chiefly through
their guns being silenced by the sharp shooters of the Allies. At the
siege of Sebastopol also, the Russian riflemen so annoyed the advanced
batteries of the besiegers by firing into the embrasures, that strong rope
screens filling up the whole of the embrasure and closely surroundmg
the muzzle of the gun (which would otherwise have been quickly sflenced
by the rifle fire), had to be devised, and were employed on both sides
during the remainder of the siege.
xiv INTRODUCTIOX.
forced to seek shelter, the assaihmts would board from
several quarters at once ; the deck once reached, their
personal dexterity in the use of their weapons, and their
activity and courage were so marked that they rarely failed
to overpower their opponents. A very good example of
their mode of fighting may be found in the action off
Panama, between the buccaneer flotilla of Captain Saw-
kins and the Spanish squadron, described in chapter 7 of
the last part of the present work. The prisoners, except
officers and others whose means enabled them to pay a
ransom, were either put ashore or set adrift in one of the
captured craft otherwise useless to the captors, and left to
find their way to the land. The prizes, if adapted for
the purpose, were often manned and armed for a further
cruise. Vessels of large size were seldom used — those
employed rarely carried more than four to six small guns,
although ships of thirty to forty guns are occasionally
mentioned as taking part in the larger expeditions. On
or previous to the return to port a general meeting of the
adventurers would be held, and the spoil duly divided ; if
the voyage happened to be a long one dividends were
frequently declared after the capture of each considerable
prize. Large amounts, £joo, ^800, or ^1,000, were
frequently realized even by the common seamen, only to
be rapidly dissipated in gambling and debauchery. Their
money spent the buccaneers would either take to the
woods or go upon a fresh cruise, as their inclination
prompted. A popular and successful captain had only
to announce his intention to fit out a squadron to attract
any number of followers ; and in the latter part of their
career, when all the smaller craft had been driven from
the sea, and the Spaniards never dared to put to sea
except in large and well armed fleets, the large towns
situated even at a considerable distance from the coast
became the object of attack, and expeditions comprising
thirty or forty ships, conveying from one to two thousand
men, were not at all unusual. The varied training of
INTRODUCTION. xv
this mixed body of soldiers, sailors, lumberers, etc., pro-
duced in them great skill in the use of arms, and
immense strength and agility, together with an extra-
ordinary power of enduring hunger, thirst and exposure ;
while the rude sense of honour and integrity, and the
obedience to discipline which so long distinguished them,
enabled them to live together in brotherly harmony, and
carry on with nearly uniform success their eternal warfare
against the common enemy — the Spaniard. For many
years, and indeed up to the very last, they were con-
stantly victorious by sea and land, and their organization
broke down in the end from internal dissension, arising
from the following causes : —
Firstly and chiefly from the fact that Spain, instead of
being confronted, as heretofore, by the protestant nations,
now found it to her interest to seek alliance against the
increasing influence of France under Louis XIV, among
the northern powers. Hence the treaty of peace with
England in 1670, already alluded to, which, however,
had but little effect at the time.
The various quarrels between French, English, and
Dutch, were an additional cause of disintegration, the
final blow being probably given by the accession of a
Bourbon to the throne of Spain in 1700. By this time
the greater part of the freebooters had ranged them-
selves under the flags of their respective nationalities,
had settled down as planters or returned to Europe,
while the residuum became ordinary pirates, preying
upon the trade of all nations alike.
Secondly, from the decay of the strong spirit of religious
antagonism which all the protestant nations (from whom
the buccaneer community received at least nine-tenths
of their recruits) bore to Spain. Spain was Antichrist,
the Bulwark of the Inquisition, the enemy of b>ecdom,
in short the embodiment of religious and political
tyranny to the descendants of Hollanders oppressed by
Alva, of Huguenots who had batded with the League,
xvi INTRODUCTIOX.
and of English to whom the memory of the great
struggle with Philip II. was a source of national pride.
This spirit was emphasized in the minds of all protes-
tant nations by the great struggle of the Thirty years'
war, still in progress in the first part of the century
and exemplified in the religious and law-abiding habits,
almost universal among the brethren in early days, and
in some crews existing almost to the last.^
A third cause of antagonism was the fiscal tyranny
already spoken of. Had a more enlightened commercial
policy been adopted towards protestant traders and colo-
nists, it is not unlikely that the tide of emigration might
have been turned from the inhospitable districts of New
England and the Canadas to the more genial districts on
the coast of the Gulf of Mexico, extending from Texas
to Florida, It would be here out of place to speculate as
to what would have been the position of the United States
under such altered circumstances, but their development
would probably have been considerably affected.
It now becomes necessary to give a short summary of
the principal incidents of the history of the buccaneers,
founded chiefly upon the narratives of Esquemeling and
RIngrose, but also including circumstances unknown to
or omitted by these writers, in order that the reader may
have a complete account of the epoch before him.
For the present purpose it will be sufficient to com-
mence with the year 1625, by which time the organi-
zation or confederacy of the brethren had probably
assumed the shape which it maintained until the close,
and to take as a starting point the joint setdement of the
Island of St. Christopher, or St. Kitts, by the English
and French.^
1 Divine service was by the English nearly always celebrated each
Sunday at least, and rules prohibiting profane language, gaming, etc.,
were frequently included in the articles signed by the adventurers.
^ The island of St. Kitts (to make use of its popular designation) was
at this time covered by forests, which have since disappeared, and in-
habited by Caribs, a race who then extended from the coast of Caraccas
IXTRODUCTIOX. xvii
In consequence of the increasing importance of the
trade carried on by the interlopers in the West Indies,
England and France agreed to plant each a colony side
by side, and the island of St. Kitts being chosen for the
purpose, in 1625 the colonists landed and divided the
territory between them. The two colonies, in spite ot
occasional disputes, were very successful, and the English
also took possession of the adjacent Island of Nevis.
In 1629, however, a large fleet from S[)ain, without
warning or provocation, attacked and totally dispersed
the colonists, and then proceeded on their voyage to the
Brazils. The fugitives soon returned, the English for
the most part settling in Nevis ; a few of the French re-
occupied their old settlements in St. Kitts, but the greater
portion of the dispossessed planters in 1630 removed to
Tortuga, an island on the north coast of Hispaniola, and
not far from the honcan establishments already existing.
Here they seem to have enjoyed considerable prosperity,
so much so as to induce the Governor-General of the
French West Indies, who had been previously stationed
in St. Kitts, to transfer in 1634 his seat of government
to Tortuga. In 1638 the Spaniards attacked Tortuga,
and temporarily expelled the inhabitants, who, however,
very shortly recaptured the place, and the French party
so improved their position as to be strong enough to ex-
pel their English allies in 1641. These latter maintained
a precarious existence pardy among the buccaneer settle-
ments on the main island, and partly by piracy, until the
capture of Jamaica by Penn in 1654, and \'enables (in
which the English freebooters took part and greatly
distinguished themselves), provided them with a new
setdement and base of operations ; the western part of
over the whole of the Lesser Antilles. A few are still to be found in
the island of Grenada, but the largest body of representatives of the
nation are now dwelling in the island of Dominica; to the inacces-
sible mountains and tangled forests of which they owe their preser-
vation. They number at present about 300, are steadily dwindling
away, and another generation will probably see them everywhere extinct.
xviii INTRODUCTION.
Hispaniola being then wholly abandoned to the French.
Tortuga was again captured by the Spaniards in 1654,
and remained in their possession for six years, after which
it was finally recovered by the French.
During the period between 1625 and 1655 constant
maritime warfare had been carried on, and as an almost
necessary consequence the commerce of the Spanish
colonies with each other and with the mother country
dwindled down almost to nothing, and the piratical com-
munity, deprived of the plunder of the local mercantile
marine was obliged, in sheer necessity, to turn their arms
against the large towns on shore. New Segovia, in Hon-
duras, being the first victim, in 1654.
Among numerous smaller exploits which it is not here
necessary to describe, must be especially noted that of
Pierre le Grand (perhaps deservedly so named) who, with
a small boat containing twenty-eight men, was skilful and
fortunate enough to capture the Spanish Vice Admiral
himself, and his galleon ; that of Alexandre, who, with
means equally inadequate, also took a large man-of-war;
of Montbars, surnamed the Exterminator; of Bartholo-
mew Portuguez, Michael le Basque and Roche Brasiliano;
of Lewis Scot, who took and pillaged the city of
Campeche ; of John Davis, who plundered Nicaragua,
and especially of V^an Horn, Granmont and De Graaf,
who in 1Ó83 sacked the town of Vera Cruz and carried
away an immense booty.
In 1664, Mansveldt, perhaps the ablest of all the
pirate chiefs, formed a project of founding an indepen-
dent buccaneer settlement with a government and flag of
its own,^ at Santa Katalina, or Old Providence (so
^ This is by no means the only instance of an attempt to found a
piratical state. The sea rovers who infested the Indian Ocean in the
early part of the eighteenth century often possessed large establishments
on the coast of Madagascar, and were very successful in conciliating
and governing the natives. Several small states, administered directly and
indirecdy by pirates, were established on that island, but no attempt at
confederation was made, and none lasted beyond the lives of their
INTRODUCTION. xix
named to distinguish it from New Providence in the
Bahamas, a place noted as the resort, in the seventeenth
and eighteenth centuries of pirates and in the nineteenth
of blockade runners), but his death and the pronounced
opposition of the Governor of Jamaica, deterred his
successor Morgan from pursuing the subject further.
It may indeed be doubted whether Morgan, although
equally eminent as a leader, was possessed of abilities to
comprehend, much less to carry out, what to him would
have seemed plans of colonisation of a visionary charac-
ter which did not appeal to his self interest. To go out
of his way to establish a new base of operation was to
him a waste of time. Jamaica was a place which fully
suited his convenience for purpose of refitting and of
disposing of his plunder, and that was all he cared
about.^ Under the leadership of Morgan the buccaneers
reached the zenith of their reputation. Never had their
plundering raids been organized on a larger scale or with
more success. Even in Mansvelt's time many of the
largest towns only escaped destruction by the payment
of heavy blackmail to the freebooters, and the new
commander apparently had only to march against the
remaining colonies successively in order to extinguish
them.
Morgan's first independent enterprise of any imi)or-
tance after the death of Mansvelt was the capture and
sack of the town of Puerto del Principe, in Cuba; he next
surprised and took the city of Porto Bello on the main-
land. He then proceeded to attack the unfortunate
towns of Maracaibo and Gibraltar, which had been
not long before plundered by L'Ollonais. They were
founders. Given, however, a leader capable of uniting the various
chiefs under one rule, and a colony equal to Java might have been
created with ease.
1 Jamaica was the resort of the English freebooters until their ex-
tinction at the end of the century. The pirates of the next generation
under Teach and others made the town of New Providence in the
Bahamas their principal base of operations.
XX INTRODUCTION.
taken for the second time by Michael le Basque, while
Morgan was engaged at Puerto del Principe. This last
raid did not however save them from Morgan, who for
the third time harried these wretched cities. In order
to wring from the inhabitants their last coins he re-
mained so long in possession as to enable the Spaniards
to send a strongly armed squadron to occupy the mouth
of the Lake of Maracaibo, to prevent his retreat. The
skilful manner in which he totally destroyed the Spanish
ships, and evaded the forts at the entrance, gained him
great credit, and was said to have caused the Spanish
court to make very strong applications for redress to
England. Upon the conclusion of a treaty of peace
in 1670,^ between the two nations, which confirmed
England in her possessions in the West Indies, but for-
bade her subjects to trade to any Spanish port without a
license ; a proclamation was issued in pursuance of such
arrangement which greatly exasperated the freebooting
community and the direct result of which was the
assemblage of the largest fleet ever brought together
by the buccaneers, amounting to 37 ships of all sizes,
manned by more than 2,000 pirates. They met in
December, 1670, at Cape Tiburon, and held a council to
decide whether their forces should be directed upon Car-
thagena. Vera Cruz, or Panama. The last was chosen,
as being the richest, and Morgan was elected Admiral ;
and the island of Santa Katalina, or Old Providence,
was, after a feigned resistance, occupied as a base of
operations. A detachment was next despatched against
Fort San Lorenzo at the mouth of the Chagre river,
which was taken after a most gallant defence by the
Spanish garrison. Having securely garrisoned Old
Providence and the Chagre forts, the main body, then
1 It may be here noted that the existence of a continual war between
Spaniards and EngHsh is virtually admitted in the treaty ; which indeed
practically condones the offences of the buccaneers antecedent to the
date thereof.
I NT ROD UC HON. xxi
numbering about 1,200 men, marched across the isthmus,
and after nine clays of severe hardship, in consequence of
the enemy having laid waste the country over which they
were obliged to advance, came in sight of Panama. An-
other day of severe fighting against a force of 2,500 men,
which was defeated and put to flight, gave them possession
of the coveted city. A large number of the pirates were
strongly disposed to pursue their advantage against Peru,
which lay temptingly open and almost defenceless before
them. Morgan, however, was able to induce his com-
panions to forego any further enterprise in the South
Sea, and (after a stay of about three weeks) to evacuate
Panama and return across the isthmus. The amount
of spoil obtained being very unsatisfactory, he was,
with some justice, suspected of embezzling a large part
of the booty, and his consequent unpopularity led to his
abandoning his comrades and accepting the post ot
Lieutenant Governor of Jamaica. He was subsequently
knighted and made Governor of the Island, in which
capacity he showed considerable energy in suppressing
piracy. His secession from the buccaneer community
just when there was no other leader of capacity to suc-
ceed him was a severe blow to their cause. P>om this
time forth the harmony, which up to this time had pre-
vailed between the various nations hitherto united against
the Spaniards, was much weakened, and an increasing
disposition among individuals to identify themselves with
the disputes of their several mother countries took its
place. From this point the account of the various occur-
rences on the Atlantic side of the Isthmus will be carried
on to its close, and the narrative of the proceedings of
the freebooters in the South Sea reserved for the con-
clusion.
About 1673 the P^rench buccaneers took part (as
privateers under their national flag in the war between
France and Holland) in two unsuccessful expeditions
against the Dutch Island of Curacoa ; soon after the
c
INTRODUCTION.
latter of which, Puerto del Principe, in Cuba, and the
ever unfortunate towns of Maracaibo and Gibraltar, were
again pillaged.
In 1679 the Spaniards almost exterminated the French
settlers at Samana, in Hispaniola, and in the same year
Porto Bello was again plundered. In 1683, a body of
1,200 French pirates took Vera Cruz by stratagem, and
carried off an immense spoil. In 1684 negotiations to
induce the French flibustiers, then about 3,000 in number,
to settle in Hispaniola were entered into, but met with
only moderate success. In 1686, Grammont and De
Graaf plundered and burnt Campeche. The former of
these two chiefs put to sea on a fresh expedition soon
afterwards, but was never again heard of, the latter
entered the service of France, and became in his way as
useful as Morgan in putting down his former companions.
In 1688, the English settlers were driven out of St. Kitts
by the French. War, however, broke out between France
and Spain. England soon afterwards joined the latter,
and the buccaneers ranged themselves under the flags of
their respective countries. St. Kitts was retaken in the
following year, and the remaining French colonists ex-
pelled.
Almost the last enterprise in which the buccaneers, as
such, were engaged, was directed against Carthagena by
the governor of the French possessions in Hispaniola,
about a third of the attacking forces on this occasion
being buccaneers. Considerable booty was obtained on
the capture of the city, but the freebooters being unable
to obtain their portion from the French conmiander, re-
turned and put the city to ransom. On their return they
were chased by a combined English and Dutch squadron,
were obliged to disperse, and lost a considerable propor-
tion of their gains.
After the Peace of Ryswick, in 1697, buccaneers be-
came practically extinct, the major part of the adventurers
either taking service with their respective governments,
h\TRODUCTION. xxiii
returning home, or settling down as planters. The
balance, becoming pirates pure and simple, long infested
the Gulf of Mexico (the coasts of Virginia, the Carolinas,
and the Bahama islands serving them as ports of call),
and were not finally put down till early in the 19th
century ; the Lafittes of Barataria, near the mouth of the
Mississippi, being probably the last in the trade.'
It now only remains to chronicle the events in the
South Sea subsequent to the capture of Panama by
Morgan. For several years after his retreat no fresh
attempts were made to carry the war in that direction
until early in 1680, when a party of 330, under Coxon,
Sawkins, Sharp, and others, landed in Darien, and under
the guidance of Indians marched to the town of Santa
Maria, and thence proceeded in canoes upon the river
of the same name to the sea. With two small cap-
tured vessels and the canoes, they engaged and took a
small Spanish squadron, three of which they fitted out
and with them blockaded Panama. Disputes however
arising, Coxon, with seventy of the men and most of
the Indians, returned across the isthmus, while the
remainder pursued their voyage to the south. On the
death of Captain Sawkins, killed soon afterwards in a
skirmish, further disputes arose, another party broke
off and returned to the Gulf, leaving Sharp in com-
mand, with about 140 men. They took a few prizes, put
one or two small towns to ransom, and on Christmas
Day, 1680, anchored at Juan Fernandez to refit. In
February they attacked Arica, but were repulsed with
loss. On their arrival at the isle of La Plata differences
again arose, and forty-four more (among whom were
William Dampier and Lionel Wafer) quitted the ship and
returned north. The ship sailed to the Gulf of Nicoya,
^ Teach (or Blackbeard), England, Low, Roberts, Kidd and Avery
were the principal pirate heroes of the iSth century. 'I'lieir depreda-
tions were on a very large scale, and extended from the Atlantic coast
of America and the Gulf of Mexico to the west coast of Africa, Mada-
gascar, and the Indian Ocean.
xxiv IXTRODUCTIOX.
then back to La Plata, during which interval some valu-
able prizes were niade,^ and finally round Cape Horn to
Antigua, where the crew dispersed. Sharp and others
on reaching England were, at the instance of the Spanish
ambassador, tried for piracy, but acquitted on the ground
that the Spanish ships captured by them had fired first,
and that therefore the pirates had acted in self-defence.
In August, 1683, the ship Revenge, of eighteen guns
and seventy men, among whom were Dampier, Wafer,
Cook, Davis, and several other noted buccaneers, sailed
from the Chesapeake. Near Sierra Leone they took a
Danish ship of thirty-six guns, into which they shifted
their crew, christening her the Bachelor s Delight, and
reached in March, 1684, Juan Fernandez, accompanied
by another English privateer, the Nicholas, Captain
Swan, that fell in with them shortly before their arrival.
Having taken a few prizes the ships proceeded in
company to the Galapagos and then to the Gulf of
Nicoya, where Captain Cook died and Davis was elected
in his place. After cruising for some time together
with moderate success the two vessels separated, the
Nicholas proceeding to England, by way of the East
Indies, while the Bachelors Delight sailed to the island
of La Plata, where she encountered the Cygnet, Captain
Swan, a vessel which (fitted out in London as a trader)
had come round Cape Horn and thence up the coast
to the Gulf of Nicoya, where she had filled up her
crew by a number of buccaneers, who had crossed the
isthmus to that point. The two crews at once agreed
to keep company, and accordingly sailed to Payta,
Guayaquil^ and Panama, taking several prizes during
* One of these prizes, the Fan Rosario, contained no less than 700
pigs or large ingots of silver, which were taken to be tin, and (with one
exception only) thrown overboard by the ignorant sailors.
2 Several hundred negroes were taken in vessels at Guayaquil, the
greater part of which were set at liberty, against the advice of Uampier,
who wished them to be employed in working the gold mines at Darien
for the benefit of the adventurers.
INTRODUCTION. xxv
the voyage. After blockading the latter town for some
weeks, they were reinforced by Captains Grogniet and
L'Escayer, with 200 French and 80 English freebooters
from the isthmus, then by Townley, with 180 English
from the same quarter, and again by 260 P>enchmen
more, which raised their total strength to 9Ó0 men,
distributed in ten vessels of various sizes, but (with the
exception of the Bachelor s Delight and the Cygnet) carry-
ino- no cannon, Davis being elected Admiral. On the
28th May, 1685, the Spanish Treasure Fleet from Lima,
numbering six heavily armed vessels, six smaller ones,
and two fire ships, hove in sight ; but havin; received
information that the buccaneers' fleet was cruising in the
neighbourhood, they had found an opportunity of landing
the greater part of the specie and other valuables with
which they were laden. A distant cannonade took place
between the two fleets, but the buccaneers were daunted
by the heavy armament of the Spaniards, who, on their
side, were too prudent to provoke an action by which
they had nothing to gain. The former then withdrew
to the Island of Quibo, where they found another body
of pirates. Disputes soon arising between English and
French, the former, under Davis, went north and
plundered Leon and Rio Lexa, in Nicaragua. Here a
fresh split took place. Swan and Townley going in search
of the French, while Davis went to the Galapagos,
and then cruised along the coast of Peru till the end of
1686, taking several vessels and sacking two or three
small towns with profitable results. Some of his men, who
desired to secure their plunder, now returned to the West
Indies- vid Cape Horn, while the remainder who still
adhered to Davis remained on the coast till Ai^nl, lóS;.
when they encountered first a Si)anish frigate, which
they drove ashore and burnt, and shortly afterwards a
squadron of very superior force, from which they suc-
cessfully escaped after a running fight which lasted for
seven days. In May they once more fell in with Town-
xxvi IN TROD UC TION.
ley and the French buccaneers, and with their re-united
forces succeeded in capturing Guayaquil. This was
practically the last exploit of Davis and his companions
in the South Sea, for after a short visit to the Galapagos
to refit they followed Knight round the Horn to the
West Indies, where they arrived in the spring of 1688,
It may be interesting here to note that Lionel Wafer,
from whose journal an account of this voyage is derived,
accompanied Davis in the capacity of surgeon ; also that
Dampier in Swan's vessel, the Cygnet, occupied the post
of pilot or quartermaster, a post analogous to that of
navigating lieutenant or staff-commander in a man-of-war
of the present day, and Ringrose, the author of the last
part of this history, that of supercargo and pilot on the
same vessel.
On leaving Rio Lexa the Cygnet, with two tenders and
340 men, cruised along the coast of Mexico and Central
America for some time, her crew landing and skirmishing
at intervals with the inhabitants, but they were not fortu-
nate enough to meet the galleon from Manila, the capture
of which had been their principal reason for visiting the
coast. This disappointment resulted in the usual quarrel,
and Townley accordingly went south to join Grogniet.
Swan remained on the coast a short time, but more than
sixty of his men being cut off ^ on shore by the Spaniards,
the most severe defeat in the South Seas ever experienced
by the buccaneers, he thought it better to retire, and the
Cygnet therefore proceeded to Mindanao, in the Philip-
pines, where a mutiny took place which caused Swan
and thirty-six others to be left behind, the rest, among
whom was Dampier, pursuing their voyage and visiting
Celebes, Timor, and New Holland, or Northern Australia.
Dampier and some others left her at the Nicobar Islands,
and somehow managed to reach England. The Cygnet
meanwhile just succeeded in reaching Madagascar but in
' Among the slain on this occasion was Basil Ringrose, above men-
tioned.
INTRODUCTION. xxvii
SO crazy a condition that she sank at her anchors im-
mediately after her arrival. Some of the crew settled or
took service with the petty chiefs, the remainder return-
ing home as opportunity offered/
Grogniet and the 340 French who had parted company
with Davis at Quibo in July, 1685, plundered several
towns, and then unfortunately revisited Quibo, where
they were discovered by a Spanish squadron in January,
1686, which burnt their vessel while the crew were on
shore. They were, however, rescued from their difficul-
ties by Townley, in whose company they went north-
ward to Nicaragua, and sacked Granada. In May,
Grogniet and half the French took the opportunity to
recross the isthmus. The other adventurers, however,
came back to Panama, disembarked, and took the neigh-
bouring town of Lavelia, at which place the valuable
cargo of the Lima fleet had been landed the previous
year to avoid capture by the buccaneer fleet under
Davis. With almost incredible carelessness the viceroy,
and the merchants to whom this immense mass of
treasure had been consigned, had taken no trouble to
remove it to a place of safety, and it consequently fell an
easy prey to Townley and his companions, who however
lost several of their number in conveying it to the ships.
In August they were attacked by three Spanish men-of-
war, but were able to give a very good account of them
by capturing two and burning the third. They lost, how-
ever, the gallant Townley, who died of his wounds a short
time afterwards.
In January. Grogniet appeared, and the united forces
once more plundered Guayaquil, but their leader was so
severely wounded that he died soon after the assault.
In May, Davis rejoined them and remained until his
retreat from the South Sea, whereupon, under the
command of Le Picard, they set sail for New Spain
and landed at Amapalla Bay. Here they destroyed
^ See note, p. xviii.
xxviii INTRODUCTION.
their ships and marched across to New Segovia, which
they took. This was their last exploit. We only know
that they finally reached Cape Gracias a Dios, on the
Gulf of Mexico, about February, 1688, and that the last
buccaneers of the South Sea gradually dispersed and
were heard of no more.
The first three parts of this volume, written in Dutch
by John Esquemeling, and originally published in
Amsterdam in 1678, under the title of De Amcri-
ccEnechc Zee Roovers, became at once very popular, and
were quickly translated into the principal European
languages. The translators, however, allowed them-
selves considerable latitude in incorporating into their
respective versions considerable additional matter, chiefly
to bring into prominence the special merits of their com-
patriots, e.g., the French version embodying many ex-
ploits of the French filibusters not referred to by the
Dutch author, while the English edition makes Morgan
the principal hero of the story. Esquemeling's book
gives a very reliable account of the principal exploits of
the buccaneers down to their final disappearance, with
the notable exception of their adventures in the South
Sea, of which he makes no mention. This defect is,
however, amply supplied by the journal of Mr. Basil
Ringrose, published in London, which is now extremely
scarce and difficult to meet with. Ringrose in the
capacity of pilot personally took part in Sharp's voyage
and was killed in a plundering raid ; his account is ex-
tremely curious and accurate. He also added several
sketches and outlines of the principal points and islands
along the coast, which have been faithfully reproduced.
Captains Sharp and Cowley, a buccaneer well known
in his time, also published their journals, but they add
but litde to what has already been narrated by Ringrose,
Dampier, or Wafer.
THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER.
The present volume, both for its curiosity and ingemtity,
J dare reconuuend to the perusal of our English nation,
whose glorious actions it -contains. What relates to the
curiosity hereof, this piece, both of N^atural and Human
History, was no sooner published in the Dutch original
than it zvas snatched up for the most curious libraries of
Holland ; it zvas translated into Spanish [two impressions
thereof being sent into Spain in one year) ; it zvas taken
notice of by the learned Academy of Paris ; and finally
recommended as zvorthy our esteem by the ingenious
author of the JVeekly Memo?'ials for the Ingenious,
printed here at London about two years ago. Neither all
this undeservedly, seeing it enlarges our acquaintance of
Natu7'al History, so much prized and enquired for by the
learned of this present age, zuith several observations not
easily to be found in other accounts already received from
America : and besides, it informs us [zvith huge novelty')
of as great and bold attempts in point of military conduct
and valour as ever zvere performed by mankind ; zuithout
excepting here either Alexander the Great or Julius
Ccrsar or the rest of the Nine Worthies of Fame. Of all
zvhich actions, as zee cannot but confess ourselves to have
been ignorant hitherto {the very name of Buccaneers being
as yet knozvn but to fezv of the ingenious, as their liz'cs,
lazus and conversation are in a manner unto none), so
can they not choose but be admired, out of this ingenious
Author, by zvhosoever is curious to learn the various
XXX THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER.
revolutions of human affairs. But, vio7'e especially by
our English Nation, as 7into whom these things more
narroii'ly appertain. We having hei'e more than half the
Book filled with the unparalleled if not inimitable adven-
tu7'es and heroic exploits of our own countrymen and rela-
tions, whose jtndaunted and exemplary courage, zühen called
■upon by our King and Country, we ought to emulate.
From IV hence it has proceeded that nothing of this kind
was ever as yet published in England, I cannot easily
determijie ; except, as some will say, from, some secret
ragion di Stato. Let the reason be as it ivill, this is
certain, so much the more zve a7'e obliged to this present
Author, ivho, though a stranger to our nation, yet with
that candour and fidelity has recorded our actions, as to
render the 77ietal of our true E7iglish valour to be the 77i07'e
believed a7td feaj-ed abroad, tha7i if these thi7igs had been
divulged by ourselves at home. F7'07n hence pe7'adventu7'e
will other nations lea7'n, that the E7iglish people are of
their ge7iius 77i07'e inclinable to act tha7i to W7'ite ; seei7ig
as well they as we have lived tuiacquai7ited with these
actions of our nation, tuitil such time as a fo7'eign Author
to our cou7it7y came to tell them.
Besides the 77ierit of this piece for its ctwiosity, another
point of 710 less esteem is the t7'uth a7id since7'ity tuhe7'e-
with eve7y thing seems to be penned. No g7'eater 07'7ia-
77ient or dig7iity cafi be added to Histo7y, cither htwian or
nattu^al, than truth. All other embellishme7its, if this be
faili7ig, a7'e of little or 710 esteem ; if this be delive7'ed,
a7'e either 7ieedless or supe7fiitous. What co7ice7'ns this
requisite in our Author, his lines eve7y where decla7'e the
faithfulness and since7'ity of his mind. He W7'ites 7iot
by hearsay, but was an eye-zuit7iess, as he S077tewhe7'e tells
you, to all a7id eve7y 07ie of the bold a7id haza7'dous
atte77pts ivhich he relates. And these he delive7's with
such candour of style, such inge7iuity of 7ni7id, such plai7i-
ness of ivords, such conciseness ofpe7'iods, so 7nuch divested
of rhetorical hype7^boles or the least flou7-i sites of eloqimice,
THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER. xxxi
SO hugely void of passion or national reflections, that he
strongly persuades all along to the credit of lohat he says ;
yea, raises the mind of the Reader to believe these things
far greater than zuhat he has said ; and having read him,
leaves only this scruple or concern behind, that you can
read him no longer. In a zvord, such are his deserts that
some persons peradventm-e zvould not stickle to compare
him to the Father of Historians, Philip de Co?nines : at
least, thus much may be said, with all truth imaginable,
that he 7'esembles that great Author in many of his excel-
lent qualities.
I know some persons have objected to the gi'eatness of
these prodigious Adventures, intimating that the resist -
ance our Buccaneers found in America was eveiywhei-e
but small. For the Spaniards, say they, in the West
Indies, are become of late years nothiitg less, but rather
much more, degenerate than in Europe, the continual peace
they have enjoyed in those parts, the defect of military
discipline, and Eiiropean soldiers for their commanders,
much contributing hc7runto. But more especially and
above all other reasons the very luxury of the soil arid
riches, the extreme heat of those countries and influence of
the stars being such as totally incline their bodies to an
infinite effeminacy and coivardice of mind.
Unto these reasons I shall only answer in brief. This
histoiy will convince them to be manifestly false. For as
to the continual peace here alleged, ive knozv that no peace
could ever be established beyond the Line, since the first
possession of the West Indies by the Spaniards till the
bmming of Panama. At that time, or feiv months before,
Sir William Godolphin by his prudent negociation in
quality of Ambassador for our most Gracious Monarch
concluded at Madrid a peace to be observed even beyond
the Li7ie and through the ivhole extent of the Spanish
Do77iinions in the West Indies. This ti'ansaction gave
the Spa7iia7^ds 7ieiv causes of complaints against our p7'o-
ceedi7igs, that no sooner a peace had l)cen established Jor
xxxii THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER.
those parts of America, but our Forces had taken and
burnt both Cha^re, St. Catharine, and Panama. But our
Reply zi'as conz'incinq\ That zuhcreas eight or ten months
had been allowed by Articles for the publishing of the
said Peace through all the Dominions of both Monarchies
in America, those hostilities had been committed, not only
without order's from his Majesty of England but also
within the space of the said eight or ten months of time.
Until that time the Spanish inhabitants of America being,
as it zuere, in a peipetual zuar zvith Eiwope, certai7i it is,
that no Coasts nor Kingdoms in the World have been 7twre
frequently infested nor alarmed with the invasions of
several nations than theirs. Thus from the very begin-
ning of their cojiquests in America, both English, French,
Dutch, Portuguese, Szvedes, Danes, Courlanders and all
other Nations that navigate the Ocean, have frequented
the West Indies, and filled them zvith their robberies and
assaults. F^'om these occasions have they been in con-
tinual zuatch and zvard, and kept their Militia in constant
exercise, as also their Garrisons p7'etty well provided and
paid ; as fearing every sail they discovered at sea to be
Pirates of one nation or another. But much more
especially, since that Curacoa, Tortuga and Jamaica have
been inhabited by English, French and Dutch, and bred
up that race of huntsmen, than zvhich no other ever zvas
more desperate nor more mortal enemies to the Spaniards,
called Buccaneers. Now shall zue say that these People,
through too long continuation of peace, have utterly
abolished the exercises of zvar, having been all along
incessantly vexed zvith the tumults and alarms thereof?
In like manner is it false to accuse their defect of
militajy discipline for zvant of European Commanders.
For zvho knozvs not that all places, both military and
civil, through those vast Dominions of the M^est Indies are
provided out of Spain? And those of the Militia most
commonly given to expert Commanders trained up from
their infancy in the Wars oj Eui'ope, either in Africa,
THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER. xxxiii
Milan, Sicily, Naples or Flanders, fighting against either
English, F^-ench, Dutch, Portuguese or Aloors? Yea,
their very garrisons, if you search them in those parts,
will peradventu7'e be found to be stocked, thi'ee parts to
four ivith soldiers both born and bred in the Kingdom of
Spain.
From these considerations it may be inferred what
little difference ought to be alloived betwixt the Spanish
soldiers, inJiabitants of the West Indies, and those of
Europe. And hoiv little the soil or climate has influenced
or caused their courage to degenerate toivards cowardice
or baseness of mind. As if the very same aiguments,
deduced from the natui'e of that climate, did not equally
militate against the valour of our famous Buccaneers,
and represent this to be of as degenerate metal as theirs !
But nothing can. be more clearly evinced than is the
valour of the American Spaniards, either soldiers or
officers, by the sequel of this history. What 7iien ever
fought moi'e desperately than the garj'ison of Chagre ?
Their number being 314, and of all these only thirty
remaining ; of which number scarce ten lücj'e unzuounded,
and among them not one officer found alive ? Were not
600 killed upon the spot at Panama, 500 at Gibraltar,
almost as many more at Puerto del Principe, all dying
with their arms in their hands and facing bravely the
Enemy for the defence of their Country and private
concerns ? Did not those of the toiun of San Pedj'o both
fortify themselves, lay several ambuscades, and lastly sell
their lives as dear as ever any European soldier could do,
L'Ollonais being forced to gain step by step his advance
unto the tozvji with huge loss both of blood and men ?
Many other instances might be produced out of this com-
pendious volume of the generous resistance the Spaniards
made in several places, though Fortune favoured not their
arms.
Next, as to the personal valour of many of their Com-
jnandcj-s, zuhat man ever behaved himself more briskly
xxxiv THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER.
than the Governor of Gibraltar ; than the Governor of
Puerto del Principe, both dying for the defence of their
toivns ; than Don Alonso del Canipo, and others? Or
what examples can easily parallel the desperate couragt of
the Governor of Chagre, zvho, though the palisades were
filled, the teri'epleins ivere sunk into the ditch, the breaches
ivere entered, the houses all burnt about him, the whole
castle taken, his men all killed, yet zvould not ad?nit of
any quarter, but chose rather to die under his arms, beijtg
shot into the brain, than suj^rendcr himself as a prisoner
unto the Buccaneers ? What lion ever fought to the last
gasp more obstinately than the Governor of Porto Bello,
zvho seeing the tozvn entei'cd by surprisal in the night, one
chief castle blozun tip into the air, all the other forts and
castles taken, his own assaulted several tuays, both religious
men and ivojnen placed at the front of the enemy to fix the
ladders against thezualls, yet spared not to kill as many of
the said religious persons as he could ; and at last, the zvalls
being scaled, the castle entered and taken, all his ozvn men
overcome by fire and sword, zvho had cast dozvn their arms
and begged mercy from the enemy, yet zvould admit of
none for his ozvn life ? Yea, zvith his ozvn hands killed
several of his soldiers, to force them to stand to their arms
though all zvere lost. Yea, though his own wife and
daughter begged of him tipon their knees that he zvould
save his life by craving quarter, though the enemy desired
of him the same thing, yet would hearken to no cries nor
persuasions, but they zvej'e forced to kill him, combating
zvith his arms in his hands, being not othcrzvise able to
take him prisoner as they zvere desirous to do. Shall
these men be said to be infiucnced zvith cozvardice, who
thus acted to the very last scene of their ozvn tragedies ?
Or shall we rather say, that they zvanted not courage, but
fortune ? It beijig certainly true that he zvho is killed in
a battle may be equally courageous zvith him that kills.
And that zvhosoever derogates from the valour of the
Spaniards in the West Indies diminishes in like 7nanner
THE TRANSLATOR TO THE READER. xxxv
the courage of the Buccaneers, his own countrymen, luho
have seemed to act beyond moi-tal me^i in America.
Now, to say something concerniitg John Esquemelin<r,
the first author of this history. I take him to be a Dutch-
man, or at least born in Flajiders, notivithstandino- that
the Spanish translation represents him to be native of the
Kingdom of France ; his printing this history originally
in Dutch, which doubtless must be his native tongue, who
otherwise was but an illiterate man, together with the
very sound of his name, convincing me thereunto. True
it is, he set sail from Finance and ivas some years at
Tortuga, but neither of these tzvo argumejtts, draivn from
the history, are prevalent. For zvere he a Frenchman
born, how came he to learn the Dutch language so pei'-
fectly as to pirfer it to his own — especially that not being
spoken at Tortuga nor Jamaica, where he resided all the
ivhile ?
I hope I have made this English translation something-
more plain and correct than the Spanish. Some feiv
notorious faults either of the printer or of the interpreter
I am sm^e I have redressed. But the Spanish translator
complaining much of the intricacy of style in the original
{as flowing from a person who, as hath been said, was no
scholar^ as he ivas pardonable, being in great haste, for
not rendering his own version so distinct and elaborate as
he could desire ; so must I be excused from the one, that
is to say, elegance, if I have cautiously declined the other,
I mean confusion.
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
PART I.
CHAPTER I.
TJie Author sets forth toivards the Western Islands, in the Service
of the West India Company of France. They meet with an
English frigate, and arrive at the Island of Tortuga.
We set sail from Havre de Grace, in France, in a ship
called St. John, the second day of May, in the year 1666.
Our vessel was equipped with eight and twenty guns,
twenty mariners, and two hundred and twenty passen-
gers, including in this number those whom the Company
sent as free passengers, as being in their service. Soon
after we came to an anchor under the Cape of Barfleur,
there to join seven other ships of the same West India
Company, which were to come from Dieppe under the
convoy of a man-of-war, mounted with seven and thirty
guns and two hundred and fifty men. Of these ships
two were bound for Senegal, five for the Caribbee Islands,
and ours for the Island of Tortuga. In the same place
there gathered unto us about twenty sail of other ships
that were bound for Newfoundland, with some Dutch
vessels that were going for Nantes, Rochelle, and St.
Martins ; so that in all we made a fleet of thirty sail.
Here we prepared to fight, putting ourselves into a con-
venient posture of defence, as having notice that four
English frigates, of threescore guns each, lay in wait
VOL. I. • B
2 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
for us about the Isle of Ornay. Our Admiral, the
Chevalier Sourdis, having distributed what orders he
thought convenient, we set sail from thence with a favour-
able gale of wind. Presently after, some mists arising,
these totally impeded the English frigates from discover-
ing our fleet at sea. We steered our course as near as
we could under the coast of France, for fear of the enemy.
As we sailed along, we met a vessel of Ostend, who
complained to our Admiral that a French privateer had
robbed him that very morning. This complaint being
heard, we endeavoured to pursue the said pirate ; but our
labour was in vain, as not being able to overtake him.
Our fleet, as we went along, caused no small fears and
alarms to the inhabitants of the coasts of France, these
judging us to be English, and that we sought some con-
venient place for landing. To allay their frights, we used
to hang out our colours ; but, notwithstanding, they would
not trust us. After this we came to an anchor in the
Bay of Conquet, in Brittany, near the Isle of Ushant,
there to take in water. Having stored ourselves with
fresh provisions at this place, we prosecuted our voyage,
designing to pass by the Ras of Fonteneau and not
expose ourselves to the Sorlingues, fearing the English
vessels that were cruising thereabouts to meet us. This
river Ras is of a current very strong and rapid, which,
rolling over many rocks, disgorges itself into the sea on
the coast of France, in the latitude of eight and forty
degrees and ten minutes. For which reason this passage
is very dangerous, all the rocks as yet being not thor-
oughly known.
Here I shall not omit to mention the ceremony which
at this passage, and some other places, is used by the
mariners, and by them called Baptism, although it may
seem either little to our purpose or of no use. The
Master's Mate clothed himself with a ridiculous sort of
garment that reached to his feet, and on his head he put
a suitable cap, which was made very burlesque. In his.
''BAPTISM AT SEA. 3
right hand he placed a naked wooden sword, and in his
left a pot full of ink. His face was horribly blacked with
soot, and his neck adorned with a collar of many little
pieces of wood. Being thus apparelled, he commanded
to be called before him every one of them who never
had passed that dangerous place before. And then caus-
ing them to kneel down in his presence, he made the sign
of the Cross upon their foreheads with ink, and gave each
one a stroke on the shoulders with his wooden sword
Meanwhile the standers-by cast a bucket of water upon
every man's head ; and this was the conclusion of the
ceremony. But. that being ended, every one of the
baptized is obliged to give a bottle of brandy for his
offering, placing it near the main-mast, and without
speaking a word ; even those who have no such liquor
being not excused from this performance. In case the
vessel never passed that way before, the Captain is
obliged to distribute some wine among the mariners and
other people in the ship. But as for other gifts which
the newly baptized frequently offer, they are divided
among the old seamen, and of them they make a banquet
among themselves.
The Hollanders likewise baptize such as never passed
that way before. And not only at the passage above-
mentioned, but also at the rocks called Berlingues, near
the coast of Portugal, in the latitude of thirty-nine de-
grees and forty minutes, being a passage very dangerous,
especially by night, when through the obscurity thereof
the rocks are not distinguishable. But their manner of
baptizing is quite distinct from that which we have de-
scribed above as performed by the French. He. therefore,
that is to be baptized is fastened, and hoisted up three
times at the main-yard's end, as if he were a criminal.
If he be hoisted the fourth time, in the name of the Prince
of Orange or of the Captain of the vessel, his honour is
more than ordinary. Thus they are dipped, every one,
several times into the main ocean. But he that is the
4 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
first dipped has the honour of being saluted with a gun.
Such as are not willing to fall are bound to pay twelve
pence for their ransom ; if he be an officer in the ship,
two shillings ; and if a passenger, according to his
pleasure. In case the ship never passed that way
before, the Captain is bound to give a small runlet of
wine, which, if he does not perform, the mariners may cut
off the stem of the vessel. All the profit which accrues by
this ceremony is kept by the Master's Mate, who after
reaching their port usually lays it out in wine, which is
drunk amongst the ancient seamen. Some say this cere-
mony was instituted by the Emperor Charles the Fifth ;
howsoever, it is not found amongst his Laws. But here I
leave these customs of the sea, and shall return to our
voyage.
Having passed the river Ras, we met with very good
weather until we came to Cape Finisterre. Here a huge
tempest of wind surprised us, and separated our ship
from the rest that were in our company. This storm
continued for the space of eight days, in which time it
would move compassion to see how miserably the passen-
gers were tumbled to and fro on all sides of the ship ;
insomuch as the mariners in the performance of their duty
were compelled to tread upon them everywhere. This
uncouthsome weather being spent, we had again the
use of very favourable gales until we came to the Tropic
of Cancer. This Tropic is nothing but an imaginary
circle which astrologers have invented in the heavens,
and serves as a period to the progress of the sun
towards the North Pole. It is placed in the latitude
of three and twenty degrees and thirty minutes, under
the line. Here we were baptized the second time, after
the same manner as before. The French always perform
this ceremony at this Tropic, as also under the Tropic
of Capricorn, towards the South. In this part of the
world we had very favourable weather, at which we were
infinitely gladdened by reason of our great necessity
PASSAGE TO THE ISLAND O E TORTUGA. 5
of water. For at this tinie that element was already so
scarce with us that we were stinted to two half-pints per
man every day.
Being about the latitude of Barbados, we met an
English frigate, or privateer, who first began to give us
chase ; but finding himself not to exceed us in strength,
presently steered away from us. This flight gave us
occasion to pursue the said frigate, as we did, shooting at
him several guns of eight pound carriage. But at length
he escaped, and we returned to our course. Not long
after, we came within sight of the Isle of Martinique.
Our endeavours were bent towards the coast of the Isle
of St. Peter. But these were frustrated by reason of a
storm, which took us hereabouts. Hence we resolved to
steer to the Island of Guadaloupe. Yet neither this
island could we reach by reason of the said storm, and
thus we directed our course to the Isle of Tortuga, which
was the very same land to which we were bound. We
passed along the coast of the Isle of Porto Rico, which is
extremely delicious and agreeable to the view, as being
adorned with beautiful trees and woods, even to the tops
of the mountains. After this, we discovered the Island
Hispaniola (of which I shall give a description in this
book), and we coasted about it until we came to the
Isle of Tortuga, our desired port. Here we anchored the
seventh day of July in the same year, not having lost one
man in the whole voyage. We unladed the goods that
belonged to the Company of the West Indies, and soon
after the ship was sent to Cul de Sac with some passen-
gers.
CHAPTER II.
Description of the Island of Tortuga : of the fruits and plants
there grozving : Jioiv the French settled there, at tzvo several
times, and cast out tJie Spaniards, first masters thereof. The
Author of this book zvas tivice sold in the said Island.
The Island of Tortuga is situated on the North side of
the famous and great island called Hispaniola, near the
Continent thereof and in the latitude of twenty degrees
and thirty minutes. Its exact extent is threescore leagues
about. The Spaniards, who gave name to this island,
called it so from the shape of the land, which in some
manner resembles a great sea tortoise, called by them
tortuga de mar. The country is very mountainous and
full of rocks, yet notwithstanding hugely thick of lofty
trees that cease not to grow upon the hardest of those
rocks without partaking of a softer soil. Hence it comes
that their roots, for the greatest part, are seen all over
entangled among the rocks, not unlike the branching of
ivy against our walls. That part of this island which
stretches towards the North is totally uninhabited. The
reason is, first, because it has proved to be very in-
commodious and unhealthy, and, secondly, for the rugged-
ness of the coast, that gives no access to the shore, unless
among rocks almost inaccessible. For this cause it is
populated only on the Southern part, which has only one
port that may be esteemed indifferently good. Yet this
harbour has two several entries, or channels, which afford
passage to ships of seventy guns, the port itself being
without danger and capable of receiving a great number
THE ISLAND OF TOR TUG A. 7
of vessels. That part which is inhabited is divided into
four other parts, of which the first is called the Low-land,
or Low-country. This is the chief of them all, because
it contains the aforesaid port. The town is called Cayona,
and here live the chief and richest planters of the island.
The second part is called the Middle Plantation. Its
territory, or soil, is hitherto almost new, as being only
known to be good for the culture of tobacco. The third
is named Ringot. These places are situated towards the
Western part of the island. The fourth, and last, is
called The Mountain, in which place were made the first
plantations that were cultivated upon this island.
As to the wood that grows on the island, we have
already said that the trees are exceedingly tall and pleas-
ing to the sight ; whence no man will doubt but they may
be applied to several uses with great benefit. Such is
the Yellow Saunder, which tree by the inhabitants of this
country is called Bois de Chandelle, or in English Candle-
wood, because it burns like a candle, and serves them
with light while they use their fishery in the night. Here
also grows Lignum Sanctimi, by others called Giiaiaaim,
the virtues of which are very well known. The trees
likewise that afford Gunimi Elemi .^xow^ here in great
abundance, and in like manner Radix Chinee, or China
Root ; yet this is not so good as that which comes
from other parts of the Western world. It is very
white and soft, and serves for pleasant food to the
wild boars when they can find nothing else. This
island also is not deficient in Aloes, nor an infinite
number of other medicinal herbs, which may please the
curiosity of such as are given to their contemplation.
Moreover for the building of ships, or any other sort of
architecture, here are found, in this spot of Neptune,
several sorts of timber very convenient. The fruits, like-
wise, which here abundandy grow, are nothing inferior,
as to their quantity or quality, to what the adjacent
islands produce. I shall name only some of the most
8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA
ordinary and common. Such are magniot/ potatoes,
Acajou apples, yannas,^ bacones, paquayes, carosoles,
mamayns,^ ananas and diverse other sorts, which, not to
be tedious, I omit to specify. Here grow likewise in
huge number those trees called Palmetto, whence is
drawn a certain juice which serves the inhabitants instead
of wine, and whose leaves cover their houses instead of
tiles.
In this island abounds also, with daily increase, the
Wild Boar. The Governor has prohibited the hunting
of them with dogs, fearing lest, the island being but
small, the whole race of those animals in short time
should be destroyed. The reason why he thought con-
venient to preserve those wild beasts was that in case of
any invasion of an external enemy the inhabitants might
sustain themselves with their food, especially if they were
constrained to retire to the woods and mountains. By
this means he judged they were enabled to maintain any
sudden assault or long persecution. Yet this sort of game
is almost impeded by itself, by reason of the many rocks
and precipices, which for the greatest part are covered
with little shrubs, ver)^ green and thick, whence the
huntsmen have ofttimes precipitated themselves, and left
us the sad experience and grief of many memorable dis-
asters.
At a certain time of the year huge flocks of Wild
Pigeons resort to this Island of Tortuga, at which
season the inhabitants feed on them very plentifully, hav-
ing more than they can consume, and leaving totally to
their repose all other sorts of fowl, both wild and tame,
to the intent that in absence of the pigeons these may
supply their place. But as nothing in the universe,
though never so pleasant, can be found but what has
1 Probably the mango. There is, however, a local term, " manihot,"
applied to cassava.
^ Probably the yam.
2 The mammee apple.
THE FRENCH IN THE ISLE OF ST. CHRISTOPHER. 9
something of bitterness joined to it, the very symbol of
this truth we see in the aforesaid pigeons. For these,
the season being past wherein God has appointed them
to afford dehcious food to those people, can scarcely be
touched with the tongue, they become so extremely lean
and bitter even to admiration. The reason of this bitter-
ness is attributed to a certain seed which they eat about
that time, as bitter as gall. About the sea shores great
multitudes of Crabs ^ are everywhere found, belonging
both to the land and sea, and both sorts very big.
These are good to feed servants and slaves, who find
them very pleasing to the palate, yet withal very hurtful
to the sight. Besides which symptom, being eaten too
often, they also cause great giddiness in the head, with
much weakness of the brain, insomuch that very fre-
quently they are deprived of sight for the space of one
quarter of an hour.
The French, having in 1625 established themselves in
the Isle of St. Christopher, planted there a sort of trees,
of which at present there possibly may be greater quan-
tities. With the timber of those trees they made Long-
boats and Hoys, which they sent thence westward, well
manned and victualled, to discover other islands. These,
setting sail from St. Christopher, came within sight of
the Island of Hispaniola, where at length they arrived
with abundance of joy. Having landed, they marched
into the country, where they found huge quantities of
catde, such as cows, bulls, horses and wild boars. But
finding no great profit in those animals unless they could
enclose them, and knowing likewise the island to be
pretty well peopled by the Spaniards, they thought it
convenient to enterprize upon and seize the Island of
Tortuga. This they performed without any difficulty
there being upon the island no more than ten or twelve
^ Land-crabs are abundant in the West Indies. The violet land-
crab {Gecarcinus ruricola), living in communities, burrowing and travel-
ling great distances, is the principal variety — it is a great delicacy.
lo THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Spaniards to guard it. These few men let the French
come in peaceably and possess the island for the space
of six months, without any trouble. In the meanwhile
they passed and repassed with their canoes to Hispaniola,
whence they transported many people, and at last began
to plant the whole Isle of Tortuga. The few Spaniards
remaining there, perceiving the French to increase their
number daily, began at last to repine at their prosperity
and grudge them the possession they had freely given.
Hence they gave notice to others of their own nation,
their neighbours, who sent several great boats, well armed
and manned, to dispossess the F"rench of that island. This
expedition succeeded according to their desires. For the
new possessors, seeing the great number of Spaniards that
came against them, fled with all they had to the woods ;
and hence by night they wafted over with canoes to the
Isle of Hispaniola. This they more easily performed
having no women or children with them, nor any great
substance to carry away. Here they also retired into the
woods, both to seek themselves food, and thence with
secrecy to give intelligence to others of their own faction ;
judging for certain that within a little while they should
be in a capacity to hinder the Spaniards from fortifying
in Tortuga.
Meanwhile the Spaniards of the greater island ceased
not to seek after their new guests, the French, with in-
tent to root them out of the woods, if possible, or cause
them to perish with hunger. But this their design soon
failed, having found that the French were masters both
of good guns, powder and bullets. Here, therefore,
the fugitives waited for a certain opportunity, wherein
they knew the Spaniards were to come from Tortuga,
with arms and great number of men, to join with those
of the greater Island for their destruction. When this
occasion proffered, they, in the meanwhile deserting the
woods where they were, returned to Tortuga, and dis
possessed the small number of Spaniards that remained
THE FRENCH IN THE ISLE OF ST. CHRISTOPHER, ii
at home. Having so done, they fortified themselves as
best they could, thereby to prevent the return of the
Spaniards, in case they should attempt it. Moreover,
they sent immediately to the Governor of St. Christo-
pher, in 1630, craving his aid and relief, and demanding
of him to send them a Governor, the better to be united
among themselves and strengthened on all occasions.
The Governor of St. Christopher received their petition
with expressions of much satisfaction, and without any
delay sent to them Monsieur le Passeur in quality of a
Governor, together with a ship full of men and all other
things necessary both for their establishment and defence.
No sooner had they received this recruit than the Gover-
nor commanded a fortress to be built upon the top of a
high rock, whence he could hinder the access of any
ships or other vessels that should design to enter the
port. To this fort no other access could be had than by
almost climbing through a very narrow passage, that was
capable only of receiving two persons at once, and those
not without difficulty. In the middle of this rock was a
great cavity, which now serves for a storehouse ; and,
besides, here was great convenience for raising a battery.
The fort being finished, the Governor commanded two
guns to be mounted, which could not be performed
without huge toil and labour, as also a house to be built
in the fort ; and, afterwards, the narrow way that led
to the said fort to be broken and demolished, leaving
no other ascent thereto than by a ladder. Within the
fort a plentiful fountain of fresh water gushes out, which
perpetually runs with a pure and crystalline stream sufii-
cient to refresh a garrison of a thousand men. Being
possessed of these conveniences, and the security these
things might promise, the French began to people the
island, and each of them to seek his living, some by the
exercise of hunting, others by planting tobacco, and others
by cruising and robbing upon the coasts of the Spanish
Islands — which trade is continued by them to this day.
12 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
The Spaniards, notwithstanding, could not behold but
with jealous eyes the daily increase of the French in
Tortuga, fearing lest in time they might by them be dis-
possessed also of Hispaniola. Thus taking an oppor-
tunity, when many of the French were abroad at sea, and
others employed in hunting, with eight hundred men in
several canoes, they landed again in Tortuga, almost
without being perceived by the French. But finding that
the Governor had cut down many trees, for the better
discovery of an enemy in case of any assault, also that
nothing of consequence could be done without great
guns, they consulted about the fittest place for raising a
battery. This place was soon concluded to be the top of
a mountain which was in sight, seeing that thence alone
they could level their guns at the fort, which now lay open
to them, since the cutting down of the trees by the new
possessors. Hence they resolved to open a way for
carriage of some pieces of ordnance to the top. This-
mountain is somewhat high, and the upper part plain,
whence the whole island may be viewed. The sides
thereof are very rugged by reason of a huge number of
inaccessible rocks surrounding it everywhere ; so that the
ascent was very difficult, and would always have been the
same, had not the Spaniards undergone the immense
labour and toil of making the way aforementioned, as I
shall now relate.
The Spaniards had in their company many slaves, and
Indians, labouring men, whom they call Matates, or, in
English, half-yellow men. To these they gave orders to
dig a way through the rocks with iron tools. This they
performed with the greatest speed imaginable. And
through this way, by the help of many ropes and pulleys,
they at last made shift to get up two sole cannon pieces,
wherewith they made a battery, and intended next day to
batter the fort. Meanwhile the French were not igno-
rant of these designs, but rather prepared themselves for
a defence (while the Spaniards were busied about the
SPANISH ATTACK ON TORTUGA. 13
battery), sending notice everywhere to their companions
requiring their help. Thus the hunters of the island all
joined together, and with them all the pirates who were
not already too far from home. These landed by night
at Tortuga, lest they should be seen by the Spaniards.
And under the same obscurity of the night, they all
together by a back way climbed up the mountain where
the Spaniards were posted ; which they more easily could
perform as being acquainted with those rocks. They
came thither at the very instant that the Spaniards, who
were above, were preparing to shoot at the fort, not
knowing in the least of their coming. Here they set
upon them, at their backs, with such fury as forced the
greatest part to precipitate themselves from the top to the
bottom, and dash their bodies in pieces. Few or none
escaped this attack, for if any remained alive they were
all put to the sword, without giving quarter to the
meanest. Some Spaniards still kept the bottom of the
mountain, but hearing the shrieks and cries of them
that were killed, and believing some tragical revolution
to be above, fled immediately towards the sea, despair-
ing, through this accident, to ever regain the Isle of
Tortuga.
The Governors of this island always behaved them-
selves as proprietors and absolute lords thereof until the
year 1664 ; at which time the West India Company of
France took possession of it, and sent thither for their
Governor, Monsieur Ogeron. These planted the colony
for themselves, by the means of their factors and servants,
thinking to drive some considerable trade thence with the
Spaniards, even as the Hollanders do from Curacoa.
But this design did not answer their expectation. For
with other nations they could drive no trade, by reason
they could not establish any secure commerce from the
beginning with their own. Forasmuch as at the first
institution of this Company in France, they made an
agreement with the pirates, hunters and planters, first
14 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
possessors of Tortuga, that these should buy all their
necessaries from the said Company, taking them upon
trust. And although this agreement was put in execu-
tion, yet the factors of the Company soon after found that
they could not recover either monies or returns from
those people. Insomuch as they were constrained to
bring some armed men into the island, in behalf of the
Company, to get in some of their payments. But neither
this endeavour nor any other could prevail towards
settlinof a secure trade with those of the island. And
hereupon the Company recalled their factors, giving
them orders to sell all that was their own in the said
plantation, both the servants belonging to the Company
(which were sold, some for twenty, others for thirty,
pieces of eight), as also all other merchandizes and pro-
perties which they had there. With this resolution all
their designs fell to the ground.
In this occasion I was also sold, as being a servant
under the said Company, in whose service I came out of
France. But my fortune was very bad, for I fell into the
hands of the most cruel tyrant and perfidious man that
ever was born of woman, who was then Governor, or
rather Lieutenant General, of that island. This man
treated me with all the hard usages imaginable, even with
that of hunger, with which I thought I should have
perished inevitably. Withal he was willing to let me buy
my freedom and liberty, but not under the rate of three
hundred pieces of eight, I not being master of one, at
that time, in the whole world. At last through the
manifold miseries I endured, as also affliction of mind, I
was thrown into a 'dangerous fit of sickness. This mis-
fortune, being added to the rest of my calamities, was the
cause of my happiness. For my wicked master, seeing
my condition, began to fear lest he should lose his monies
with my life. Hereupon he sold me the second time to
a surgeon for the price of seventy pieces of eight. Being
in the hands of this second master, I began soon after to
THE AUTHOR SOLD INTO SLAVERY. 15
recover my health through the good usage I received
from him, as being much more humane and civil than
that of my first patron. He gave me both clothes and
very good food, and after I had served him but one year
he offered me my liberty, with only this condition, that I
should pay him one hundred pieces of eight when I was
in a capacity of wealth to do so. Which kind proposal of
his I could not choose but accept with infinite joy and
gratitude of mind.
Being now at liberty, though like unto Adam when he
was first created by the hands of his Maker — that is,
naked and destitute of all human necessaries, nor knowing
how to get my living — I determined to enter into the
wicked order of the Pirates, or Robbers at Sea. Into
this Society I was received with common consent both of
the superior and vulgar sort, and among them I continued
until the year 1672. Having assisted them in all their
designs and attempts, and served them in many notable
exploits, of which hereafter I shall give the reader a true
account, I returned to my own native country. But be-
fore I begin to relate the things above-mentioned, I shall
say something, for the satisfaction of such as are curious,
of the Island Hispaniola, which lies towards the Western
parts of America, as also give my reader a brief descrip-
tion thereof, according to my slender ability and experi-
ence.
'^^
CHAPTER III.
Description of the great and famous Island of Hispaniola.
The very large and rich island called Hispaniola is
situate in the latitude of seventeen degrees and a half.
The greatest part thereof extends, from East to West,
twenty degrees Southern latitude. The circumference
is three hundred leagues, the length one hundred and
twenty, its breadth almost fifty, being more or less
broad or narrow at certain places. I shall not need here
to insert how this island was at first discovered, it
being known to the world that it was performed by
the means of Christopher Columbus, in the year 1492,
being sent for this purpose by Ferdinand, the Catholic,
then King of Spain. From which time, to this
present, the Spaniards have been continually possessors
thereof. There are on this island many very good
THE ISLAND OF HISPANIOLA. 17
and strong cities, towns and hamlets ; it also abounds
in a great number of pleasant and delicious country-
houses and plantations ; all which are owing to the care
and industry of the Spaniards, its inhabitants.
The chief city and metropolis of this island is called
San Domingo, being dedicated to St. Dominic, from
whom it derives this name. It is situated towards the
South, in a place which affords a most excellent prospect,
the country round about being embellished with in-
numerable rich plantations, also verdant meadows and
fruitful gardens — all which produce plenty and variety of
excellent and pleasant fruits, according to the nature of
those countries. The Governor of the island makes his
residence in this city, which is, as it were, the storehouse
of all the other cities, towns and villages, which hence
export and provide themselves with all necessaries what-
soever for human life. And yet has it this particularity,
above many other cities in other places, that it entertains
no external commerce with any other nation than its own,
the Spaniards. The greatest part of the inhabitants are
rich and substantial merchants, or such as are shop-
keepers and sell by retail.
Another city of this island is named Santiago, or,
in English, St. James, as being consecrated to the
Apostle of that name. This is an open place, without
either walls or castle, situate in the latitude of nineteen
degrees South. The greatest part of the inhabitants
are hunters and planters, the adjacent territory and
soil being very proper for the said exercises of its
constitution. The city is surrounded with large and
delicious fields, as much pleasing to the view as those
of San Domingo ; and these abound with all sorts of
beasts, both wild and tame, whence are taken a huge
number of skins and hides, that afford to the owners
a very considerable traffic.
Towards the Southern parts of this island is seen
another city called Nuestra Sefiora del Alta Gracia.
VOL. I. c
i8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
The territory hereof produces great quantities of cacao,
which occasions the inhabitants to make great store of
the richest sort of chocolate. Here grows also much
ginger and tobacco ; and much tallow is prepared of the
beasts which hereabouts are hunted.
The inhabitants of this beautiful island of Hispaniola
often go and come in their canoes to the Isle of Savona, '
not far distant thence, where is their chief fishery, especi-
ally of tortoises. Hither those fish constantly resort in
huge multitudes at certain seasons of the year, there to
lay their eggs, burying them in the sands of the shore.
Thus by the heat of the sun, which in those parts is very
ardent, they are hatched, and continue the propagation of
their species. This island of Savona has little or nothing
that is worthy consideration or may merit any particular
description, as being so extremely barren, by reason of
its sandy soil. True it is, that here grows some small
quantity of ligmim sanctum or guaiacum.
Westwards of the city of San Domingo is also
situated another great village, called by the name of
El Pueblo del Aso, or the Town of Aso. The in-
habitants of this town drive a great commerce and traffic
with those of another village, which is placed in the
very middle of the island, and is called San Juan de
Goave, or St. John of Goave. This place is environed
with a magnificent prospect of gardens, woods and
meadows. Its territory extends above twenty leagues
in length, and grazes a huge number of wild bulls and
cows. In this village scarce dwell any others than
hunters and butchers, who flay the beasts that are killed.
These are for the most part a mongrel sort of people of
several bloods ^ ; some of which are born of white Euro-
1 The offspring of a negro and Indian, or a person with three-fourths
of black blood, is denominated a zambo or sambo ; a mixture of half
white and half black is strictly the mulatto ; three parts white to one
part black forms the quadroon ; one-eighth part of black blood marks
the mustee or octoroon ; after the octoroon the mixed race are usually
considered to be " white-washed," and rank as white. In the British
THE ISLAND OF HISPANIOLA. 19
pean people and negroes, and these are called Mulattos.
Others are born of Indians and white people, and such
are termed Mestizos. But others are begotten of negroes
and Indians, and these also have their peculiar name,
being called Alcatraces. Besides which sorts of people,
there are several other species and races, both here and
in other places of the West Indies, of whom this account
may be given, that the Spaniards love better the negro
women, in those Western parts, or the tawny Indian
females, than their own white European race, whereas
peradventure the negroes and Indians have greater
inclinations to the white women, or those that come near
them, the tawny, than their own. From the said village
are exported yearly vast quantities of tallow and hides,
they exercising no other traffic nor toil. For as to the
lands in this place, they are not cultivated, by reason of
the excessive dryness of the soil. These are the chiefest
places that the Spaniards possess in this island, from the
Cape of Lobos towards St. John de Goave, to the Cape
of Samana, near the sea, on the North side, and from the
Eastern part, towards the sea, called Punta d' Espada.
All the rest of the island is possessed by the French, who
are also planters and hunters.
This island has very good ports for ships, from the
Cape of Lobos to the Cape of Tiburon, which lies on the
Western side thereof. In this space of land there are
no less than four ports, which exceed in goodness,
largeness and security even the very best of England.
Besides these, from the Cape of Tiburon to the Cape of
Donna Maria, there are two very excellent ports, and
from this Cape to the Cape of St. Nicholas there are no
less than twelve others. Every one of these ports has
also the confluence of two or three good rivers, in which
West Indies very few of the negroes are of pure black blood, owing to
the number of convicts and political prisoners who were sent to the
plantations during the earlier settlements of the islands. In Montserrat
(known as little Ireland), which was largely colonized by Irish prisoners,
the negroes universally bear Irish surnames, and retain the Irish accent.
20 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
are found several sorts of fish, very pleasing to the palate,
and also in great plenty. The country hereabouts is
sufficiently watered with large and profound rivers and
brooks, so that this part of the land may easily be culti-
vated without any great fear of droughts, it being certain
that better streams are not to be found in any part of the
world. The sea coasts and shores are also very pleasant,
to which the tortoises resort in huge numbers, there to
lay their eggs.
This island was formerly very well peopled on the
North side with many towns and villages ; but these,
being ruined by the Hollanders, were at last for the
greatest part deserted by the Spaniards.
CHAPTER IV.
Of the Fruits, Trees and Animals that are found at Hispaniola.
The spacious fields of this island commonly extend them-
selves to the length of five or six leagues, the beauty
whereof is so pleasing to the eye that, together with the
great variety of their natural productions, they infinitely
applaud and captivate the senses of the contemplator.
For here at once they not only, with diversity of objects,
recreate the sight, but, with many of the same, also
please the smell, and, with most, contribute abundancy
of delights to the taste. With sundry diversities also
they flatter and excite the appetite ; but more especially
with the multitude of oranges and lemons, here growing
both sweet and sour, and those that participate of both
tastes, and are only pleasantly tart. Besides which here
abundantly grow several other sorts of the same fruit,
such as are called citrons, toronjas and limes, in English
not improperly called crab-lemons. True it is that, as to
the lemons, they do not exceed here the bigness of a
hen's egg ; which smallness distinguishes them from
those of Spain most frequently used in these our Northern
countries. The date-trees, which here are seen to cover
the whole extent of very spacious plains, are exceedingly
tall in their proportion, which notwithstanding does not
offend but rather delight the view. Their height is
observed to be from 150 to 200 feet, being wholly
destitute of branches to the very tops. Here it is there
grows a certain pleasant white substance not unlike that
of white cabbage, whence the branches and leaves sprout,
and in which also the seed or dates are contained.
22 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Every month one of those branches falls to the ground,
and at the same time another sprouts out. But the
seed ripens only once in the year. The dates are food
extremely coveted by the hedgehogs. The white sub-
stance growing at the top of the tree is used by the
Spaniards after the same manner for common sustenance
as cabbage in Europe, they cutting it into slices, and
boiling it in their ollas, or stews, with all sorts of meat.
The leaves of this sort of date-tree are seven or eight
foot in length and three or four in breadth, being very fit
to cover houses with. For they defend from rain equally
with the best tiles, though never so rudely huddled
together. They make use of them also to wrap up
smoked flesh with, and to make a certain sort of buckets
wherewith to carry water, though no longer durable
than the space of six, seven, or eight days. The
cabbages of these trees, for so we may call them, are of
a greenish colour on the outside, though inwardly very
white, whence may be separated a sort of rind, which is
very like parchment, being fit to write upon, as we do
upon paper. The bodies of these trees are of an huge
bulk or thickness, which two men can hardly compass
with their arms. And yet they cannot properly be
termed woody, but only three or four inches deep in
thickness, all the rest of the internal part being very soft,
insomuch that, paring off those three or four inches of
woody substance, the remaining part of the body may
be sliced like new cheese. They wound them three or
four foot above the root, and, making an incision or
broach in the body, thence gently distils a sort of liquor,
which in short time by fermentation becomes as strong
as the richest wine, and which easily inebriates if not
used with moderation. The French call this sort of
palm-trees Frank-palms, and they only grow, both here
and elsewhere, in saltish grounds.
Besides these palm-trees of which we have made
mention, there are also in Hispaniola four other species
FLORA AND FAUNA OF HISPANIOLA. 23
of palms, which are distinguished by the names of
Latanier, Palma Espinosa or Prickle-palm, Palma a
Chapelet or Rosary-palm, Palma Vinosa or Wine-palm.
The Latanier-palm is not so tall as the Wine-palm,
although it has almost the same shape, only that the
leaves are very like the fans our women use. They grow
mostly in gravelly and sandy ground, their circumference
being of seven foot more or less. The body has many
prickles or thorns of the length of half a foot, very sharp
and pungent. It produces its seed after the same manner
as that above-mentioned, which likewise serves for food
to the wild beasts.
Another sort of these palm-trees is called Prickle-palm,
as we said before, by reason it is infinitely full of prickles,
from the root to the very leaves thereof, much more
than the precedent. With these prickles some of the
barbarous Indians torment their prisoners of war, whom
they take in batde. They tie them to a tree, and then
taking these thorns, they put them into little pellets
of cotton, which they dip in oil, and thus stick them in
the sides of the miserable prisoners, as thick as the
bristles of a hedgehog ; which of necessity cause an
incredible torment to the patient. Afterwards they set
them on fire, and if the tormented prisoner sings in the
midst of his torments and flames, he is esteemed as a
valiant and courageous soldier, who neither fears his
enemies nor their torments. But if on the contrary he
cries out, they esteem him but as a poltroon or coward,
and unworthy of any memory. This custom was told
me by an Indian, who said he had used his enemies thus
oftentimes. The like cruelties to these, many Christians
have seen while they lived among those barbarians. But
returning to the Prickle-palm, I shall only tell you that
this palm-tree is in this only different from the Latanier,
that the leaves are like those of the Frank-palm. Its
seed is like that of the other palm-trees, only much
bigger and rounder, almost as a farthing, and inwardly
24 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
full of little kernels, which are as pleasing to the taste as
our walnuts in Europe. This tree grows for the most
part in the marshes and low grounds of the sea coast.
The Wine-palm is so called from the abundance of wine
which is gathered from it. This palm grows in high and
rocky mountains, not exceeding in tallness the height of
forty or fifty foot, but yet of an extraordinary shape or
form. For from the root to the half of its proportion, it
is only three or four inches thick. But upwards, some-
thing above the two-thirds of its height, it is as big and
as thick as an ordinary bucket or milk-pail. Within, it is
full of a certain matter, very like the tender stalk of a
white cabbage, which is very juicy of a liquor that is
much pleasing to the palate. This liquor after fermenta-
tion and settling of the grounds reduces itself into a very
good and clear wine, which is purchased with no great
industry. For having wounded the tree with an ordinary
hatchet, they make a square incision or orifice in it,
through which they bruise the said matter until it be
capable of being squeezed out, or expressed with the
hands, they needing no other instrument than this.
With the leaves they make certain vessels, not only to
settle and purify the afore-mentioned liquor, but also to
drink in. It bears its fruit like other palms, but of a
very small shape, being not unlike cherries. The taste
hereof is very good, but of dangerous consequence to the
throat, where it causes huge and extreme pains, that pro-
duce malignant quinsies in them that eat it.
The Palma a Chapelet, or Rosary-palm, was thus called
both by the French and Spaniards, because its seed is
very fit to make rosaries or beads to say prayers upon,
the beads being small, hard and capable of being easily
bored for that use. This fourth species grows on the tops
of the highest mountains, and is of an excessive tallness,
but withal very straight, and adorned with very few leaves.
Here grows also in this island a certain sort of Apricot
trees, whose fruit equals in bigness that of our ordinary
FLORA AND FAUNA OF HISPANIOLA. 25
melons. The colour is like ashes, and the taste the very
same as that of our apricots in Europe, the inward stones
of this fruit being of the bigness of a hen's egg. On
these the wild boars feed very deliciously, and fatten even
to admiration.
The trees called caremites are very like our pear-trees,
whose fruits resemble much our Damascene plums or
pruants of Europe, being of a very pleasant and agree-
able taste and almost as sweet as milk. This fruit is
black on the inside, and the kernels thereof, sometimes
only two in number, sometimes three, others five, of the
bigness of a lupin. This plum affords no less pleasant
food to the wild boars than the apricots above-mentioned,
only that it is not so commonly to be found upon the
island, nor in such quantity as those are.
The Genipa-trees are seen everywhere all over this
island, being very like our cherry-trees, although its
branches are more dilated. The fruit hereof is of an ash
colour, of the bigness of two fists, which interiorly is full
of many prickles or points that are involved under a thin
membrane or skin, the which, if not taken away at the
time of eating, causes great obstructions and gripings of
the belly. Before this fruit grows ripe, if pressed, it
affords a juice as black as ink, being fit to write with
upon paper. But the letters disappear within the space
of nine days, the paper remaining as white as if it never
had been written upon. The wood of this tree is very
strong, solid and hard, good to build ships with, seeing
it is observed to last many years in the water without
putrefaction.
Besides these, divers other sorts of trees are natives
of this delicious island, that produce very excellent and
pleasant fruits. Of these I shall omit to name several,
knowing there are entire volumes of learned authors that
have both described and searched them with greater
attention and curiosity than my own. Notwithstanding,
I shall continue to make mention of some few more in
26 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
particular. Such are the Cedars, which trees this part
of the world produces in prodigious quantity. The
French nation calls them Acajou; and they find them
very useful for the building of ships and canoes.^ These
canoes are like little wherry-boats, being made of one
tree only, excavated, and fitted for the sea. They are
withal so swift as for that very property they may be
called " Neptune's post-horses." The Indians make
these canoes without the use of any iron instruments, by
only burning the trees at the bottom near the root, and
afterwards governing the fire with such industry that
nothing is burnt more than what they would have. Some
of them have hatchets, made of flint, wherewith they
scrape or pare off whatsoever was burnt too far. And
thus, by the sole instrument of fire, they know how to give
them that shape which renders them capable of navigating
threescore or fourscore leagues with ordinary security.
As to medicinal productions, here is to be found the
tree that affords the g2u?i clemi, wsed in our apothecaries'
shops. Likewise guaiaciun, or ligniun sanctum, ligmun
aloes, or aloe- wood, cassia lignea, China- roots, with
several others. The tree called niapou, besides that it is
medicinal, is also used for making of canoes, as being
very thick ; yet is it much inferior to the acajou or cedar,
as being somewhat spongy, whereby it sucks in much
water, rendering it dangerous in navigation. The tree
called acoma has its wood very hard and heavy, of the
colour of palm. These qualities render it very fit to make
oars for the sugar mills. Here are also in great quantities
brasilete, or brazil-wood, and that which the Spaniards
call iiiaiLcanilla.
Brazil-wood is now very well known in the provinces
of Holland and the Low Countries. By another name
it is called by the Spaniards Lcnna de Peje paLo. It
^ The French term "Acajou" seems to be apphed by the buccaneers
to cedar wood ; it is now, however, almost entirely confined to
mahogany.
FLORA AND FAUNA OF HISPANIOLA. 27
serves only, or chiefly, for dyeing, and what belongs to
that trade. It grows abundantly along the sea coasts of
this island, especially in two places called Jacmel and
Jaquina. These are two commodious ports or bays,
capable of receiving ships of the greatest bulk.
The tree called inaufanilla, or dwarf-apple-tree,^ grows
near the sea shore, being naturally so low that its
branches, though never so short, always touch the
water. It bears a fruit something like our sweet-scented
apples, which notwithstanding is of a very venomous
quality. For these apples being eaten by any person, he
instantly changes colour, and such a huge thirst seizes
him as all the water of the Thames cannot exting-uish, he
dying raving mad within a little while after. But what
is more, the fish that eat, as it often happens, of this
fruit are also poisonous. This tree affords also a liquor,
both thick and white, like the fig-tree, which, if touched
by the hand, raises blisters upon the skin, and these are
so red in colour as if it had been deeply scalded with hot
water. One day being hugely tormented with mosquitos
or gnats, and as yet unacquainted with the nature of this
tree, I cut a branch thereof, to serve me instead of a fan,
but all my face swelled the next day and filled with
blisters, as if it were burnt to such a degree that I was
blind for three days.
Ycao is the name of another sort of tree, so called
by the Spaniards, which grows by the sides of rivers.
This bears a certain fruit, not unlike our bullace or
damson plums. And this food is extremely coveted by
the wild boar, when at its perfect maturity, with which
they fatten as much as our hogs with the sweetest acorns
of Spain. These trees love sandy ground, yet are so
low that, their branches being very large, they take up a
great circumference, almost couched upon the ground.
The trees named Abelcoses bear fruit of like colour with
^ The well-known manchineel, erroneously supposed to be the upas-
tree, which latter owes its reputation to a Malay legend.
28 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the Ycaos above-mentioned, but of the bigness of melons,,
the seeds or kernels being as big as eggs. The sub-
stance of this fruit is yellow, and of a pleasant taste,
which the poorest among the French eat instead of
bread, the wild boar not caring at all for this fruit.
These trees grow very tall and thick, being somewhat like
our largest sort of pear-trees.
As to the insects which this island produces, I shall
only take notice of three sorts of flies, which excessively
torment all human bodies, but more especially such as
never before, or but a little while, were acquainted with
these countries. The first sort of these flies are as big
as our common horse-flies in Europe. And these,
darting themselves upon men's bodies, there stick and
suck their blood till they can no longer fly. Their
importunity obliges to make almost continual use of
branches of trees wherewith to fan them away. The
Spaniards in those parts call them mosquitos or gnats,
but the French give them the name of maranguines.
The second sort of these insects is no bigger than a
grain of sand. These make no buzzing noise, as the
preceding species does, for which reason it is less avoid-
able, as being able also through its smallness to penetrate
the finest linen or cloth. The hunters are forced to
anoint their faces with hogs' -grease, thereby to defend
themselves from the stings of these little animals. By
night, in their huts or cottages, they constantly for the
same purpose burn the leaves of tobacco, without which
smoke they were not able to rest. True it is that in the
daytime they are not very troublesome, if any wind be
stirring ; for this, though never so little, causes them to
dissipate. The gnats of the third species exceed not
the bigness of a grain of mustard.^ Their colour is red.
These sting not at all, but bite so sharply upon the
flesh as to create little ulcers therein. Whence it often
^ This is the Bete rouge, one of the greatest plagues of the West
Indies.
INSECTS AND SNAKES OF HISPANIOLA. 29
comes that the face swells and is rendered hideous to the
view, through this inconvenience. These are chiefly-
troublesome by day, even from the beginning of the
morning until sun-setting, after which time they take
their rest, and permit human bodies to do the same.
The Spaniards gave these insects the name of rojados,
and the French that of calarodes.
The insects which the Spaniards call cochinillas and
the English glow-worms are also to be found in these
parts. These are very like such as we have in Europe,
unless that they are somewhat bigger and longer than
ours. They have two little specks on their heads, which
by night give so much light that three or four of those
animals, being together upon a tree, it is not discernible
at a distance from a bright shining fire. I had on a
certain time at once three of these cochinillas in my
cottage, which there continued until past midnight,
shining so brightly that without any other light I could
easily read in any book, although of never so small a
print, I attempted to bring some of these insects into
Europe, when I came from those parts, but as soon as
they came into a colder climate they died by the way.
They lost also their shining on the change of air, even
before their death. This shining is so great, according
to what I have related, that the Spaniards with great
reason may well call them from their luminous quality
moscas de fuego, that is to say fire-flies.
There be also in Hispaniola an excessive number of
grillones or crickets. These are of an extraordinary
magnitude, if compared to ours, and so full of noise
that they are ready to burst themselves with singing, if
any person comes near them. Here is no lesser number
of reptiles, such as serpents and others, but by a par-
ticular providence of the Creator these have no poison.
Neither do they any other harm than to what fowl
they can catch, but more especially to pullets, pigeons
and others of this kind. Ofttimes these serpents or
30 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
snakes are useful in houses to cleanse them of rats and
mice. For with great cunning they counterfeit their
shrieks, and hereby both deceive and catch them at their
pleasure. Having taken them, they in no wise eat the
guts of these vermin, but only suck their blood at first.
Afterwards throwing away the guts, they swallow almost
entire the rest of the body, which, as it should seem,
they readily digest into soft excrements, of which they
discharge their bellies. Another sort of reptiles belong-
ing; to this island is called by the name of cafadores de
moscas. or tiy-catchers. This name was given to this
reptile by the Spaniards, by reason they never could
experience it lived upon any other food than flies.
Hence it cannot be said this creature causes any harm
to the inhabitants, but rather benefit, seeing it consumes
by its continual exercise of hunting the vexatious and
troublesome flies.
Land-tortoises here are also in great quantities.
They mostly breed in mud, and fields that are overflown
with w^ater. The inhabitants eat them, and testify they
are verv sfood food. But a sort of spider which is here
found is very hideous. These are as big as an ordinary
egg, and their feet as long as those of the biggest sea-
crabs. Withal, they are very hairy, and have four black
teeth, like those of a rabbit, both in bigness and shape.
Notwithstanding, their bites are not venomous, although
they can bite very sharply, and do use it very commonly.
They breed for the most part in the roofs of houses. This
island also is not free from the insect called in Latin
millcpes, and in Greek scolopcndria, or "Many-feet":
neither is it void of scorpions. Yet, by the providence of
nature, neither the one nor the other bears the least
suspicion of poison. For although they cease not to
bite, yet their wounds require not the application of any
medicament for their cure. And although their bites
cause some inflammation and swelling at the beginning,
however these symptoms disappear of their own accord.
THE CROCODILES OF HISPANIOLA. 31
Thus in the whole circumference of Hispaniola, no animal
is found that produces the least harm with its venom.
After the insects above-mentioned, I shall not omit to
say something of that terrible beast called cayman.
This is a certain species of crocodile, wherewith this
island very plentifully abounds. Among these caymans
some are found to be of a corpulency very horrible to
the sight. Certain it is, that such have been seen as
had no less than threescore and ten foot in length, and
twelve in breadth. Yet more marvellous than their bulk
is their cunning and subtlety wherewith they purchase
their food. Being hungry, they place themselves near
the sides of rivers, more especially at the fords, where
cattle come to drink or wade over. Here they lie with-
out any motion, nor stirring any part of their body,
resembling an old tree fallen into the river, only floating
upon the waters, whither these will carry them. Yet
they recede not far from the bank-sides, but continually
lurk in the same place, waiting till some wild boar or
salvage cow comes to drink or refresh themselves at that
place. At which point of time, with huge activity, they
assault them, and seizing on them with no less fierceness,
they drag the prey into the water and there stifle it.
But what is more worthy admiration is, that three or
four days before the caymans go upon this design, they
eat nothing at all. But, diving into the river, they
swallow one or two hundred-weight of stones, such as
they can find. With these they render themselves more
heavy than before, and make addition to their natural
strength (which in this animal is very great), thereby to
render their assault the more terrible and secure. The
prey being thus stifled, they suffer it to lie four or five
days under water untouched. For they could not eat
the least bit thereof, unless half rotten. But when it is
arrived at such a degree of putrefaction as is most
pleasing to their palate, they devour it with great
appetite and voracity. If they can lay hold on any hides
32 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of beasts, such as the inhabitants ofttimes place in the
fields for drying In the sun, they drag them into the
water. Here they leave them for some days, well
loaden with stones, till the hair falls off. Then they eat
them with no less appetite than they would the animals
themselves, could they catch them. I have seen myself,
many times, like things to these I have related. But
besides my own experience, many writers of natural things
have made entire treatises of these animals, describing
not only their shape, magnitude and other qualities, but
also their voracity and brutish inclinations ; which, as I
have told you, are very strange. A certain person of
good reputation and credit told me that one day he was
by the river-side, washing his baraca, or tent, wherein he
used to lie in the fields. As soon as he began his work,
a cayman fastened upon the tent, and with incredible fury
dragged it under water. The man, desirous to see if he
could save his tent, pulled on the contrary side with all
his strength, having in his mouth a butcher's knife
(wherewith as it happened he was scraping the canvas)
to defend himself in case of urgent necessity. The
cayman, being angry at this opposition, vaulted upon his
body, out of the river, and drew him with great celerity
into the water, endeavouring with the weight of his bulk
to stifle him under the banks. Thus finding himself in
the greatest extremity, almost crushed to death by that
huge and formidable animal, with his knife he gave the
cayman several wounds in the belly, wherewith he suddenly
expired. Being thus delivered from the hands of immi-
nent fate, he drew the cayman out of the water, and with
the same knife opened the body, to satisfy his curiosity.
In his stomach he found nearly one hundred- weight of
stones, each of them being almost of the bigness of his fist.
The caymans are ordinarily busied in hunting and
catching of flies, which they eagerly devour. The
occasion is, because close to their skin they have certain
little scales, which smell with a sweet scent, something
CROCODILES OF HISPANIOLA.
35
like musk. This aromatic odour is coveted by the flies,
and here they come to repose themselves and sting.
Thus they both persecute each other continually, with an
incredible hatred and antipathy. Their manner of procre-
ating and hatching their young ones is as follows. They
approach the sandy banks of some river that lies exposed
to the rays of the south sun. Among these sands they lay
their eggs, which afterwards they cover with their feet ;
and here they find them hatched, and with young genera-
tion, by the heat only of the sun. These, as soon as
they are out of the shell, by natural instinct run to the
water. Many times those eggs are destroyed by birds
that find them out, as they scrape among the sands.
Hereupon the females of the caymans, at such times as
they fear the coming of any flocks of birds, ofttimes
by night swallow their eggs, and keep them in their
stomach till the danger is over. And, from time to time,
they bury them again in the sand, as I have told you,
bringing them forth again out of their belly till the
season is come of being excluded the shell. At this
time, if the mother be near at hand, they run to her and
play with her as little whelps would do with their dams,
sporting themselves according to their own custom. In
this sort of sport they will oftentimes run in and out of
their mother's belly, even as rabbits into their holes.
This I have seen them do many times, as I have spied
them at play with their dam over the water upon the
contrary banks of some river. At which time I have
often disturbed their sport by throwing a stone that way,
causing them on a sudden to creep into the mother's
bowels, for fear of some imminent danger. The manner
of procreating of those animals is always the same as I
have related, and at the same time of the year, for they
neither meddle nor make with one another but in the
month of May. They give them in this country the
name of crocodiles, though in other places of the West
Indies they go under the name of caymans.
VOL. I. D
CHAPTER V.
Of all sorts of quadruped Animals afid Birds that are foimd in
this Islajid. As also a relation of the French Biiccaneers.
Besides the fruits which this island produces, whose
plenty, as is held for certain, surpasses all the islands of
America, it abounds also very plentifully in all sorts of
quadruped animals, such as horses, bulls, cows, wild
boars, and others very useful to human kind, not only for
common sustenance of life, but also for cultivating the
ground and the management of a sufficient commerce.
In this island therefore are still remaining a huge num-
ber of wild dogs. These destroy yearly multitudes of all
sorts of cattle. For no sooner has a cow brought forth
her calf, or a mare foaled, than these wild mastiffs come
to devour the young breed, if they find not some resis-
tance from keepers and other domestic dogs. They run
up and down the woods and fields commonly in whole
troops of fifty, threescore or more, together, being
withal so fierce that they ofttimes will assault an entire
herd of wild boars, not ceasing to persecute them till they
have at last overcome and torn in pieces two or three.
One day a French buccaneer caused me to see a strange
action of this kind. Being in the fields hunting to-
gether, we heard a great noise of dogs, which had sur-
rounded a wild boar. Having tame dogs with us, we left
them to the custody of our servants, desirous to see the
sport, if possible. Hence my companion and I, each of us,
climbed up into several trees, both for security and pros-
pect. The wild boar was all alone, and standing against
a tree ; with his tusks he endeavoured to defend himself
FIGHT BETWEEN A WILD BOAR AND WILD DOGS. 35
from a great number of dogs that had enclosed him, hav-
ing with his teeth killed and wounded several of them.
This bloody fight continued about an hour, the wild boar
meanwhile attempting many times to escape. At last,
being upon the thght, one of those dogs leaped on his
back, and the rest of the dogs, perceiving the courage of
their companion, fastened likewise upon the boar, and
presently after killed him. This being done, all of them,
the first only excepted, laid themselves down upon the
ground about the prey, and there peaceably continued
till he, the first and most courageous of the troop, had
eaten as much as he could devour. When this dos: had
ended his repast and left the dead beast, all the rest fell
in to take their share, till nothing was left that they could
devour. What ought we to infer from this notable action,
performed by the brutish sense of wild animals } Only
this, that even beasts themselves are not destitute of
knowledge, and that they give us documents how to
honour such as have well deserved, seeing these, being
irrational animals as they were, did reverence and respect
him that exposed his life to the greatest danger, in
vanquishing courageously the common enemy.
The Governor of Tortucja, Monsieur Ogeron, under-
standing that the wild dogs killed too many of the wild
boars, and that the hunters of that island had much-a-do
to find any, fearing lest that common sustenance of the
isle should fail, caused a great quantity of poison to be
brought from France, therewith to destroy the wild
mastiffs. This was performed in the year 1668, by com-
manding certain horses to be killed and envenomed, and
laid open in the woods and fields, at certain places where
mostly wild dogs used to resort. This being continued
for the space of six months, there were killed an incredible
number in the said time. And yet all this industry was
not sufficient to exterminate and destroy the race ; yea,
scarce to make any diminution thereof, their number
appearing to be almost as entire as before. These wild
36 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
dogs are easily rendered tame among people, even as
tame as the ordinary dogs we breed in houses. More-
over, the hunters of those parts, whensoever they find a
wild bitch with young whelps, commonly take away the
puppies, and bring them to their houses, where they find
them, being grown up, to hunt much better than other
dogs.
But here the curious reader may peradventure enquire
whence or by what accident came so many wild dogs into
those islands ? The occasion was that the Spaniards,
having possessed themselves of these isles, found them
much peopled with Indians. These were a barbarous
sort of people, totally given to sensuality and a brutish
custom of life, hating all manner of labour, and only in-
clined to run from place to place, killing and making war
against their neighbours, not out of any ambition to reign,,
but only because they agreed not with themselves in
some common terms of language. Hence perceiving
the dominion of the Spaniards laid a great restriction
upon their lazy and brutish customs, they conceived an
incredible odium against them, such as never was to be
reconciled. But more especially, because they saw them
take possession of their kingdoms and dominions. Here-
upon they made against them all the resistance they were
capable of, opposing everywhere their designs to the
utmost of their power, until the Spaniards, finding them-
selves to be cruelly hated by those Indians, and no-
where secure from their treacheries, resolved to extirpate
and ruin them every one ; especially seeing they could
neither tame them by the civilities of their customs, nor
conquer them with the sword. But the Indians, it being
their ancient custom to make their woods their chiefest
places of defence, at present made these their refuge
whenever they fled from the Spaniards that pursued them.
Hereupon those first conquerors of the New World made
use of dogs to range and search the intricatest thickets
of woods and forests for those their implacable and un-
WILD HORSES OF HISPANIOLA. 37
conquerable enemies. By this means they forced them
to leave their ancient refuge and submit to the sword,
seeing no milder usage would serve turn. Hereupon
they killed some of them, and, quartering their bodies,
placed them in the highways, to the intent that others
might take warning from such a punishment, not to incur
the like danger. But this severity proved to be of ill
consequence. For, instead of frighting them and reducing
their minds to a civil society, they conceived such horror
of the Spaniards and their proceedings, that they resolved
to detest and fly their sight for ever. And hence the
greatest part died in- caves and subterraneous places of
the woods and mountains ; in which places I myself have
seen many times great numbers of human bones. The
Spaniards afterwards, finding no more Indians to appear
about the woods, endeavoured to rid themselves of the
great number of dogs they had in their houses, whence
these animals, finding no masters to keep them, betook
themselves to the woods and fields, there to hunt for food
to preserve their lives. Thus by degrees they became
unacquainted with the houses of their ancient masters
and at last grew wild. This is the truest account I can
give of the multitudes of wild dogs which are seen to this
day in these parts.
But besides the wild mastiffs above-mentioned, here
are also huge numbers of wild horses to be seen every-
where. These run up and down in whole herds or flocks
all over the Island of Hispaniola. They are but low of
stature, short-bodied, with great heads, long necks, and
big or thick legs. In a word, they have nothing that is
handsome in all their shape. They are seen to run up
and down commonly in troops of two or three hundred
together, one of them going always before, to lead the
multitude. When they meet any person that travels
through the woods or fields, they stand still, suffering him
to approach till he can almost touch them, and then,
suddenly starting, they betake themselves to flight,
38 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
running away disorderly, as fast as they are able. The
hunters catch them with industry, only for the benefit of
their skins, although sometimes they preserve their flesh
likewise, which they harden with smoke, using it for pro-
visions when they go to sea.
Here would be also wild bulls and cows, in greater
number than at present, if by continuation of hunting their
race were not much diminished. Yet considerable profit
is made even to this day by such as make it their busi-
ness to kill them. The wild bulls are of a vast corpu-
lency, or bigness of body ; and yet they do no hurt to
any person if they be not exasperated, but left to their
own repose. The hides which are taken from them are
from eleven to thirteen foot long.
The diversity of birds inhabiting the air of this island
is so great that I should be troublesome, as well to the
reader as myself, if I should attempt to muster up their
species. Hence, leaving aside the prolix catalogue of
their multitude, I shall content myself only to mention
some few of the chiefest. Here is a certain species of
pullets in the woods, which the Spaniards call by the
name of pintadas, which the inhabitants find without any
distinction to be as good as those which are bred in
houses. It is already known to everybody that the
parrots which we have in Europe are transported to us
from these parts of the world. Whence may be inferred
that, seeing such a number of these talkative birds are
preserved among us, notwithstanding the diversity of
climates, much greater multitudes are to be found where
the air and temperament is natural to them. The par-
rots make their nests in holes of palmetto-trees, which
holes are before made to their hand by other birds.
The reason is, forasmuch as they are not capable of
excavating any wood, though never so soft, as having
their own bills too crooked and blunt. Hence provident
nature has supplied them with the labour and industry of
another sort of small birds called carpinteros, or carpenters.
BIRDS OF HISPANIOLA. 39
These are no bigger than sparrows, yet notwithstanding
of such hard and piercing bills, that no iron instrument
can be made more apt to excavate any tree, though never
so solid and hard. In the holes therefore fabricated be-
forehand by these birds, the parrots get possession, and
build their nests, as has been said.
Pigeons of all sorts are also here abundantly provided
to the inhabitants by Him that created in the beginning
and provided all things. For eating of them, those of
this island observe the same seasons as we said before,
speaking of the Isle of Tortuga. Betwixt the pigeons of
both islands little or no difference is observable, only that
these of Hispaniola are something fatter and bigger than
those. Another sort of small birds here are called
cabreros, or goat-keepers. These are very like others
called hei^onsetas, and chiefly feed upon crabs of the sea.
In these birds are found seven distinct bladders of gall,
and hence their flesh is as bitter to the taste as aloes.
Crows or ravens, more troublesome to the inhabitants
than useful, here make a hideous noise through the whole
circumference of the island. Their ordinary food is
the flesh of wild dogs, or the carcases of those beasts
the buccaneers kill and throw away. These clamorous
birds no sooner hear the report of a fowling-piece or
musket than they gather from all sides into whole flocks,
and fill the air and woods with their unpleasant notes.
They are in nothing different from those we see in
Europe.
It is now high time to speak of the French nation, who
inhabit a great part of this island. We have told, at the
beginning of this book, after what manner they came at
first into these parts. At present, therefore, we shall
only describe their manner of living, customs and ordi-
nary employments. The different callings or professions
they follow are generally but three : either to hunt, or
plant, or else to rove on the sea in quality of pirates. It
is a general and solemn custom amongst them all to seek
40 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
out for a comrade or companion, whom we may call
partner, in their fortunes, with whom they join the whole
«tock of what they possess, towards a mutual and recipro-
cal gain. This is done also by articles drawn and signed
on both sides, according to what has been agreed between
them. Some of these constitute their surviving com-
panion absolute heir to what is left by the death of the
first of the two. Others, if they be married, leave their
estates to their wives and children ; others to other
relations. This being done, every one applies himself
to his calling, which is always one of the three afore-
mentioned.
The hunters are again sub-divided into two several
sorts. For some of these are only given to hunt wild
bulls and cows ; others hunt only wild boars. The first
of these two sorts of hunters are called buccaneers.
These not long ago were about the number of six hun-
dred upon this island ; but at present there are not
reckoned to be above three hundred, more or less. The
cause has been the great decrease of wild cattle through
the dominions of the French in Hispaniola, which has
appeared to be so notable that, far from getting any con-
siderable gain, they at present are but poor in this exer-
cise. When the buccaneers go into the woods to hunt
for wild bulls and cows, they commonly remain there the
space of a whole twelvemonth or two years, without
returning home. After the hunt is over and the spoil
divided among them, they commonly sail to the Isle of
Tortuga, there to provide themselves with guns, powder,
bullets and small shot, with all other necessaries against
another going out or hunting. The rest of their gains
they spend with great liberality, giving themselves freely
to all manner of vices and debauchery, among which the
first is that of drunkenness, which they exercise for the
most part with brandy. This they drink as liberally as
the Spaniards do clear fountain water. Sometimes they
buy together a pipe of wine ; this they stave at the one
HUNTERS AND PLANTERS. 41
€nd, and never cease drinking till they have made an end
of it. Thus they celebrate the festivals of Bacchus so
long as they have any money left. For all the tavern-
keepers wait for the coming of these lewd buccaneers,
even after the same manner that they do at Amsterdam
for the arrival of the East India fleet at the Texel.
The said buccaneers are hugely cruel and tyrannical
towards their servants ; insomuch that commonly these
had rather be galley slaves in the Straits, or saw brazil-
wood in the rasp-houses of Holland, than serve such
barbarous masters.
The second sort of hunters hunt nothing else but wild
boars. The flesh of these they salt, and, being thus pre-
served from corruption, they sell it to the planters. These
hunters have also the same vicious customs of life, and
are as much addicted to all manner of debauchery as the
former. But their manner of hunting is quite different
from what is practised in Europe. For these buccaneers
have certain places, designed for hunting, where they live
for the space of three or four months, and sometimes,
though not often, a whole year. Such places are called
Desa Boulan ; and in these, with only the company of five
or six friends, who go along with them, they continue all
the time above-mentioned, in mutual friendship. The
first buccaneers we spoke of many times make an agree-
ment with certain planters to furnish them with meat all
the whole year at a certain price. The payment here-
of is often made with two or three hundred-weight of
tobacco, in the leaf But the planters commonly into the
bargain furnish them likewise with a servant, whom they
send to help. To the servant they afford a sufficient
quantity of all necessaries for that purpose, especially of
powder, bullets and small shot, to hunt with.
The planters began to cultivate and plant the Isle of
Tortuga in the year 1598. The first plantation was of
tobacco, which grew to admiration, being likewise of very
-good quality. Notwithstanding, by reason of the small
42 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
circumference of the island, they were then able to plant
but little ; especially there being many pieces of land in
that isle that were not fit to produce tobacco. They
attempted likewise to make sugar, but by reason of the
great expenses necessary to defray the charges, they
could not bring it to any effect. So that the greatest part
of the inhabitants, as we said before, betook themselves
to the exercise of hunting, and the remaining part to that
of piracy. At last the hunters, finding themselves scarce
able to subsist by their first profession, began likewise to
seek out lands that miorht be rendered fit for culture ; and
in these they also planted tobacco. The first land that
they chose for this purpose was Cul de Sac, whose terri-
tory extends towards the Southern part of the island.
This piece of ground they divided into several quarters,
which were called the Great Amea, Niep, Rochelois, the
Little Grave, the Great Grave, and the Augame. Here,
by little and litde, they increased so much, that at present
there are above two thousand planters in those fields.
At the beginning they endured very much hardship,
seeing that while they were busied about their husbandry,
they could not go out of the island to seek provisions.
This hardship was also increased by the necessity of
grubbing, cutting down, burning and digging, whereby to
extirpate the innumerable roots of shrubs and trees. For
when the French possessed themselves of that island, it
was wholly overgrown with woods extremely thick, these
being only inhabited by an extraordinary number of wild
boars. The method they took to clear the ground was
to divide themselves into small companies of two or three
persons together, and these companies to separate far
enough from each other, provided with a few hatchets
and some quantity of coarse provision. With these things
they used to go into the woods, and there to build huts
for their habitation, of only a few rafters and boughs of
trees. Their first endeavour was to root up the shrubs
and little trees ; afterwards to cut down the great ones.
BE A NS—P O TA TOES- CA SS A I A. 43-
These they gathered into heaps, with their branches, and
then set them on fire, excepting the roots, which, last of
all, they were constrained to grub and dig up after the
best manner they could. The first seed they committed
to the ground was beans. These in those countries both
ripen and dry away in the space of six weeks.
The second fruit, necessary to human life, which here
they tried, was potatoes. These do not come to perfec-
tion in less time than four or five months. On these they
most commonly make their breakfasts every morning.
They dress them no otherwise than by boiling them in a
kettle with fair water. Afterwards they cover them with
a cloth for the space of half an hour, by which manner of
dressing they become as soft as boiled chestnuts. Of the
said potatoes also they make a drink called Maiz. They
cut them into small slices, and cover them with hot water.
When they are well imbibed with water, they press them
through a coarse cloth, and the liquor that comes out,
although somewhat thick, they keep in vessels made for
that purpose. Here, after settling two or three days, it
begins to work ; and, having thrown off its lees, is fit
for drink. They use it with great delight, and although
the taste is somewhat sour, yet it is very pleasant, sub-
stantial and wholesome. The industry of this composi-
tion is owing to the Indians, as well as of many others,
which the ingenuity of those barbarians caused them to
invent both for the preservation and the pleasure of their
own life.
The third fruit the newly cultivated land afforded was
Mandioca, which the Indians by another name call
Cassava. This is a certain root which they plant, but
comes not to perfection till after eight or nine months,
sometimes a whole year. Being thoroughly ripe, it may
be left in the ground the space of eleven or twelve
months, without the least suspicion of corruption. But
this time being past, the said roots must be converted to
use some way or another, otherwise they conceive a total
44 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
putrefaction. Of these roots of Cassava, in those countries,
is made a sort of granulous flour or meal, extremely dry
and white, which supplies the want of common bread
made of wheat, whereof the fields are altogether barren
in that island. For this purpose they have in their houses
certain graters made either of copper or tin, where-
with they grate the afore-mentioned roots, just as they
do Mirick in Holland. By the by, let me tell you,
Mirick is a certain root of a very biting taste, not unlike
to strong mustard, wherewith they usually make sauces
for some sorts of fish. When they have grated as much
Cassava root as will serve turn, they put the gratings
into bags or sacks, made of coarse linen, and press out all
the moisture, until they remain very dry. Afterwards
they pass the gratings through a sieve, leaving them,
after sifting, very like sawdust. The meal being thus
prepared, they lay it upon planches of iron, which are
made very hot, upon which it is converted into a sort of
cakes, very thin. These cakes are afterwards placed
in the sun, upon the tops of houses, where they are
thoroughly and perfectly dried. And lest they should
lose any part of their meal, what did not pass the sieve is
made up into rolls, five or six inches thick. These are
placed one upon another, and left in this posture until
they begin to corrupt. Of this corrupted matter they
make a liquor, by them called Veycou, which they find
very excellent, and certainly is not inferior to our English
beer.
Bananas are likewise another sort of fruit, of which is
made another excellent liquor, which, both in strength
and pleasantness of taste, may be compared with the best
wines of Spain. But this liquor of Bananas, as it easily
causes drunkenness in such as use it immoderately, so it
likewise very frequently inflames the throat, and produces
dangerous diseases in that part. Guines agudos is also
another fruit whereof they make drink. But this sort of
liquor is not so strong as the preceding. Howbeit, both
TO BA CC O -P LA NTING. 4 5
the one and the other are frequently mingled with water,
thereby to quench thirst.
After they had cultivated these plantations, and filled
them with all sorts of roots and fruits necessary for human
life, they began to plant tobacco, for trading. The man-
ner of planting this frequent commodity is as follows.
They make certain beds of earth in the field, no larger
than twelve foot square. These beds they cover very
well with palmetto leaves, to the intent that the rays of
the sun may not touch the earth wherein tobacco is sowed.
They water them, likewise, when it does not rain, as we
do our gardens in Europe. When it is grown about the
bigness of young lettuce, they transplant it into straight
lines which they make in other spacious fields, setting
every plant at the distance of three foot from each other.
They observe, likewise, the fittest seasons of the year for
these things, which are commonly from January until the
end of March, these being the months wherein most rains
fall in those countries. Tobacco ought to be weeded
very carefully, seeing that the least root of any other herb,
coming near it, is sufficient to hinder its growth. When it
is grown to the height of one foot and a half or there-
abouts, they cut off the tops, thereby to hinder the stalks
and leaves from shooting too high upwards, to the intent
that the whole plant may receive greater strength from
the earth, which affords it all its vigour and taste. While
it ripens and comes to full perfection, they prepare in
their houses certain apartments of fifty or threescore foot
in length, and thirty or forty in breadth. These they fill
with branches of trees and rafters, and upon them lay the
green tobacco to dry. When it is thoroughly dried, they
strip off the leaf from the stalks, and cause it to be rolled
up by certain people who are employed in this work and
no other. To these they afford for their labour the tenth
part of what they make up into rolls. This property is
peculiar to tobacco, which therefore I shall not omit, that
if, while it is yet in the ground, the leaf be pulled oft" from
^6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the stalk, it sprouts again, no less than four times in one
year. Here I should be glad to give an account also of
the manner of making sugar, indigo, and gimbes ^ ; but
seeing these things are not planted in those parts where-
of we now speak, I have thought fit to pass them over in
silence.
The French planters of the Isle of Hispaniola have
always to this present time been subject to the Gover-
nors of Tortuga. Yet this obedience has not been ren-
dered without much reluctance and grudging on their
side. In the year 1664 the West India Company of
France laid the foundations of a colony in Tortuga, under
which colony the planters of Hispaniola were compre-
hended and named, as subjects thereto. This decree
disgusted the said planters very much, they taking it very
ill to be reputed subjects to a private Company of men
who had no authority to make them so ; especially being
in a country which did not belong to the dominions of
the King of France. Hereupon they resolved to work
no longer for the said Company. And this resolution of
theirs was sufficient to compel the Company to a total
dissolution of the Colony. But at last the Governor of
Tortuga, who was pretty well stocked with planters, con-
ceiving he could more easily force them than the West
India Company, found an invention whereby to draw
them to his obedience. He promised them he would put
off their several sorts of merchandise, and cause such
returns to be made, in lieu of their goods from France,
as they should best like. Withal, he dealt with the mer-
chants under hand, that all ships whatsoever should come
consigned to him, and no persons should entertain any
correspondence with those planters of Hispaniola ; think-
ing thereby to avoid many inconveniences, and compel
them through necessity and want of all things to obey.
By this means he not only obtained the obedience he
designed from those people, but also that some merchants
^ Probably gambier.
DUTCH TRADING WITH HISPANIOLA. 47
who had promised to deal with them and visit them now
and then, no longer did it.
Notwithstanding what has been said, in the year 1669
two ships from Holland happened to arrive at the Isle of
Hispaniola with all sorts of merchandise necessary in
those parts. With these ships presently the planters
aforesaid resolved to deal, and with the Dutch nation for
the future, thinking hereby to withdraw their obedience
from the Governor of Tortuga, and, by frustrating his
designs, revenge themselves of what they had endured
under his government. Not long after the arrival of the
Hollanders, the Governor of Tortuga came to visit the
plantation of Hispaniola, in a vessel very well armed.
But the planters not only forbade him to come ashore,
but with their guns also forced him to weigh anchor, and
retire faster than he came. Thus the Hollanders began
to trade with these people for all manner of things. But
such relations and friends as the Governor had in
Hispaniola used all the endeavours they were capable of
to impede the commerce. This being understood by the
planters, they sent them word that in case they laid not
aside their artifices, for the hindrance of the commerce
which was begun with the Hollanders, they should every
one assuredly be torn in pieces. Moreover, to oblige
farther the Hollanders and contemn the Governor and
his party, they gave greater ladings to the two ships than
they could desire, with many gifts and presents to the
officers and mariners, whereby they sent them very well
contented to their own country. The Hollanders came
again very punctually, according to their promise, and
found the planters under a greater indignation than be-
fore against the Governor ; either because of the great
satisfaction they had already conceived of this commerce
with the Dutch, or that by their means they hoped to
subsist by themselves without any further dependence
upon the French nation. However, it was suddenly
after, they set up another resolution something more
48 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Strange than the preceding. The tenour hereof was, that
they would go to the Island of Tortuga, and cut the
Governor in pieces. Hereupon they gathered together
as many canoes as they could, and set sail from His-
paniola, with design not only to kill the Governor, but
also to possess themselves of the whole island. This,
they thought they could more easily perform, by reason
of all necessary assistance which they believed would at
any time be sent them from Holland. By which means
they were already determined in their minds to erect
themselves into a new Commonwealth, independent of
the Crown of France. But no sooner had they begun
this great revolution of their litde State, when they
received news of a war declared between the two nations
in Europe. This wrought such a consternation in their
minds as caused them to give over that enterprize, and
retire without attempting anything.
In the meanwhile the Governor of Tortuga sent into
France for aid towards his own security, and the reduc-
tion of those people to their former obedience. This
was granted him, and two men-of-war were sent to
Tortuofa, with orders to be at his commands. Having
received such a considerable support, he sent them very
well equipped to the Isle of Hispaniola. Being arrived
at the place, they landed part of their forces, with a
design to force the people to the obedience of those
whom they much hated in their hearts. But the
planters, seeing the arrival of those two frigates, and not
being ignorant of their design, fled into the woods, aban-
doning their houses and many of their goods, which they
left behind. These were immediately rifled and burnt
by the French without any compassion, not sparing the
least cottage they found. Afterwards the Governor be-
gan to relent in his anger, and let them know by some
messengers that in case they luoidci rehirn to his obedience,
he would give ear to some accommodation between them.
Hereupon the planters, finding themselves destitute of all
PLANTERS AND THEIR SLAVES. 49^
human relief and that they could expect no help from any-
side, surrendered to the Governor upon Articles, which
were made and signed on both sides. But these were
not too strictly observed, for he commanded two of the
chief among them to be hanged. The residue were par-
doned, and, moreover, he gave them free leave to trade
with any nation zuhatsoever they found most fit for their
purpose. With the grant of this liberty they began to
recultivate their plantations, which gave them a huge
quantity of very good tobacco ; they selling yearly to the
sum of twenty or thirty thousand rolls.
In this country the planters have but very few slaves,
for want of which they themselves, and some servants
they have, are constrained to do all the drudgery. These
servants commonly oblige and bind themselves to their
masters for the space of three years. But their masters,
forsaking all conscience and justice, oftentimes traffic
with their bodies, as with horses at a fair ; selling them
to other masters, just as they sell negroes brought from
the coast of Guinea. Yea, to advance this trade, some
persons there are who go purposely into France (the same
happens in England and other countries), and travelling
through the cities, towns and villages, endeavour to
pick up young men or boys, whom they transport, by
making them great promises. These, being once allured
and conveyed into the islands I speak of, they force to
work like horses, the toil they impose upon them being
much harder than what they usually enjoin on the
negroes, their slaves. For these they endeavour in some
manner to preserve, as being their perpetual bond-men ;
but as for their white servants, they care not whether they
live or die, seeing that they are to continue no longer
than three years in their service. These miserable
kidnapped people are frequently subject to a certain dis-
ease, which in those parts is called coma, being a total
privation of all their senses. And this distemper is
judged to proceed from their hard usage, together with
VOL. I. E
50 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the change from their native climate into that which is
directly opposite. Oftentimes it happens that, among
these transported people, such are found as are persons
of good quality and tender education. And these, being
of a softer constitution, are more suddenly surprised with
the disease above-mentioned and with several others
belonging to those countries, than those who have harder
bodies and have been brought up to all manner of
fatigue. Besides the hard usage they endure in their
diet, apparel and repose, many times they beat them so
cruelly that some of them fall down dead under the
hands of their cruel masters. This I have often seen
with my own eyes, not without great grief and regret.
Of many instances of this nature I shall only give you
the following history, as being somewhat remarkable in
its circumstances.
It happened that a certain planter of those countries
exercised such cruelty towards one of his servants as
caused him to run away. Having absconded for some
days in the woods from the fury of his tyrannical master,
at last he was taken, and brought back to the dominion
of this wicked Pharaoh. No sooner had he got him into
his hands than he commanded him to be tied to a tree.
Here he gave him so many lashes upon his naked back
as made his body run an entire stream of gore blood,
embruing therewith the ground about the tree. After-
wards, to make the smart of his wounds the greater, he
anointed them with juice of lemon mingled with salt
and pepper, being ground small together. In this
miserable posture he left him tied to the tree for the
space of four and twenty hours. These being past, he
commenced his punishment again, lashing him as before,
with so much cruelty that the miserable wretch, under
this torture, gave up the ghost, with these dying words
in his mouth : / beseech the Almighty God, Creator of
heaven and earth, that he permit the wicked Spirit to
make thee feel as 7nany torments, before thy death, as
TORTURE OF A SLAVE. 51
thou hast caused me to feel before mine. A strange thing
and worthy all astonishment and admiration ! Scarce
three or four days were past after this horrible fact, when
the Almighty Judge, who had heard the clamours of that
tormented wretch, gave permission to the Author of
Wickedness suddenly to possess the body of that bar-
barous and inhuman Amirricide, who tormented him to
death. Insomuch that those tyrannical hands, where-
with he had punished to death his innocent servant, were
the tormentors of his own body. For with them, after a
miserable manner, he beat himself and lacerated his own
flesh, till he lost the very shape of man which nature had
given him ; not ceasing to howl and cry, without any
rest either by day or night. Thus he continued to do
until he died, in that condition of raving madness where-
in he surrendered his ghost to the same Spirit of Dark-
ness who had tormented his body. Many other examples
of this kind I could rehearse, but these, not belonging to
our present discourse, I shall therefore omit.
The planters that inhabit the Caribbee Islands are
rather worse and more cruel to their servants than the
preceding. In the Isle of Saint Christopher dwells one,
whose name is Bettesa, very well known among the
Dutch merchants, who has killed above a hundred of his
servants with blows and stripes. The English do the
same with their servants. And the mildest cruelty they
exercise towards them is that, when they have served six
years of their time (the years they are bound for among
the English being seven complete), they use them with
such cruel hardship as forces them to beg of their masters
to sell them to others, although it be to begin another
servitude of seven years, or at least three or four. I
have known many who after this manner served fifteen
and twenty years before they could obtain their freedom.
Another thing very rigorous among that nation is a law
in those islands, whereby if any man owes to another
above five and twenty shillings, English money, in case
52 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
he cannot pay, he is Hable to be sold for the space of six
or eight months. I shall not trouble the patience of my
reader any longer with relations of this kind, as belong-
ing to another subject, different from what I have pro-
posed to myself in this history. Whereupon I shall take
my beginning hence to describe the famous actions and
exploits of the greatest Pirates of my time, during my
residence in those parts. These I shall endeavour to'
relate without the least note of passion or partiality ; yea,
with that candour which is peculiar both to my mind and
style : withal assuring my reader I shall give him no
stories taken from others upon trust or hearsay, but only
those enterprizes to which I was myself an eye-witness.
CHAPTER VI.
Of tJie Origin of the most famous Pirates of the coasts of America.
A notable exploit of Pierre le Grand.
I HAVE told you in the preceding chapters of this book,
after what manner I was compelled to adventure my life
among the Pirates of America— to which sort of men I
think myself obliged to give this name, for no other
reason than that they are not maintained or upheld in
their actions by any Sovereign Prince. For this is cer-
tain, that the Kings of Spain have upon several occasions
sent, by their Ambassadors, to the Kings of France and
England, complaining of the molestations and troubles
those Pirates often caused itpon the coasts of America,
£ven in the calm of peace. To whose Ambassadors it has
always been answered : That stich men did not commit
those acts of hostility and piracy as subjects of their
Majesties ; and therefore his Catholic Majesty might pro-
ceed against them according as he should find fit. The
King of. France, besides what has been said, added to
this answer : That he had no fortress nor castle upon the
Isle of Hispaniola, neither did he receive one farthing of
tribute thence. Moreover, the King of England adjoined :
That he had never given any patents or commissions to
those of Jamaica, for committing any hostility against the
subjects of his Catholic Majesty. Neither did he only
give this bare answer, but also, out of his Royal desire to
pleasure the Court of Spain, recalled the Governor of
Jamaica, placing another in his room. All this was not
sufficient to prevent the Pirates of those parts from acting
what mischief they could to the contrary. But before I
54 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
commence the relation of their bold and insolent actions,
I shall say something of their origin and most common
exercises, as also of the chief among them, and their
manner of arming before they go out to sea.
The first Pirate that was known upon the Island of
Tortuga was named Pierre le Grand, or Peter the Great.
He was born at the town of Dieppe, in Normandy. The
action which rendered him famous was his taking of the
Vice-Admiral of the Spanish flota, near the Cape of
Tiburon, upon the Western side of the Island of His-
paniola. This bold exploit he performed alone with only
one boat, wherein he had eight and twenty persons, no
more, to help him. What gave occasion to this enter-
prize was that until that time the Spaniards had passed
and repassed with all security, and without finding the
least opposition, through the Bahama Channel. So that
Pierre le Grand set out to sea by the Caicos, where
he took this great ship with almost all facility imaginable.
The Spaniards they found aboard were all set on shore,
and the vessel presently sent into France. The manner
how this undaunted spirit attempted and took such an
huge ship, I shall give you out of the Journal of a true
and faithful author, in the same words as I read. The
Boat, he says, wherein Piei^re le Grand was with his
companions, had now been at sea a long time, without
finding anything, according to his intent of piracy, suit-
able to make a prey. And now their provisions beginning
to fail, they could keep themselves no longer upon the
ocean, or they must of necessity starve. Being almost
reduced to despair, they espied a great ship belonging to
the Spanish flota, which had separated from the rest.
This bulky vessel they i^esolved to set upon and take, or
die in the attempt. Hereupon they made sail towards
her, with design to vieiu her strength. And although
they jtidged the vessel to be far above their forces, yet the
covetousness of such a prey, and the extremity of fortune
they were reduced to, made them adventure on such an
ORIGIN OF BUCCANEERING. 55
&nterp7'ize. Bemg now come so near that they could not
escape without danger of being all killed, the Pirates
jointly made an oath to their captain, Pierre le Grand, to
behave themselves courageously in this attempt, without
the least fear or fainting. True it is, that these rovers
had conceived an opinion that they should find the ship
unprovided to fight, and that through this occasion they
should master her by degrees. It was in the dusk of the
evening, or soon after, when this great action was per-
formed. BiU before it was begun, they gave orders to the
surgeon of the boat to bore a hole in the sides theixof, to
the intent that, their own vessel sinking imder them, they
might be compelled to attack more vigorously, and en-
deavottr more hastily to run aboard the gi^eat ship. This
was performed accoi^dingly ; and without any other arms
than a pistol in one of their hands and a sword in the
other, they immediately climbed up the sides of the ship,
and ran altogether into the great cabin, ivhere they found
the Captain, with several of his companions, playing at
cards. Here they set a pistol to his breast, commanding
him to deliver up the ship to their obedience. The Spani-
ards seeing the Pirates aboard their ship, zvithottt scarce
having seen them at sea, cried out, " Jesus bless us ! Are
these devils, or what are they ? " In the meanwhile some
of them took possession of the gun-room, and seized the
arms and military affairs they found ther^e, killing as
many of the ship as made any opposition. By which
means the Spaniards presently were compelled to sur-
render. That very day the Captain of the ship had been
told by some of the Seamen that the boat, which was in
view cruizing, was a boat of Pij'ates. To whojn t/ie
Captain, slighting their advice, made answer: "What
then ? Must I be afraid of such a pitiful thing as that
is ? No, nor though she were a ship as big and as strong
as mine is." As soon as Piei^re le Grand had taken this
magnificent prize, he detained in his sei'vice as many of
the common seamen as he had need of and the rest he set
56 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
on shore. This being done, he immediately set sail for
France, carrying with him all the riches he found in that
huge vessel : here he continued ivithout ever returning to
the parts of America.
The planters and hunters of the Isle of Tortuga had
no sooner understood this happy event, and the rich
prize those Pirates had obtained, than they resolved to
follow their example. Hereupon many of them left their
ordinary exercises and common employments, and used
what means they could to get either boats or small
vessels, wherein to exercise piracy. But not being able
either to purchase or build them at Tortuga, at last
they resolved to set forth in their canoes and seek them
elsewhere. With these, therefore, they cruized at first
upon Cape d'Alvarez, whereabouts the Spaniards used
much to trade from one city to another in small boats.
In these they carry hides, tobacco and other commodi-
ties to the port of Havana, which is the metropolis of
that island, and to which the Spaniards from Europe
frequently resort.
Hereabouts it was that those Pirates at the beginning
took a great number of boats, laden with the aforesaid
commodities. These boats they used to carry to the
Isle of Tortuga, and there sell the whole purchase to the
ships that waited in the port for their return, or acciden-
tally happened to be there. With the gain of these prizes
they provided themselves with necessaries, wherewithal
to undertake other voyages. Some of these voyages
were made towards the coast of Campeche, and others
towards that of New Spain ; in both which places the
Spaniards at that time frequendy exercised much com-
merce and trade. Upon those coasts they commonly
found a great number of trading vessels and many times
ships of great burden. Two of the biggest of these
vessels, and two great ships which the Spaniards had
laden with plate in the port of Campeche to go to
Caracas, they took in less than a month's time, by cruiz-
PROGRESS OF BUCCANEERING. 57
ing to and fro. Being arrived at Tortuga with these
prizes, and the whole people of the island admiring their
progresses, especially that within the space of two years
the riches of the country were much increased, the
number also of Pirates augmented so fast, that from
these beginnings, within a little space of time, there were
to be numbered in that small island and port above
twenty ships of this sort of people. Hereupon the
Spaniards, not able to bear their robberies any longer,
were constrained to put forth to sea two great men-of-
war, both for the defence of their own coasts, and to
cruize upon the enemies.
CHAPTER VII.
After what manner the Pirates arm their vessels, and how they
regulate their voyages.
Before the Pirates go out to sea, they give notice to
every one that goes upon the voyage, of the day on
which they ought precisely to embark, intimating also to
them their obligation of bringing each man in particular
so many pounds of powder and bullets as they think
necessary for that expedition. Being all come on board,
they join together in council, concerning what place they
ought first to go to wherein to get provisions — especially
of flesh, seeing they scarce eat anything else. And of
this the most common sort among them is pork. The
next food is tortoises, which they are accustomed to salt
a little. Sometimes they resolve to rob such or such
hog-yards, wherein the Spaniards often have a thousand
heads of swine together. They come to these places in
the dark of the night, and having beset the keeper's
lodge, they force him to rise, and give them as many
heads as they desire, threatening withal to kill him in
case he disobeys their commands or makes any noise.
Yea, these menaces are oftentimes put in execution,
without giving any quarter to the miserable swine-
keepers, or any other person that endeavours to hinder
their robberies.
Having got provisions of flesh sufficient for their
voyage, they return to their ship. Here their allowance,
twice a day to every one, is as much as he can eat, with-
out either weight or measure. Neither does the steward
of the vessel give any greater proportion of flesh, or
anything else to the captain than to the meanest mariner.
58
DIVISION OF PROFITS AMONG BUCCANEERS. 59
The ship being well victualled, they call another council,
to deliberate towards what place they shall go, to seek
their desperate fortunes. In this council, likewise, they
agree upon certain Articles, which are put in writing, by
way of bond or obligation, which every one is bound to
observe, and all of them, or the chief, set their hands to
it. Herein they specify, and set down very distinctly,
what sums of money each particular person ought to
have for that voyage, the fund of all the payments
being the common stock of what is gotten by the whole
expedition ; for otherwise it is the same law, among
these people, as with other Pirates, No prey, no pay. In
the first place, therefore, they mention how much the
Captain ought to have for his ship. Next the salary of
the carpenter, or shipwright, who careened, mended and
rigged the vessel. This commonly amounts to one
hundred or an hundred and fifty pieces of eight,^ being,
according to the agreement, more or less. Afterwards
for provisions and victualling they draw out of the same
common stock about two hundred pieces of eight. Also
a competent salary for the surgeon and his chest of
medicaments, which usually is rated at two hundred or
two hundred and fifty pieces of eight. Lastly they
stipulate in writing what recompense or reward each one
ought to have, that is either wounded or maimed in his
body, suffering the loss of any limb, by that voyage.
Thus they order for the loss of a right arm six hundred
pieces of eight, or six slaves ; for the loss of a left arm
five hundred pieces of eight, or five slaves ; for a right
leg five hundred pieces of eight, or five slaves ; for the
left leg four hundred pieces of eight, or four slaves ;
for an eye one hundred pieces of eight, or one slave ;
for a finger of the hand the same reward as for the eye.
All which sums of money, as I have said before, are
taken out of the capital sum or common stock of what
is got by their piracy. For a very exact and equal
^ A piece of eight is equivalent to about five shillings.
«o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
dividend is made of the remainder among them all.
Yet herein they have also regard to qualities and places.
Thus the Captain, or chief Commander, is allotted five
or six portions to what the ordinary seamen have ; the
Master's Mate only two; and other Officers proportionate
to their employment. After whom they draw equal parts
from the highest even to the lowest mariner, the boys
not being omitted. For even these draw half a share, by
reason that, when they happen to take a better vessel
than their own, it is the duty of the boys to set fire to
the ship or boat wherein they are, and then retire to the
prize which they have taken.
They observe among themselves very good orders.
For in the prizes they take, it is severely prohibited to
every one to usurp anything in particular to themselves.
Hence all they take is equally divided, according to what
has been said before. Yea, they make a solemn oath to
each other not to abscond, or conceal the least thing
they find amongst the prey. If afterwards any one is
found unfaithful, who has contravened the said oath,
immediately he is separated and turned out of the society.
Among themselves they are very civil and charitable to
each other. Insomuch that if any wants what another
has, with great liberality they give it one to another.
As soon as these Pirates have taken any prize of ship or
boat, the first thing they endeavour is to set on shore the
prisoners, detaining only some few for their own help
and service, to whom also they give their liberty after
the space of two or three years. They put in very fre-
quendy for refreshment at one island or another ; but
more especially into those which lie on the Southern side
of the Isle of Cuba. Here they careen their vessels, and
in the meanwhile some of them go to hunt, others to
cruize upon the seas in canoes, seeking their fortune.
Many times they take the poor fishermen of tortoises,
and, carrying them to their habitations, they make them
work so long as the Pirates are pleased.
TORTOISES. 6p
In the several parts of America are found four distinct
species of tortoises. The first hereof are so great that
every one reaches the weight of two or three thousand
pounds. The scales of the species are so soft that
they may easily be cut with a knife. Yet these tortoises
are not good to be eaten. The second species is of
an indifferent bigness, and are green in colour. The
scales of these are harder than the first, and this sort is
of a very pleasant taste. The third is very little different
in size and bigness from the second, unless that it has
the head something bigger. This third species is called
by the French cavana, and is not good for food. The
fourth is named caret, being very like the tortoises we
have in Europe. This sort keeps most commonly among
the rocks, whence they crawl out to seek their food,
which is for the greatest part nothing but apples of the
sea. These other species above-mentioned feed upon
grass, which grows in the water upon the banks of sand.
These banks or shelves, for their pleasant green, re-
semble the delightful meadows of the United Provinces.
Their eggs are almost like those of the crocodile, but
without any shell, being only covered with a thin mem-
brane or film. They are found in such prodigious quan-
tities along the sandy shores of those countries, that,
were they not frequently destroyed by birds, the sea
would infinitely abound with tortoises.
These creatures have certain customary places whither
they repair every year to lay their eggs. The chief of
these places are the three islands called Caymanes, situ-
ated in the latitude of twenty degrees and fifteen minutes
North, being at the distance of five and forty leagues
from the Isle of Cuba, on the Northern side thereof
It is a thing much deserving consideration how the
tortoises can find out these islands. For the greatest
part of them come from the Gulf of Honduras, distant
thence the whole space of one hundred and fifty leagues.
Certain it is, that many times the ships, having lost their
^2 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
latitude through the darkness of the weather, have steered
their course only by the noise of the tortoises swimming
that way, and have arrived at those isles. When their
season of hatching is past, they retire towards the Island
of Cuba, where are many good places that afford them
food. But while they are at the Islands of Caymanes,
they eat very little or nothing. When they have been
about the space of one month in the seas of Cuba, and
are grown fat, the Spaniards go out to fish for them,
they being then to be taken in such abundance that they
provide with them sufficiently their cities, towns and
villages. Their manner of taking them is by making
with a great nail a certain kind of dart. This they fix
at the end of a long stick or pole, with which they wound
the tortoises, as with a dagger, whensoever they appear
above water to breathe fresh air.
The inhabitants of New Spain and Campeche lade
their principal sorts of merchandises in ships of great
bulk ; and with these they exercise their commerce to
and fro. The vessels from Campeche in winter time
set out towards Caracas, Trinity Isles and Margarita.
For in summer the winds are contrary, though very
favourable to return to Campeche, as they are accustomed
to do at the beginning of that season. The Pirates are
not ignorant of these times, being very dextrous in
searching out all places and circumstances most suitable
to their designs. Hence in the places and seasons afore-
mentioned, they cruize upon the said ships for some
while. But in case they can perform nothing, and that
fortune does not favour them with some prize or other,
after holding a council thereupon, they commonly enter-
prize things very desperate. Of these their resolutions
I shall give you one instance very remarkable. One
certain Pirate, whose name was Pierre Fran9ois, or Peter
Francis, happened to be a long time at sea with his boat
and six and twenty persons, waiting for the ships that
were to return from Maracaibo towards Campeche. Not
ATTACK ON SPANISH PEARL-FISHERS. 63
being able to find anything, nor get any prey, at last he
resolved to direct his course to Rancherias, which is near
the river called De la Plata, in the latitude of twelve
degrees and a half North, In this place lies a rich
bank of pearl, to the fishery whereof they yearly send
from Cartagena a fleet of a dozen vessels, with a man-of-
war for their defence. Every vessel has at least a couple
of negroes in it, who are very dextrous in diving, even
to the depth of six fathoms within the sea, whereabouts
they find good -store of pearls. Upon this fleet of
vessels, though small, called the Pearl Fleet, Pierre
Francois resolved to adventure, rather than go home
with empty hands. They rode at anchor, at that time,
at the mouth of the river De la Hacha, the man-of-war
being scarce half a league distant from the small ships,
and the wind very calm. Having espied them in this
posture, he presently pulled down his sails and rowed
along the coast, dissembling to be a Spanish vessel that
came from Maracaibo, and only passed that way. But
no sooner was he come to the Pearl Bank, than suddenly
he assaulted the Vice-Admiral of the said fleet, mounted
with eight guns and threescore men well armed, com-
manding them to surrender. But the Spaniards, running
to their arms, did what they could to defend them-
selves, fighting for some while ; till at last they were
constrained to submit to the Pirate. Being thus pos-
sessed of the Vice-Admiral, he resolved next to adven-
ture with some other stratagem upon the man-of-war,
thinking thereby to get strength sufficient to master the
rest of the fleet. With this intent he presently sank his
own boat in the river, and, putting forth the Spanish
colours, weighed anchor, with a little wind, which then
began to stir, having with promises and menaces com-
pelled most of the Spaniards to assist him in his design.
But no sooner did the man-of-war perceive one of his
fleet to set sail than he did so too, fearing lest the
mariners should have any design to run away with the
64 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
vessel and riches they had on board. This caused the
Pirates immediately to give over that dangerous enter-
prize, thinking themselves unable to encounter force to
force with the said man-of-war that now came against
them. Hereupon they attempted to get out of the
river and gain the open seas with the riches they had
taken, by making as much sail as possibly the vessel
would bear. This being perceived by the man-of-war,
he presently gave them chase. But the Pirates, having
laid on too much sail, and a gust of wind suddenly arising,
had their main-mast blown down by the board, which
disabled them from prosecuting their escape.
This unhappy event much encouraged those that were
in the man-of-war, they advancing and gaining upon the
Pirates every moment ; by which means at last they were
overtaken. But these notwithstanding, finding them-
selves still with two and twenty persons sound, the rest
being either killed or wounded, resolved to defend them-
selves so long as it were possible. This they performed
very courageously for some while, until being thereunto
forced by the man-of-war, they were compelled to sur-
render. Yet this was not done without Articles, which
the Spaniards were glad to allow them, as follows : That
they should not use them as slaves, forcing them to carry
or bring stones, or employing them in other labours, for
three or four years, as they commonly employ their
negroes. But that they should set them on shore, upon
free land, without doing them any harm in their bodies.
Upon these Articles they delivered themselves, with all
that they had taken, which was worth only in pearls to
the value of above one hundred thousand pieces of eight,
besides the vessel, provisions, goods and other things.
All which, being put together, would have made to this
Pirate one of the greatest prizes he could desire ; which
he would certainly have obtained, had it not been for the
loss of his main-mast, as was said before.
Another bold attempt, not unlike that which I have
rtmmmêmm
t-v-Y'rp"'^7T
l,lMllll!UUl|)l»IINillJ»l4>MI)4m'lgpili'MIW.UMI(l!il|M'^ll^^
BART o t o M EW PORT UGUXS^ \ J?^
BARTHOLOMEW PORTUGUES. 65
related, nor less remarkable, I shall also give you at
present. A certain Pirate, born in Portugal, and from
the name of his country called Bartholomew Portugues,
was cruizing in his boat from Jamaica (wherein he had
only thirty men and four small guns) upon the Cape de
Corrientes, in the Island of Cuba. In this place he met
with a great ship, that came from Maracaibo and Carte-
gena, bound for the Havana, well provided with twenty
great guns and threescore and ten men, between pas-
sengers and mariners. This ship he presently assaulted,
but found as strongly defended by them that were on
board. The Pirate escaped the first encounter, resolving
to attack her more vigorously than before, seeing he had
sustained no great damage hitherto. This resolution
he boldly performed, renewing his assaults so often
that after a long and dangerous fight he became master
of the great vessel. The Portuguese lost only ten men
and had four wounded, so that he had still remain-
ing twenty fighting men, whereas the Spaniards had
double that number. Having possessed themselves of
such a ship, and the wind being contrary to return to
Jamaica, they resolved to steer their course towards
the Cape of Saint Antony (which lies on the Western
side of the Isle of Cuba), there to repair themselves
and take in fresh water, of which they had great neces-
sity at that time.
Being now very near the cape above-mentioned, they
unexpectedly met with three great ships that were coming
from New Spain and bound for the Havana. By these,
as not being able to escape, they were easily retaken, both
ship and Pirates. Thus they were all made prisoners,
through the sudden change of fortune, and found them-
selves poor, oppressed, and stripped of all the riches they
had pillaged so litde before. The cargo of this ship
consisted of one hundred and twenty thousand weight
of cacao-nuts, the chief ingredient of that rich liquor
called chocolate, and threescore and ten thousand pieces
VOL. I. F
66 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of eight. Two days after this misfortune, there happened
to arise a huge and dangerous tempest, which largely
separated the ships from one another. The great vessel
wherein the Pirates were, arrived at Campeche, where
many considerable merchants came to salute and welcome
the Captain thereof These presently knew the Portu-
guese Pirate, as being him who had committed innumer-
able excessive insolences upon those coasts, not only
infinite murders and robberies, but also lamentable
incendiimis {i.e., fires), which the people of Campeche
still preserved very fresh in their memory.
Hereupon, the next day after their arrival, the magis-
trates of the city sent several of their officers to demand
and take into custody the criminal prisoners from on
board the ship, with intent to punish them according to
their deserts. Yet fearing lest the Captain of those
Pirates should escape out of their hands on shore (as he
had formerly done, being once their prisoner in the city
before), they judged it more convenient to leave him
safely guarded on board the ship for the present. In
the meanwhile they caused a gibbet to be erected, where-
upon to hang him the very next day, without any other
form of process than to lead him from the ship to the
place of punishment. The rumour of this future tragedy
was presently brought to Bartholomew Portugues' ears,
whereby he sought all the means he could to escape that
night. With this design he took two earthen jars,
wherein the Spaniards usually carry wine from Spain
to the West Indies, and stopped them very well, intend-
ing to use them for swimming, as those who are unskilful
in that art do calabashes, a sort of pumpkins, in Spain,
and in other places empty bladders. Having made this
necessary preparation, he waited for the night, when all
should be asleep, even the sentry that guarded him.
But seeing he could not escape his vigilancy, he secredy
secured a knife, and with the same gave him such a
mortal stab as suddenly deprived him of life and the
ESCAPE OF BARTHOLOMEW PORTUGUES. 67
possibility of making any noise. At that instant he com-
mitted himself to sea, with those two earthen jars before-
mentioned, and by their help and support, though never
having learned to swim, he reached the shore. Being
arrived upon land, without any delay he took refuge in
the woods, where he hid himself for three days, without
daring to appear nor eating any other food than wild herbs.
Those of the city failecPnot the next day to make a
diligent search for him in the woods, where they con-
cluded him to be. This strict enquiry Portugues had
the convenience to espy from the hollow of a tree, where-
in he lay absconded. Hence perceiving them to return
without finding what they sought for, he adventured to
sally forth towards the coasts called Del Golfo Triste, forty
leagues distant from the city of Campeche. Hither he
arrived within a fortnight after his escape from the ship.
In which space of time, as also afterwards, he endured
extreme hunger, thirst, and fears of falling again into the
hands of the Spaniards. For during all this journey he
had no other provision with him than a small calabash,
with a little water ; neither did he eat anything else than
a few shell-fish, which he found among the rocks near
the sea-shore. Besides that, he was compelled to pass
some rivers, not knowing well to swim. Being in this
distress, he found an old board, which the waves had
thrown upon the shore, wherein stuck a few great nails.
These he took, and with no small labour whetted aofainst
a stone, until he had made them capable of cutting like
knives, though very imperfectly. With these, and no
better instruments, he cut down some branches of trees,
which with twigs and osiers he joined together, and
made as well as he could a boat, or rather a raft,
wherewith he rafted over the rivers. Thus he arrived
finally at the Cape of Golfo Triste, as was said before,
where he happened to find a certain vessel of Pirates,
who were great comrades of his own, and were -lately
come from Jamaica.
68 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
To these Pirates he instantly related all his adversities
and misfortunes, and withal demanded of them that they
would fit him with a boat and twenty men. With which
company alone he promised to return to Campeche and
assault the ship that was in the river, which he had been
taken by and escaped from fourteen days before. They
readily granted his request, and equipped him a boat with
the said number of men. With this small company he
set forth towards the execution of his design, which he
bravely performed eight days after he separated from his
comrades at the Cape of Golfo Triste. For being arrived
at the river of Campeche, with undaunted courage and
without any rumour of noise he assaulted the ship before-
mentioned. Those that were on board were persuaded
this was a boat from land, that came to bring contraband
goods ; and hereupon were not in any posture of defence.
Thus the Pirates, laying hold on this occasion, assaulted
them without any fear of ill success, and in short space of
time compelled the Spaniards to surrender.
Being now masters of the ship, they immediately
weighed anchor and set sail, determining to fly from the
port, lest they should be pursued by other vessels.
This they did with extremity of joy, seeing themselves
possessors of such a brave ship. Especially Portugues,
their captain, who now by a second turn of Fortune's
wheel was become rich and powerful again, who had
been so lately in that same vessel a poor miserable
prisoner and condemned to the gallows. With this great
booty he designed in his mind greater things ; which he
might well hope to obtain, seeing he had found in the
vessel great quantity of rich merchandise still remaining
on board, although the plate had been transported into
the city. Thus he continued his voyage towards Jamaica
for some days. But coming near the Isle of Pinos, on
the South side of the Island of Cuba, Fortune suddenly
turned her back upon him once more, never to show him
her countenance again. For a horrible storm arising at
ROCHE BRASILIANO. 69
sea occasioned the ship to split against the rocks or
banks called Jardines. Insomuch that the vessel was
totally lost, and Portugues, with his companions, escaped
in a canoe. After this manner he arrived at Jamaica,
where he remained no long time, being only there till he
could prepare himself to seek his fortune anew, which
from that time proved always adverse to him.
Nothing less rare and admirable than the preceding
are the actions of another Pirate, who at present lives
at Jamaica, and who has on sundry occasions enterprized
and achieved things very strange. The place of his
birth was the city of Groningen, in the United Provinces;
but his own proper name is not known : the Pirates,
his companions, having only given him that of Roche
Brasiliano by reason of his long residence in the country
of Brazil, whence he was forced to flee, when the
Portuguese retook those countries from the West India
Company of Amsterdam, several nations then inhabiting
at Brazil (as English, French, Dutch and others) being
constrained to seek new fortunes.
This fellow at that conjuncture of time retired to
Jamaica, where being at a stand how to get a liveli-
hood, he entered the Society of Pirates. Under these
he served in quality of a private mariner for some
while, in which degree he behaved himself so well that
he was both beloved and respected by all, as one that
deserved to be their Commander for the future. One
day certain mariners happened to engage in a dissension
with their Captain ; the effect whereof was that they left
the boat. Brasiliano followed the rest, and by these was
chosen for their conductor and leader, who also fitted him
out a boat or small vessel, wherein he received the title
of Captain.
Few days were past from his being chosen Captain,
when he took a great ship that was coming from New
Spain, on board of which he found great quantity of
plate, and both one and the other he carried to Jamaica.
70 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
This action gave him renown, and caused him to be
both esteemed and feared, every one apprehending him
much abroad. Howbeit, in his domestic and private
affairs he had no good behaviour nor government over
himself ; for in these he would oftentimes shew himself
either brutish or foolish. Many times being in drink, he
would run up and down the streets, beating or wounding;
whom he met, no person daring to oppose him or make
any resistance.
To the Spaniards he always showed himself very bar-
barous and cruel, only out of an inveterate hatred he had
against that nation. Of these he commanded several to
be roasted alive upon wooden spits, for no other crime
than that they would not shew him the places or hog-
yards, where he might steal swnne. After many of these
cruelties, it happened as he was cruizing upon the coasts
of Campeche, that a dismal tempest suddenly surprised
him. This proved to be so violent that at last his ship
was wrecked upon the coasts, the mariners only escaping
with their muskets and some few bullets and powder,
which were the only things they could save of all that
was in the vessel. The place where the ship w^as lost
was precisely between Campeche and the Golfo Triste,
Here they got on shore in a canoe, and marching along
the coast with all the speed they could, they directed
their course towards Golfo Triste, as being a place where
the Pirates commonly used to repair and refresh them-
selves. Being upon this journey and all very hungry
and thirsty, as is usual in desert places, they were pur-
sued by some Spaniards, being a whole troop of a
hundred horsemen. Brasiliano no sooner perceived this
imminent danger than he animated his companions, tell-
ing them : " We had better, fellozu soldiers, choose to die
under our arms fighting, as becomes men of courage^
than snrreiider to the Spania7'ds, zuho, in case they over-
come us, zuill take away ottr lives luith cruel torments T
The Pirates were no more than thirty in number, who^
BRASILIANO ROUTS THE SPANIARDS. 71
notwithstanding, seeing their brave Commander oppose
himself with courage to the enemy, resolved to do the
like. Hereupon they faced the troop of Spaniards, and
discharged their muskets against them with such dex-
terity, that they killed one horseman with almost every
shot. The fight continued for the space of an hour, till
at last the Spaniards were put to flight by the Pirates.
They stripped the dead, and took from them what they
thought most convenient for their use. But such as
were not already dead, they helped to quit the miseries
of life with the ends of their muskets.
Having vanquished the enemy, they all mounted on
several horses they found in the field, and continued the
journey aforementioned, Brasiliano having lost but two
of his companions in this bloody fight, and had two others
wounded. As they prosecuted their way, before they
came to the port, they espied a boat from Campeche,
well manned, that rode at anchor, protecting a small
number of canoes that were lading wood. Hereupon
they sent a detachment of six of their men to watch
them ; and these the next morning possessed them-
selves of the canoes. Having given notice to their
companions, they went all on board, and with no great
difficulty took also the boat, or little man-of-war, their
convoy. Thus having rendered themselves masters of
the whole fleet, they wanted only provisions, which they
found but very small aboard those vessels. But this
defect was supplied by the horses, which they instantly
killed and salted with salt which by good fortune the
wood-cutters had brought with them. Upon which vic-
tuals they made shift to keep themselves, until such time
as they could procure better.
These very same Pirates, I mean Brasiliano and his
companions, took also another ship that was going from
New Spain to Maracaibo, laden with divers sorts of
merchandise, and a very considerable number of pieces
of eight, which were designed to buy cacao-nuts for their
72 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
lading home. All these prizes they carried into Jamaica,
where they safely arrived, and, according to their custom,
wasted in a few days in taverns all they had gained, by
giving themselves to all manner of debauchery. Such
of these Pirates are found who will spend two or three
thousand pieces of eight in one night, not leaving
themselves peradventure a good shirt to wear on their
backs in the morning. J\Iy own master would buy,
on like occasions, a whole pipe of wine, and, placing it
in the street, would force every one that passed by to
drink with him ; threatening also to pistol them, in case
they would not do it. At other times he would do the
same with barrels of ale or beer. And, very often, with
both his hands, he would throw these liquors about the
streets, and wet the clothes of such as walked by, with-
out regarding whether he spoiled their apparel or not,
were they men or women.
Among themselves, and to each other, these Pirates
are extremely liberal and free. If any one of them has
lost all his goods, which often happens in thei^^-manner
of life, they freely give him, and make him partaker of
what they have. In taverns and ale-houses they always
have great credit ; but in such houses at Jamaica they
ought not to run very deep in debt, seeing the inhabi-
tants of that island easily sell one another for debt.
Thus it happened to my patron, or master, to be sold
for a debt of a tavern, wherein he had spent the greatest
part of his money. This man had, within the space of
three months before, three thousand pieces of eight in
ready cash, all which he wasted in that short space of
time, and became as poor as I have told you.
But now to return to our discourse, I must let my
reader know that Brasiliano, after having spent all that
he had robbed, was constrained to go to sea again, to
seek his fortune once more. Thus he set forth towards
the coast of Campeche, his common place of rendezvous.
Fifteen days after his arrival there, he put himself into
BRASILIANO'S ESCAPE FROM PRISON. 73
a canoe, with intent to espy the port of that city, and see
if he could rob any Spanish vessel. But his fortune
was so bad, that both he and all his men were taken
prisoners, and carried into the presence of the Governor.
This man immediately cast them into a dungeon, with
full intention to hang them every person. And doubdess
he had performed his intent, were it not for a stratagem
that Brasiliano used, which proved sufficient to save their
lives. He wrote therefore a letter to the Governor,
making him believe it came from other Pirates that were
abroad at sea, and withal telling him : He should have a
care how he used those persons he had in his aistody. For
in case he caused thein any harm, they did swear nnto him
they would never give quarter to any person of the Spanish
nation that should fall into their hands.
Because these Pirates had been many times at Cam-
peche, and in many other towns and villages of the
West Indies belonging to the Spanish dominions, the
Governor began to fear what mischief they might cause
by means of their companions abroad, in case he should
punish them. Hereupon he released them out of prison,
exacting only an oath of them beforehand, that they
would leave their exercise of piracy for ever. And withal
he sent them as common mariners, or passengers in the
galleons to Spain. They got in this voyage altogether
five hundred pieces of eight, whereby they tarried not
long there after their arrival. But providing themselves
with some few necessaries, they all returned to Jamaica
within a litde while. Whence they set forth again to
sea, committing greater robberies and cruelties than ever
they had done before ; but more especially abusing the
poor Spaniards that happened to fall into their hands,
with all sorts of cruelty imaginable.
The Spaniards perceiving they could gain nothing
upon this sort of people, nor diminish their number,
which rather increased daily, resolved to diminish the
jiumber of their ships wherein they exercised trading to
74 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
and fro. But neither was this resolution of any effect, or
did them any good service. For the Pirates, finding not
so many ships at sea as before, began to gather into
greater companies, and land upon the Spanish dominions,
ruining whole cities, towns and villages ; and withal
pillaging, burning and carrying away as much as they
could find possible.
The first Pirate who gave a beginning to these in-
vasions by land, was named Lewis Scot, who sacked and
pillaged the city of Campeche. He almost ruined the
town, robbing and destroying all he could ; and, after he
had put it to the ransom of an excessive sum of money,
he left it. After Scot came another named Mansvelt,
who enterprized to set footing in Granada, and penetrate
with his piracies even to the South Sea. Both which
things he effected, till at last, for want of provision,
he was constrained to go back. He assaulted the Isle
of Saint Catharine, which was the first land he took, and
upon it some few prisoners. These showed him the way
towards Cartagena, which is a principal city situate in
the kingdom of New Granada. But the bold attempts
and actions of John Davis, born at Jamaica, ought not
to be forgotten in this history, as being some of the most
remarkable thereof, especially his rare prudence and
valour, wherewith he behaved himself in the aforemen-
tioned kingdom of Granada. This Pirate having cruized
a long time in the Gulf of Pocatauro upon the ships that
were expected from Cartagena bound for Nicaragua, and
not being able to meet any of the said ships, resolved at
last to land in Nicaragua, leaving his ship concealed
about the coast.
This design he presendy put in execution. P'or taking
fourscore men, out of fourscore and ten which he had in
all (the rest being left to keep the ship), he divided them
equally into three canoes. His intent was to rob the
churches, and rifle the houses of the chief citizens of the
aforesaid town of Nicaragua. Thus, in the obscurity of
JOHN DAVIS' ATTACK ON NICARAGUA. 75.
the night, they mounted the river which leads to that
city, rowing with oars in their canoes. By day they
concealed themselves and boats under the branches of
trees that were upon the banks. These grow very thick
and intricate along the sides of the rivers in those coun-
tries, as also along the sea-coast. Under which, likewise,
those who remained behind absconded from their vessel,
lest they should be seen either by fishermen or Indians.
After this manner they arrived at the city the third night,
where the sentry, who kept the post of the river, thought
them to be fishermen that had been fishing in the lake.
And as the greatest part of the Pirates are skilful in the
Spanish tongue, so he never doubted thereof as soon as
he heard them speak. They had in their company an
Indian, who had run away from his master because he
would make him a slave after having served him a long
time. This Indian went first on shore, and, rushing at
the sentry, he instantly killed him. Being animated
with this success, they entered into the city, and went
directly to three or four houses of the chief citizens,
where they knocked with dissimulation. These believing
them to be friends opened the doors, and the Pirates
suddenly possessing themselves of the houses, robbed all
the money and plate they could find. Neither did they
spare the churches and most sacred things, all which
were pillaged and profaned without any respect or vene-
ration.
In the meanwhile great cries and lamentation were
heard about the town, of some who had escaped their
hands ; by which means the whole city was brought into
an uproar and alarm. Hence the whole number of
citizens rallied together, intending to put themselves in
defence. This being perceived by the Pirates, they
instantly put themselves to flight, carrying with them
all that they had robbed, and likewise some prisoners.
These they led away, to the intent that, if any of them
should happen to be taken by the Spaniards, they might
76 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
make use of them for ransom. Thus they got to their
ship, and with all speed imaginable put out to sea, forcing
the prisoners, before they would let them go, to procure
them as much flesh as they thought necessary for their
voyage to Jamaica. But no sooner had they weighed
anchor, than they saw on shore a troop of about five
hundred Spaniards, all being very well armed, at the
sea-side. Against these they let fly several guns, where-
with they forced them to quit the sands and retire to-
wards home, with no small regret to see those Pirates
carry away so much plate of their churches and houses,
though distant at least forty leagues from the sea.
These Pirates robbed on this occasion above four
thousand pieces of eight in ready money, besides great
quantities of plate uncoined and many jewels. All which
Avas computed to be worth the sum of fifty thousand
pieces of eight, or more. With this great booty they
arrived at Jamaica, soon after the exploit. But as this
sort of people are never masters of their money but a
very litde while, so were they soon constrained to seek
more, by the same means they had used before. This
adventure caused Captain John Davis, presendy after
his return, to be chosen Admiral of seven or eight boats
of Pirates ; he being now esteemed by common consent
an able conductor for such enterprizes as these were.
He began the exercise of this new command by directing
his fleet towards the coasts of the North of Cuba, there
to wait for the fleet which was to pass from New Spain.
But, not being able to find anything by this design, they
determined to go towards the coasts of Florida. Being
arrived there, they landed part of their men, and sacked
a small city, named Saint Augustine of Florida, the
casde of which place had a garrison of two hundred men,
which, notwithstanding, could not prevent the pillage of
the city, they effecting it without receiving the least
damage from either soldiers or townsmen.
Hitherto we have spoken in the first part of this book
END OF THE FIRST PART jy
of the constitution of the Islands of Hispaniola and
Tortuga, their pecuHarities and inhabitants, as also of the
fruits to be found in those countries. In the second part
of this work we shall bend our discourse to describe the
actions of two of the most famous Pirates, who committed
many horrible crimes and inhuman cruelties against the
Spanish nation.
The End of the First Part.
PART II.
CHAPTER I.
Origin of Francis LOUonais, and beginning of his robberies.
Francis L'Ollonais was a native of that territory in
France which is called Les Sables d'Ollone, or the
Sands of Ollone. In his youth he was transported to
the Caribbee Islands, in quality of a servant or slave,
according to the custom of France and other countries ;
of which we have already spoken in the first part of
this book. Being out of his time, when he had obtained
his freedom, he came to the Isle of Hispaniola. Here
he placed himself for some while among the hunters,
before he began his robberies against the Spaniards ;
whereof I shall make mention at present, until his unfor-
tunate death.
At first he made two or three voyages in quality of a
common mariner, wherein he behaved himself so coura-
geously as to deserve the favour and esteem of the
Governor of Tortuga, who was then Monsieur de la
Place. Insomuch that this gendeman gave him a ship,
and made him captain thereof, to the intent he might
seek his fortune. This Dame shewed herself very
favourable to him at the beginning, for in a short
while he pillaged great riches. But, withal, his cruelties
against the Spaniards were such that the very fame of
them made him known through the whole Indies. P^or
which reason the Spaniards, in his time, whensoever they
8o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
were attacked by sea, would choose rather to die or sink
fighting than surrender, knowing they should have no
mercy nor quarter at his hands. But as Fortune is sel-
dom constant, so after some time she turned her back
upon him. The beginning of whose disasters was, that in
a huge storm he lost his ship upon the coasts of Cam-
peche. The men were all saved ; but coming upon dry
land, the Spaniards pursued them, and killed the greatest
part of them, wounding also L'Ollonais, their captain.
Not knowing how to escape, he thought to save his life
by a stratagem. Hereupon he took several handfuls of
sand and mingled them with the blood of his own
wounds, with which he besmeared his face and other
parts of his body. Then hiding himself dextrously
among the dead, he continued there till the Spaniards
had quitted the field.
After they were gone, he retired into the woods, and
bound up his wounds as well as he could. These being
by the help of Nature pretty well healed, he took his-
way to the city of Campeche, having perfecdy disguised
himself in Spanish habit. Here he spoke with certain
slaves, to whom he promised their liberty, in case they
would obey him and trust in his conduct. They accepted
his promises, and stealing one night a canoe from one of
their masters, they went to sea with the Pirate. The
Spaniards in the meanwhile had made prisoner several
of his companions, whom they kept in close dungeons in
the city, while L'Ollonais went about the town and saw all
that passed. These were often asked by the Spaniards,
''What is become of your Captain?'' to whom they
constandy answered, " He is deady With which news
the Spaniards were hugely gladdened, and made great
demonstrations of joy, kindling bonfires, and, like those
that knew nothing to the contrary, giving thanks to God
Almighty for their deliverance from such a cruel Pirate.
L'Ollonais, having seen these joys for his death, made
haste to escape with the slaves above-mentioned, and
nOLLONAIS AT CUBA. 8t
came safe to Tortuga, the common place (jf refuge of all
sorts of wickedness, and the seminary, as it were, of all
manner of Pirates and thieves. Though now his fortune
was but low, yet he failed not of means to get another
ship, which with craft and subtlety he obtained, and in it
one and twenty persons. Being well provided with arms
and other necessaries, he set forth towards the Isle of
Cuba, on the South side whereof lies a small village,
which is called De los Cayos. The inhabitants of this
town drive a great trade in tobacco, sugar and hides ;
and all in boats, as not being able to make use of ships
by reason of the little depth of that sea.
L'Ollonais was greatly persuaded he should get here
some considerable prey ; but by the good fortune of some
fishermen who saw him, and the mercy of the Almighty,
they escaped his tyrannical hands. For the inhabitants
of the town of Cayos dispatched immediately a messenger
overland to Havana, complaining to the Governor that
L'Ollonais was come to destroy them, with two canoes.
The Governor could very hardly be persuaded of the
truth of this story, seeing he had received letters from
Campeche that he was dead. Notwithstanding, at the
importunity of the petitioners he sent a ship to their
relief, with ten guns and fourscore and ten persons, well
armed ; giving them withal this express command : They
should not return unto his presence without having totally
destroyed those Pirates. To this effect he gave them
also a negro, who might serve them for a hangman ; his
orders being that They should immediately hang every one
of the said Pirates, excepting L'Ollonais their Captain,
zuhom they should bring alive to Havana. This ship
arrived at Cayos ; of whose coming the Pirates were
advertised beforehand ; and, instead of flying, went to
seek the said vessel in the river Estera, where she rode at
anchor. The Pirates apprehended some fishermen, and
forced them, by night, to shew the entry of the port,
hoping soon to obtain a greater vessel than their two
VOL. I. G
82 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
canoes, and thereby to mend their fortune. They arrived,
after two o'clock in the morning, very near the ship.
And the watch on board the ship asking them : Whence
they came, mid if they had seen any Pirates abroad, they
caused one of the prisoners to answer : They had seen no-
Pirates, nor anything else. Which answer brought them,
into persuasion that they were fled away, having heard
of their coming.
But they experienced very soon the contrary; for
about break of day the Pirates began to assault the vessel
on both sides with their two canoes. This attack they
performed with such vigour that, although the Spaniards
behaved themselves as they ought and made as good
defence as they could, shooting against them likewise
some great guns, yet-they were forced to surrender, after
being beaten by the Pirates, with swords in hand, down
under the hatches. Hence L'Ollonais commanded them
to be brought up one by one, and in this order caused their
heads to be struck off. Among the rest came up the
negro, designed to be the Pirates' executioner by the
Governor of Havana. This fellow implored mercy at
his hands very dolefully, desiring not to be killed, and
telling L'Ollonais he was constituted hangman of that ship ;,
and that, in case he would spare him, he would tell him
faithfully all that he should desire to know. L'Ollonais
made him confess as many things as he thought fit to
ask him ; and, having done, commanded him to be
murdered with the rest. Thus he cruelly and barbar-
ously put them all to death, reserving of the whole num-
ber only one alive, whom he sent back to the Governor
of Havana, with this message given him in writing :
/ shall never henceforward give quarter to any Spaniard
zuhatsoever ; and I have great hopes I shall execute on your
own person the very same punishment I have done upon
them you sent against me. Thus I have retaliated the
kindness you designed to me and my companions. The
Governor was much troubled to understand these sad
LOLLONAIS RETURNS TO TORTUGA. 83
and withal insolent news ; which occasioned him to swear,
in the presence of many, he would never grant quarter
to any Pirate that should fall into his hands. But the
citizens of Havana desired him not to persist in the
execution of that rash and rigorous oath, seeing the
Pirates would certainly take occasion thence to do the
same ; and they had an hnndred times moix opporttmity
of revenge than he : that, being necessitated to get their
livelihood by fishery, they sho2tld hereafter always be hi
danger of losing their lives. By these reasons he was
persuaded to bridle his anger, and remit the severity of
his oath aforementioned.
Now L'Ollonais had got himself a good ship, but withal
very few provisions and people in it. Hereupon, to se-
cure both the one and the other, he resolved to use his
customary means of cruizing from one port to another.
This he did for some while, till at last not being able to
procure anything, he determined to go to the port of
Maracaibo. Here he took by surprize a ship that was
laden with plate and other merchandize, being outward
bound to buy cacao-nuts. With these prizes he returned
to Tortuga, where he was received with no small joy by
the inhabitants, they congratulating his happy success
and their own private interest. He continued not long
there, but pitched upon new designs of equipping a whole
fleet, sufficient to transport five hundred men, with all
other necessaries. With these preparations he resolved
to go to the Spanish dominions, and pillage both cities,
towns and villages, and finally take Maracaibo itself
For this purpose, he knew the Island of Tortuga would
afford him many resolute and courageous men, very fit
for such enterprizes. Besides that, he had in his service
several prisoners, who were exactly acquainted with the
ways and places he designed upon.
CHAPTER II.
LOllojiais equips a fleet to land upon the Spanish islands of
America, with intent to rob, sack and burn ivJiatever lie met.
Of this his design L'Ollonais gave notice to all the Pirates
who at that conjuncture of time were either at home or
abroad. By which means he got together in a little while
above four hundred men. Besides which, there was at
that present in the Isle of Tortuga another Pirate, whose
name was Michael de Basco. This man by his piracy
had got riches sufficient to live at ease, and go no more
abroad to sea ; having withal the office of Major of the
Island. Yet seeing the great preparations that L'Ollonais
made for this expedition, he entered into a straight league
of friendship with him, and proffered him that, in case
he would make him his chief captain by land (seeing he
knew the country very well and all its avenues), he would
take part in his fortunes, and go along with him. They
both agreed upon articles, with great joy of L'Ollonais,
as knowing that Basco had performed great actions in
Europe, and had gained the repute of a good soldier.
He gave him therefore the command he desired, and
the conduct of all his people by land. Thus they all
embarked in eight vessels, that of L'Ollonais being the
greatest, as having ten guns of various carriage.
All things being in readiness, and the whole com-
pany on board, they set sail together about the end of
April, having a considerable number of men for those
parts, that is in all six hundred and threescore persons.
They directed their course towards that part which is
L'OLLONAIS' SUCCESS AGAINST THE SPANIARDS. 85
called Bayala, situated on the North side of the Island of
Hispaniola. Here they also took into their company a
certain number of French hunters, who voluntarily offered
themselves to go along with them. And here likewise
they provided themselves with victuals and other neces-
saries for that voyage.
Hence they set sail again the last day of July, and
steered directly towards the Eastern Cape of the Isle,
called Punta d' Espada. Hereabouts they suddenly
espied a ship that was coming from Porto Rico, and
bound for New Spain, being laden with cacao-nuts.
L'Ollonais, the Admiral, presendy commanded the rest of
the fleet they should wait for him near the Isle of Savona,
situate on the Eastern side of Cape Punta d' Espada,
forasmuch as he alone intended to go and take the said
vessel. The Spaniards, although they had been in sight
now fully two hours, and knew them to be Pirates, yet
they would not flee, but rather prepared to fight ; as
being well armed, and provided of all things necessary
thereto. Thus the combat began between L'Ollonais and
the Spanish vessel, which lasted three hours ; and these
being past, they surrendered to him. This ship was
mounted with sixteen guns, and had fifty fighting men
on board. They found in her one hundred and twenty
thousand weight of cacao, forty thousand pieces of eight,
and the value of ten thousand more in jewels. L'Ollonais
sent the vessel presently to Tortuga to be unladed, with
orders to return with the said ship as soon as possible to
the Isle of Savona, where he would wait for their coming.
In the meanwhile the rest of the fleet, being arrived at the
said Island of Savona, met with another Spanish vessel
that was coming from Comana with military provisions to
the Isle of Hispaniola; and also with money to pay the
garrisons of the said island. This vessel also they took
without any resistance, although mounted with eight
guns. Here were found seven thousand weight of pow-
der, great number of muskets and other things of this
86 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
kind, together with twelve thousand pieces of eight in
ready money.
These forementioned events gave good encouragement
to the Pirates, as judging them very good beginnings to
the business they had in hand, especially finding their
fleet pretty well recruited within a little while. For the
first ship that was taken being arrived at Tortuga, the
Governor ordered to be instantly unladen, and soon after
sent her back with fresh provisions and other necessaries
to L'Ollonais. This ship he chose for his own, and gave
that which he commanded to his comrade Antony du
Puis, Thus having received new recruits of men, in lieu
of them he had lost in taking the prizes above-mentioned
and by sickness, he found himself in a good condition to
prosecute his voyage. All being well animated and full
of courage, they set sail for Maracaibo, which port is
situated in the province of New Venezuela, in the lati-
tude of twelve degrees and some minutes North. This
island is in length twenty leagues, and twelve in breadth.
To this port also belong the Islands of Onega and
Monges. The East side thereof is called Cape St.
Roman, and the Western side Cape of Caquibacoa.
The gulf is called by some the Gulf of Venezuela ; but
the Pirates usually call it the Bay of Maracaibo.
At the beginning of this gulf are two islands, which
extend for the greatest part from East to West. That
which lies towards the East is called I sla de las Vigilias,
or the Watch Isle, because in the middle thereof is to be
seen a high hill, upon which stands a house wherein
dwells perpetually a watchman. The other is called I sla
de las Palomas, or the Isle of Pigeons. Between these
two islands runs a little sea, or rather a lake, of fresh
water, being threescore leagues in length and thirty in
breadth ; which disgorges into the ocean, and dilates it-
self about the two islands afore-mentioned. Between them
is found the best passage for ships, the channel of this
passage being no broader than the flight of a great gun
MARA CA/B o. 87
of eight pound carriage, more or less. Upon the Isle of
Pigeons stands a castle, to impede the entry of any
vessels ; all such as come in being necessitated to
approach very near the casde, by reason of two banks of
sand that lie on the other side, with only fourteen foot
water. Many other banks of sand are also found in
this lake, as that which is called El Tablazo, or The
Great Table, which is no deeper than ten foot ; but this
lies forty leagues within the lake. Others there are that
are no more than six, seven or eight foot in depth.
All of them are very dangerous, especially to such
mariners as are little acquainted with this lake. On the
West side hereof is situated the city of Maracaibo, being
very pleasant to the view, by reason its houses are built
along the shore, having delicate prospects everywhere
round about. The city may possibly contain three or
four thousand persons, the slaves being included in
this number ; all which make a town of reasonable big-
ness. Among these are judged to be eight hundred
persons, more or less, able to bear arms, all of them
Spaniards. Here are also one Parish Church, of very
good fabric and well adorned, four monasteries and one
hospital. The city is governed by a Deputy-Governor,
who is substituted here by the Governor of Caracas,
as being his dependency. The commerce or trading
here exercised consists for the greatest part in hides
and tobacco. The inhabitants possess great numbers of
cattle, and many plantations, which extend for the space
of thirty leagues within the country ; especially on that
side that looks towards the great and populous town of
Gibraltar. At which place are gathered huge quantities
of cacao-nuts, and all other sorts of garden fruits ; which
gready serve for the regalement and sustenance of the m-
habitants of Maracaibo, whose territories are much drier
than those of Gibraltar. To this place those of Maracaibo
send great quantities of flesh ; they making returns in
oranges, lemons, and several other fruits. Por the in-
88 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
habitants of Gibraltar have great scarcity of provisions
of flesh, their fields being not capable of feeding cows
or sheep.
Before the city of Maracaibo lies a very spacious and
secure port, wherein may be built all sort of vessels ; as
having great convenience of timber, which may be trans-
ported thither at very little charge. Near the town lies
also a small island called Borrica, which serves them to
feed great numbers of goats, of which cattle the inhabi-
tants of Maracaibo make greater use of their skins than
their flesh or milk ; they making no great account of
these two, unless while they are as yet but tender and
young kids. In the fields about the town are fed some
numbers of sheep, but of a very small size. In some of
the islands that belong to the lake, and in other places
hereabouts, inhabit many savage Indians, whom the
Spaniards call Bravos, or Wild. These Indians could
never agree as yet, nor be reduced to any accord with
the Spaniards, by reason of their brutish and untamable
nature. They dwell for the most part towards the
Western side of the lake, in little huts that are built upon
trees which grow in the water, the cause hereof being
only to exempt themselves as much as possible from the
innumerable quantity of mosquitos or gnats which infest
those parts, and by which they are tormented night and
day. Towards the East side of the said lake are also to
be seen whole towns of fishermen, who likewise are con-
strained to live in huts, built upon trees, like the former.
Another reason of thus dwelling is the frequent inun-
dations of waters : for after great rains, the land is often
overflowed for the space of two or three leagues, there
being no less than five and twenty great rivers that feed
this lake. The town of Gibraltar is also frequently
drowned by these inundations, insomuch that the inhabi-
tants are constrained to leave their houses and retire to
their plantations.
Gibraltar is situated at the side of the lake, forty
GIBRALTAR.
leagues or thereabouts within it, and receives its neces-
sary provisions of flesh, as has been said, from Maracaibo.
The town is inhabited by fifteen hundred persons, more
or less, whereof four hundred may be capable of bearing
arms. The greatest part of the inhabitants keep open
shops, wherein they exercise one mechanic trade or other.
All the adjacent fields about this town are cultivated with
numerous plantations of sugar and cacao, in which are
many tall and beautiful trees, of whose timber houses
may be built, and also ships. Among these trees are
found great store of handsome and proportionable cedars,
being seven or eight foot in circumference, which serve
there very commonly to build boats and ships. These
they build after such manner as to bear only one great
sail ; and such vessels are called Piraguas. The whole
country round about is sufficiently furnished with rivers
and brooks, which are very useful to the inhabitants in
time of droughts, they opening in that occasion many
litde channels, through which they lead the rivulets to
water their fields and plantations. They plant in like
manner great quantity of tobacco, which is much
esteemed in Europe ; and for its goodness, is called
there Tabaco de Sacerdotes, or Priest's Tobacco. They
enjoy nigh twenty leagues of jurisdiction, which is
bounded and defended by very high mountains that are
perpetually covered with snow. On the other side of
these mountains is situated a great city called Merida, to
which the town of Gibraltar is subject. All sort of mer-
chandize is carried from this town to the aforesaid city,
upon mules ; and that but at one season of the year, by
reason of the excessive cold endured in those high moun-
tains. Upon the said mules great returns are made in
flour of meal, which comes from towards Peru by the
way of Estaffe.
Thus far I thought it convenient to make a short
description of the aforesaid lake of Maracaibo, and its
situation ; to the intent my reader might the better be
90 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
enabled to comprehend what I shall say concerning what
was acted by the Pirates in this place, the history
whereof I shall presently begin.
As soon as L'Ollonais arrived at the Gulf of Venezuela,
he cast anchor with his whole fleet, out of sight of the
watch-tower of the Island of Vigilias, or Watch- Isle. The
next day, very early, he set sail hence, with all his ships,
for the lake of Maracaibo ; where being arrived, they
cast anchor the second time. Soon after, they landed all
their men, with design to attack in the first place the
castle or fortress that commanded the bar, and is there-
fore called De la Barra. This fort consists only of
several great baskets of earth, placed upon a rising
ground, upon which are planted sixteen great guns, with
several other heaps of earth round about, for covering
the men within. The Pirates having landed at the
distance of a league from this fort, began to advance
by degrees towards it. But the Governor thereof,
having espied their landing, had placed an ambuscade
of some of his men, with design to cut them off behind,
while he meant to attack them in the front. This
ambuscade was found out by the Pirates ; and, hereupon
getting before, they assaulted and defeated it so entirely
that not one man could retreat to the castle. This
obstacle being removed, L'Ollonais with all his com-
panions advanced in great haste towards the fort. And
after a fight of almost three hours, wherein they behaved
themselves with desperate courage, such as this sort
of people are used to show, they became masters
thereof, having made use of no other arms than their
swords and pistols. And while they were fighting,
those who were routed in the ambuscade, not being
able to get into the castle, retired towards the city ot
Maracaibo in great confusion and disorder, crying : The
Pirates will pi'C sent ly be here with tzvo thousand men and
more. This city having formerly been taken by such
kind of people as these were, and sacked even to the
THE PIRATES ENTER MARACAIBO. 91
remotest corners thereof, preserved still in its memory a
fresh Idea of that misery. Hereupon, as soon as they
heard this dismal news, they endeavoured to escape as
fast as they could towards Gibraltar in their boats and
canoes, carrying with them all the goods and money they
could. Being come to Gibraltar, they dispersed the
rumour that the fortress was taken, and that nothing had
been saved, nor any persons able to escape the fury of
the Pirates.
The casde being taken by the Pirates, as was said
before, they presenUy made sign to the ships of the
victory they had obtained ; to the end they should come
farther in, without apprehension of any danger. The
rest of that day was spent in ruining and demolishing
the said casde. They nailed the guns, and burnt as
much as they could not carry away ; burying also the
dead, and sending on board the fleet such as were
wounded. The next day very early in the morning
they weighed anchor, and directed their course all to-
gether towards the city of Maracaibo, distant only six
leagues more or less from the fort. But the wind being
very scarce, that day they could advance but litde, as
being forced to expect the flowing of the tide. The
next morning they came within sight of the town, and
began to make preparations for landing under the pro-
tection of their own guns ; being persuaded the Spaniards
might have laid an ambuscade among the trees and
woods. Thus they put their men into canoes, which for
that purpose they brought with them, and landed where
they thought most convenient, shooting in the meanwhile
very furiously with their great guns. Of the people that
were in the canoes, half only went on shore, the other
half remained on board the said canoes. They fired
with their guns from the ships as fast as was possible
towards the woody part of the shore ; but could see, and
were answered by, nobody. Thus they marched in good
order into the town, whose inhabitants, as I told you
92 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
before, were all retired into the woods, and towards
Gibraltar, with their wives, children and families. Their
houses they left well provided with all sort of victuals,
such as flour, bread, pork, brandy, wines and good store
of poultry. With these things the Pirates fell to ban-
queting and making good cheer ; for in four weeks
before they had had no opportunity of filling their
stomachs with such plenty.
They instantly possessed themselves of the best houses
in the town, and placed sentries everywhere they thought
convenient. The great church served them for their
main corps du garde. The next day they sent a body of
one hundred and sixty men to find out some of the in-
habitants of the town, whom they understood were hidden
in the woods not far thence. These returned that very
night, bringing with them twenty thousand pieces of
eight, several mules laden with household goods and
merchandize, and twenty prisoners, between men, women
and children. Some of these prisoners were put to the
rack, only to make them confess where they had hidden
the rest of their goods ; but they could extort very litde
from them. L'Ollonais, who never used to make any
great account of murdering, though in cold blood, ten
or twelve Spaniards, drew his cutlass and hacked one
to pieces in the presence of all the rest, saying : If yoit
do not confess and declare wkei^e you have hidden the rest
of your goods, I will do the like to all your companions.
At last, amongst these horrible cruelties and inhuman
threats, one was found who promised to conduct him and
show the place where the rest of the Spaniards were
hidden. But • those that were fled, having intelligence
that one had discovered their lurking holes to the
Pirates, changed place, and buried all the remnant of
their riches under ground ; insomuch that the Pirates
could not find them out, unless some other person of
their own party should reveal them. Besides that the
Spaniards, flying from one place to another every day
THE PIRATES PROCEED TO GIBRALTAR. 93
and often changing woods, were jealous even of each
other ; insomuch as the father scarce presumed to trust
his own son.
Finally, after that the Pirates had been fifteen days in
Maracaibo, they resolved to go towards Gibraltar. But
the inhabitants of this place, having received intelligence
thereof beforehand, as also that they intended afterwards
to go to Merida, gave notice of this design to the Gover-
nor thereof, who was a valiant soldier and had served
his king in Flanders in many military offices. His
answer was : He would have the7n take no care ; for he
hoped ill a little while to exterminate the said Pirates.
Whereupon he transferred himself immediately to Gib-
raltar, with four hundred men well armed, ordering at
the same time the inhabitants of the said town to put
themselves in arms ; so that in all he made a body
of eight hundred fighting men. With the same speed
he commanded a battery to be raised towards the sea,
whereon he mounted twenty guns, covering them all
with great baskets of earth. Another battery likewise
he placed in another place, mounted with eight guns.
After this was done, he barricaded a highway or narrow
passage into the town, through which the Pirates of
necessity ought to pass ; opening at the same time
another, through much dirt and mud, in the wood, which
was totally unknown to the Pirates.
The Pirates, not knowing anything of these prepara-
tions, having embarked all their prisoners and what they
had robbed, took their way towards Gibraltar. Being
come within sight of the place, they perceived the Royal
standard hanging forth, and that those of the town had
a mind to fight and defend their houses. L'Ollonais,
seeing this resolution, called a council of war, to deliberate
what he ought to do in such case ; propounding withal
to his officers and mariners, that the difficulty of such
an enterprize was very great, seeing the Spaniards had
had so much time to put themselves in a posture of
94 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
defence, and had got a good body of men together, with
many martial provisions. But notzvithstanding, said he,
have a good courage. We must either defend ottrselves
like s"ood soldiers, or lose our lives with all the riches we
have got. Do as I shall do, who am your Captain. At
other times we have fought with fewer men than we have
in 02ir company at present, and yet zue have overcome
greater mwibers than there possibly can be in this town.
The more they are, the more glory we shall attribute unto
07ir fortune, and the greater riches we shall increase unto
it. The Pirates were under this suspicion, that all those
riches which the inhabitants of Maracaibo had absconded,
were transported to Gibraltar, or at least the greatest
part thereof. After this speech they all promised to
follow him and obey very exactly his commands. To
whom L'Ollonais made answer : ' Tis well; but know ye
withal that the first man zuho shall show any fear, or the
least apprehension thereof, I will pistol him with my own
hands.
With this resolution they cast anchor near the shore,
at the distance of one quarter of a league from the town.
The next day, before sunrise, they were all landed,
being to the number of three hundred and fourscore men,
well provided, and armed every one with a cutlass and
one or two pistols ; and withal sufficient powder and
bullet for thirty charges. Here, upon the shore, they all
shook hands with one another in testimony of good
courage, and began their march, L'Ollonais speaking these
words to them : Come, my brothers, follow me, and have
a good courage. They followed their way with a guide
they had provided. But he, believing he led them well,
brought them to the way which the Governor had
obstructed with barricades. Through this not being
able to pass, they went to the other, which was newly
made in the wood among the mire, to which the Spaniards
could shoot at pleasure. Notwithstanding, the Pirates
being full of courage, cut down multitude of branches
ATTACK ON GIBRALTAR. 95
of trees, and threw them in the dirt upon the way, to the
end they might not stick so fast in it. In the meanwhile,
those of Gibraltar fired at them with their great guns so
furiously that they could scarce hear or see one another
through the noise and smoke. Being now past the
wood, they came upon firm ground, where they met with
a battery of six guns, which immediately the Spaniards
discharged against them, all being loaded with small bul-
lets and pieces of iron. After this, the Spaniards sallying
forth set upon them with such fury, as caused the Pirates
to give way and retire ; very few of them daring to
advance towards the fort. They continued still firing
against the Pirates, of whom they had already killed and
wounded many. This made them go back to seek
some other way through the middle of the wood ; but
the Spaniards having cut down many trees to hinder the
passage, they could find none, and thus were forced to
return to that they had left. Here the Spaniards con-
tinued to fire as before ; neither would they sally out of
their batteries to attack the Pirates any more. Hereby
L'Ollonais and his companions, not being able to grimp
up the baskets of earth, were compelled to make use of
an old stratagem ; wherewith at last they deceived and
overcame the Spaniards.
L'Ollonais retired suddenly with all his men, making
show as if he fled. Hereupon the Spaniards, crying out,
They flee, they flee ; let us foihzu them, sallied forth with
great disorder, to pursue the fugitive Pirates. After
they had drawn them some distance from their batteries,
which was their only design, they turned upon them un-
expectedly with swords in hand, and killed above two
hundred men. And thus fighting their way through
those who remained alive, they possessed themselves of
the batteries. The Spaniards that remained abroad gave
themselves up for lost, and consequently took their flight
to the woods. The other part that was in the battery of
eight guns surrendered themselves ui)on conditions of
96 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
obtaining quarter for their lives. The Pirates, being now
become masters of the whole town, pulled down the
Spanish colours, and set up their own, taking prisoners
at the same time as many as they could find. These
they carried to the great church, whither also they trans-
ferred many great guns, wherewith they raised a battery
to defend themselves, fearing lest the Spaniards that
were fled should rally more of their own party and come
upon them again. But the next day, after they were all
fortified, all their fears disappeared. They gathered all
the dead, with intent to allow them burial, finding the
number of above five hundred Spaniards killed, besides
those that were wounded within the town and those that
died of their wounds in the woods, where they sought
for refuge. Besides which, the Pirates had in their
custody above one hundred and fifty prisoners, and nigh
five hundred slaves, many women and children.
Of their own companions the Pirates found only forty
dead, and almost as many more wounded. Whereof the
greatest part died afterwards, through the constitution of
the air, which brought fevers and other accidents upon
them. They put all the Spaniards that were slain into
two great boats, and carrying them one quarter of a
league within the sea, they sank the boats. These things
being done, they gathered all the plate, household stuff"
and merchandize they could rob or thought convenient
to carry away. But the Spaniards who had anything as
yet left to them, hid it very carefully. Soon after, the
Pirates, as if they were unsatisfied with the great riches
they had got, began to seek for more goods and mer-
chandize, not sparing those who lived in the fields, such
as hunters and planters. They had scarce been eighteen
days upon the place, when the greatest part of the
prisoners they had taken died of hunger. For in the
town very few provisions, especially of flesh, were to be
found. Howbeit, they had some quantity of flour of
meal, although perhaps something less than what was
THE PIRATES IN GIBRALTAR. qy
sufficient. But this the Pirates had taken into their
custody to make bread for themselves. As to the swine,
cows, sheep and poultry that were found upon the place,
they took them likewise for their own sustenance, with-
out allowing any share thereof to the poor prisoners.
For these they only provided some small quantity of
mules' and asses' flesh, which they killed for that purpose.
And such as could not eat of that loathsome provision
were constrained to die of hunger, as many did, their
stomachs not being accustomed to such unusual suste-
nance. Only some women were found, who were allowed
better cheer by the Pirates, because they served them
in their sensual delights, to which those robbers are
hugely given. Among those women, some had been
forced, others were volunteers ; though almost all had
rather taken up that vice through poverty and hunger,
more than any other cause. Of the prisoners many also
died under the torments they sustained, to make them
confess where they had hidden their money or jewels.
And of these, some because they had none nor knew of
any, and others for denying what they knew, endured
such horrible deaths.
Finally, after having been in possession of the town
four entire weeks, they sent four of the prisoners, re-
maining alive, to the Spaniards that were fled into the
woods, demanding of them a ransom for not burning the
town. The sum hereof they constituted icn thousand
pieces of eight, which, unless it were sent to them, they
threatened to fire and reduce into ashes the whole village.
For bringing in of this money they allowed them only
the space of two days. These being past, and the
Spaniards not having been able to gather so punctually
such a sum, the Pirates began to set fire to many places
of the town. Thus the inhabitants, perceiving the
Pirates to be in earnest, begged of them to help to
extinguish the fire ; and withal promised the ransom
should be readily paid. The Pirates condescended to
VOL. I. H
98 THE BUCCAXEERS OF AMERICA.
their petition, helping as much as they could to stop the
progress of the fire. Yet, though they used the best
endeavours they possibly could, one part of the town
was ruined, especially the church belonging to the mon-
astery, which was burnt even to dust. After they had
received the sum above-mentioned, they carried on board
their ships all the riches they had robbed, together with
a great number of slaves which had not as yet paid their
ransom. For all the prisoners had sums of money set
upon them, and the slaves were also commanded to be
redeemed. Hence they returned to Maracaibo, where
being arrived they found a general consternation in the
whole city. To which they sent three or four prisoners
to tell the governor and inhabitants : They should bring
them thirty thousand pieces of eight on board their ships,
for a ransoin of their houses ; otherwise they should be
entirely sacked anew and burnt.
Among these debates a certain party of Pirates came
on shore to rob, and these carried away the images, the
pictures and bells of the great church, on board the fleet.
The Spaniards, who were sent to demand of those that
were fled the sum afore-mentioned, returned with orders
to make some agreement with the Pirates. This they per-
formed, and concluded with the Pirates they would give
for their ransom and liberty the sum of twenty thousand
pieces of eight and five hundred cows. The condition
hereof being that they should commit no farther acts
of hostility against any person, but should depart thence
presendy after payment of the money and catde. The
•one and the other being delivered, they set sail with
the whole fleet, causing great joy to the inhabitants of
Maracaibo to see themselves quit of this sort of people.
Notwithstanding, three days after they resumed their
fears and admiration, seeing the Pirates to appear again
and re-enter the port they had left with all their ships.
But these apprehensions soon vanished, by only hearing
the errand of one of the Pirates, who came on shore
DIVISION OF THE BOOTY. 99
to tell them from L'Ollonais : They sJio2tld send him a
skilful Pilot to conduct one of his greatest ships over the
dangeroiis bank that lies at the entry of the lake. Which
petition, or rather command, was instantly granted.
The Pirates had now been full two months in those
towns, wherein they committed those cruel and insolent
actions we have told you of. Departing therefore thence,
they took their course towards the island Hispaniola, and
arrived thither in eight days, casting anchor in a port
called Isla de la Vaca, or Cow Island. This isle is in-
habited by French buccaneers, who most commonly sell
the flesh they hunt to Pirates and others who now and
then put in there with intent of victualling or trading
with them. Here they unladed the whole cargo of riches
they had robbed ; the usual storehouse of the Pirates
being commonly under the shelter of the buccaneers.
Here also they made a dividend amongst them of all
their prizes and gains, according to that order and degree
which belonged to every one, as hath been mentioned
above. Having cast up the account and made exact
calculation of all they had purchased, they found in ready
money two hundred and threescore thousand pieces of
eight. Whereupon, this being divided, every one re-
ceived to his share in money, and also in pieces of silk,
linen and other commodities, the value of above one
hundred pieces of eight. Those who had been wounded
in this expedition received their part before all the rest ;
I mean, such recompences as I spoke of in the first Book,
for the loss of their limbs which many sustained. After-
wards they weighed all the plate that was uncoined,
reckoning after the rate of ten pieces of eight for every
pound. The jewels were prized with much variety,
either at too high or too low rates ; being thus occasioned
by their own ignorance. This being done, every one
was put to his oath again, that he had not concealed
anything nor subtracted from the common stock. Hence
they proceeded to the dividend of what shares belonged
loo THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
to such as were dead amongst them, either in battle or
otherwise. These shares were given to their friends to
be kept entire for them, and to be deHvered in due time
to their nearest relations, or whomsoever should appear
to be their lawful heirs.
The whole dividend being entirely finished, they set
sail thence for the Isle of Tortuga. Here they arrived
one month after, to the great joy of most that were upon
the island. For as to the common Pirates, in three
weeks they had scarce any money left them ; having
spent it all in things of little value, or at play either at
cards or dice. Here also arrived, not long before them,
two French ships laden with wine and brandy and other
thino-s of this kind ; whereby these liquors, at the arrival
of the Pirates, were sold indifferent cheap. But this
lasted not long ; for soon after they were enhanced
extremely, a gallon of brandy being sold for four pieces
of eight. The Governor of the island bought of the
Pirates the whole cargo of the ship laden with cacao,
giving them for that rich commodity scarce the twentieth
part of what it was worth. Thus they made shift to lose
and spend the riches they had got in much less time than
they were purchased by robbing. The taverns, ac-
cording to the custom of Pirates, got the greatest part
thereof; insomuch that soon after they were constrained
to seek more by the same unlawful means they had
obtained the preceding.
CHAPTER III.
L Ollonais makes neiv preparations to take the city of St. James
de Leon ; as also that of Nicaragua, ivJiere lie miserably
perishes.
L' Ollonais had got himself very great esteem and repute
at Tortuga by this last voyage, by reason he brought
them home such considerable profit. And now he needed
take no great care how to gather men to serve under his
colours, seeing more came in voluntarily to proffer their
service to him than he could employ, every one reposing
such great confidence in his conduct for seeking their
fortunes, that they judged it a matter of the greatest
security imaginable to expose themselves in his company
to the hugest dangers that might possibly occur. He
resolved therefore for a second voyage, to go with his
officers and soldiers towards the parts of Nicaragua, and
pillage there as many towns as he could meet.
Having published his new preparations, he had all his
men together at the time appointed, being about the
number of seven hundred, more or less. Of these he
put three hundred on board the ship he took at Mara-
caibo, and the rest in other vessels of lesser burden,
which were five more : so that the whole number were
in all six ships. The first port they went to was in the
Island of Hispaniola, to a place called Bayaha, where
they determined to victual the fleet and take in pro-
visions. This being done, they set sail thence, and
steered their course to a port called Matamana, lying on
the South side of the Isle of Cuba. Their intent was to
take here all the canoes they could meet, these coasts
I02 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
being frequented by an huge number of fishermen of
tortoises, who carry them thence to Havana. They
took as many of the said canoes, to the great grief of
those miserable people, as they thought necessary for
their designs. For they had great necessity of these
small bottoms, by reason the port whither they designed
to go was not of depth sufficient to bear ships of any
burden. Hence they took their course towards the cape
called Gracias a Dios, situate upon the continent in
latitude fifteen degrees North, at the distance of one
hundred leagues from the island De los Pinos. But
being out at sea they were taken with a sad and
tedious calm, and by the agitation of the waves alone
were thrown into the Gulf of Honduras. Here they
laboured very much to regain what they had lost, but all
in vain ; both the waters in their course, and the winds,
being contrary to their endeavours. Besides that the
ship wherein L'Ollonais was embarked could not follow
the rest ; and what was worse, they wanted already pro-
visions. Hereupon they were forced to put into the
first port or bay they could reach, to revictual their fleet.
Thus they entered with their canoes into a river called
Xagua, inhabited by Indians, whom they totally robbed
and destroyed ; they finding amongst their goods great
quantity of millet, many hogs and hens. Not contented
with what they had done, they determined to remain
there until the bad weather was over, and to pillage all
the towns and villages lying along the coast of the gulf.
Thus they passed from one place to another, seeking as
yet more provisions, by reason they had not what they
wanted for the accomplishment of their designs. Having
searched and rifled many villages, where they found no
great matter, they came at last to Puerto Cavallo. In
this port the Spaniards have two several storehouses,
which serve to keep the merchandizes that are brought
from the inner parts of the country until the arrival of
the ships. There was in the port at that occasion a
nOLLONAIS' TORTURE OF PRISONERS. 103
Spanish ship mounted with four and twenty guns and
sixteen pateraras or mortar-pieces. This ship was
immediately seized by the Pirates ; and then, drawing
near the shore, they landed and burnt the two store-
houses, with all the rest of the houses belonging to the
place. Many inhabitants likewise they took prisoners,
and committed upon them the most insolent and in-
human cruelties that ever heathens invented, putting
them to the cruellest tortures they could imagine or
devise. It was the custom of L'Ollonais that, having
tormented any persons and they not confessing, he would
instandy cut them in pieces with his hanger, and pull out
their tongues ; desiring to do the same, if possible, to
every vSpaniard in the world. Oftentimes it happened
that some of these miserable prisoners, being forced
thereunto by the rack, would promise to discover the
places where the fugitive Spaniards lay hidden ; which
being not able afterwards to perform, they were put to
more enormous and cruel deaths than they who were
dead before.
The prisoners being all dead and annihilated (except-
ing only two, whom they reserved to show them what
they desired), they marched hence to the town of San
Pedro, or St. Peter, distant ten or twelve leagues from
Puerto Cavallo, having in their company three hundred
men, whom L'Ollonais led, and leaving behind him Moses
van Vin for his lieutenant to govern the rest in his
absence. Being come three leagues upon their way,
they met with a troop of Spaniards, who lay in ambus-
cade for their coming. These they set upon with all the
courage imaginable, and at last totally defeated, howbeit
they behaved themselves very manfully at the beginning
of the fight. But not being able to resist the fury of the
Pirates, they were forced to give way and save them-
selves by flight, leaving many Pirates dead upon the
place and wounded, as also some of their own party
maimed by the way. These L'Ollonais put to death with-
I04 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
out mercy, having asked them what questions he thought
fit for his purpose.
There were still remaining some few prisoners who
were not wounded. These were asked by L'Ollonais if
any more Spaniards did lie farther on in ambuscade ?
To whom they answered, there were. Then he com-
manded them to be brought before him, one by one, and
asked if there was no other way to be found to the town
but that ? This he did out of a design to excuse, if
possible, those ambuscades. But they all constantly
answered him, they knew none. Having asked them
all, and finding they could show him no other way,
L'Ollonais grew outrageously passionate ; insomuch that
he drew his cutlass, and with it cut open the breast of
one of those poor Spaniards, and pulling out his heart
with his sacrilegious hands, began to bite and gnaw it
with his teeth, like a ravenous wolf, saying to the rest :
/ luill serve you all alike, if you show me not another
way.
Hereupon those miserable wretches promised to show
him another way ; but withal they told him, it was
extremely difficult and laborious. Thus, to satisfy that
cruel tyrant, they began to lead him and his army. But
finding it not for his purpose, even as they told him, he
was constrained to return to the former way, swearing
with great choler and indignation : Mort Dietc, les
Espagnols me le payeront {By God's death the Spaniards
shall pay 7ne for this).
The next day he fell into another ambuscade ; the
which he assaulted with such horrible fury that in less
than an hour's time he routed the Spaniards, and killed
the greatest part of them. The Spaniards were per-
suaded that by these ambuscades they should better be
able to destroy the Pirates, assaulting them by degrees;
and for this reason had posted themselves in several
places. At last he met with a third ambuscade, where
was placed a party of Spaniards both stronger and to
CAPTURE OF SAN PEDRO. 105
greater advantage than the former. Yet, notwithstanding,
the Pirates, by throwing with their hands Httle fireballs
in great number, and continuing to do so for some time,
forced this party, as well as the preceding, to flee. And
this with such great loss of men as that, before they
could reach the town, the greatest part of the Spaniards
were either killed or wounded. There was but one path
which led to the town. This path was very well barri-
caded with good defences ; and the rest of the town
round about was planted with certain shrubs or trees
named Raqueltes, very full of thorns and these very
sharp-pointed. This sort of fortification seemed stronger
than the triangles which are used in Europe, when an
army is of necessity to pass by the place of an enemy, it
being almost impossible for the Pirates to traverse those
shrubs. The Spaniards that were posted behind the
said defences, seeing the Pirates come, began to shoot
at them with their great guns. But these, perceiving
them ready to fire, used to stoop down, and w^hen the
shot was made, fall upon the defendants with fireballs
in hands and naked swords, killing with these weapons
many of the town. Yet, notwithstanding, not being able
to advance any farther, they were constrained to retire
for the first time. Afterwards they returned to the
attack again, with fewer men than before ; and observing
not to shoot till they were very near, they gave the
Spaniards a charge so dexterously, that with every shot
they killed an enemy.
The attack continuing thus eager on both sides till
night, the Spaniards were compelled to hang forth a
white flag, in token of truce and that they desired to
come to a parley. The only conditions they required for
delivering the town were : That the Pirates should give
the inhabitants quarter for t^uo hours. This short space
of time they demanded, with intent to carry away and
abscond as much of their goods and riches as they could,
as also to flee to some other neighbouring town. Upon
io6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the agreement of this article they entered the town, and
continued there the two hours above-mentioned, without
committing the least act of hostility, or causing any
trouble to the inhabitants. But no sooner that time was
passed, than L'Ollonais ordered the inhabitants should be
followed and robbed of all they had carried away ; and
not only goods, but their persons likewise to be made all
prisoners. Notwithstanding, the greatest part of their
merchandize and goods were in such manner absconded
as the Pirates could not find them ; they meeting only a
few leathern sacks that were filled with anil or indigo.
Having stayed at this town some few days, and
according to their usual customs committed there most
horrid insolencies, they at last quitted the place, carrying
away with them all that they possibly could, and reducing
the town totally into ashes. Being come to the seaside,
where they left a party of their own comrades, they
found these had busied themselves in cruizing upon the
fishermen that lived thereabouts or came that way from
the river of Guatemala. In this river also was expected
a ship that was to come from Spain. Finally they re-
solved to gfo towards the islands that lie on the other
side of the gulf, there to cleanse and careen their vessels.
But in the meanwhile they left two canoes before the
coast, or rather the mouth of the river of Guatemala, to
the intent they should take the ship which, as I said
before, was expected from Spain.
But their chief intention of going to those islands was
to seek provisions, as knowing the tortoises of those
places are very excellent and pleasant food. As soon as
they arrived there, they divided into troops, each party
choosing a fit post for that fishery. Every one of them
undertook to knit a net with the rinds of certain trees,
called in those parts Macoa. Of these rinds they make
also ropes and cables for the service of ships : insomuch
that no vessel can be in need of such things whensoever
they can but find the said trees. There are also in those
GUATEMALA. 107
parts many places where they find pitch, ^ which is gathered
thereabouts in great abundance. The quantity hereof is
so great that, running down the sea-coasts, being melted
by the heat of the sun, it congeals in the water into o-reat
heaps, and represents the shape of small islands. This
pitch is not like that we have in the countries of Europe,
but is hugely like, both in colour and shape, that froth of
the sea which is called by the naturalists bitumen. But
in my judgment this matter is nothing else but wax,
which stormy weather has cast into the sea, being part
of that huge quantity which in the neighbouring terri-
tories is made by the bees. Thus from places far distant
from the sea it is also brought to the sea-coast by the winds
and rolling waves of great rivers ; being likewise mingled
with sand, and having the smell of black amber, such as is
sent us from the Orient. In those parts are found great
quantities of the said bees, who make their honey in
trees ; whence it happens that the honey-combs being
fixed to the bodies of the trees, when tempests arise they
are torn away, and by the fury of the winds carried into
the sea, as has been said before. Some naturalists are
willing to say that between the honey and the wax is
made a separation by means of the salt water, whence
proceeds also the good amber. This opinion is rendered
the more probable because the said amber being found
and tasted, it affords the like taste as wax does.
But now, returning to my discourse, I shall let you
know that the Pirates made in those islands all the haste
to equip their vessels they could possibly, by reason they
had news the Spanish ship which they expected was
come. They spent some time in cruizing upon the
coasts of Yucatan, whereabouts inhabit many Indians,
who seek for the amber above-mentioned in those seas.
^ One of the largest pitch or asphalt lakes is to be seen in the
British island of Trinidad, a very good description of which is to be
found in C. Kingsley's " At Last." Similar deposits on a small scale
are not uncommon in the West Indian Islands, which arc mostly of
volcanic origin.
io8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
But seeing we are come to this place, I shall here, by
the by, make some short remarks on the manner of
living of these Indians, and the divine worship which
they practise.
The Indians of the coasts of Yucatan have now been
above one hundred years under the dominion of the
Spaniards. To this nation they performed all manner
of service ; for, whensoever any of them had need of a
slave or servant, they sent to seek one of these Indians
to serve them as long as they pleased. By the Spaniards
they were initiated at first in the principles of Christian
faith and religion. Being thus made a part of Christi-
anity, they used to send them every Sunday and holiday
through the whole year a priest to perform divine service
among them. Afterwards, for what reasons are not
known, but certainly through evil temptations of the
Father of Idolatry, the Devil, they suddenly cast off
Christian religion again, and abandoned the true divine
worship, beating withal and abusing the priest was sent
them. This provoked the Spaniards to punish them
according to their deserts, which they did by casting
many of the chief of these Indians into prison. Every
one of those barbarians had, and has still, a god to him-
self, whom he serves and worships. It is a thing that
deserves all admiration, to consider how they use in this
particular a child that is newly born into the world. As
soon as this is issued from the womb of the mother, they
carry it to the temple. Here they make a circle or hole,
which they fill with ashes, without mingling anything
else with them. Upon this heap of ashes they place
the child naked, leaving it there a whole night alone,
not without great danger ; nobody daring to come near
it. In the meanwhile the temple is oj>en on all sides, to
the intent all sorts of beasts may freely come in and out.
The next day the father and relations of the infant return
thither, to see if the track or step of any animal appears
to be printed in the ashes. Not finding any, they leave
INDIANS OF YUCATAN. 109
the child there until some beast hath approached the
infant, and left behind him the mark of his feet. To
this animal, whatsoever it be, they consecrate the crea-
ture newly born, as unto its god ; which he is bound to
worship and serve all his life, esteeming the said beast
as his patron and protector in all cases of danger or
necessity. They offer to their gods sacrifices of fire,
wherein they burn a certain gum called by them copal,
whose smoke affords a very delicious smell. When the
infant is grown up, the parents thereof tell him and show
him whom he ought to worship, serve and honour as his
own proper god. This being known, he goes to the
temple, where he makes offerings to the said beast.
Afterwards, if in the course of his life any one has injured
him, or any evil happens to him, he complains thereof to
that beast, and sacrifices to it for revenge. Whence
many times comes that those who have done the injury
of which he complains are found to be bitten, killed, or
otherwise hurt by such animals.
After this superstitious and idolatrous manner do live
those miserable and ignorant Indians, that inhabit all the
islands of the Gulf of Honduras, as also many of them
that dwell upon the continent of Yucatan. In the terri-
tories of which country are found most excellent ports
for the safety of ships, where those Indians most com-
monly love to build their houses. These people are not
very faithful one to another, and likewise use strange
ceremonies at their marriages. Whensoever any one
pretends to marry a young damsel, he first applies him-
self to her father or nearest relation. He then examines
him very exactly concerning the manner of cultivatmg
their plantations and other things at his pleasure.
Having satisfied the questions that were put to him by
the father-in-law, he gives the young man a bow and
arrow. With these things he repairs to the young maid,
and presents her with a garland of green leaves, inter-
weaved with sweet-smelling flowers. This she is obliged
ïio THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
to put upon her head, and lay aside that which she wore
before that time ; it being the custom of the country that
all virgins go perpetually crowned with flowers. This
garland being received and put upon the head, every one
of the relations and friends go to advise with others,
among themselves, whether that marriage will be useful
and of likely happiness, or not. Afterwards the aforesaid
relations and friends meet together at the house of the
damsel's father, and there they drink of a certain liquor
made of maize, or Indian wheat. And here before the
whole company the father gives his daughter in marriage
to the bridegroom. The next day the newly-married
bride comes to her mother, and in her presence pulls off
the garland and tears it in pieces, with great cries and
bitter lamentations, according to the custom of the
country. Many other things I could relate at large of
the manner of living and customs of those Indians ; but
these I shall omit, thereby to follow my discourse.
Our Pirates therefore had many canoes of the Indians
in the Isle of Sambale, five leagues distant from the
coasts of Yucatan. In the aforesaid island is found great
quantity of amber, but more especially when any storm
arises from towards the East, whence the waves bring
many things and very different. Through this sea no
vessels can pass, unless very small, the waters being too
shallow. In the lands that are surrounded by this sea is
found huge quantity of Campeche wood {i.e. logwood),
and other things of this kind, that serve for the art of
dyeing, which occasions them to be much esteemed in
Europe, and doubtless would be much more, in case we
had the skill and science of the Indians, who are so
industrious as to make a dye or tincture that never
changes its colour nor fades away.
After that the Pirates had been in that gulf three
entire months, they received advice that the Spanish
ship was come. Hereupon they hastened to the port,
where the ship lay at anchor unlading the merchandize
CAPTURE OF THE SPANISH SHIP. in
it brought, with design to assault her as soon as it were
possible. But before this attempt they thought it con-
venient to send away some of their boats from the mouth
of the river, to seek for a small vessel which was ex-
pected ; having notice that she was very richly laden,
the greatest part of the cargo being plate, indigo and
cochineal. In the meanwhile the people of the ship that
was in the port had notice given that the Pirates designed
upon them. Hereupon they prepared all things very
well for the defence of the said vessel, which was
mounted with forty-two guns, had many arms on board
and other necessaries, together with one hundred and
thirty fighting men. To L'Ollonais all this seemed but
litde ; and thus he assaulted her with great courage, his
own ship carrying only twenty-two guns, and having no
more than a small saetia, or flyboat, for help. But the
Spaniards defended themselves after such manner as
they forced the Pirates to retire. Notwithstanding,
while the smoke of the powder continued very thick, as
amidst a dark fog or mist, they sent four canoes very
well manned, and boarded the ship with great agility,
whereby they compelled the Spaniards to surrender.
The ship being taken, they found not in her what they
thought, as being already almost wholly unladed. All
the treasure they here got consisted only in fifty bars of
iron, a small parcel of paper, some earthen jars full
of wine, and other things of this kind ; all of small im-
portance.
Presently after, L'Ollonais called a council of the whole
fleet, wherein he told them he intended to go to Guate-
mala. Upon this point they divided into several senti-
ments ; some of them liking the proposal very well, and
others disliking it as much — especially a certain party of
them, who were but new in those exercises of piracy, and
who had imagined at their setting forth from Tortuga
that pieces of eight were gathered as easily as pears from
a tree. But having found at last most things contrary to
112 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
their expectation, they quitted the fleet, and returned
whence they set out. Others, on the contrary, affirmed
they had rather die of hunger, than return home without
a great deal of money.
But the major part of the company, judging the pro-
pounded voyage Htde fit for their purpose, separated from
L'Ollonais and the rest. Among these was ringleader
one Moses Vanclein, who w^as captain of the ship taken
at Puerto Cavallo. This fellow took his course towards
Tortuga, designing to cruize to and fro in those seas.
With him also joined another comrade of his own, by
name Pierre le Picard, who, seeing the rest to leave
L'Ollonais, thought fit to do the same. These runaways
having thus parted company, steered their course home-
wards, coasting along the continent, till they came at
last to Costa Rica. Here they landed a strong party of
men near the river of Veraguas. and marched in good
order to the town of the same name. This place they
took and totally pillaged, notwithstanding that the
Spaniards made a strong and warlike resistance. They
brought away some of the inhabitants as prisoners, with
all that they had robbed, which was of no great impor-
tance, the reason hereof being the poverty of the place,
which exercises no manner of trade than only working in
the mines, where some of the inhabitants constantly
attend. Yet no other persons seek for the gold than
only slaves. These they compel to dig, whether they
live or die, and wash the earth that is taken out in the
neighbouring rivers ; where oftentimes they find pieces
of gold as big as peas. Finally, the Pirates found in
this robbery no greater value than seven or eight pounds
weight of gold. Hereupon they returned back, giving
over the design they had to go farther on to the town of
Nata, situated upon the coasts of the South sea. Hither-
to they designed to march, knowing the inhabitants to
be rich merchants, who had their slaves at work in the
mines of Veraguas. But from this enterprize they were
DE LAS PERTAS INDIANS. 113
deterred by the multitude of Spaniards whom they saw-
gather on all sides to fall upon them ; whereof they had
timely advice beforehand.
L'Ollonais, thus abandoned by his companions, remained
alone in the Gulf of Honduras, by reason his ship was too
great to get out at the time of the reflux of those seas,
which the smaller vessels could more easily do. There he
sustained great want of all sorts of provisions ; insomuch
as they were constrained to go ashore every day, to seek
wherewithal to maintain themselves. And not finding
anything else, they were forced to kill monkeys and
other animals such as they could find, for their sus-
tenance.
At last having found, in the latitude of the Cape of
Gracias a Dios, certain litde islands called De las Pertas,
here, near these isles, his ship fell upon a bank of sand,
where it stuck so fast that no art could be found to get her
off into deep water again, notwithstanding they unladed
all the guns, iron and other weighty things as much as
possibly they could : but all they could do was to litde
or no effect. Hereupon they were necessitated to break
the ship in pieces, and with some of the planks and
nails build themselves a boat, wherewith to get away
from those islands. Thus they began their work ; and
while they are employed about it, I shall pass to describe
succinctly the isles aforementioned and their inhabitants.
The islands called De las Pertas are inhabited by
Indians, who are properly savages, not having at any
time known or conversed with any civil people. They
are tall in stature and very nimble in running, which they
perform almost as fast as horses. At diving also in the
sea they are very dexterous and hardy. From the bottom
of the sea I saw them take up an anchor that weighed
six hundred pound, by tying a cable to it with great
dexterity, and pulling it from a rock. They use no
other arms than such as are made of wood, without any
iron, unless that some instead thereof fix a crocodile
VOL. I. I
114 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
tooth, which serves for a point. They have neither bows
nor arrows among them, as other Indians have ; but their
common weapon is a sort of lances, that are long a fathom
and a half. In these islands there are many plantations
surrounded with woods, whence they gather great abun-
dance of fruits. Such are potatoes, bananas, racoven,
ananas and many others, which the constitution of the
soil affords. Near these plantations they have no houses
to dwell in, as in other places of the Indies. Some are
of opinion that these Indians eat human flesh, which seems
to be confirmed by what happened when L'Ollonais was
there. Two of his companions, the one being a French-
man and the other a Spaniard, went into the woods,
where having straggled up and down some while, they
met with a troop of Indians that began to pursue them.
They defended themselves as well as they could with
their swords ; but at last were forced to flee. This the
Frenchman performed with great agility; but the Spaniard,
being not so swift as his companion, was taken by those
barbarians, and heard of no more. Some days after, they
attempted to go into the woods to see what was become
of their companion. To this effect twelve Pirates set
forth very well armed, amongst whom was the French-
man, who conducted them, and shewed them the place
where he left his companion. Here they found, near the
place, that the Indians had kindled a fire ; and, at a small
distance thence, they found the bones of the said Spaniard
very well roasted. Hence they inferred that they had
roasted the miserable Spaniard, of whom they found
more, some pieces of flesh ill scraped off from the bones,
and one hand, which had only two fingers remaining.
They marched farther on, seeking for Indians. Of
these they found a great number together, who endea-
voured to escape, seeing the Pirates so strong and well
armed. But they overtook some of them, and brought
on board their ships five men and four women. With
these they used all the means they could invent to make
DE LAS PERTAS INDIANS. 115
themselves be understood and gain their affections ;
giving them certain small trifles, as knives, beads and
the like things. They gave them also victuals and
drink ; but nothing of either would they taste. It was
also observable that all the while they were prisoners on
board the ships, they spoke not one word to each other
among themselves. Thus the Pirates, seeing these poor
Indians were much afraid of them, presented them again
with some small things, and let them go. When they
departed, they made signs, giving them to understand
they would come again. But they soon forgot their
benefactors, and were never heard nor seen more.
Neither could any notice afterwards be had of these
Indians or any others in the whole island after that time.
Which occasioned the Pirates to suspect that both those
that were taken, and all the rest of the island, did all
swim away by night to some other little neighbouring
islands, especially considering they could never set eyes
on any Indian more ; neither was there ever seen any
boat or other vessel in the whole circumference of the
island.
In the meanwhile the Pirates were very desirous to
see their long-boat finished, which they were building
with the timber of the ship that struck upon the sands.
Yet, considering their work would be but long, they
began to cultivate some pieces of ground. Here they
sowed French beans, which came to maturity in six
weeks' time, and many other fruits. They had good
provision of Spanish wheat, bananas, racoven and other
things. With the wheat they made bread, and baked it
in portable ovens, which they had brought with them to
this effect. Thus they feared not hunger in those desert
places. After this manner they employed themselves
for the space of five or six months. Which time being
passed, and the long-boat finished, they determined to
go to the river of Nicaragua, to see if they could take
some few canoes, and herewith return to the said islands
ii6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and fetch away their companions that remained behind^
by reason the boat they had built was not capable of
transporting so many men together. Hereupon, to avoid
any disputes that might arise, they cast lots among them-
selves, determining thereby who should go, or stay, irt
the island.
The lot fell only upon one half of the people of the
lost vessel ; who embarked upon the long-boat they had
built, and also the skiff which they had before ; the other
half remaining on shore. L'Ollonais having set sail,,
arrived in a few days at the mouth of the river of
Nicaragua. Here suddenly his ill-fortune assailed him,
which of long time had been reserved for him, as a
punishment due to the multitude of horrible crimes,,
which in his licentious and wicked life he had committed.
Here he met with both Spaniards and Indians, who
jointly together set upon him and his companions, and
used them so roughly that the greatest part of the Pirates,
were killed upon the place. L'Ollonais, with those that
remained alive, had much ado to escape on board their
boats aforementioned. Yet notwithstanding this great
loss of men, he resolved not to return to seek those he
had left at the Isle of Pertas, without taking some boats,
such as he looked for. To this effect he determined to
go farther on to the coasts of Cartagena, with design to
seek for canoes. But God Almighty, the time of His
Divine justice being now already come, had appointed the
Indians of Darien to be the instruments and executioners
thereof. The I ndians of Darien are esteemed as bravos, or
wild savage Indians, by the neighbouring Spaniards, who
never could reduce them to civility. Hither L'Ollonais
came (being rather brought by his evil conscience that
cried for punishment of his crimes), thinking to act in
that country his former cruelties. But the Indians with-
in a few days after his arrival took him prisoner and
tore him in pieces alive, throwing his body limb by limb
into the fire, and his ashes into the air ; to the intent no
L'OLLONAIS TORN IN PIECES AND BURNT. ii
trace nor memory might remain of such an infamous,
inhuman creature. One of his companions gave me an
exact account of the aforesaid tragedy ; affirming withal
that he himself had escaped the same punishment, not
without the greatest of difficulties. He believed also
that many of his comrades who were taken prisoners in
that encounter by the Indians of Darien were after the
same manner as their cruel captain torn in pieces and
burned alive. Thus ends the history of the life and
miserable death of that infernal wretch L'Ollonais, who,
full of horrid, execrable and enormous deeds, and also
debtor to so much innocent blood, died by cruel and
butcherly hands, such as his own were in the course of
his life.
Those that remained in the island De las Pertas,
waiting for the return of them who got away, only to
their great misfortune, hearing no news of their captain
nor companions, at last embarked themselves upon the
ship of a certain Pirate who happened to pass that way.
This fellow was come from Jamaica with intent to land
at the Cape of Gracias a Dios, and hence to mount the
river with his canoes, and take the city of Cartagena.
These two parcels of Pirates being now joined together
were infinitely gladdened at the presence and society of
one another. Those because they found themselves
delivered from their miseries, poverty and necessities,
wherein now they had lived the space of ten entire
months — these, because they were now considerably
strengthened, whereby to effect with greater satisfaction
their intended designs. Hereupon, as soon as they
were arrived at the aforesaid Cape of Gracias a Dios,
they all put themselves into canoes, and with these
vessels mounted the river, being in number five hundred
men ; leaving only five or six persons in every ship to
keep them. They took no provisions with them, as
being persuaded they should find everywhere sufficient.
But these their own hopes were found totally vain.
ii8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
as not being grounded in God Almighty. For He
ordained it so that the Indians having perceived
their coming, were all fled before them, not leaving in
their houses nor plantations, which for the most part
border upon the sides of rivers, anything of necessary
provisions or victuals. Hereby, in few days after they
had quitted their ships, they were reduced to such ne-
cessity and hunger as nothing could be more extreme.
Notwithstanding, the hopes they had conceived of
making their fortunes very soon animated them for the
present, being contented in this affliction with a few
green herbs, such as they could gather as they went upon
the banks of the river.
Yet all this courage and vigour of mind could not last
above a fortnight. After which, their hearts, as well as
their bodies, began to fail for hunger ; insomuch as they
found themselves constrained to quit the river and betake
themselves to the woods, seeking out some small villages
where they might find relief for their necessity. But all
was in vain : for, having ranged up and down the woods
for some days without finding the least comfort to their
hungry desires, they were forced to return again to the
river. 'Where being come, they thought it convenient to
descend to the sea-coasts where they had left their ships,
not being able to find in the present enterprize what they
sought for. In this laborious journey they were reduced
to such extremity that many of them devoured their own
shoes, the sheaths of their swords, knives and other
things of this kind, being almost ravenous, and fully
desirous to meet some Indians, intending to sacrifice
them unto their teeth. At last they arrived at the coast
of the sea, where they found some comfort and relief to
their former miseries, and also means to seek more. Yet
notwithstanding, the greatest part of them perished
through faintness and other diseases contracted by
hunger ; which occasioned also the remaining part to-
disperse. Till at last by degrees many or most of them
MISERABLE END OF THE EXPEDITION. 119
fell into the same pit that L'Ollonais did. Of him, and of
his companions I have hitherto given my reader a com-
pendious narrative ; which now I shall continue with the
actions and exploits of Captain Henry Morgan, who may
not undeservedly be called the second L'Ollonais, as not
being unlike or inferior to him either in achievements
against the Spaniards or in robberies of many innocent
people.
CHAPTER IV.
Of the Origin and Descent of Captain Henry Morgan — his
Exploits and a continuation of the most remarkable actions of
ids life.
Captain Henry Morgan was born in the Kingdom of
England, and there in the principality of Wales. His
father was a rich yeoman, or farmer, and of good quality
in that country, even as most who bear that name in
Wales are known to be. Morgan, being as yet young,
had no inclinations to follow the calling of his father ;
and therefore left his country, and came towards the sea-
coasts to seek some other employ more suitable to his
humour, that aspired to something else. There he found
entertainment in a certain port where several ships lay
at anchor, that were bound for the Isle of Barbados.
With these ships he resolved to go in the service of one,
who, according to what is commonly practised in those
parts by the English and other nations, sold him as soon
as he came on shore. He served his time at Barbados,
and when he had obtained his liberty, thence transferred
himself to the Island of Jamaica, there to seek new for-
tunes. Here he found two vessels of Pirates that were
ready to go to sea. Being destitute of employ, he put
himself into one of these ships, with intent to follow the
exercises of that sort of people. He learned in a little
while their manner of living ; and so exactly, that having
performed three or four voyages with some profit and
good success, he agreed with some of his comrades, who
had gotten by the same voyages a small parcel of money,
to join stocks and buy a ship. The vessel being bought,
CAPTAIN HENRY MORGAN. 121
they unanimously chose him to be the captain and com-
mander thereof.
With this ship, soon after, he set forth from Jamaica
to cruize upon the coasts of Campeche ; in which voyage
he had the fortune to take several ships, with which
he returned triumphant to the same island. Here he
found at the same time an old Pirate, named Mansvelt
(of whom we have already made mention in the first
part of this book), who was then busied in equipping
,a considerable fleet of ships with design to land upon
the Continent, and pillage whatever came in his way.
Mansvelt, seeing Captain Morgan return with so many
.prizes, judged him, from his actions, to be of undaunted
•courage ; and hereupon was moved to choose him for
his Vice-Admiral in that expedition. Thus having fitted
•out fifteen ships, between great and small, they set sail
from Jamaica with five hundred men, both Walloons and
French. With this fleet they arrived not long after at
the Isle of St. Catharine, situated near the Continent of
Costa Rica, in the latitude of twelve degrees and a
half North, and distant thirty-five leagues from the
river of Chagre, between North and South. Here they
made their first descent, landing most of their men pre-
:sently after.
Being now come to try their arms and fortune, they
in a short while forced the garrison that kept the island
to surrender and deliver into their hands all the forts and
•castles belonging thereunto. All these they instantly
demolished, reserving only one, wherein they placed one
hundred men of their own party, and all the slaves they
had taken from the Spaniards. With the rest of their
men they marched to another small island near that of
St. Catharine, and adjoining so near to it, that with a
bridge they could get over. In few days they made a
bridge, and passed thither, conveying also over it all the
pieces of ordnance which they had taken upon the great
island. Having ruined and destroyed, with sword and
122 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
fire, both the islands, leaving what orders were necessar)^
at the castle above-mentioned, they put forth to sea again
with the Spaniards they had taken prisoners. Yet these
they set on shore, not long after, upon the firm land,
near a place called Porto Bello. After this they began
to cruize upon the coasts of Costa Rica, till finally they
came to the river of Colla, designing to rob and pillage
all the towns they could find in those parts, and after-
wards to pass to the village of Nata, to do the same.
The President or Governor of Panama, having had
advice of the arrival of these Pirates and the hostilities-
they committed everywhere, thought it his duty to set
forth to their encounter with a body of men. His
coming caused the Pirates to retire suddenly with all
speed and care, especially seeing the whole country
alarmed at their arrival, and that their designs were
known and consequendy could be of no great effect at
that present. Hereupon they returned to the Isle of
St. Catharine, to visit the hundred men they had left in
garrison there. The Governor of these men was a
certain Frenchman named Le Sieur Simon, who behaved
himself very well in that charge, while Mansvelt was
absent. Insomuch that he had put the great island in a
very good posture of defence ; and the litde one he had
caused to be cultivated with many fertile plantations,
which were sufficient to revictual the whole fleet with
provisions and fruits, not only for present refreshment,
but also in case of a new voyage. Mansvelt's inclinations-
were very much bent to keep these two islands in per-
petual possession, as being very commodious, and profit-
ably situated for the use of the Pirates, chiefly because
they were so near the Spanish dominions, and easily to
be defended against them ; as I shall represent in the
third part of this history more at large, in a copper
plate, delineated for this purpose.
Hereupon Mansvelt determined to return to Jamaica,,
with design to send some recruit to the Isle of St..
LE SI EUR SIMON. 123
Catharine, that in case of any invasion of the Spaniards,
the Pirates might be provided for a defence. As soon
as he arrived, he propounded his mind and intentions to
the Governor of that island ; but he Hked not the pro-
positions of Mansvelt, fearing lest by granting such
things he should displease his Master, the King of
England, besides, that giving him the men he desired,
and other necessaries for that purpose, he must of
necessity diminish and weaken the forces of that island
whereof he was Governor. Mansvelt seeing the un-
willingness of the Governor of Jamaica, and that of his
own accord he could not compass what he desired, with
the same intent and designs went to the Isle of Tortuga.
But there, before he could accomplish his desires, or put
in execution what was intended, death suddenly surprised
him, and put a period to his wicked life ; all things here-
by remaining in suspense, until the occasion which I
shall hereafter relate.
Le Sieur Simon, who remained at the Isle of St.
Catharine in quality of Governor thereof, receiving no
news from Mansvelt, his Admiral, was greatly impatient,
and desirous to know what might be the cause thereof.
In the meanwhile Don John Perez de Guzman, being
newly come to the government of Costa Rica, thought
it no ways convenient for the interest of the King of
Spain that that island should remain in the hands of the
Pirates. And hereupon he equipped a considerable
fleet, which he sent to the said island to retake it.
But before he came to use any great violence, he
wrote a letter to Le Sieur Simon, wherein he gave him
to understand, if he would surrender the island to his
Catholic Majesty, he should be very well rewarded ; but
in case of refusal, severely punished when he had forced
him to do it. Le Sieur Simon, seeing no appearance or
probability of being able to defend it alone, nor any
emolument that by so doing could accrue either to him
or his people, after some small resistance delivered up
124 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the island into the hands of its true lord and master,
under the same articles they had obtained it from the
Spaniards. Few days after the surrender of the island,
there arrived from Jamaica an English ship which the
Governor of the said island had sent underhand, wherein
was a good supply of people, both men and women. The
Spaniards from the castle having espied this ship, put
forth the English colours, and persuaded Le Sieur Simon
to go on board, and conduct the said ship into a port
they assigned him. This he performed immediately with
dissimulation, whereby they were all made prisoners. A
certain Spanish engineer has published, before me, an
-exact account and relation of the retaking of the Isle of
St. Catharine by the Spaniards ; which printed paper
being fallen into my hands, I have thought it fit to be
inserted here.
A true Relation and particular Account of the Victory
obtained by the Arms of his Catholic Majesty against
the English Filiates, by the direction a7id valour of
Don John Perez de Guzman, Kiiight of the Order
of St. James, Governor and Captain-General of
Terra Firma and the Province of Veraguas.
The Kingdom of Terra Firma, which of itself is suffi-
ciently strong to repulse and extirpate great fleets, but
more especially the Pirates of Jamaica, had several ways
notice, under several hands, imparted to the Governor
thereof, that fourteen English vessels did cruize upon the
coasts belonging to his Catholic Majesty. The 14th day
of July, 1665, news came to Panama, that the English
Pirates of the said fleet were arrived at Puerto de Naos,
and had forced the Spanish garrison of the Isle of
St. Catharine, whose Governor was Don Estevan del
Campo ; and that they had possessed themselves of the
said island, taking prisoners the inhabitants, and destroy-
ing all that ever they met. Moreover, about the same
DON JOHN PEREZ DE GUZMAN. 125
time Don John Perez de Guzman received particular
information of these robberies from the relation of some
Spaniards who escaped out of the island (and whom he
ordered to be conveyed to Porto Bello), who more dis-
tinctly told him, that the aforementioned Pirates came
into the island the 2nd day of May, by night, without
being perceived by anybody ; and that the next day,
after some disputes by arms, they had taken the fortresses-
and made prisoners all the inhabitants and soldiers, not
one excepted, unless those that by good fortune had
escaped their hands. This being heard by Don John, he
called a council of war, wherein he declared the great pro-
gress the said Pirates had made in the dominions of his
Catholic Majesty. Here likewise he propounded : That
it was absolutely necessary to send some forces to the Isle
of St. Catharine, sufficient to retake it from the Pirates /
the honour and interest of his Majesty of Spain being
very narrowly concerned herein. Otherwise the Pirates
by such conquests might easily in course of time possess
themselves of all the countries thereabouts. To these
reasons some were found who made answer : That the
Pirates, as not being able to subsist in the said island,
would of necessity consume and zuaste themselves, and be
forced to quit it, zuithout any necessity of retaking it.
That consequently it zuas not lüorth the while to engage in
so many expenses and troubles as 7Jiight be foreseen this
would cost. Notwithstanding these reasons to the con-
trary, Don John, as one who was an expert and valiant
soldier, gave order that a quantity of provisions should be
conveyed to Porto Bello, for the use and service of the
militia. And neither to be idle nor negligent in his
master's affairs, he transported himself thither, with no
small danger to his life. Here he arrived the 7th day
of July, with most things necessary to the expedition in
hand ; where he found in the port a good ship, called
St. Vincent, that belonged to the Company of the
Negroes. This ship being of itself a strong vessel and
126 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
well mounted with guns, he manned and victualled very
well and sent to the Isle of St. Catharine, constituting
Captain Joseph Sanchez Ximenez, mayor of the city of
Porto Bello, commander thereof. The people he carried
with him were two hundred threescore and ten soldiers,
and thirty-seven prisoners of the same island, besides
four-and-thirty Spaniards belonging to the garrison of
Porto Bello, nine-and-twenty mulattos of Panama,
twelve Indians very dexterous at shooting with bows
and arrows, seven expert and able gunners, two lieu-
tenants, two pilots, one surgeon, and one religious man
of the Order of St. Francis for their chaplain.
Don John soon after gave his orders to every one of
the officers, instructing them how they ought to behave
themselves, telling them withal that the Governor of
Cartagena would assist and supply them with more men,
'boats, and all things else they should find necessary for
that enterprize ; to which effect he had already written
to the said Governor. On the 24th day of the said
month Don John commanded the ship to weigh anchor,
and sail out of the port. Then seeing a fair wind to
blow, he called before him all the people designed for
that expedition, and made them a speech, encouraging
them to fight against the enemies of their country and
religion, but more especially against those inhuman
Pirates who had heretofore committed so many horrid
and cruel actions against the subjects of his Catholic
Majesty. Withal, promising to every one of them most
liberal rewards : but especially to such as should behave
themselves as they ought in the service of their king and
country. Thus Don John bid them farewell ; and imme-
diately the ship weighed anchor, and set sail under a
favourable gale of wind. The 22nd of the said month
they arrived at Cartagena, and presented a letter to the
Governor of the said city from the noble and valiant Don
John ; who received it, with testimonies of great affection
to the person of Don John and his Majesty's service. And
THE ISLE OF ST. CATHARINE. 127
■seeing their resolute courage to be conformable to his
desires and expectation, he promised them his assistance,
which should be with one frigate, one galleon, one boat,
and one hundred and twenty-six men, the one half out
•of his own garrison, and the other half mulattos. Thus
all of them being well provided with necessaries, they
set forth from the port of Cartagena, the 2nd day of
August ; and the loth of the said month they arrived
within sight of the Isle of St. Catharine, towards the
Western point thereof. And although the wind was con-
trary, yet they reached the port, and came to an anchor
within it ; having lost one of their boats, by foul weather,
at the rock called Quita Signos.
The Pirates, seeing our ships come to an anchor, gave
them presently three guns with bullets ; the which were
soon answered in the same coin. Hereupon the Mayor
Joseph Sanchez Ximenez sent on shore to the Pirates
■one of his officers, to require them in the name of the
Catholic King, his Master, to surrender the island, seeing
they had taken it in the midst of peace between the two
crowns of Spain and England ; and that in case they
would be obstinate, he would certainly put them all to
the sword. The Pirates made answer, That island had
■once before belonged to the Government and dominions
of the King of England ; and that, instead of surrender-
ing it, they preferred to lose their lives.
On Friday, the 13th of the said month, three negroes,
from the enemy, came swimming aboard our Admiral.
These brought intelligence, that all the Pirates that were
upon the island were only threescore and twelve in num-
ber ; and that they were under a great consternation, see-
ing such considerable forces come against them. With this
intelligence the Spaniards resolved to land, and advance
towards the fortresses, the which ceased not to fire as many
great guns against them as they possibly could ; which
were corresponded in the same manner on our side till dark
night. On Sunday, the r5th of the said month, wliich
128 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
was the day of the Assumption of Our Lady, the weather
being very calm and clear, the Spaniards began to-
advance thus. The ship named St. Vincent, which
rode Admiral, discharged two whole broadsides upon
the battery called the Conception. The ship called
St. Peter, that was Vice- Admiral, discharged likewise her
guns against the other battery named St. James. In
the meanwhile our people were landed in small boats,
directing their course towards the point of the battery
last mentioned, and thence they marched towards the
gate called Cortadura. The lieutenant Frances de
Cazeres. being desirous to view the strength of the
enemy, with only fifteen men, was compelled to retreat
in all haste, by reason of the great guns which played so
furiously upon the place where he stood, they shooting
not only pieces of iron and small bullets, but also the
organs of the church, discharging in every shot three-
score pipes at a time.
Notwithstanding this heat of the enemy, Captain Don
Joseph Ramirez de Leyva, with threescore men, made a
strong attack, wherein they fought on both sides very
desperately, till at last he overcame and forced the
Pirates to surrender the fort he had taken in hand.
On the other side. Captain John Galeno, with four-
score and ten men, passed over the hills, to advance that
way towards the castle of St. Teresa. In the meanwhile
the Mayor Don Joseph Sanchez Ximenez, as com-
mander-in-chief, with the rest of his men set forth from
the battery of St. James, passing the fort with four boats,,
and landing in despite of the enemy. About this same
time Captain John Galeno began to advance with the
men he led to the forementioned fortress. So that our
men made three attacks upon the enemy, on three several
sides, at one and the same time, with great courage and
valour. Thus the Pirates, seeing many of their men
already killed and that they could in no manner subsist
any longer, retreated towards Cortadura, where they
SURRENDER OF THE PIRATES. 129
surrendered themselves and likewise the whole island
into our hands. Our people possessed themselves of all,
and set up the Spanish colours, as soon as they had
rendered thanks to God Almighty for the victory obtained
on such a signalized day. The number of dead were
six men of the enemy's, with many wounded, and three-
score and ten prisoners. On our side was found only
one man killed, and four wounded.
There was found upon the island eight hundred pound
of powder, two hundred and fifty pound of small bullets,
with many other military provisions. Among the pri-
soners were taken also two Spaniards, who had borne
arms under the English against his Catholic Majesty.
These were commanded to be shot to death the next day
by order of the Mayor. The loth day of September
arrived at the isle an English vessel, which being seen at
a great distance by the Mayor, he gave order to Le
Sieur Simon, who was a Frenchman, to go and visit the
said ship, and tell them that were on board the island
belonged still to the English. He performed the com-
mands, and found in the said ship only fourteen men,
one woman and her daughter ; who were all instantly
made prisoners.
The English Pirates were all transported to Porto
Bello ; excepting only three, who by order of the Go-
vernor were carried to Panama, there to work in the
castle of St. Jerome. This fortification is an excellent
piece of workmanship, and very strong ; being raised in
the middle of the port, of quadrangular form, and ol
very hard stone. Its elevation or height is eighty-
eight geometrical feet, the walls being fourteen and
the curtains seventy-five feet diameter. It was built at
the expense of several private persons, the Governor ot
the city furnishing the greatest part of the money ; so
that it did not cost his Majesty any sum at all.
VOL. I.
K
CHAPTER V.
Some account of the Island of Oiba. Capt. Morgan attempts to
preserve the Isle of St. Catharine as a refuge and nest to
Pirates ; but fails of his designs. He arrives at and takes
the village of El Puerto del Principe.
Captain Morgan, seeing his predecessor and Admiral
Mansvelt was dead, endeavoured as much as he could,
and used all the means that were possible, to preserve
and keep in perpetual possession the Isle of St. Catha-
rine, seated near that of Cuba. His principal intent was
to consecrate it as a refuge and sanctuary to the Pirates
of those parts, putting it in a sufficient condition of being
a convenient receptacle or storehouse of their preys and
robberies. To this effect he left no stone unmoved
whereby to compass his designs, writing for the same
purpose to several merchants that lived in Virginia and
New England, and persuading them to send him pro-
visions and other necessary things towards the putting
the said island in such a posture of defence as it might
neither fear any external dangers nor be moved at any
suspicions of invasion from any side that might attempt
to disquiet it. At last all his thoughts and cares proved
ineffectual by the Spaniards retaking the said island.
Yet, notwithstanding, Captain Morgan retained his
ancient courage, which instantly put him upon new
designs. Thus he equipped at first a ship, with inten-
tion to gather an entire fleet, both as great and as
strong as he could compass. By degrees he put the
whole matter in execution, and gave order to every
member of his fleet, they should meet at a certain
THE ISLAND OF CUBA. 131
port of Cuba. Here he determined to call a council
and deliberate concerning what were best to be done,
and what place first they should fall upon. Leaving
these new preparations in this condition, I shall here
give my reader some small account of the aforementioned
Isle of Cuba, in whose ports this expedition was hatched,
seeing I omitted to do it in its proper place.
The Island of Cuba lies from East to West, in the
latitude and situation of twenty to three and twenty
degrees North, being in length one hundred and fifty
German leagues and about forty in breadth. Its fertility
is equal to that of the Island of Hispaniola. Besides
which, it affords many things proper for trading and
commerce, such as are hides of several beasts, particu-
larly those that in Europe are called Hides of Havana.
On all sides it is surrounded with a great number of
small islands, which go altogether under the name of
Cayos. Of these little islands the Pirates make great
use, as of their own proper ports of refuge. Here most
commonly they make their meetings and hold their
councils, how to assault more easily the Spaniards. It
is thoroughly irrigated on all sides with the streams of
plentiful and pleasant rivers, whose entries form both
secure and spacious ports, besides many other harbours
for ships, which along the calm shores and coasts adorn
many parts of this rich and beautiful island ; all which
contribute very much to its happiness, by facilitating the
exercise of trade, whereunto they invite both natives and
aliens. The chief of these ports are Santiago, Bayame,
Santa Maria, Espiritu Santo, Trinidad, Xagoa, Cabo de
Corrientes and others, all which are seated on the south
side of the island. On the northern side hereof are found
the following : La Havana, Puerto Mariano, Santa Cruz,
Mata Ricos and Barracoa.
This island has two principal cities, by which the
whole country is governed, and to which all the towns
and villages thereof give obedience. The first of these
132 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
is named Santiago, or St. James, being seated on the
south side, and having under its jurisdiction one half of the
island. The chief magistrates hereof are a Bishop and a
Governor, who command over the villages and towns
belonging to the half above-mentioned. The chief of
these are, on the southern side Espiritu Santo, Puerto
del Principe and Bayame ; on the north side it has
Barracoa and the town called De los Cayos. The
greatest part of the commerce driven at the aforemen-
tioned city of Santiago comes from the Canary Islands,
whither they transport great quantity of tobacco, sugar,
and hides : which sorts of merchandize are drawn to the
head city from the subordinate towns and villages. In
former times the city of Santiago was miserably sacked
by the Pirates of Jamaica and Tortuga, notwithstanding
that it is defended by a considerable castle.
The city and port De la Havana lies between the
north and west side of the island. This is one of the
most renowned and strongest places of all the West
Indies. Its jurisdiction extends over the other half of
the island, the chief places under it being Santa Cruz
on the northern side and La Trinidad on the south.
Hence is transported huge quantity of tobacco, which is
sent in great plenty to New Spain and Costa Rica, even
as far as the South Sea ; besides many ships laden with
this commodity that are consigned to Spain and other
parts of Europe, not only in the leaf but also in rolls.
This city is defended by three castles, very great and
strong ; two of which lie towards the port, and the other
is seated upon a hill that commands the town. 'Tis
esteemed to contain ten thousand families, more or less ;
among which number of people the merchants of this
place trade in New Spain, Campeche, Honduras and
Florida. All the ships that come from the parts afore-
mentioned, as also from Caracas, Cartagena and Costa
Rica, are necessitated to take their provisions in at
Havana, wherewith to make their voyage for Spain ;
CAPTAIN MORGAN EQUIPS A FLEET. 133
this being the necessary and straight course they ought to
steer for the South of Europe and other parts. The
plate-fleet of Spain, which the Spaniards call Flota.
being homeward bound, touches here yearly, to take in
the rest of their full cargo, as hides, tobacco and Cam-
peche-wood.
Captain Morgan had been no longer than two months
in the above-mentioned ports of the South of Cuba, when
he had got together a fleet of twelve sail, between ships
and great boats ; wherein he had seven hundred fighting
men, part of which were English and part French.
They called a council, and some were of opinion 'twere
convenient to assault the city of Havana, under the
obscurity of the night. Which enterprize, they said,
might easily be performed, especially if they could but
take a few of the ecclesiastics, and make them pri-
soners. Yea, that the city might be sacked, before the
castles could put themselves in a posture of defence.
Others propounded, according to their several opinions,
other attempts. Notwithstanding, the former proposal
was rejected, because many of the Pirates had been
prisoners at other times in the said city ; and these
affirmed nothing of consequence could be done, unless
with fifteen hundred men. Moreover, that with all this
number of people they ought first to go to the island
De los Pinos, and land them in small boats about
Matamano, fourteen leagues distant from the aforesaid
city, whereby to accomplish by these means and order
their designs.
Finally, they saw no possibility of gathering so great
a fleet ; and hereupon, with that they had, they con-
cluded to attempt some other place. Among the rest
was found, at last, one who propounded they should go
and assault the town of El Puerto del Principe. This
proposition he endeavoured to persuade, by saying he
knew that place very well, and that, being at a distance
from the sea, it never was sacked by any Pirates ; where-
134 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
by the inhabitants were rich, as exercising their trade for
ready money with those of Havana, who kept here an
estabHshed commerce which consisted chiefly in hides.
This proposal was presently admitted by Captain Morgan
and the chief of his companions. And hereupon they
gave order to every captain to weigh anchor and set
sail, steering their course towards that coast that lies
nearest to El Puerto del Principe. Hereabouts is to
be seen a bay, named by the Spaniards El Puerto de
Santa Maria. Being arrived at this bay, a certain
Spaniard, who was prisoner on board the fleet, swam
ashore by night, and came to the town of Puerto
del Principe, giving account to the inhabitants of the
design the Pirates had against them. This he affirmed
to have overheard in their discourse, while they thought
he did not understand the English tongue. The
Spaniards, as soon as they received this fortunate advice,
began instantly to hide their riches, and carry away what
movables they could. The Governor also immediately
raised all the people of the town, both freemen and
slaves ; and with part of them took a post by which of
necessity the Pirates were to pass. He commanded
likewise many trees to be cut down and laid amidst the
ways to hinder their passage. In like manner he placed
several ambuscades, which were strengthened with some
pieces of cannon, to play upon them on their march. He
gathered in all about eight hundred men, of which he
distributed several into the aforementioned ambuscades,
and with the rest he begirt the town, displaying them upon
the plain of a spacious field, whence they could see the
coming of the Pirates at length.
Captain Morgan, with his men, being now upon the
march, found the avenues and passages to the town
impenetrable. Hereupon they took their way through
the wood, traversing it with great difficulty, whereby
they escaped divers ambuscades. Thus at last they
came into the plain aforementioned, which, from its
attack: on PUERTO DEL PRINCIPE. 135
figure, is called by the Spaniards, La Savana, or the
Sheet. The Governor, seeing them come, made a de-
tachment of a troop of horse, which he sent to charge
them in the front, thinking to disperse them, and, by
putting them to flight, pursue them with his main body.
But this design succeeded not as it was intended. For
the Pirates marched in very good rank and file, at the
sound of their drums and with flying colours. When
they came near the horse, they drew into the form of
a semicircle, and thus advanced towards the Spaniards,
who charged them like valiant and courageous soldiers
for .some while. But seeing that the Pirates were very
dextrous at their arms, and their Governor, with many
of their companions, killed, they began to retreat towards
the wood. Here they designed to save themselves with
more advantage ; but, before they could reach it, the
greatest part of them were unfortunately killed by the
hands of the Pirates. Thus they left the victory to
these new-come enemies, who had no considerable loss
of men in this battle, and but very few wounded, how-
beit the skirmish continued for the space of four hours.
They entered the town, though not without great resist-
ance of such as were within ; who defended themselves as
long as was possible, thinking by their defence to hinder
the pillage. Hereupon many, seeing the enemy within
the town, shut themselves up in their own houses, and
thence made several shot against the Pirates, who, per-
ceiving the mischief of this disadvantage, presently
began to threaten them, saying : If you surrender not
voluntarily, you shall soon see the town in a flame, and
your wives and children torn in pieces before your faces.
With these menaces the Spaniards submitted entirely to
the discretion of the Pirates, believing they could not
continue there long, and would soon be forced to dis-
lodge.
As soon as the Pirates had possessed themselves ot
the town, they enclosed all the Spaniards, both men.
136 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
women, children and slaves, in several churches ; and
gathered all the goods they could find by way of pillage.
Afterwards they searched the whole country round about
the town, bringing in day by day many goods and
prisoners, with much provision. With this they fell to
banqueting among themselves and making great cheer
after their customary way, without remembering the poor
prisoners, whom they permitted to starve in the churches.
In the meanwhile they ceased not to torment them daily
after an inhuman manner, thereby to make them confess
where they had hid their goods, moneys and other
things, though little or nothing was left them. To this
effect they punished also the women and little children,
giving them nothing to eat ; whereby the greatest part
perished.
When they could find no more to rob, and that pro-
visions began to grow scarce, they thought it convenient
to depart and seek new fortunes in other places. Hence
they intimated to the prisoners : They should find
moneys to ransom themselves, else they shotdd be all tracts-
ported to Jamaica. Which being done, if they did not
pay a second ransom for the town, they would turn every
house into ashes. The Spaniards, hearing these severe
menaces, nominated among themselves four fellow-
prisoners to go and seek for the above-mentioned con-
tributions. But the Pirates, to the intent they should
return speedily with the ransoms prescribed, tormented
several in their presence, before they departed, with all
rigour imaginable. After few days, the Spaniards re-
turned from the fatigue of their unreasonable commis-
sions, telling Captain Morgan : We have r2Ln 2ip and
down, and searched all the neighboiciHng woods and places
we 7nost suspected, and yet have 7iot been able to find any
of ottr own party, nor consequently any fruit of our
embassy. But if you are pleased to have a little longer
patience with 2cs, we shall certainly cause all that you
demand to be paid zvitlmi the space of fifteen days. Cap-
LETTERS INTERCEPTED. I37
tain Morgan was contented, as it should seem, to grant
them this petition. But, not long after, there came into
the town seven or eight Pirates, who had been ranging
in the woods and fields, and got thereabouts some con-
siderable booty. These brought among other prisoners
a certain negro, whom they had taken with letters about
him. Captain Morgan having perused them, found they
were from the Governor of Santiago, being written to
some of the prisoners ; wherein he told them : They
should not make too much haste to pay any ransom for
their town or persons, or any other pretext. But, on the
contrary, they should put off the Pirates as well as they
could with excuses and delays ; expecting to be relieved by
him within a short while, when he would certainly come
to their aid. This intelligence being heard by Captain
Morgan, he immediately gave orders that all they had
robbed should be carried on board the ships. And,
withal, he intimated to the Spaniards that the very next
day they should pay their ransoms, forasmuch as he
would not wait one moment longer, but reduce the whole
town to ashes in case they failed to perform the sum he
demanded.
With this intimation Captain Morgan made no men-
tion to the Spaniards of the letters he had intercepted.
Whereupon they made him answer, that it was totally
impossible for them to give such a sum of money in so
short a space of time ; seeing their fellow-townsmen
were not to be found in all the country thereabouts.
Captain Morgan knew full well their intentions, and,
withal, thought it not convenient to remain there any
longer time. Hence he demanded of them only five
hundred oxen or cows, together with sufficient salt
wherewith to salt them. Hereunto he added only this
condition, that they should carry them on board his
ships, which they promised to do. Thus he departed
with all his men, taking with him only six of the prm-
cipal prisoners, as pledges of what he intended. The
138 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
next day the Spaniards brought the cattle and salt to
the ships, and required the prisoners. But Captain
Morgan refused to deliver them till such time as they
had helped his men to kill and salt the beeves. This
was likewise performed in great haste, he not caring
to stay there any longer, lest he should be surprised by
the forces that were gathering against him. Having
received all on board his vessels, he set at liberty the
prisoners he had kept as hostages of his demands.
While these things were in agitation, there happened
to arise some dissensions between the EnMish and the
o
French. The occasion of their discord was as follows : A
certain Frenchman being employed in killing and salting
one of the beeves, an English Pirate came to him and
took away the marrow-bones he had taken out of the ox ;
which sort of meat these people esteem very much.
Hereupon they challenged one another. Being come to
the place of duel, the Englishman drew his sword treache-
rously against the Frenchman, wounding him in the
back, before he had put himself into a just posture of
defence ; whereby he suddenly fell dead upon the place.
The other Frenchmen, desirous to revenge this base
action, made an insurrection against the English. But
Captain Morgan soon extinguished this flame, by com-
manding the criminal to be bound in chains, and thus
carried to Jamaica ; promising to them all he would see
justice done upon him. For although it was permitted
him to challenge his adversary, yet it was not lawful
to kill him treacherously, as he did.
As soon as all things were in readiness, and on
board the ships, and likewise the prisoners set at liberty,,
they sailed thence, directing their course to a certain
island, where Captain Morgan intended to make a divi-
dend of what they had pillaged in that voyage. Being
arrived at the place assigned, they found near the value
of fifty thousand pieces of eight, both in money and
goods. The sum being known, it caused a general
SMALL BOOTY. 139
resentment and grief, to see such a small booty ; which
was not sufficient to pay their debts at Jamaica. Here-
upon Captain Morgan propounded to them, they should
think upon some other enterprize and pillage before they
returned home. But the Frenchmen not being able to
agree with the English, separated from their company,
leaving Captain Morgan alone with those of his own
nation ; notwithstanding all the persuasions he used to
induce them to continue in his company. Thus they
parted with all external signs of friendship ; Captain
Morgan reiterating his promises to them that he would
see justice done upon the criminal. This he performed :
for being arrived at Jamaica, he caused him to be
hanged ; which was all the satisfaction the French
Pirates could expect.
CHAPTER VI.
Captain Morgan resolves to attack and plunder the city of Porto
Bello. To this effect he equips a fleet, and, zvith little expense
and small forces, takes the said place.
Some nations may think that the French having deserted
Captain Morgan, the Enghsh alone could not have suf-
ficient courage to attempt such great actions as before.
But Captain Morgan, who always communicated vigour
with his words, infused such spirits into his men as were
able to put every one of them instantly upon new designs;
they being all persuaded by his reasons, that the sole
execution of his orders would be a certain means of
obtaining great riches. This persuasion had such in-
fluence upon their minds, that with inimitable courage
they all resolved to follow him. The same likewise did
a certain Pirate of Campeche, who in this occasion joined
with Captain Morgan, to seek new fortunes under his
conduct, and greater advantages than he had found
before. Thus Captain Morgan in a few days gathered
a fleet of nine sail, between ships and great boats,
wherein he had four hundred and threescore military
men.
After that all things were in a good posture of readi-
ness, they put forth to sea, Captain Morgan imparting
the design he had in his mind to nobody for that present.
He only told them on several occasions, that he held
as indubitable he should make a good fortune by that
voyage, if strange occurrences altered not the course of
his designs. They directed their course towards the
continent, where they arrived in few days upon the coast
EXPEDITION TO PORTO BELLO. 141
of Costa Rica, with all their fleet entire. No sooner had
they discovered land than Captain Morgan declared his
intentions to the Captains, and presently after to all the
rest of the company. He told them he intended in that
expedition to plunder Porto Bello, and that he would
perform it by night, being resolved to put the whole city
to the sack, not the least corner escaping his diligence.
Moreover, to encourage them, he added : This enterprize
could not fail to succeed well, seeing he had kept it
secret in his mind without revealing it to anybody ;
whereby they could not have notice of his coming. To
this proposition some made answer : They had not a
sufficient number of men wherewith to assault so strontr
and great a city. But Captain Morgan replied : If om-
nimiber is small, our hearts are great. And the fewer
persons we are, the more union and better shares we shall'
have in the spoil. Hereupon, being stimulated with the
ambition of those vast riches they promised themselves
from their good success, they unanimously concluded to
venture upon that design. But, now, to the intent my
reader may better comprehend the incomparable bold-
ness of this exploit, it may be necessary to say some-
thing beforehand of the city of Porto Bello.
The city which bears this name in America is seated
in the Province of Costa Rica, under the latitude of
ten degrees North, at the distance of fourteen leagues
from the Gulf of Darien, and eight westwards from
the port called Nombre de Dios. It is judged to be
the strongest place that the King of Spain possesses
in all the West Indies, excepting two, that is to say
Havana and Cartagena. Here are two castles, almost
inexpugnable, that defend the city, being situated at the
entry of the port ; so that no ship or boat can pass with-
out permission. The garrison consists of three hundred
soldiers, and the town constantly inhabited by four hun-
dred families, more or less. The merchants dwell not
here, but only reside for awhile, when the galleons come
142 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
or go from Spain ; by reason of the unhealthiness of the
air, occasioned by certain vapours that exhale from the
mountains. Notwithstanding, their chief warehouses are
at Porto Bello, howbeit their habitations be all the year
long at Panama, whence they bring the plate upon mules
at such times as the fair begins, and when the ships,
belonging to the Company of Negroes, arrive here to sell
slaves.
Captain Morgan, who knew very well all the avenues
of this city, as also all the neighbouring coasts, arrived
in the dusk of the evening at the place called Puerto de
Naos, distant ten leagues towards the west of Porto
Bello. Being come to this place, they mounted the river
in their ships, as far as another harbour called Puerto
Pontin ; where they came to an anchor. Here they put
themselves immediately into boats and canoes, leaving
in the ships only a few men to keep them and conduct
them the next day to the port. About midnight they
came to a certain place called Estera longa Lemos, where
they all went on shore, and marched by land to the first
posts of the city. They had in their company a certain
Englishman, who had been formerly a prisoner in those
parts, and who now served them for a guide. To him,
and three or four more, they gave commission to take
the sentry, if possible, or kill him upon the place. But
they laid hands on him and apprehended him with such
cunning, that he had no time to give warning with his
musket, or make any other noise. Thus they brought
him, with his hands bound, to Captain Morgan, who
asked him : How things went in the city, and zu hat forces
they had : with many other circumstances, which he was
desirous to know. After every question, they made him
a thousand menaces to kill him, in case he declared not
the truth. Thus they began to advance towards the
city, carrying always the said sentry bound before them.
Having marched about one quarter of a league, they
came to the castle that is near the city, which presently
EXPEDITION TO PORTO BELLO. 143
they closely surrounded, so that no person could get
either in or out of the said fortress.
Being thus posted under the walls of the castle.
Captain Morgan commanded the sentry whom they had
taken prisoner, to speak to those that were within, charg-
ing them to surrender, and deliver themselves up to his
discretion ; otherwise they should be all cut to pieces,
without giving quarter to any one. But they would
hearken to none of these threats, beginning in-
stantly to fire ; which gave notice to the city, and this
was suddenly alarmed. Yet, notwithstanding, although
the Governor and soldiers of the said castle made as
great resistance as could be performed, they were con-
strained to surrender to the Pirates, These no sooner
had taken the castle, than they resolved to be as good
as their words, in putting the Spaniards to the sword,
thereby to strike a terror into the rest of the city. Here-
upon, having shut up all the soldiers and officers as pri-
soners into one room, they instantly set fire to the powder
(whereof they found great quantity), and blew up the
whole castle into the air, with all the Spaniards that were
within. This being done, they pursued the course of
their victory, falling upon the city, which as yet was not
in order to receive them. Many of the inhabitants cast
their precious jewels and moneys into wells and cisterns
or hid them in other places underground, to excuse, as
much as were possible, their being totally robbed. One
party of the Pirates being assigned to this purpose, ran
immediately to the cloisters, and took as many religious
men and women as they could find. The Governor of
the city not being able to rally the citizens, through the
huge confusion of the town, retired to one of the castles
remaining, and thence began to fire Incessantly at the
Pirates. But these were not in the least negligent either
to assault him or defend themselves with all the courage
imaginable. Thus it was observable that, amidst
the horror of the assault, they made very few shot in
144 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
vain. For aiming with great dexterity at the mouths of
the guns, the Spaniards were certain to lose one or two
men every time they charged each gun anew.
The assault of this castle where the Governor was con-
tinued very furious on both sides, from break of day until
noon. Yea, about this time of the day the case was very
dubious which party should conquer or be conquered. At
last the Pirates, perceiving they had lost many men and
as yet advanced but little towards the gaining either this
or the other castles remaining, thought to make use of
fireballs, which they threw with their hands, designing,
if possible, to burn the doors of the castle. But going
about to put this into execution, the Spaniards, from the
wall let fall great quantities of stones and earthen pots
full of powder and other combustible matter, which forced
them to desist from that attempt. Captain Morgan see-
ing this generous defence made by the Spaniards, began
to despair of the whole success of the enterprize. Here-
upon many faint and calm meditations came into his
mind ; neither could he determine which way to turn
himself in that straitness of affairs. Being involved in
these thoughts, he was suddenly animated to continue the
assault, by seeing the English colours put forth at one of
the lesser castles, then entered by his men, of whom he
presently after spied a troop that came to meet him, pro-
claiming victory with loud shouts of joy. This instantly
put him upon new resolutions of making new efforts to
take the rest of the castles that stood out against him ;
especially seeing the chief citizens were fled to them, and
had conveyed thither great part of their riches, with all
the plate belonging to the churches, and other things
dedicated to divine service.
To this effect, therefore, he ordered ten or twelve
ladders to be made, in all possible haste, so broad that
three or four men at once might ascend by them. These
being finished, he commanded all the religious men and
women whom he had taken prisoners to fix them against
CAPTURE OF PORTO BELLO. 145
the walls of the castle. Thus much he had beforehand
threatened the Governor to perform, in case he delivered
not the castle. But his answer was : He would never sur-
render himself alive. Captain Morgan was much persuaded
that the Governor would not employ his utmost forces,
seeing religious women and ecclesiastical persons, ex-
posed in the front of the soldiers to the greatest dangers.
Thus the ladders, as I have said, were put into the hands
of religious persons of both sexes ; and these were
forced, at the head of the companies, to raise and apply
them to the walls. But Captain Morgan was fully de-
ceived in his judgment of this design. For the Governor,
who acted like a brave and courageous soldier, refused
not, in performance of his duty, to use his utmost en-
deavours to destroy whoever came near the walls. The
religious men and women ceased not to cry to him and
beg of him by all the Saints of Heaven he would deliver
the castle, and hereby spare both his and their own lives.
But nothing could prevail with the obstinacy and fierce-
ness that had possessed the Governor's mind. Thus
many of the religious men and nuns were killed before
they could fix the ladders. Which at last being done,
though with great loss of the said religious people, the
Pirates mounted them in great numbers, and with no less
valour ; having fireballs in their hands, and earthen pots
full of powder. All which things, being now at the
top of the walls, they kindled and cast in among the
Spaniards.
This effort of the Pirates was very great: insomuch as
the Spaniards could no longer resist nor defend the castle,
which was now entered. Hereupon they all threw down
their arms, and craved quarter for their lives. Only the
Governor of the city would admit or crave no mercy ;
but rather killed many of the Pirates with his own hands,
and not a few of his own soldiers, because they did not
stand to their arms. And although the Pirates asked
him if he would have quarter, yet he constantly answered :
VOL. I. L
146 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
By no means : I had rather die as a valiant soldier than
be hanged as a coiuard. They endeavoured, as much as
they could, to take him prisoner. But he defended him-
self so obstinately that they were forced to kill him ; not-
withstanding all the cries and tears of his own wife and
daughter, who begged of him upon their knees he would
demand quarter and save his life. When the Pirates had
possessed themselves of the castle, which was about
night, they enclosed therein all the prisoners they had
taken, placing the women and men by themselves, with
some guards upon them. All the wounded were put
into a certain apartment by itself, to the intent their own
complaints might be the cure of their own diseases ; for
no other was afforded them.
This being done, they fell to eating and drinking after
their usual manner ; that is to say, committing in both
these things all manner of debauchery and excess.
After such manner they delivered themselves up to
all sort of debauchery, that if there had been found
only fifty courageous men, they might easily have
retaken the city, and killed all the Pirates. The
next day, having plundered all they could find, they
began to examine some of the prisoners (who had been
persuaded by their companions to say they were the
richest of the town), charging them severely to discover
where they had hidden their riches and goods. But not
being able to extort anything out of them, as they were
not the right persons who possessed any wealth, they at
last resolved to torture them. This they performed with
such cruelty that many of them died upon the rack, or
presently after. Soon after, the President of Panama
had news brought him of the pillage and ruin of Porto
Bello. This intelligence caused him to employ all his
care and industry to raise forces, with design to pursue
and cast out the Pirates thence. But these cared little for
what extraordinary means the President used, as having
their ships near at hand, and being determined to set fire
CAPTAIN MORGAN AT PORTO BELLO. 147
to the city, and retreat. They had now been at Porto
Bello fifteen days, in which space of time they had lost
many of their men, both by unhealthiness of the country
and the extravagant debaucheries they had committed.
Hereupon they prepared for a departure, carrying on
board their ships all the pillage they had got. But,
before all, they provided the fleet with sufficient victuals
for the voyage. While these things were getting ready,
Captain Morgan sent an injunction to the prisoners, that
they should pay him a ransom for the city, or else he
would by fire consume it to ashes, and blow up all the
castles into the air. Withal, he commanded them to send
speedily two persons to seek and procure the sum he de-
manded, which amounted to one hundred thousand pieces
of eight. To this effect, two men were sent to the
President of Panama, who gave him an account of all
these tragedies. The President having now a body of
men in a readiness, set forth immediately towards Porto
Bello, to encounter the Pirates before their retreat. But
these people, hearing of his coming, instead of flying
away, went out to meet him at a narrow passage through
which of necessity he ought to pass. Here they placed
an hundred men very well armed ; who, at the first en-
counter, put to flight a good party of those of Panama.
This accident oblio^ed the President to retire for that
time, as not being yet in a posture of strength to proceed
any farther. Presently after this encounter, he sent a
message to Captain Morgan, to tell him : That in case he
departed not suddenly zuitJi all his forces from Porto
Bello, he ought to expect no quarter for himself nor his
companions, zuhen he should take them, as he hoped soon to
do. Captain Morgan, who feared not his threats, know-
ing he had a secure retreat in his ships which were
near at hand, made him answer : He would not deliver
the castles, before he had received the contribution-money
he had demanded. Which in case it were not paid down,
he would co'tainh burn the whole city, and then leave
148 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
it ; demolishing beforehand the castles, and killing the
prisoners.
The Governor of Panama perceived by this answer that
no means would serve to mollify the hearts of the Pirates,
nor reduce them to reason. Hereupon he determined to
leave them ; as also those of the city, whom he came to re-
lieve, involved in the difficulties of making the best agree-
ment they could with their enemies. Thus, in few days
more, the miserable citizens gathered the contribution
wherein they were fined, and brought the entire sum of
one hundred thousand pieces of eight to the Pirates, for
a ransom of the cruel captivity they were fallen into. But
the President of Panama, by these transactions, was
brought into an extreme admiration, considering that four
hundred men had been able to take such a great city, with
so many strong casdes : especially seeing they had no
pieces of cannon, nor other great guns, wherewith to
raise batteries against them. And what was more,
knowing that the citizens of Porto Bello had always
great repute of being good soldiers themselves, and who
had never wanted courage in their own defence. This
astonishment was so great, that it occasioned him, for
to be satisfied herein, to send a messenger to Captain
Morgan, desiring him to send him some small pattern of
those arms wherewith he had taken with such violence
so great a city. Captain Morgan received this messenger
very kindly, and treated him with great civility. Which
being done, he gave him a pistol and a few small bullets
of lead, to carry back to the President, his Master, tell-
ing him withal : He desired hi^n to accept that slender
pattern of the arms wherewith he had taken Porto Bello,
and keep them for a twelvemonth ; after which ti7?te he
promised to come to Panama and fetch them away. The
Governor of Panama returned the present very soon to
Captain Morgan, giving him thanks for the favour of
lending him such weapons as he needed not, and withal
sent him a ring of gold, with this message : That he
DEPARTURE FROM PORTO BELLO. 149
desired him not to give himself the labour of coming to
Panama, as he had done to Po7'to Bello ; for he did
certify to him, he should not speed so well here as he had
done there.
After these transactions, Captain Morgan (having pro-
vided his fleet with all necessaries, and taken with him
the best guns of the castles, nailing the rest which he
could not carry away) set sail from Porto Bello with all
his ships. With these he arrived in few days at the Island
of Cuba, where he sought out a place wherein with all
quiet and repose he might make the dividend of the spoil
they had got. They found in ready money two hundred
and fifty thousand pieces of eight, besides all other
merchandizes, as cloth linen, silks, and other goods.
With this rich booty they sailed again thence to their
common place of rendezvous, Jamaica. Being arrived,
they passed here some time in all sorts of vices and
debauchery, according to their common manner of doing,
spending with huge prodigality what others had gained
with no small labour and toil.
CHAPTER VIL
Captain Morgan takes the city of Maracaibo, on the coast of
New Venezuela. Piracies committed in those Seas. Rian
of three Spanish ships, that were set forth to hinder the rob-
beries of the Pirates.
Not long after the arrival of the Pirates at Jamaica,
being precisely that short time they needed to lavish
away all the riches above-mentioned, they concluded upon
another enterprize whereby to seek new fortunes. To
this effect Captain Morgan gave orders to all the com-
manders of his ships to meet together at the island called
De la Vaca, or Cow Isle, seated on the south side of the
Isle of Hispaniola, as has been mentioned above. As
soon as they came to this place, there flocked to them
great numbers of other Pirates, both French and English,
by reason the name of Captain Morgan was now rendered
famous in all the neighbouring countries, for the great
enterprizes he had performed. There was at that pre-
sent at Jamaica an English ship newly come from New-
England, well mounted with thirty-six guns. This vessel
likewise, by order of the Governor of Jamaica, came to
join with Captain Morgan to strengthen his fleet, and
give him greater courage to attempt things of huge con-
sequence. With this supply Captain Morgan judged
himself sufficiently strong, as having a ship of such port,
being the greatest of his fleet, in his company. Not-
withstanding, there being in the same place another great
vessel that carried twenty-four iron guns, and twelve of
brass, belonging to the French, Captain Morgan endea-
voured as much as he could to join this ship in like
CAPTAIN MORGAN'S TREACHERY. 151
manner to his own. But the French, not daring to re-
pose any trust in the English, of whose actions they were
not a little jealous, denied absolutely to consent to any
such thing.
The French Pirates belonging to this great ship had
accidentally met at sea an English vessel ; and being
then under an extreme necessity of victuals, they had
taken some provisions out of the English ship without
paying for them, having peradventure no ready money
on board. Only they had given them bills of exchange,
for Jamaica and Tortuga, to receive money there for
what they had taken. Captain Morgan having notice of
this accident, and perceiving he could not prevail with
the French Captain to follow him in that expedition,
resolved to lay hold on this occasion as a pretext to ruin
the French, and seek his own revenge. Hereupon he
invited, with dissimulation, the French commander and
several of his men to dine with him on board the great
ship that was come from Jamaica, as was said before.
Being come thither, he made them all prisoners, pretend-
ing the injury aforementioned done to the English vessel
in taking away some few provisions without pay.
This unjust action of Captain Morgan was soon fol-
lowed by divine punishment, as we may very rationally
conceive. The manner I shall instantly relate. Captain
Morgan, presently after he had taken the French
prisoners abovesaid, called a council to deliberate what
place they should first pitch upon, in the course of this
new expedition. At this council it was determined to
go to the Isle of Savona, there to wait for iha /lota which
was then expected from Spain, and take any of the
Spanish vessels that might chance to straggle from the
rest. This resolution being taken, they began on board
the great ship to feast one another for joy of their new
voyage and happy council, as they hoped it would prove.
In testimony hereof, they drank many healths, and dis-
charged many guns, as the common sign of mirth among
152 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
seamen used to be. Most of the men being drunk, by
what accident is not known the ship suddenly was blown
up into the air, with three hundred and fifty EngHshmen,
besides the French prisoners above-mentioned that were
in the hold. Of all which number, there escaped only
thirty men, who were in the great cabin at some distance
from the main force of the powder. Many more 'tis
thought might have escaped, had they not been so much
overtaken with wine.
The loss of such a great ship brought much conster-
nation and conflict of mind upon the English. They
knew not whom to blame ; but at last the accusation was
laid upon the French prisoners, whom they suspected to
have fired the powder of the ship wherein they were, out
of design to revenge themselves, though with the loss of
their own lives. Hereupon they sought to be revenged
on the French anew, and accumulate new accusations
against the former, whereby to seize the ship and all
that was in it. With this design they forged another
pretext against the said ship, by saying the French
designed to commit piracy upon the English. The
grounds of this accusation were given them by a com-
mission from the Governor of Barracoa, found on board
the French vessel, wherein were these words : That the
said Governor did permit the French to trade in all
Spanish ports, etc. . . . As also to cruize tipon the English
Pirates in zu hat place soever they could find them, because
of the multitude of hostilities which they had com7nitted
against the subjects of his Catholic Majesty, in time of
peace betzuixt the tzvo C^'ozvns. This Commission for
trade was interpreted by the English as an express order
to exercise piracy and war against them, notwithstanding
it was only a bare licence for coming into the Spanish
ports ; the cloak of which permission were those words
inserted : That they should cruize upon the English.
And although the French did sufficiently expound the
true sense of the said Commission, yet they could not
MORGAN PROCEEDS TO OCOA. 153
clear themselves to Captain Morgan, nor his council.
But, in lieu hereof, the ship and men were seized and
sent to Jamaica. Here they also endeavoured to obtain
justice and the restitution of their ship, by all the means
possible. But all was in vain : for instead of justice,
they were long time detained in prison, and threatened
with hanging.
Eight days after the loss of the said ship. Captain
jM organ commanded the bodies of the miserable wretches
who were blown up to be searched for, as they floated
upon the waters of the sea. This he did, not out of any
design of affording them Christian burial, but only to
obtain the spoil of their clothes and other attire. And
if any had golden rings on their fingers, these were cut
off for purchase, leaving them in that condition exposed
to the voracity of the monsters of the sea. At last they
set sail for the Isle of Savona, being the place of their
assignation. They were in all fifteen vessels, Captain
Morgan commanding the biggest, which carried only
fourteen small guns. The number of men belonging to
this fleet were nine hundred and threescore. In few
days after, they arrived at the Cape called Cabo de
Lobos, on the south side of the Isle of Hispaniola,
between Cape Tiburon and Cape Punta d' Espada.
Hence they could not pass, by reason of contrary winds
that continued the space of three weeks, notwithstanding
all the endeavours Captain Morgan used to get forth,
leaving no means unattempted thereunto. At the end
of this time they doubled the cape, and presently after
spied an English vessel at a distance. Having spoken
with her, they found she came from England, and bought
of her, for ready money, some provisions they stood in
need of.
Captain Morgan proceeded in the course of his voyage,
till he came to the port of Ocoa. Here he landed some
of his men, sending them into the woods to seek water
and what provisions they could find, the better to spare
154 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
such as he had already on board his fleet. They killed
many beasts, and among other animals some horses. But
the Spaniards, being not well satisfied at their hunting,
attempted to lay a stratagem for the Pirates. To this
purpose they ordered three or four hundred men to come
from the city of San Domingo, not far distant from this
port, and desired them to hunt in all the parts there-
abouts adjoining the sea, to the intent that if any Pirates
should return, they might find no subsistence. Within
a few days the same Pirates returned, with design to
hunt. But finding nothing to kill, a party of them, being
about fifty in number, straggled farther on into the
woods. The Spaniards, who watched all their motions,
gathered a great herd of cows, and set two or three
men to keep them. The Pirates having spied this herd,
killed a sufficient number thereof ; and although the
Spaniards could see them at a distance, yet they would
not hinder their work for the present. But as soon as
they attempted to carry them away, they set upon them
with all fury imaginable, crying : Mata, inata ! that is,
Kill, kill. Thus the Pirates were soon compelled to
quit the prey, and retreat towards their ships as well as
they could. This they performed, notwithstanding, in
good order, retiring from time to time by degrees ;
and when they had any good opportunity, discharging
full volleys of shot upon the Spaniards. By this means
the Pirates killed many of the enemies, though with
some loss on their own side.
The rest of the Spaniards, seeing what damage they
had sustained, endeavoured to save themselves by flight,
and carry off the dead bodies and wounded of their com-
panions. The Pirates perceiving them to flee, could not
content themselves with what hurt they had already
done, but pursued them speedily into the woods, and
killed the greatest part of those that were remaining.
The next day Captain Morgan, being extremely offended
at what had passed, went himself with two hundred men
PIRATES BAFFLED NEAR SAN DOMINGO. 155
into the woods, to seek for the rest of the Spaniards.
But finding nobody there, he revenged his wrath upon
the houses of the poor and miserable rustics that inhabit
scatteringly those fields and woods ; of which he burnt
a great number. With this he returned to his ships,
something more satisfied in his mind, for having done
some considerable damage to the enemy ; which was
always his most ardent desire.
The huge impatience wherewith Captain Morgan had
waited now this long while for some of the ships, which
were not yet arrived, made him resolve to set sail with-
out them, and steer his course for the Isle of Savona, the
place he had always designed. Being arrived there, and
not finding any of his ships yet come, he was more
impatient and concerned than before, fearing their
loss, or that he must proceed without them. Notwith-
standing, he waited for their arrival some few days
longer. In the meanwhile, having no great plenty of
provisions, he sent a crew of one hundred and fifty men
to the Isle of Hispaniola, to pillage some towns that were
near the city of San Domingo. But the Spaniards,
having had intelligence of their coming, were now so
vigilant and in such good posture of defence, that the
Pirates thought it not convenient to assault them, choos-
ing rather to return empty-handed to Captain Morgan's
presence than to perish in that desperate enterprlze.
At last Captain Morgan, seeing the other ships did
not come, made a review of his people, and found only
five hundred men, more or less. The ships that were
wanting were seven, he having only eight in his company,
of which the greatest part were very small. Thus
having hitherto resolved to cruize upon the coasts of
Caracas, and plunder all the towns and villages he could
meet, finding himself at present with such small forces,
he changed his resolution, by the advice of a French
Captain that belonged to his fleet. This Frenchman had
served L'Ollonais in like enterprizes, and was at the taking
156 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of Maracaibo ; whereby he knew all the entries, pass-
ages, forces and means how to put in execution the same
again in the company of Captain Morgan, to whom,
having made a full relation of all, he concluded to sack
it again the second time, as being himself persuaded,
with all his men, of the facility the Frenchman pro-
pounded. Hereupon they weighed anchor, and steered
their course towards Cura^oa. Being come within sight
of that island, they landed at another, which is near it,
and is called Ruba, seated about twelve leagues from
Curacoa, towards the west. This island is defended but
by a slender garrison, and is inhabited by Indians, who
are subject to the Crown of Spain, and speak Spanish,
by reason of the Roman Catholic religion, which is
here cultivated by some few priests that are sent from
time to time from the neighbouring continent.
The inhabitants of this isle exercise a certain com-
merce or trade with the Pirates that go and come this
way. These buy of the islanders sheep, lambs and kids,
which they exchange unto them for linen, thread and'
other things of this kind. The country is very dry and
barren, the whole substance thereof consisting in those
three things above-mentioned, and in a small quantity of
wheat, which is of no bad quality. This isle produces a
great number of venomous insects, as vipers, spiders
and others. These last are so pernicious here, that if
any man is bitten by them, he dies mad. And the
manner of recovering such persons, is to tie them very
fast both hands and feet, and in this condition to leave
them for the space of four and twenty hours without eat-
ing or drinking the least thing imaginable. Captain
Morgan, as was said, having cast anchor before this
island, bought of the inhabitants many sheep, lambs and
also wood, which he needed for all his fleet. Having
been there two days he set sail again, in the time of the
night, to the intent they might not see what course he
steered.
MORGAN GOES TO MARACAIBO. 157
The next day they arrived at the sea of Maracaibo,
having always great care of not being seen from VigiHas,
for which reason they anchored out of the sight of the
watch-tower. Night being come, they set sail again
towards the land, and the next morning by break of day
found themselves directly over against the bar of the
lake above-mentioned. The Spaniards had built another
fort since the action of L'Ollonais, whence they did now
fire continually against the Pirates, while they were
putting their men into boats to land. The dispute con-
tinued very hot on both sides, being managed with huge
courage and valour from morning till dark night. This
being come, Captain Morgan, in the obscurity thereof,
drew nigh the fort ; which having examined, he found
nobody in it, the Spaniards having deserted it not long
before. They left behind them a match kindled near a
train of powder, wherewith they designed to blow up
the Pirates and the whole fortress, as soon as they were
in it. This design had taken effect, had the Pirates
failed to discover it the space of one quarter of an hour.
But Captain Morgan prevented the mischief by snatch-
ing away the match with all speed, whereby he saved
both his own and his companions' lives. They found
here great quantity of powder, whereof he provided his
fleet ; and afterwards demolished part of the walls, nail-
ing sixteen pieces of ordnance, which carried from twelve
to four and twenty pound of bullet. Here they found
also great number of muskets and other military pro-
visions.
The next day they commanded the ships to enter the
bar ; among which, they divided the powder, muskets
and other things they found in the fort. These things
being done, they embarked again, to continue their
course towards Maracaibo. But the waters were very
low, whereby they could not pass a certain bank that
lies at the entry of the lake. Hereupon they were com-
pelled to put themselves into canoes and small boats
158 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
with which they arrived the next day before Maracaibo,
having no other defence than some small pieces which
they could carry in the said boats. Being landed, they
ran immediately to the fort called De la Barra, which
they found in like manner as the preceding, without any
person in it : for all were fled before them into the woods,
leaving also the town without any people, except a few
miserable poor folk who had nothing to lose.
As soon as they had entered the town the Pirates
searched every corner thereof, to see if they could find
any people that were hidden who might offend them
unawares. Not finding anybody, every party, according
as they came out of their several ships, chose what
houses they pleased to themselves, the best they could
find. The church was deputed for the common corps de
garde, where they lived after their military manner, com-
mitting many insolent actions. The next day after their
arrival, they sent a troop of one hundred men to seek for
the inhabitants and their goods. These returned the
next day following, bringing with them to the number
of thirty persons, between men, women and children,
and fifty mules laden with several good merchandize.
All these miserable prisoners were put to the rack, to
make them confess where the rest of the inhabitants
were and their goods. Amongst other tortures then
used, one was to stretch their limbs with cords, and at
the same time beat them with sticks and other instru-
ments. Others had burning matches placed betwixt
their fingers, which were thus burnt alive. Others had
slender cords or matches twisted about their heads, till
their eyes burst out of the skull. Thus all sort of
inhuman cruelties were executed upon those innocent
people. Those who would not confess, or who had no-
thing to declare, died under the hands of those tyrannical
men. These tortures and racks continued for the space
of three whole weeks ; in which time they ceased not to
send out, daily, parties of men to seek for more people
MORGAN PROCEEDS TO GIBRALTAR. 159
to torment and rob ; they never returning home without
booty and new riches.
Captain Morgan, having now got by degrees into his
hands about one hundred of the chief famihes, with all
their goods, at last resolved to go to Gibraltar, even as
L'Ollonais had done before. With this design he equipped
his fleet, providing it- very sufficiently with all necessary
things. He put likewise on board all the prisoners ;
and, thus weighing anchor, set sail for the said place,
with resolution to hazard the battle. They had sent
before them some prisoners to Gibraltar, to denounce to
the inhabitants they should surrender : otherwise Captain
Morgan would certainly put them all to the sword, with-
out giving quarter to any person he should find alive.
Not long after, he arrived with his fleet before Gibraltar,
whose inhabitants received him with continual shooting
of great cannon-bullets. But the Pirates, instead of
fainting hereat, ceased not to encourage one another,
saying : We must make one meal upon bitter things, be-
fore zve come to taste the sweetness of the sugar this place
affords.
The next day, very early in the morning, they landed
all their men. And being guided by the Frenchman
above-mentioned, they marched towards the town, not by
the common way but crossing through the woods ; which
way the Spaniards scarce thought they would have come.
For, at the beginning of their march, they made appearance
as if they intended to come the next and open way that
led to the town, hereby the better to deceive the Spani-
ards. But these remembering as yet full well what hos-
tilities L'Ollonais had committed upon them but two years
before, thought it not safe to expect the second brunt,
and hereupon were all fled out of the town as fast
as they could, carrying with them all their goods and
riches, as also all the powder, and having nailed all the
great guns : insomuch as the Pirates found not one person
in the whole city, excepting only one poor and innocent
«6o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
man who was born a fool. This man they asked whither
the inhabitants were fled, and where they had absconded
their goods. To all which questions and the like he
constantly made answer: / knoiv nothing, I knozu nothing.
But they presently put him to the rack, and tortured
him with cords ; which torments forced him to cry out :
Do not toi'ture me any more, but come with me and I will
show yon my goods and my riches. They were persuaded,
as it should seem, he was some rich person who had
disguised himself under those clothes so poor as also that
innocent tongue. Hereupon they went along with him ;
and he conducted them to a poor and miserable cottage,
wherein he had a few earthen dishes, and other things of
Httle or no value ; and amongst these, three pieces of
eight, which he had concealed with some other trumpery
underground. After this, they asked him his name ; and
he readily made answer : My name is Don Sebastian
Sanchez, and I am brother to the Governor of Maracaibo.
This foolish answer, it must be conceived, these men,
though never so inhuman, took for a certain truth. For
no sooner had they heard it, but they put him again upon
the rack, lifting him up on high with cords, and tying huge
weights to his feet and neck ; besides which cruel and
stretching torment, they burnt him alive, applying palm-
leaves burning to his face, under which miseries he died
in half-an-hour. After his death they cut the cords
wherewith they had stretched him, and dragged him
forth into the adjoining woods, where they left him with-
out burial.
The same day they sent out a party of Pirates to seek
for the inhabitants, upon whom they might employ their
inhuman cruelties. These brought back with them an
honest peasant with two daughters of his, whom they had
taken prisoners, and whom they intended to torture as
they used to do with others, in case they showed not the
places where the inhabitants had absconded themselves.
The peasant knew some of the said places, and hereupon
MORGAN AT GIBRALTAR. i6i
seeing himself threatened with the rack, went with the
Pirates to show them. But the Spaniards perceiving
their enemies to range everywhere up and down the
woods, were already fled thence much farther off into
the thickest parts of the said woods, where they built
themselves huts, to preserve from the violence of the
weather those few goods they had carried with them.
The Pirates judged themselves to be deceived by the
said peasant ; and hereupon, to revenge their wrath up-
on him, notwithstanding all the excuses he could make,
and his humble supplications for his life, they hanged
him upon a tree.
After this, they divided into several parties, and went
to search the plantations. For they knew the Spaniards
that were absconded could not live upon what they found
in the woods, without coming now and then to seek pro-
visions at their own country houses. Here they found a
certain slave, to whom they promised mountains of gold,
and that they would give him his liberty by transporting
him to Jamaica, in case he would show them the places
where the inhabitants of Gibraltar lay hidden. This
fellow conducted them to a party of Spaniards, whom they
instandy made all prisoners, commanding the said slave
to kill some of them before the eyes of the rest ; to the
intent that by this perpetrated crime he might never
be able to leave their wicked company. The negro,
according to their orders, committed many murders and
insolent actions upon the Spaniards, and followed the
unfortunate traces of the Pirates, who after the space
of eight days, returned to Gibraltar with many prisoners
and some mules laden with riches. They examined
every prisoner by himself (who were in all about two
hundred and fifty persons) where they had absconded the
rest of their goods, and if they knew of their fellow-
townsmen. Such as would not confess were tormented
after a most cruel and inhuman manner. Among the
rest, there happened to be a certain Portuguese, who by
VOL. I. ^
i62 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the information of a negro was reported, though falsely,
to be very rich. This man was commanded to produce
his riches. But his answer was, he had no more than
one hundred pieces of eight in the whole world, and that
these had been stolen from him two days before, by a
servant of his. Which words, although he sealed with
many oaths and protestations, yet they would not believe
him. But dragging him to the rack, without any regard
to his age, as being threescore years old, they stretched
him with cords, breaking both his arms behind his
shoulders.
This cruelty went not alone. For he not being able
or willing to make any other declaration than the above-
said, they put him to another sort of torment that was
worse and more barbarous than the preceding. They
tied him with small cords by his two thumbs and great-
toes to four stakes that were fixed in the g^round at a con-
venient distance, the whole weight of his body being
pendent in the air upon those cords. Then they thrashed
upon the cords with great sticks and all their strength,
so that the body of this miserable man was ready to
perish at every stroke, under the severity of those
horrible pains. Not satisfied as yet with this cruel torture,
they took a stone which weighed above two hundred
pound, and laid it on his belly, as if they intended to
press him to death. At which time they also kindled
palm-leaves, and applied the flame to the face of this un-
fortunate Portuguese, burning with them the whole skin,
beard and hair. At last these cruel tyrants, seeing that
neither with these tortures nor others they could get any-
thing out of him, they untied the cords, and carried him,
being almost half dead, to the church, where was their
corps du garde. Here they tied him anew to one of
the pillars thereof, leaving him in that condition, without
giving him either to eat or drink, except very sparingly,
and so little as would scarce sustain life, for some days.
Four or five being past, he desired that one of the
CRUEL TORTURES BY THE PIRATES. 163
prisoners niight have the Hberty to come to him, by
whose means he promised he would endeavour to raise
some money to satisfy their demands. The prisoner
whom he required was brought to him ; and he ordered
him to promise the Pirates five hundred pieces of eight
for his ransom. But they were both deaf and obstinate
at such a small sum, and, instead of accepting it, did beat
him cruelly with cudgels, saying unto him : Old fellow,
instead of five Jmndred you must say five hundred thojt-
sand pieces of eight ; otherwise you shall here end your
life. Finally, after a thousand protestations that he was
but a miserable man, and kept a poor tavern for his living,
he agreed with them for the sum of one thousand pieces
of eight. These he raised in few days, and having paid
them to the Pirates, got his liberty ; although so horribly
maimed in his body, that 'tis scarce to be believed he could
survive many weeks after.
Several other tortures besides these were exercised
upon others, which this Portuguese endured not. If with
this they were minded to show themselves merciful to
those wretches, thus lacerated in the most tender parts
of their bodies, their mercy was to run them through
and through with their swords ; and by this means rid
them soon of their pains and life. Otherwise, if this
were not done, they used to lie four or five days under
the agonies of death, before dying. Others were cruci-
fied by these tyrants, and with kindled matches were
burnt between the joints of their fingers and toes.
Others had their feet put into the fire, and thus were left
to be roasted alive. At last, having used both these and
other cruelties with the white men, they began to practice
the same over again with the negroes, their slaves ; who
were treated with no less inhumanity than their masters.
Among these slaves was found one who promised
Captain Morgan to conduct him to a certain river belong-
ing to the lake, where he should find a ship and four
boats richly laden with goods that belonged to the inhabit
l64 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
tants of Maracaibo, The same slave discovered likewise
the place where the Governor of Gibraltar lay hidden, to-
gether with the greatest part of the women of the town.
But all this he revealed, through great menaces where-
with they threatened to hang him, in case he told not
what he knew. Captain Morgan sent away presently
two hundred men in two saëties, or great boats, towards
the river above-mentioned, to seek for what the slave had
discovered. But he himself, with two hundred and fifty
more, undertook to go and take the Governor. This
gentleman was retired to a small island seated in the
middle of the river, where he had built a litde fort, after
the best manner he could, for his defence. But hearing
that Captain Morgan came in person with great forces
to seek him, he retired farther off to the top of a moun-
tain not much distant from that place ; unto which
there was no ascent, but by a very narrow passage.
Yea, this was so straight, that whosoever did pretend to
gain the ascent, must of necessity cause his men to pass
one by one. Captain Morgan spent two days before he
could arrive at the litde island above-mentioned. Thence
he designed to proceed to the mountain where the
Governor was posted, had he not been told of the im-
possibility he should find in the ascent, not only of the
narrowness of the path that led to the top, but also be-
cause the Governor was very well provided with all sorts
of ammunition above. Besides that, there was fallen a
huge rain, whereby all the baggage belonging to the
Pirates, and their powder, was wet. By this rain also
they had lost many of their men at the passage over a
river that was overflown. Here perished likewise some
women and children, and many mules laden with plate
and other goods ; all which they had taken in the fields
from the fugitive inhabitants. So that all things were in
a very bad condition with Captain Morgan, and the
bodies of his men as much harassed, as ought to be in-
ferred from this relation. Whereby, if the Spaniards in
DEPARTURE FROM GIBRALTAR. 165
that juncture of time had had but a troop of fifty men
well armed with pikes or spears, they might have en-
tirely destroyed the Pirates, without any possible resis-
tance on their sides. But the fears which the Spaniards
had conceived from the beginning were so great, that
only hearing the leaves on the trees to stir, they often
fancied them to be Pirates. Finally, Captain Morgan
and his people, having upon this march sometimes waded
up to their middles in water for the space of half or whole
miles together, they at last escaped for the greatest part.
But of the woman and children they brought home
prisoners, the major part died.
Thus twelve days after they set forth to seek the Gover-
nor, they returned to Gibraltar with a great number of
prisoners. Two days after arrived also the two sa'éhes
that went to the river, bringing with them four boats and
some prisoners. But as to the greatest part of the mer-
chandize that were in the said boats, they found them
not, the Spaniards having unladed and secured them, as
having intelligence beforehand of the coming of the
11
Pirates. Whereupon they designed also, when the mer-
chandize were all taken out, to burn the boats. Yet the
Spaniards made not so much haste as was requisite to
unlade the said vessels, but that they left both in the
ship and boats great parcels of goods, which, they being
fled from thence, the Pirates seized, and brought thereof
a considerable booty to Gibraltar. Thus, after they had
been in possession of the place five entire weeks,
and committed there infinite number of murders,
robberies, and suchlike insolences, they concluded upon
their departure. But before this could be performed,
for the last proof of their tyranny, they gave orders to
some prisoners to go forth into the woods and fields, and
collect a ransom for the town ; otherwise they would cer-
tainly burn every house down to the ground. Those poor
afflicted men went forth as they were sent. And alter
they had searched every corner of the adjoining fields and
1 56 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
woods, they returned to Captain Morgan, telling him they
had scarce been able to find anybody. But that to such
as they had found, they had proposed his demands ; to
which had they made answer that the Governor had
prohibited them to give any ransom for not burning the
town. But notwithstanding any prohibition to the con-
trary, they beseeched him to have a little patience, and
among themselves they would collect to the sum of
five thousand pieces of eight. And for the rest, they
would give him some of their own townsmen as hostages,
whom he might carry with him to Maracaibo, till such
time as he had received full satisfaction.
Captain Morgan having now been long time absent
from Maracaibo, and knowing the Spaniards had had
sufficient time wherein to fortify themselves, and hinder
his departure out of the lake, granted them their proposi-
tion above-mentioned ; and, withal, made as much haste
as he could to set things in order for his departure. He
gave liberty to all the prisoners, having beforehand put
them every one to the ransom ; yet he detained all the
slaves with him. They delivered to him four persons
that were agreed upon for hostages of what sums of
money more he was to receive from them ; and they
desired to have the slave of whom we made mention
above, intending to punish him according to his deserts.
But Captain Morgan would not deliver him, being per-
suaded they would burn him alive. At last they weighed
anchor, and set sail with all the haste they could, directing
their course towards Maracaibo. Here they arrived in
four days, and found all things in the same posture they
had left them when they departed. Yet here they re-
ceived news, from the information of a poor distressed
old man, who was sick and whom alone they found in
the town, that three Spanish men-of-war were arrived at
the entry of the lake, and there waited for the return
of the Pirates out of those parts. Moreover, that the
castle at the entry thereof was again put into a good pos-
THE SPANIARDS AT MARACAIBO. 167
ture of defence, being well provided with great guns and
men and all sorts of ammunition.
This relation of the old man could not choose but
cause some disturbance in the mind of Captain Morgan,
who now was careful how to get away through those nar-
row passages of the entry of the lake. Hereupon he sent
one of his boats, the swiftest he had, to view the entry,
and see if things were as they had been related. The
next day the boat came back, confirming what was said,
and assuring they had viewed the ships so near that they
had been in great danger of the shot they had made at
them. Hereunto they added that the biggest ship was
mounted with forty guns, the second with thirty, and the
smallest with four and twenty. These forces were much
beyond those of Captain Morgan ; and hence they caused
a general consternation in all the Pirates, whose biggest
vessel had not above fourteen small o^uns. Everv one
judged Captain Morgan to despond in his mind and be
destitute of all manner of hopes, considering the difficulty
either of passing safely with his little fleet amidst those
great ships and the fort, or that he must perish. How
to escape any other way by sea or by land, they saw no
opportunity nor convenience. Only they could have
wished that those three ships had rather come over the
lake to seek them at Maracaibo, than to remain at the
mouth of the strait where they were. For at that
passage they must of necessity fear the ruin of their fleet,
which consisted only for the greatest part of boats.
Hereupon, being necessitated to act as w^ell as he could,
Captain Morgan resumed new courage, and resolved to
show himself as yet undaunted with these terrors. To
this intent he boldly sent a Spaniard to the Admiral of
those three ships, demanding of him a considerable
tribute or ransom for not putting the city of Maracaibo
to the flame. This man (who doubtless was received by
the Spaniards with great admiration of the confidence
and boldness of those Pirates) returned two days after.
i68 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
bringing to Captain Morgan a letter from the said
Admiral, whose contents were as follows.
Letter of Don Alonso del Campo y Espinosa, Ad-
miral of the Spanish Fleet, unto Captain Morgan,
commander of the pirates.
Ha ving tmderstood by all our friends a7id neighbours the
unexpected news, that you have dared to attempt and coin-
viit hostilities in the countries, cities, towns and villages
belonging to the dominions of his Catholic Majesty,
my Sovereign Lord and Master ; I let you understand
by these lines, that I am come to this place, accoi^ding
to my obligation, nigh tinto that castle which you took
out of the hands o f a parcel of cowards ; where I have put
things into a very good posture of defence, and mounted
again the artillery ivhich you had nailed and dismounted.
My intent is to dispute ivith you yoztr passage out of the
lake, and follow and pursue you everywhere, to the end
you may see the performance of my duty. Notwithstand-
ing, if you be contented to surrender with humility all that
you have taken, together with the slaves and all other
prisoners, I luill let you. freely pass, without trouble or
molestation ; upon condition that you retire home presently
to your own country. But in case that you make any
resistance or opposition unto these things that I pj'offer unto
you, I do assure you I will coinmand boats to come from
Caracas, wherein I will put my troops, and coming to
Maracaibo, will cause yoic tUterly to perish, by putting
you every man to the sword. This is m^y last and absolute
resolution. Be prudent, the^^efore, and do not abuse my
bounty with ingratitude. I have with me very good soldiers,
who desire nothing more ardently than to revenge on you
and your people all the cruelties and base infamous actions
you have committed tpon the Spanish nation in A^^iei^ica.
Dated on board the Royal Ship named the Magdalen, lying
LETTER FROM THE SPANISH ADMIRAL. 169
at anchor at the entry of the Lake of Maracaibo, this 24//^
day of April, 1669.
Don Alonso del Campo y Espinosa.
As soon as Captain Morgan had received this letter,
he called all his men together in the market-place of
Maracaibo ; and, after reading the contents thereof, both
in French and English, he asked their advice and reso-
lutions upon the whole matter, and whether they had
rather surrender all they had purchased, to obtain their
liberty, than fight for it ?
They answered all unanimously : They had rather
fight, and spill the very last drop of blood they had in
their veins, than surrender so easily the booty they had
got with so much danger of their lives. Among the rest,
one was found who said to Captain Morgan : Take you
care for the rest, and I will undertake to destroy the
biggest of those ships ivith only twelve 7nen. The mangier
shall be, by making a brulot, or fire-ship, of that vessel ive
took in the river of Gibraltar. Which, to the intent she
may not be knoivn for a fire-ship, we will fill her decks
with logs of wood, standing with hats and Mo7ttera-caps,
to deceive their fight zuith the representation of men. The
same we will do at the port-holes that serve for the guns,
which shall be filled zvith counterfeit cannon. At the
stern we will hang out the English colours, and persuade
the enemy she is one of our best men-of-war that goes to
fight them. This proposition, being heard by the Junta
(i.e., council), was admitted and approved of by every
one ; howbeit their fears were not quite dispersed.
For notwithstanding what had been concluded there,
they endeavoured the next day to see if they could come
to an accommodation with Don Alonso. To this effect
Captain Morgan sent him two persons, with these follow-
ing propositions. First : That he zuo^tld quit Maracaibo,
zvithout doing any damage to the town, nor exacting any
ransom f or the firing thereof . Secondly : That he would
lyo
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
set at liberty one half of the slaves, and likeimse all other
prisoners, without ransom. Thirdly : That he would
send home freely the fonr chief inhabitants of Gibraltar,
zühich he had in his custody as hostages for the contribu-
tions those people had promised to pay. These proposi-
tions from the Pirates, being understood by Don Alonso,
were instandy rejected every one, as being dishonourable
for him to grant. Neither would he hear any word more
of any other accommodation ; but sent back this message :
That in case they surrendered not themselves volunta7Hly
into his hands within the space of two days, under the
conditions which he had offered thein by his letter, he
would immediately come and force them to do it.
No sooner had Captain Morgan received this message
from Don Alonso, than he put all things in order to fight,
resolving to get out of the lake by main force, and with-
out surrendering anything. In the first place, he com-
manded all the slaves and prisoners to be tied and
guarded very well. After this, they gathered all the
pitch, tar and brimstone they could find in the whole
town, therewith to prepare the fire-ship above-mentioned.
Likewise they made several inventions of powder and
brimstone, with great quantities of palm-leaves, very well
anointed with tar. They covered very well their coun-
terfeit cannon, laying under every piece thereof many
pounds of powder. Besides which, they cut down many
outworks belonging to the ship, to the end the powder
might exert its strength the better. Thus they broke
open also new port-holes ; where, instead of guns they
placed litde drums, of which the negroes make use.
Finally, the decks were handsomely beset with many
pieces of wood dressed up in the shape of men with hats,
or monteras, and likewise armed with swords, muskets
and bandoliers.
The brulot or fire-ship, being thus fitted to their
purpose, they prepared themselves to go to the entry of
the port. All the prisoners were put into one great boat,
THE SPANISH ARMADA DESTROYED. 171
and in another of the biggest they placed all the women,
plate, jewels and other rich things which they had. Into
others they put all the bales of goods and merchandize,
and other things of greatest bulk. Each of these boats
had twelve men on board, very well armed. The brulot
had orders to go before the rest of the vessels, and pre-
sently to fall foul with the great ship. All things being
in readiness, Captain Morgan exacted an oath of all his
comrades, whereby they protested to defend themselves
against the Spaniards, even to the last drop of blood,
without demanding quarter at any rate : promising them
withal, that whosoever thus behaved himself should be
very well rewarded.
With this disposition of mind and courageous resolution,
they set sail to seek the Spaniards, on the 30th day of
April, 1669. They found the Spanish fleet riding at
anchor in the middle of the entry of the lake. Captain
Morgan, it being now late and almost dark, commanded
all his vessels to come to an anchor ; with design to
fight thence even all ni^ht, if they should provoke him
thereunto. He gave orders that a careful and vigilant
watch should be kept on board every vessel till the morn-
ing, they being almost within shot, as well as within fight,
of the enemy. The dawning of the day being come,
they weighed anchors, and set sail again, steering their
course direcdy towards the Spaniards; who observing
them to move, did instandy the same. The fire-ship,
sailing before the rest, fell presendy upon the great ship,
and grappled to her sides in a short while. Which by
the Spaniards being perceived to be a fire-ship, they at-
tempted to escape the danger by putting her off ; but in
vain, and too late. For the flame suddenly seized her
timber and tackling, and in a short space consumed all
the stern, the forepart sinking into the sea, whereby she
perished. The second Spanish ship, perceiving the
Admiral to burn, not by accident but by industry of the
enemy, escaped towards the casde, where the Spaniards
172 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
themselves caused her to sink ; choosing this way of
losing their ship, rather than to fall into the hands ot
those Pirates, which they held for inevitable. The third,
as having no opportunity nor time to escape, was taken
by the Pirates. The seamen that sank the second ship
near the castle, perceiving the Pirates to come towards
them to take what remains they could find of their ship-
wreck (for some part of the bulk was extant above water),
set fire in like manner to this vessel, to the end the Pirates
might enjoy nothing of that spoil. The first ship being
set on fire, some of the persons that were in her swam
towards the shore. These the Pirates would have taken
up in their boats ; but they would neither ask nor admit
of any quarter, choosing rather to lose their lives than
receive them from the hands of their persecutors, for such
reasons as I shall relate hereafter.
The Pirates were extremely gladdened at this signal
victory, obtained in so short a time and with so great
inequality of forces ; whereby they conceived greater
pride in their minds than they had before. Hereupon
they all presently ran ashore, intending to take the castle.
This they found very well provided both with men, great
cannon and ammunition ; they having no other arms than
muskets and a few fire-balls in their hands. Their own
artillery they thought incapable, for its smallness, of
making any considerable breach in the walls. Thus they
spent the rest of that day, firing at the garrison with their
muskets till the dusk of the evening, at which time they
attempted to advance nearer to the walls, with intent
to throw in the fire balls. But the Spaniards, resolving
to sell their lives as dear as they could, continued firing
so furiously at them, that they thought it not convenient
to approach any nearer nor persist any longer in that
dispute. Thus having experienced the obstinacy of the
enemy, and seeing thirty of their own men already
dead, and as many more wounded, they retired to their
ships.
THE SPANISH ARMADA DESTROYED. 173
The Spaniards believing the Pirates would return the
next day to renew the attack, as also make use of their
own cannon against the castle, laboured very hard all
night to put all things in order for their coming. But
more particularly they employed themselves that night
in digging down and making plain some little hills and
eminent places, whence possibly the castle might be
offended.
But Captain Morgan intended not to come ashore
again, busying himself the next day in taking prisoners
some of the men who still swam alive upon the waters, and
hoping to get part of the riches that were lost in the two
ships that perished. Among the rest, he took a certain
pilot, who was a stranger and who belonged to the lesser
ship of the two, with whom he held much discourse,
enquiring of him several things. Such questions were :
What number of people those three ships had had in
them 1 Whether they expected any more ships to come ?
From what port they set forth the last time, when they
came to seek them out ? His answer to all these ques-
tions was as follows, which he delivered in the Spanish
tongue : Noble sir, be pleased to pai'don and spare vie,
that no evil be done to vie, as being a stranger to this
nation I have served, and I shall sincerely inform you of
all that passed till our arrival at this lake. We were
sent by orders from the Siprenie Council of State in Spain,
being six men-of-war well-equipped into these seas, zvith
histructions to crinze ttpon the English pirates, and root
them out fro7ii these parts by destroying as many of them
as we could. These orders were given, by reason of the
news brought to the Court of Spain of the loss and ruin
of Porto Bello, and other places. Of all which damages
and hostilities co^nmitted here by the English veiy dismal
lamentations have oftentimes penetrated the ears both of
the Catholic King and Council to zuhom belongs the care
and preservation of this New World. And although the
Spanish Court has many times by their Ambassadors sent
174 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
coiuphiints hereof to the King of England, yet it has been
the constant answer of his Majesty of Great Britain,
That he never gave any Letters-patent nor Commissions f or
the acting any hostility whatsoever against the subjects of
the King of Spain. Hereupon the Catholic King, being
resolved to avenge his subjects and punish these proceed-
ings, commanded six ?nen-ofwar to be equipped, luhich he
sent into these parts tinder the C07nniand of Don Attgustin
de Bustos, who was constituted Admiral of the said fleet.
He covinianded the biggest ship thereof, named Nuestra
Senora de la Soledad, moimted with eight and forty great
o-uns and ei^ht small ones. The Vice- Admiral was Don
Alonso del Campo y Espinosa, who commanded the second
ship, called ha. Concepcion, which carried forty-four great
o-uns and eizht small ones. Besides which vessels, tJiere
were also four more ; whereof the first was 7iamed the
Magdalen, and was moimted with thirty-six great guns
and tzuclve small ones, having on board two hundred and
fifty men. The second was called St. Lewis, with twenty-
six great guns, twelve small ones and two hund^^ed men.
The third was called La Marquesa, which carried sixtee^i
great guns, eight small ones and one himdred and fifty
men. The fourth and last, Nuestra Sefiora del Carmen,
with eighteen great gtms, eight small ones and likewise
two hundred and fifty men.
We were now arrived at Cartagena, when the two
greatest ships received orders to return into Spain, as being
judged too big f or cruizing upon these coasts. With the
four ships remaining, Don Alonso del Campo y Espinosa
departed thence towards Campcche, to seek out the English.
We arrived at the port of the said city, zvhere being sur-
prised by a huge storm that blew from the north, we lost
one of our four ships ; being that which I named in the
last place among the rest. Hence we set sail for the Isle of
Hispaniola ; in sight of which we came within few days,
and directed our course to the poi^t of San Domingo. Here
we received intelligence there had passed that way a fieet
THE SPANISH ARMADA DESTROYED. 175
from Jamaica, and that some men thereof haviiig landed at
a place called A Ita Gracia, the inhabitants had taken one
of them prisoner, who confessed their ivhole design was to
go and pillage the city of Caracas. With these itews Don
Alonso instantly weighed anchor, and set sail thence, cross-
ing over to the continent, till we came in sight of Caracas.
Hej^e we found not the English; but happened to 7neet
with a boat which ceiHified us they were in the Lake of
Maracaibo, and that the fleet consisted of seven sjnall ships
and one boat.
Upon this intelligence we arrived here; and coming nigh
unto the entiy of the lake, we shot off a gun to demand a
pilot from the shore. Those on land perceiving that zue
were Spaniards, came willingly to us with a pilot, and
toldtts that the English had take7i the city of Maracaibo,
and that they were at present at the pillage of Gibraltar.
Don Alonso, having understood this neivs, made a hand-
S07ne speech to all his soldiers and mariners, encouraging
them to perform their dnty, and withal promising to
divide among them all they shoidd take from the English.
After this, he gave order that the guns ivhich zve had taken
out of the ship that was lost should be put into the castle,
and thei^e mounted for its defence, with tivo pieces more
out of his own ship, of eighteen pounds port each. The
pilots conducted tts into the p07^t, and Don Alonso com-
manded the people that were on shore to come to his pre-
sence, to whom he gave orders to repossess the castle, and
re-inforce it with one hundred men more than it had be-
fore its being taken by the English. Not long after, we
received news that you zvere retiirned from Gibraltar to
Maracaibo ; to ivhich place Don Alonso iv rote you a Letter,
giving you account of his arrival and design, and zv it hal
exhorting you to restore all that you had taken. This you
refused to do ; zvhereupon he renewed his promises and
intentions to his soldiers and seamen. And having given
a very good supper to all his people, he persuaded them
neither to take nor give any quarter to the English that
176 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
should fall into their hands. This was the occasion of
so many being drozvned, who dared not to crave any
quarter for their lives, as knowing their own intentions
of giving none. Tivo days before you came against us, a
certain negro came on board Don Alonsds ship, telling
him : Sir, be pleased to have great care of youi'self ; for
the English have prepared a fire-ship with design to burn
your feet. But Don Alonso zuould not believe this in-
telligence, his answer being: How can that bef Have
they, peradventure, wit enough to build a fire-ship ? or
what instruments have they to do it zuithal ?
The pilot above-mentioned having related so distinctly
all the aforesaid things to Captain Morgan, was very well
used by him, and, after some kind proffers made to
him, remained in his service. He discovered moreover
to Captain Morgan, that in the ship which was sunk,
there was a great quantity of plate, even to the value of
forty thousand pieces of eight. And that this was cer-
tainly the occasion they had oftentimes seen the Spaniards
in boats about the said ship. Hereupon Captain Mor-
gan ordered that one of his ships should remain there
to watch all occasions of getting out of the said vessel
what plate they could. In the meanwhile he himself,
with all his fleet, returned to Maracaibo, where he re-
fitted the great ship he had taken of the three afore-men-
tioned. And now being well accommodated, he chose it
for himself, giving his own bottom to one of his captains.
After this he sent again a messenger to the Admiral,
who was escaped on shore and got into the castle, de-
manding of him a tribute or ransom of fire for the town
of Maracaibo ; which being denied, he threatened he
would entirely consume and destroy it. The Spaniards,
considering how unfortunate they had been all along
with those Pirates, and not knowing after what manner
to get rid of them, concluded among themselves to pay
the said ransom, although Don Alonso would not consent
TREATMENT OF THE PRISONERS. 177
Hereupon they sent to Captain Morgan to ask what
sum he demanded. He answered them he would have
thirty thousand pieces of eight, and five hundred beeves,
to the intent his fleet might be well victualled with flesh.
This ransom being paid, he promised in such case he
would give no farther trouble to the prisoners, nor cause
any ruin or damage to the town. Finally, they agreed
with him upon the sum of twenty thousand pieces of
eight, besides the five hundred beeves. The catde the
Spaniards brought in the next day, together with one part
of the money. And while the pirates were busied in
salting the flesh, they returned with the rest of the whole
sum of twenty thousand pieces of eight, for which they
had agreed.
But Captain Morgan would not deliver for that present
the prisoners, as he had promised to do, by reason he
feared the shot of the artillery of the casde at his going
forth of the lake. Hereupon he told them he intended
not to deliver them till such time as he was out of that
danger, hoping by this means to obtain a free passage.
Thus he set sail with all his fleet in quest of that ship
which he had left behind, to seek for the plate of the
vessel that was burnt. He found her upon the place,
with the sum of fifteen thousand pieces of eight, which
they had secured out of the wreck, besides many other
pieces of plate, as hilts of swords and other things of
this kind ; also great quantity of pieces of eight that were
melted and run together by the force of the fire of the
said ship.
Captain Morgan scarce thought himself secure, neither
could he contrive how to evade the damages the said
casde might cause to his fleet. Hereupon he told the
prisoners it was necessary they should agree with the
Governor to open the passage with security for his fleet ;
to which point, if he should not consent, he would cer-
tainly hang them all up in his ships. After this warnmg
the prisoners met together to confer upon the persons
VOL. I. N
178 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
they should depute to the said Governor Don Alonso ;
and they assigned some few among them for that em-
bassy. These went to him, beseeching and suppHcating
the Admiral he would have compassion and pity on those
afflicted prisoners who were as yet, together with their
wives and children, in the hands of Captain Morgan ;
and that to this effect he would be pleased to give his
w^ord to let the whole fleet of Pirates freely pass, without
any molestation, forasmuch as this would be the only
remedy of saving both the lives of them that came with
this petition, as also of those who remained behind in
captivity ; all being equally menaced with the sword and
gallows, in case he granted not this humble request.
But Don Alonso gave them for answer a sharp repre-
hension of their cowardice, telling them : If you had been
as loyal to your King in hindering the entry of these
Pii'ates as I shall do their going out, you had never caused
these troubles, neither to yo2trselves, nor to our whole
nation ; which have suffered so much through yojir pusill-
animity. In a word, I shall never grant your request ;
but shall endeavo2Lr to maintain that respect zv hie h is due
to my King, according to my duty.
Thus the Spaniards returned to their fellow-prisoners
with much consternation of mind, and no hopes of obtain-
ing their request ; telling Captain Morgan what answer
they had received. His reply was : If Don Alonso
lull I not let mc pass, I zu ill find means hozv to do it without
him. Hereupon he began presently to make a dividend
of all the booty they had taken in that voyage, fearing lest
he might not have an opportunity of doing it in another
place, if any tempest should arise and separate the ships,
as also being jealous that any of the commanders might
run away with the best part of the spoil which then lay
much more in one vessel than another. Thus they all
brought in, according to their laws, and declared what
they had ; having beforehand made an oath not to con-
ceal the least thing from the public. The accounts
CAPTAIN JrORGAN'S STRATAGEM FOR RETREAT. 179
being cast up, they found to the value of two hundred
and fifty thousand pieces of eight in money and jewels,
besides the huge quantity of merchandize and slaves :
all which booty was divided into every ship or boat,
according to its share.
The dividend being made, the question still remained
on foot, how they should pass the castle and get out of the
Lake. To this effect they made use of a stratagem, of no
ill invention, which was as follows. On the day that pre-
ceeded the night wherein they determined to get forth,
they embarked many of their men in canoes, and rowed
towards the shore, as if they designed to land them.
Here they concealed themselves under the branches of
trees that hung over the coast for a while till they had
laid themselves down along in the boats. Then the
canoes returned to the ships, with the appearance only of
two or three men rowing them back, all the rest being-
concealed at the bottom of the canoes. Thus much only
could be perceived from the castle ; and this action of false-
landing of men, for so we may call it, was repeated that
day several times. Hereby the Spaniards were brought
into persuasion the Pirates intended to force the castle
by scaling it, as soon as night should come. This fear
caused them to place most of their great guns on that
side which looks towards the land, together with the
main force of their arms, leaving the contrary side be-
longing to the sea almost destitute of strength and
defence.
Night being come, they weighed anchor, and by the
light of the moon, without setting sail, committed them-
selves to the ebbing tide, which gendy brought them
down the river, till they were nigh the casde. Being now
almost over against it, they spread their sails with all
the haste they could possibly make. The Spaniards,
perceiving them to escape, transported with all speed
their guns from the other side of the castle, and began to
fire very furiously at the Pirates. But these having a
i8o THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
favourable wind were almost past the danger before those
of the castle could put things into convenient order of
offence. So that the Pirates lost not many of their men,
nor received any considerable damage in their ships.
Being now out of the reach of the guns, Captain Morgan
sent a canoe to the castle with some of the prisoners ;
and the Governor thereof gave them a boat that every
one might return to his own home. Notwithstanding, he
detained the hostages he had from Gibraltar, by reason
those of that town were not as yet come to pay the rest
of the ransom for not firing the place. Just as he de-
parted Captain Morgan ordered seven great guns with
bullets to be fired against the castle, as it were to take his
leave of them. But they answered not so much as with
a musket-shot.
The next day after their departure, they were surprised
with a great tempest, which forced them to cast anchor
in the depth of five or six fathom water. But the storm
increased so much that they were compelled to weigh
again and put out to sea, where they were in great danger
of being lost. For if on either side they should have been
cast on shore, either to fall into the hands of the Spaniards,
or of the Indians, they would certainly have obtained no
mercy. At last the tempest being spent, the wind
ceased ; which caused much content and joy in the whole
fleet.
While Captain Morgan made his fortune by pil-
laging the towns above-mentioned, the rest of his com-
panions, who separated from his fleet at the Cape de
Lobos to take the ship of which was spoken before,
endured much misery, and were very unfortunate in all
their attempts. For being arrived at the Isle of Savona,
they did not find Captain Morgan there, nor any one of
their companions. Neither had they the good fortune
to find a letter which Captain Morgan at his departure
left behind him in a certain place, where in all probability
they would meet with it. Thus, not knowing what course
ATTACK ON COM A NA. i8i
to Steer, they at last concluded to pillage some town or
other, whereby to seek their fortune. They were in all
four hundred men, more or less, who were divided into
four ships and one boat. Being ready to set forth they
constituted an Admiral among themselves, by whom they
might be directed in the whole affair. To this effect they
chose a certain person who had behaved himself very
courageously at the taking of Porto Bello, and whose
name was Captain Hansel. This commander resolved
to attempt the taking of the town of Comana, seated
upon the continent of Caracas, nearly threescore leagues
from the west side of the Isle of Trinidad. Being arrived
there, they landed their men, and killed some few Indians
that were near the coast. But approaching the town, the
Spaniards, having in their company many Indians, dis-
puted them the entry so briskly, that with great loss and
in great confusion they were forced to retire towards their
ships. At last they arrived at Jamaica, where the rest
of their companions who came with Captain Morgan,
ceased not to mock and jeer them for their ill success at
Comana, often telling them : Let zis see lühat money yoic
brought from Comana, and if it be as good silver as that
which we bring from Maracaibo.
The End of the Second Part.
PART III.
CHAPTER I.
Captain Morgan goes to the Isle of Hispaniola to equip a new fleet,
with intent to pillage again itpon the coasts of the West
Indies.
Captain Morgan perceived now that fortune favoured
his arms, by giving good success to all his enterprizes,
which occasioned him, as it is usual in human affairs, to
aspire to greater things, trusting she would always be
constant to him. Such was the burning of Panama ;
wherein fortune failed not to assist him, in like manner as
she had done before, crowning the event of his actions
with victory, howbeit she had led him thereto through
thousands of difficulties. The history hereof I shall
now begin to relate, as being so very remarkable in
all its circumstances that peradventure nothing more
deserving memory may occur to be read by future ages.
Not long after Captain Morgan arrived at Jamaica,
he found many of his chief officers and soldiers reduced
to their former state of indigence through their im-
moderate vices and debauchery. Hence they ceased not
to importune him for new invasions and exploits, thereby
to get something to expend anew in wine, as they
had already wasted what was secured so little before.
Captain Morgan being willing to follow fortune while
she called him, hereupon stopped the mouths of many
of the inhabitants of Jamaica, who were creditors to
183
1 84 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
his men for large sums of money, with the hopes and
promises he gave them, of greater achievements than
ever, by a new expedition he was going about. This
being done, he needed not give himself much trouble to
levy men for this or any other enterprize, his name being
now so famous through all those islands, that that alone
would readily bring him in more men than he could well
employ. He undertook therefore to equip a new fleet of
ships ; for which purpose he assigned the south side of
the Isle of Tortuga, as a place of rendezvous. With this
resolution, he wrote divers letters to all the ancient and
expert Pirates there inhabiting, as also to the Governor
of the said isle, and to the planters and hunters of His-
paniola, giving them to understand his intentions, and
desiring their appearance at the said place, in case they
intended to go with him. All these people had no
sooner understood his designs than they flocked to the
place assigned in huge numbers, with ships, canoes and
boats, being desirous to obey his commands. Many,
who had not the convenience of coming to him by sea,
traversed the woods of Hispaniola, and with no small
difficulties arrived there by land. Thus all were present
at the place assigned, and in readiness, against the 24th
day of October, 1670.
Captain Morgan was not wanting to be there accord-
ing to his punctual custom, who came in his ship to the
same side of the island, to a port called by the French
Port Couillon, over against the island De la Vaca, this
being a place which he had assigned to others. Having
now gathered the greatest part of his fleet, he called a
council, to deliberate about the means of finding provi-
sions sufficient for so many people. Here they concluded
to send four ships and one boat, manned with four hundred
men, over to the continent, to the intent they should rifle
some country towns and villages, and in these get all the
corn or maize they could gather. They set sail for the
continent, towards the river De la Hacha, with design
EQUIPMENT OF CAPTAIN MORGAN'S FLEET. 185
to assault a small village, called La Rancheria, where is
usually to be found the greatest quantity of maize of all
those parts thereabouts. In the meanwhile Captain
Morgan sent another party of his men to hunt in the
woods, who killed there a huge number of beasts, and
salted them. The rest of his companions remained in
the ships, to clean, fit and rig them out to sea, so that at
the return of those who were sent abroad, all things
might be in readiness to weigh anchor, and follow the
course of their designs.
CHAPTER II.
What happened in the river Dc la Hacha.
The four ships abovementioned, after they had set sail
from Hispaniola, steered their course till they came
within sight of the river De la Hacha, where they were
suddenly overtaken with a tedious calm. Being thus with-
in sight of land becalmed for some days, the Spaniards
inhabiting along the coast, who had perceived them to
be enemies, had sufficient time to prepare themselves
for the assault, at least to hide the best part of their
goods, to the end that, without any care of preserving
them, they might be in readiness to retire, when they
found themselves unable to resist the force of the Pirates,
by whose frequent attempts upon those coasts they had
already learnt what they had to do in such cases. There
was in the river at that present a good ship, which was
come from Cartagena to lade maize, and was now when the
Pirates came almost ready to depart. The men belong-
ing to this ship endeavoured to escape, but not being
able to do it, both they and the vessel fell into their
hands. This was a fit booty for their mind, as being
good part of what they came to seek for with so much
care and toil. The next morning about break of day
they came with their ships towards the shore, and landed
their men, although the Spaniards made huge resistance
from a battery which they had raised on that side, where
of necessity they had to land : but notwithstanding
what defence they could make, they were forced to retire
towards a village, to which the Pirates followed them.
Here the Spaniards, rallying again, fell upon them with
TORTURE OF PRISONERS. 187
great fury, and maintained a strong combat, which lasted
till night was come ; but then, perceiving they had lost
great number of men, which was no smaller on the
Pirates' side, they retired to places more occult in the
woods.
The next day when the Pirates saw they were all fled,
and the town left totally empty of people, they pursued
them as far as they could possibly. In this pursuit they
overtook a party of Spaniards, whom they made all
prisoners and exercised the most cruel torments, to
discover where they had hidden their goods : some were
found who by the force of intolerable tortures confessed ;
but others who would not do the same were used more
barbarously than the former. Thus, in the space of
fifteen days that they remained there, they took many
prisoners, much plate and moveable goods, with all other
things they could rob, with which booty they resolved to
return to Hispaniola. Yet not contented with what they
had already got, they dispatched some prisoners into the
woods to seek for the rest of the inhabitants, and to
demand of them a ransom for not burning the town. To
this they answered, they had no money nor plate, but in
case they would be satisfied with a certain quantity of
maize, they w^ould give as much as they could afford.
The Pirates accepted this proffer, as being more useful to
them at that occasion than ready money, and agreed they
should pay four thousand hanegs, or bushels, of maize.
These were brought in three days after, the Spaniards
being desirous to rid themselves as soon as possible of
that inhuman sort of people. Having laded them on
board their ships, together with all the rest of their
booty, they returned to the Island of Hispaniola, to give
account to their leader Captain Morgan of all they had
performed.
They had now been absent five entire weeks, about
the commission aforementioned, which long delay oc-
casioned Captain Morgan almost to despair of their
1 88 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
return, fearing lest they were fallen into the hands
of the Spaniards, especially considering that the place
whereto they went could easily be relieved from Carta-
gena and Santa Maria, if the inhabitants were at all
careful to alarm the country : on the other side he feared
lest they should have made some great fortune in that
voyage, and with it escaped to some other place. But at
last seeing his ships return, and in greater number than
they had departed, he resumed new courage, this sight
causing both in him and his companions infinite joy.
This was much increased when, being arrived, they found
them full laden with maize, whereof they stood in great
need for the maintenance of so many people, by whose
help they expected great matters through the conduct of
their commander.
After Captain Morgan had divided the said maize, as
also the flesh which the hunters brought in, among all
the ships, according to the number of men that were in
every vessel, he concluded upon the departure, having
viewed beforehand every ship, and observed their being
well equipped and clean. Thus he set sail, and directed
his course towards Cape Tiburon, where he determined
to take his measures and resolution, of what enterprize
he should take in hand. No sooner were they arrived
there than they met with some other ships that came
newly to join them from Jamaica. So that now the
whole fleet consisted of thirty-seven ships, wherein were
two thousand fighting men, besides mariners and boys ;
the Admiral hereof was mounted with twenty-two great
guns, and six small ones, of brass ; the rest carried some
twenty, some sixteen, some eighteen, and the smallest
vessel at least four, besides which they had great quantity
of ammunition and fire-balls, with other inventions of
powder.
Captain Morgan finding himself with such a great
number of ships, divided the whole fleet into two
squadrons, constituting a Vice-Admiral, and other
RATE OF DIVISION OF BOOTY. 189
officers and commanders of the second squadron, dis-
tinct from the former. To every one of these he gave
letters patent, or commissions, to act all manner of
hostility against the Spanish nation, and take of them
what ships they could, either abroad at sea or in the
harbours, in like manner as if they were open and de-
clared enemies (as he termed it) of the King of England,
his pretended master. This being done, he called all
his captains and other officers together, and caused them
to sign some articles of common agreement between them,
and in the name of all. Herein it was stipulated that he
should have the hundredth part of all that was gotten to
himself alone : That every captain should draw the shares
of eight men, for the expenses of his ship, besides his
own : That the surgeon, besides his ordinary pay, should
have two hundred pieces of eight, for his chest of medi-
caments : And every carpenter, above his common salary,
should draw one hundred pieces of eight. As to recom-
pences and rewards, they were regulated in this voyage
much higher than was expressed in the first part of this
book. Thus, for the loss of both legs, they assigned one
thousand five hundred pieces of eight or fifteen slaves, the
choice being left to the election of the party ; for the loss
of both hands, one thousand eight hundred pieces of eight
or eighteen slaves ; for one leg, whether the right or the
left, six hundred pieces of eight or six slaves ; for a
hand, as much as for a leg ; and for the loss of an
eye, one hundred pieces of eight or one slave. Lastly,
unto him that in any batde should signalize himself,
either by entering the first any castle, or taking down the
Spanish colours and setting up the English, they con-
stituted fifty pieces of eight for a reward. In the head
of these articles it was stipulated that all these extra-
ordinary salaries, recompences and rewards should be
paid out of the first spoil or purchase they should take,
according as every one should then occur to be either
rewarded or paid.
I90 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
This contract being signed, Captain Morgan com-
manded his Vice-admirals and Captains to put all things
in order, every one in his ship, to go and attempt one of
three places, either Cartagena, Panama or Vera Cruz ;
but the lot fell upon Panama as being believed to be the
richest of all three : notwithstanding this city being
situated at such distance from the Northern sea, as they
knew not well the avenues and entries necessary to ap-
proach it, they judged it necessary to go beforehand
to the isle of St. Catharine, there to find and provide
themselves with some persons who might serve them for
guides in this enterprize ; for in the garrison of that
island are commonly employed many banditti and outlaws
belonging to Panama and the neighbouring places, who
are very expert in the knowledge of all that country.
But before they proceeded any farther, they caused an
act to be published through the whole fleet, containing
that in case they met with any Spanish vessel, the first
captain who with his men should enter and take the said
ship, should have for his reward the tenth part of what-
soever should be found within her.
CHAPTER III.
Captain Morgan leaves the Island of HispaniohXy and goes to that
of St. Catharine, which he takes.
Captain Morgan and his companions weighed anchor
from the Cape of Tiburon, the i6th day of December in
the year 1670. Four days after they arrived within sight
of the Isle of St. Catharine, which was now in posses-
sion of the Spaniards again, as was said in the Second
Part of this history, and to which they commonly banish
all the malefactors of the Spanish dominions in the West
Indies. In this island are found huge quantities of
pigeons at certain seasons of the year ; it is watered
continually by four rivulets or brooks, whereof two are
always dry in the summer season. Here is no manner
of trade nor commerce exercised by the inhabitants,
neither do they give themselves the trouble to plant
more fruits than what are necessary for the sustentation
of human life ; howbeit the country would be sufficient
to make very good plantations of tobacco, which might
render considerable profit, were it cultivated for that
use.
As soon as Captain Morgan came near the island
with his fleet, he sent before one of his best sailing
vessels to view the entry of the river and see if any other
ships were there who might hinder him from landing ;
as also fearing lest they should give intelligence of his
arrival to the inhabitants of the island, and they by this
means prevent his designs.
The next day before sunrise, all the fleet came to
anchor near the island, in a certain bay called Aguada
192 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Grande : upon this bay the Spaniards had lately built a
battery, mounted with four pieces of cannon. Captain
Morgan landed with a thousand men, more or less, and
disposed them into squadrons, beginning his march
through the woods, although they had no other guides
than some few of his own men who had been there
before when Mansvelt took and ransacked the island.
The same day they came to a certain place where the
Governor at other times kept his ordinary residence :
here they found a battery called The Platform, but
nobody in it, the Spaniards having retired to the lesser
island, which, as was said before, is so near the great
one that a short bridge only may conjoin them.
This lesser island aforesaid was so well fortified with
forts and batteries round it as might seem impregnable.
Hereupon, as soon as the Spaniards perceived the pirates
to approach, they began to fire upon them so furiously
that they could advance nothing that day, but were con-
tented to retreat a little, and take up their rest upon the
grass in the open fields, which afforded no strange beds
to these people, as being sufficiently used to such kind of
repose : what most afflicted them was hunger, having not
eaten the least thing that whole day. About midnight
it began to rain so hard that those miserable people had
much ado to resist so much hardship, the greatest part of
them having no other clothes than a pair of seaman's
trousers or breeches, and a shirt, without either shoes or
stockings. Thus finding themselves in great extremity,
they began to pull down a few thatched houses to make
fires withal : in a word, they were in such condition that
one hundred men, indifferently well armed, might easily
that night have torn them all in pieces. The next morn-
ing about break of day the rain ceased, at which time
they began to dry their arms, which were entirely wet,
and proceed on their march. But not long after, the
rain commenced anew, rather harder than before, as if
the skies were melted into waters, which caused them
THE ISLAND OF ST. CATHARINE. 193
to cease from advancing towards the forts, whence the
Spaniards continually fired at the Pirates, seeing them to
approach.
The Pirates were now reduced to great affliction and
danger of their lives through the hardness of the weather,
their own nakedness, and the great hunger they sus-
tained. For a small relief hereof, they happened to find
in the fields an old horse, which was both lean and full of
scabs and blotches, with galled back and sides. This
horrid* animal they instantly killed and flayed, and
divided into small pieces among themselves as far as it
would reach, for many could not obtain one morsel,
which they roasted and devoured without either salt or
bread, more like ravenous wolves than men. The rain
as yet ceased not to fall, and Captain Morgan perceived
their minds to relent, hearing many of them say they
would return on board the ships. Amongst these
fatigues both of mind and body, he thought it convenient
to use some sudden and almost unexpected remedy : to
this effect he commanded a canoe to be rigged in all
haste, and the colours of truce to be hanged out of it.
This canoe he sent to the Spanish governor of the
island with this message : That if zuithin a fezu hours he
delivered not himself and all his men into his hands, he
did by that messenger swear to him, and all those that
were in his company, he luoiild most certainly put thou all
to the szuord, zjüithout granting qttarter to any.
After noon the canoe returned with this answer : That
the Governor desired tzvo hours time to deliberate zvtth his
officers in a full council about that affair ; zuhich being
past, he would give his positive anszuer to the message.
The time now being elapsed, the said Governor sent two
canoes with white colours, and two persons, to treat with
Captain Morgan ; but before they landed, they demanded
of the Pirates two persons as hostages of their security.
These were readily granted by Captain Morgan, who
delivered to them two of his captains, for a mutual pledge
VOL. I. o
194 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of the security required. With this the Spaniards pro-
pounded to Captain Morgan, that their Governor in a
full assembly had resolved to deliver up the island,
not being provided with sufficient forces to defend it
against such an armada or fleet. But withal he desired
that Captain Morgan would be pleased to use a certain
stratagem of war, for the better saving of his own credit,
and the reputation of his officers both abroad and at
home, which should be as follows : That Captain Mor-
gan would come with his troops by night, near the bridge
that joined the lesser island to the great one, and there
attack the fort of St. Jerome : that at the same time all
the ships of his fleet would draw near the castle of Santa
Teresa, and attack it by sea, landing in the meanwhile
some more troops, near the battery called St. Matthew :
that these troops which were newly landed should by
this means intercept the Governor by the way, as he en-
deavoured to pass to St. Jerome's fort, and then take
him prisoner, using the formality, as if they forced him
to deliver the said castle ; and that he would lead the
English into it, under the fraud of being his own troops ;
that on one side and the other there should be continual
firing at one another, but without bullets, or at least into
the air, so that no side might receive any harm by this
device ; that thus having obtained two such consider-
able forts, the chief of the isle, he needed not take care
for the rest, which of necessity must fall by course into
his hands.
These propositions, every one, were granted by
Captain Morgan, upon condition they should see them
faithfully observed, for otherwise they should be used
with all rigour imaginable : this they promised to do, and
hereupon took their leaves, and returned to give account
of their negotiation to the Governor. Presently after
Captain Morgan commanded the whole fleet to enter the
])ort, and his men to be in readiness to assault that
night the castle of St. Jerome. Thus the false alarm or
AN UNUSUAL STRATAGEM. 195
battle began, with incessant firing of great guns from
both the castles against the ships, but without bullets,
as was said before. Then the Pirates landed, and
assaulted by night the lesser island, which they took, as
also possession of both the fortresses, forcing all the
Spaniards, in appearance, to fly to the church. Before
this assault. Captain Morgan had sent word to the
Governor he should keep all his men together in a body,
otherwise if the Pirates met any straggling Spaniards in
the streets, they should certainly shoot them.
The island being taken by this unusual stratagem, and
all things put in due order, the Pirates began to make a
new war against the poultry, cattle and all sort of victuals
they could find. This was their whole employ for some
days, scarce thinking of anything else than to kill those
animals, roast and eat, and make good cheer, as much as
they could possibly attain unto. If wood was wanting,
they presently fell upon the houses, and, pulling them
down, made fires with the timber, as had been done be-
fore in the field. The next day they numbered all the
prisoners they had taken upon the whole island, which
were found to be in all four hundred and fifty persons,
between men, women and children, viz., one hundred and
ninety soldiers, belonging to the garrison ; forty inhabi-
tants, who were married ; forty-three children ; thirty-
four slaves, belonging to the King, with eight children ;
eight banditti ; thirty-nine negroes, belonging to private
persons, with twenty-seven female blacks and thirty-four
children. The Pirates disarmed all the Spaniards, and
sent them out immediately to the plantations, to seek for
provisions, leaving the women in the church, there to
exercise their devotions.
Soon after they took a review of the whole island, and
all the fortresses belonging thereunto, which they found to
be nine in all, as follows : the fort of St. Jerome, nearest
to the bridge, had eight great guns, of 12, 6 and 8
pound carriage, together with six pipes of muskets,
196 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
every pipe containing ten muskets. Here they found
still sixty muskets, with sufficient quantity of powder and
all other sorts of ammunition. The second fortress,
called St. Matthew, had three guns, of 8 pound carriage
each. The third and chief among all the rest, named
Santa Teresa, had twenty great guns, of 1 8, 12, 8 and 6
pound carriage, with ten pipes of muskets, like those
we said before, and ninety muskets remaining, besides
all other warlike ammunition. This castle was built with
stone and mortar, with very thick walls on all sides, and
a large ditch round about it of twenty foot depth, which
although it was dry was very hard to get over. Here
was no entry but through one door, which corresponded
to the middle of the castle. Within it was a mount or
hill, almost inaccessible, with four pieces of cannon at
the top, whence they could shoot directly into the port.
On the sea side this castle was impregnable, by reason of
the rocks which surrounded it and the sea beating furi-
ously upon them. In like manner, on the side of the
land, it was so commodiously seated on a mountain that
there was no access to it, but by a path of three or four
foot broad. The fourth fortress was named St. Augus-
tine, having" three guns, of 8 and 6 pound carriage. The
fifth, named La Plattaforma de la Concepcion, had only
two guns, of eight pound carnage. The sixth, by
name San Salvador, had likewise no more than two
guns. The seventh, being called Plattaforma de los
Artilleros, had also two guns. The eighth, called Santa
Cruz, had three guns. The ninth, which was called St.
Joseph's Fort, had six guns, of 12 and 8 pound carriage,
besides two pipes of muskets and sufficient ammunition.
In the store-house were found above thirty thousand
pounds of powder, with all other sorts of ammunition,
which were transported by the Pirates on board the ships.
All the guns were stopped and nailed, and the fortresses
demolished, excepting that of St. Jerome, where the
Pirates kept their guard and residence. Captain Morgan
DEPARTURE FROM THE ISLAND OF ST. CATHARINE. 197
enquired if any banditti were there from Panama or
Porto Bello ; and hereupon three were brought before
him, who pretended to be very expert in all the avenues
of those parts. He asked them if they would be his
guides, and show him the securest ways and passages to
Panama ; which, if they performed, he promised them
equal shares in all they should pillage and rob in that
expedition, and that afterwards he would set them at
liberty, by transporting them to Jamaica. These pro-
positions pleased the banditti very well, and they readily
accepted his proffers, promising to serve him very faith-
fully in all he should desire ; especially one of these
three, who was the greatest rogue, thief and assassin
amone them, and who had deserved for his crimes rather
to be broken alive upon the wheel than punished with
serving in a garrison. This wicked fellow had a great
ascendancy over the other two banditti, and could domi-
neer and command over them as he pleased, they not
daring to refuse obedience to his orders.
Hereupon Captain Morgan commanded four ships and
one boat to be equipped and provided with all things
necessary, to go and take the castle of Chagre, seated
upon the river of that name. Neither would he go him-
self with his whole fleet, fearing lest the Spaniards should
be jealous of his farther designs upon Panama. In these
vessels he caused to embark four hundred men, who
went to put in execution the orders of their chief com-
mander Captain Morgan, while he himself remained be-
hind in the Island of St. Catharine, with the rest of the
fleet, expecting to hear the success of their arms.
CHAPTER IV.
Captain Morgan takes the castle of Chagre, with four hundred
men sent for this purpose from the Isle of St. Catharine.
Captain Morgan sending these four ships and a boat
to the river of Chagre, chose for Vice- Admiral thereof
a certain person named Captain Brodely. This man
had been a long time in those quarters, and committed
many robberies upon the Spaniards when Mansvelt took
the Isle of St. Catharine, as was related in the Second
Part of this history. He, being therefore well acquainted
with those coasts, was thought a fit person for this ex-
ploit, his actions likewise having rendered him famous
among the Pirates, and their enemies the Spaniards.
Captain Brodely being chosen chief commander of these
forces, in three days after he departed from the presence
of Captain Morgan arrived within sight of the said castle
of Chagre, which by the Spaniards is called St. Lawrence.
This castle is built upon a high mountain, at the entry
of the river, and surrounded on all sides with strong
palisades or wooden walls, being very well terre-pleined,
and filled with earth, which renders them as secure as the
best walls made of stone or brick. The top of this
mountain is in a manner divided into two parts, between
which lies a ditch, of the depth of thirty foot. The
casde itself has but one entry, and that by a drawbridge
which passes over the ditch aforementioned. On the
land side it has four bastions, that of the sea containing
only two more. That part thereof which looks towards
the South is totally inaccessible and impossible to be
climbed, through the infinite asperity of the mountain.
19S
ASSAULT ON THE CASTLE OF CHAGRE. 199
The North side is surrounded by the river, which here-
abouts runs very broad. At the foot of the said castle,
or rather mountain, is seated a strong fort, with eight
great guns, which commands and impedes the entry of
the river. Not much lower are to be seen two other
batteries, whereof each hath six pieces of cannon, to de-
fend likewise the mouth of the said river. At one side
of the casde are built two great store-houses, in which
are deposited all sorts of warlike ammunition and mer-
chandize, which are brought thither from the inner parts
of the country. Near these houses is a high pair of
stairs, hewed out of the rock, which serves to mount to
the top of the castle. On the West side of the said
fortress lies a small port, which is not above seven or
eight fathom deep, being very fit for small vessels and of
very good anchorage. Besides this, there lies before the
castle, at the entry of the river, a great rock, scarce to be
perceived above water, unless at low tide.
No sooner had the Spaniards perceived the Pirates to
come than they began to fire incessantly at them with
the biggest of their guns. They came to an anchor in a
small port, at the distance of a league more or less from
the castle. The next morning very early they went on
shore, and marched through the woods, to attack the
castle on that side. This march continued until two
o'clock in the afternoon, before they could reach the
casde, by reason of the difficulties of the way, and its
mire and dirt. And although their guides served them
exactly, notwithstanding they came so near the castle at
first that they lost many of their men with the shot from
the guns, they being in an open place where nothing-
could cover nor defend them. This much perplexed the
Pirates in their minds, they not knowing what to do, nor
what course to take, for on that side of necessity they
must make the assault, and beino^ uncovered from head
to foot, they could not advance one step without great
danger. Besides that, the castle, both for its situation
200 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and strenp:th, caused them much to fear the success
of that enterprize. But to give it over they dared not,
lest they should be reproached and scorned by their
companions.
At last, after many doubts and disputes among them-
selves, they resolved to hazard the assault and their lives
after a most desperate manner. Thus they advanced
towards the castle, with their swords in one hand and
fire-balls in the other. The Spaniards defended them-
selves very briskly, ceasing not to fire at them with their
great guns and muskets continually, crying withal :
Cojnc on, ye English dogs, enemies to God and our King ;
let your other companions that are behind come on too ; ye
shall not co to Panama this bout. After the Pirates had
made some trial to climb up the walls, they were forced
to retreat, which they accordingly did, resting them-
selves until night. This being come, they returned to
the assault, to try if by the help of their fire-balls they
could overcome and pull down the pales before the wall.
This they attempted to do, and while they were about it
there happened a very remarkable accident, which gave
them the opportunity of the victory. One of the Pirates
was wounded with an arrow in his back, which pierced
his body to the other side. This instandy he pulled out
with great valour at the side of his breast ; then taking
a litde cotton that he had about him, he wound it about
the said arrow, and putting it into his musket, he shot it
back into the casde. But the cotton being kindled by
the powder, occasioned two or three houses that were
within the casde, being thatched with palm-leaves, to
take fire, which the Spaniards perceived not so soon
as was necessary. For this fire meeting with a parcel
of powder, blew it up, and thereby caused great ruin,
and no less consternation to the Spaniards, who were not
able to account for this accident, not having seen the
beginning thereof.
Thus the Pirates, perceiving the good effect of the
. BURNING THE PALISADES. 201
arrow and the beginning of the misfortune of the
Spaniards, were infinitely gladdened thereat. And while
they were busied in extinguishing the fire, which caused
great confusion in the whole castle, having not sufficient
water wherewithal to do it, the Pirates made use of this
opportunity, setting fire likewise to the palisades. Thus
the fire was seen at the same time in several parts about
the castle, which gave them huge advantage against the
Spaniards. For many breaches were made at once by
the fire among the pales, great heaps of earth falling
down into the ditch. Upon these the Pirates climbed up,
and got over into the castle, notwithstanding that some
Spaniards, who were not busied about the fire, cast down
upon them many flaming pots, full of combustible matter
and odious smells, which occasioned the loss of many of
the English.
The Spaniards, notwithstanding the great resistance
they made, could not hinder the palisades from being
entirely burnt before midnight. Meanwhile the Pirates
ceased not to persist in their intention of taking the
castle. To which effect, although the fire was great, they
would creep upon the ground, as nigh unto it as they
could, and shoot amidst the flames, against the Spaniards
they could perceive on the other side, and thus cause
many to fall dead from the walls. When day was come,
they observed all the moveable earth that lay between
the pales to be fallen into the ditch in huge quantity.
So that now those within the castle did in a manner lie
equally exposed to them without, as had been on the
contrary before. Whereupon the Pirates continued
shooting very furiously against them, and killed great
numbers of Spaniards. For the Governor had given
them orders not to retire from those posts which cor-
responded to the heaps of earth fallen into the ditch, and
caused the artillery to be transported to the breaches.
Notwithstanding, the fire within the castle still con-
tinued, and now the Pirates from abroad used what
202 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
means they could to hinder its progress, by shooting
incessantly against it. One party of the Pirates was
employed only to this purpose, and another commanded
to watch all the motions of the Spaniards, and take all
opportunities against them. About noon the English
happened to gain a breach, which the Governor himself
defended with twenty-five soldiers. Here was per-
formed a very courageous and warlike resistance by the
Spaniards, both with muskets, pikes, stones and swords.
Yet notwithstanding, through all these arms the Pirates
forced and fought their way, till at last they gained the
castle. The Spaniards who remained alive cast them-
selves down from the castle into the sea, choosine rather
to die precipitated by their own selves (few or none sur-
viving the fall) than ask any quarter for their lives.
The Governor himself retreated to the coi'ps die garde,
before which were placed two pieces of cannon. Here he
intended still to defend himself, neither would he demand
any quarter. But at last he was killed with a musket
shot, which pierced his skull into the brain.
The Governor being dead, and the corps du garde
surrendered, they found still remaining in it alive to the
number of thirty men, whereof scarce ten were not
wounded. These informed the Pirates that eisfht or nine
o
of their soldiers had deserted their colours, and were
gone to Panama to carry news of their arrival and in-
vasion. These thirty men alone were remaining of three
hundred and fourteen, wherewith the castle was gar-
risoned, among which number not one officer was found
alive. These were all made prisoners, and compelled to
tell whatsoever they knew of their designs and enter-
prizes. Among other things they declared that the
Governor of Panama had notice sent him three weeks
ago from Cartagena, how that the English were equip-
ping a fleet at Hispaniola, with design to come and take
the said city of Panama. Moreover, that this their
intention had been known by a person, who was run
CAPTURE OF THE CASTLE OF C HAG RE. 203
away from the Pirates, at the river De la Hacha, where
they provided their fleet with corn. That, upon this
news, the said Governor had sent one hundred and sixty
four men to strengthen the garrison of that castle, to-
gether with much provision and warlike ammunition ;
the ordinary garrison whereof did only consist of one
hundred and fifty men. So that in all they made the
number aforementioned of three hundred and fourteen
men, being all very well armed. Besides this they had
declared that the Governor of Panama had placed several
ambuscades all along the river of Chagre ; and that he
waited for their coming, in the open fields of Panama,
with three thousand six hundred men.
The taking of this casde of Chagre cost the Pirates
excessively dear, in comparison to the small numbers
they used to lose at other times and places. Yea, their
toil and labour here far exceeded what they sustained at
the conquest of the Isle of St. Catharine and its adjacent.
For coming to number their men, they found they had
lost above one hundred, besides those that were wounded,
whose number exceeded seventy. They commanded the
Spaniards that were prisoners to cast all the dead bodies
of their own men down from the top of the mountain to
the seaside, and afterwards to bury them. Such as were
wounded were carried to the church belonging to the
casde, of which they made a hospital, and where also
they shut up the women.
Captain Morgan remained not long time behind at the
Isle of St. Catharine, after taking the casde of Chagre ;
of which he had notice presendy sent him. Yet notwith-
standing, before he departed thence, he caused to be
embarked all the provisions that could be found, together
with great quantities of maize or Indian wheat, and
cassava, whereof in like manner is made bread in those
parts. He commanded likewise great store of provisions
should be transported to the garrison of the aforesaid
castle of Chagre, from what parts soever they could be
204 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
got. At a certain place of the island they cast into the
sea all the guns belonging thereto, with a design to re-
turn and leave that island well garrisoned, for the per-
petual possession of Pirates. Notwithstanding he ordered
all the houses and forts to be set on fire, excepting only
the castle of St. Teresa, which he judged to be the
strongest and securest wherein to fortify himself at his
return from Panama. He carried with him all the
prisoners of the island, and thus set sail for the river of
Chagre, where he arrived in the space of eight days.
Here the joy of the whole fleet was so great, when they
spied the English colours upon the castle that they
minded not their way into the river, which occasioned
them to lose four of their ships at the entry thereof, that
wherein Captain Morgan went being one of the four.
Yet their fortune was so good as to be able to save all
the men and goods that were in the said vessels. Yea,
the ships likewise had been preserved, if a strong
northerly wind had not risen on that occasion, which cast
the ships upon the rock abovementioned, that lies at the
entry of the said river.
Captain Morgan was brought into the castle with great
acclamations of triumph and joy of all the Pirates, both
of those who were within, and also them that were but
newly come. Having understood the whole transactions
of the conquest, he commanded all the prisoners to be-
gin to work, and repair what was necessary. Especially
in setting up new palisades, or pales, round about the
forts depending on the castle. There were still in the
river some Spanish vessels, called by them chatten, which
serve for the transportation of merchandize up and down
the said river, as also for going to Porto Bello and
Nicaragua. These are commonly mounted with two
great guns of iron and four other small ones of brass.
All these vessels they seized on. together with four
little ships they found there, and all the canoes. In the
casde they left a garrison of five hundred men, and in
DEPARTURE FOR PANAMA. 205
the ships within the river one hundred and fifty more.
These things being done, Captain Morgan departed to-
wards Panama, at the head of one thousand two hundred
men. He carried very small provisions with him, being
in good hopes he should provide himself sufficiendy
among the Spaniards, whom he knew to lie in ambuscade
at several places by the way.
CHAPTER V.
Captain Morgan departs from the Castle of CJiagre, at the head of
one thousand ttvo hundred men, zvith design to take the city
of Panama.
Captain Morgan set forth from the castle of Chagre,
towards Panama, the i8th day of August^ in the year 1670.
He had under his conduct one thousand two hundred men,
five boats with artillery and thirty-two canoes, all which
were filled with the said people. Thus he steered his course
up the river towards Panama. That day they sailed only
six leagues, and came to a place called De los Bracos.
Here a party of his men went on shore, only to sleep
some few hours and stretch their limbs, they being almost
crippled with lying too much crowded in the boats. After
they had rested a while, they went abroad, to see if any
victuals could be found in the neighbouring plantations.
But they could find none, the Spaniards being fled and
carrying with them all the provisions they had. This day,
being the first of their journey, there was amongst them
such scarcity of victuals that the greatest part were forced
to pass with only a pipe of tobacco, without any other
refreshment.
The next day, very early in the morning, they con-
tinued their journey, and came about evening to a place
called Cruz de Juan Gallego. Here they were compelled
to leave their boats and canoes, by reason the river was
1 " August " is probably intended for " January," for we note (p. 3
of 3rd part) that the assembly at Tortuga was on the 24th of October,
1670, that (p. 11) they sailed from Teburon on i6th December, 1670,
and that (p. 70) they left Panama on the 24th February, 1671.
206
JOURNEY TO PANAMA. 207
very dry for want of rain, and the many obstacles of trees
that were fallen into it.
The guides told them that about two leagues farther on
the country would be very good to continue the journey
by land. Hereupon they left some companies, being In
all one hundred and sixty men, on board the boats to
defend them, with intent they might serve for a place of
refuge, in case of necessity.
The next morning, being the third day of their journey,
they all went ashore, excepting those above mentioned
who were to keep the boats. To these Captain Morgan
gave very strict orders, under great penalties, that no
man, upon any pretext whatsoever, should dare to leave
the boats and go ashore. This he did, fearing lest they
should be surprised and cut off by an ambuscade of
Spaniards, that might chance to lie thereabouts in the
neighbouring woods, which appeared so thick as to seem
almost impenetrable. Having this morning begun their
march they found the ways so dirty and irksome, that
Captain Morgan thought it more convenient to trans-
port some of the men In canoes (though it could not be
done without great labour) to a place farther up the river,
called Cedro Bueno. Thus they re-embarked, and the
canoes returned for the rest that were left behind. So
that about night they found themselves altogether at the
said place. The Pirates were extremely desirous to meet
any Spaniards, or Indians, hoping to fill their bellies
with what provisions they should take from them. For
now they were reduced almost to the very extremity of
hunger.
On the fourth day, the greatest part of the Pirates
marched by land, being led by one of the guides. The
rest went by water, farther up with the canoes, being
conducted by another guide, who always went before
them with two of the said canoes, to discover on both
sides the river the ambuscades of the Spaniards. These
had also spies, who were very dextrous, and could at any
2oS THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
time give notice of all accidents or of the arrival of the
Pirates, six hours at least before they came to any place.
This day about noon they found themselves near a post,
called Torna Cavallos. Here the guide of the canoes
began to cry aloud he perceived an ambuscade. His
voice caused infinite joy to all the Pirates, as persuading
themselves they should find some provisions wherewith
to satiate their hunger, which was very great. Being
come to the place, they found nobody in it, the Spaniards
who were there not long before being every one fied, and
leaving nothing behind unless it were a small number of
leather bags, all empty, and a few crumbs of bread
scattered upon the ground where they had eaten. Being
angry at this misfortune, they pulled down a few little
huts which the Spaniards had made, and afterwards fell
to eating the leathern bags, as being desirous to afford
something to the ferment of their stomachs, which now
was grown so sharp that it did gnaw their very bowels,
having nothing else to prey upon. Thus they made a
'huge banquet upon those bags of leather, which doubtless
had been more grateful unto them, if divers quarrels had
not risen concerning who should have the greatest share.
By the circumference of the place, they conjectured five
hundred Spaniards, more or less, had been there. And
these, finding no victuals, they were now infinitely
desirous to meet, intending to devour some of them
rather than perish. Whom they would certainly in that
occasion have roasted or boiled, to satisfy their famine,
had they been able to take them.
After they had feasted themselves with those pieces of
leather, they quitted the place, and marched farther on,
till they came about night to another post called Torna
Munni. Here they found another ambuscade, but as
barren and desert as the former. They searched the
neighbouring woods, but could not find the least thing to
eat. The Spaniards having been so provident as not to
leave behind them anywhere the least crumb of sus-
TRACES OF AMBUSCADES. 209
tenance, whereby the Pirates were now brought to the
extremity aforementioned. Here again he was happy,
that had reserved since noon any small piece of leather
whereof to make his supper, drinking after it a good
draught of water for his greatest comfort. Some persons,
who never were out of their mothers' kitchens, may ask
how these Pirates could eat, swallow and digest those
pieces of leather, so hard and dry. To whom I only
answer : That could they once experiment what hunger,
or rather famine, is, they would certainly find the manner,
by their own necessity, as the Pirates did. For these
first took the leather, and sliced it in pieces. Then did
they beat it between two stones, and rub it, often dipping
it in the water of the river, to render it by these means
supple and tender. Lastly, they scraped off the hair, and
roasted or broiled it upon the fire. And being thus
cooked they cut it into small morsels, and eat it, helping
it down with frequent gulps of water, which by good
fortune they had near at hand.
They continued their march the fifth day, and about
noon came to a place called Barbacoa. Here likewise
they found traces of another ambuscade, but the place
totally as unprovided as the two preceeding were. At
a small distance were to be seen several plantations,
which they searched very narrowly, but could not find
any person, animal or other thing that was capable of
relieving their extreme and ravenous hunger. P^inally,
having ranged up and down and searched a long time,
they found a certain grotto which seemed to be but lately
hewn out of a rock, in which they found tw^o sacks of
meal, wheat and like things, with two great jars of
wine, and certain fruits called Platanos. Captain Mor-
gan knowing that some of his men were now, through
hunger, reduced almost to the extremity of their lives,
and fearing lest the major part should be brought into
the same condition, caused all that was found to be
distributed amongst them who were in greatest neces-
VOL. I. P
2IO THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
sity. Having refreshed themselves with these victuals,
they began to march anew with greater courage than
ever. Such as could not well q^o for weakness were
put into the canoes, and those commanded to land that
were in them before. Thus they prosecuted their
journey till late at night, at which time they came to
a plantation where they took up their rest. But with-
out eating anything at all ; for the Spaniards, as before,
had swept away all manner of provisions, leaving not
behind them the least signs of victuals.
On the sixth day they continued their march, part of
them by land through the woods, and part by water in
the canoes. Howbeit they were constrained to rest
themselves very frequently by the way, both for the
ruggedness thereof and the extreme weakness they were
under. To this they endeavoured to occur, by eating
some leaves of trees and green herbs, or grass, such as
they could pick, for such was the miserable condition
they were in. This day, at noon, they arrived at a
plantation, where they found a barn full of maize. Im-
mediately they beat down the doors, and fell to eating of
it dry, as much as they could devour. Afterwards they
distributed great quantity, giving to every man a good
allowance thereof Being thus provided, they prosecuted
their journey, which having continued for the space of
an hour or thereabouts, they met with an ambuscade
of Indians. This they no sooner had discovered, but they
threw away their maize, with the sudden hopes they con-
ceived of finding all things in abundance. But after all
this haste, they found themselves much deceived, they
meeting neither Indians, nor victuals, nor anything else
of what they had imagined. They saw notwithstanding
on the other side of the river a troop of a hundred Indians,
more or less, who all escaped away through the agility of
their feet. Some few Pirates there were who leapt into
the river, the sooner to reach the shore to see if they
could take any of the said Indians prisoners. But all
MURMURINGS IN THE CAMP. 211
was in vain ; for being much more nimble on their feet
than the Pirates, they easily baffled their endeavours.
Neither did they only baffle them, but killed also two or
three of the Pirates with their arrows, shouting at them at
a distance, and crying : Ha ! perros, a la savana, a la
savana. Ha ! ye dogs, go to the plain, go to the plain.
This day they could advance no farther, by reason
they were necessitated to pass the river hereabouts to
continue their march on the other side. Hereupon they
took up their repose for that night. Howbeit their sleep
was not heavy nor profound, for great murmurings were
heard that night in the camp, many complaining of
Captain Morgan and his conduct in that enterprize, and
being desirous to return home. On the contrary, others
would rather die there than go back one step from what
they had undertaken. But others who had greater
courage than any of these two parties did laugh and joke
at all their discourses. In the meanwhile they had a
guide who much comforted them, saying : It would not
be long before they met with people, from whom they should
reap some considej'able advantage.
The seventh day in the morning they all made clean
their arms, and every one discharged his pistol or
musket, without bullet, to examine the security of their
firelocks. This being done, they passed to the other side
of the river in the canoes, leaving the post where they
had rested the night before, called Santa Cruz. Thus
they proceeded on their journey till noon, at which time
they arrived at a village called Cruz. Being at a great
distance as yet from the place, they perceived much
smoke to arise out of the chimneys. The sight hereof
afforded them great joy and hopes of finding people in
the town, and afterwards what they most desired, which
was plenty of good cheer. Thus they went on with as
much haste as they could, making several arguments to
one another upon those external signs, though all like
castles built in the air. For, said they, there is smoke
212 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
coining otit of every house, therefore they are niakiug good
fires, to roast and boil what we are to eat. With other
things to this purpose.
At length they arrived there in great haste, all sweat-
ing and panting, but found no person in the town, nor
anything that was eatable wherewith to refresh themselves,
unless it were good fires to warm themselves, which they
wanted not. For the Spaniards before their departure,
had every one set fire to his own house, excepting only
the store-houses and stables belonging to the King,
They had not left behind them any beast whatsoever,
either alive or dead. This occasioned much confusion in
their minds, they not finding the least thing to lay hold
on, unless it were some few cats and dogs, which they
immediately killed and devoured with great appetite.
At last in the King's stables they found by good fortune
fifteen or sixteen jars of Peru wine, and a leather sack
full of bread. But no sooner had they began to drink of
the said wine when they fell sick, almost every man.
This sudden disaster made them think that the wine
was poisoned, which caused a new consternation in the
whole camp, as judging themselves now to be irrecover-
ably lost. But the true reason was, their huge want of
sustenance in that whole voyage, and the manifold sorts
of trash which they had eaten upon that occasion. Their
sickness was so great that day as caused them to remain
there till the next morning, without being able to pro-
secute their journey as they used to do, in the after-
noon. This village is seated in the latitude of 9 degrees
and 2 minutes, North, being distant from the river
of Chagre twenty-six Spanish leagues, and eight from
Panama. Moreover, this is the last place to which boats
or canoes can come ; for which reason they built here
store-houses, wherein to keep all sorts of merchandize,
which hence to and from Panama are transported upon
the backs of mules.
Here, therefore, Captain Morgan was constrained to
ATTACKED BY THE INDIANS. 213
leave his canoes and land all his men, though never so
weak in their bodies. But lest the canoes should be
surprized, or take up too many men for their defence, he
resolved to send them all back to the place where the
boats were, excepting one, which he caused to be hidden,
to the intent it might serve to carry intelligence accord-
ing to the exigence of affairs. Many of the Spaniards
and Indians belonging to this village were fled to the
plantations thereabouts. Hereupon Captain Morgan
gave express orders that none should dare to go out of
the village, except in whole companies of a hundred to-
gether. The occasion hereof was his fear lest the enemies
should take an advantage upon his men, by any sudden
assault. Notwithstanding, one party of English soldiers,
stickled not to contravene these conmiands, being tempted
with the desire of finding victuals. But these were
soon glad to fly into the town again, being assaulted with
great fury by some Spaniards and Indians, who snatched
up one of the Pirates, and carried him away prisoner.
Thus the vigilance and care of Captain Morgan was not
sufficient to prevent every accident that might happen.
On the eighth day, in the morning. Captain Morgan
sent two hundred men before the body of his army, to
discover the way to Panama, and see if they had laid any
ambuscades therein. Especially considering that the
places by which they were to pass were very fit for that
purpose, the paths being so narrow that only ten or
twelve persons could march in a file, and oftentimes not
so many. Having marched about the space of ten
hours, they came to a place called Ouebrada Obscura.
Here, all on a sudden, three or four thousand arrows were
shot at them, without being able to perceive whence they
came, or who shot them. The place whence it was pre-
sumed they were shot was a high rocky mountain, ex-
cavated from one side to the other, wherein was a grotto
that went through it, only capable of admitting one horse,
or other beast laded. This multitude of arrows caused
214 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
a huge alarm among the Pirates, especially because they
could not discover the place whence they were discharged.
At last, seeing no more arrows to appear, they marched a
little farther, and entered into a wood. Here they per-
ceived some Indians to fly as fast as they could possible ^
before them, to take the advantage of another post, and
thence observe the march of the Pirates. There remained
notwithstanding one troop of Indians upon the place, with
full desio-n to fiorht and defend themselves. This combat
they performed with huge courage, till such time as their
captain fell to the ground wounded, who although he
was now in despair of life, yet his valour being greater
than his strength, would demand no quarter, but, en-
deavouring to raise himself, with undaunted mind laid
hold of his azagaya, or javelin, and struck at one of the
Pirates. But before he could second the blow, he was
shot to death with a pistol. This was also the fate of
many of his companions, who like good and courageous
soldiers lost their lives with their captain, for the defence
of their country.
The Pirates endeavoured, as much as was possible, to
lay hold on some of the Indians and take them prisoners.
But they being infinitely swifter than the Pirates, every
one escaped, leaving eight Pirates dead upon the place
and ten w^ounded. Yea, had the Indians been more
dextrous in military affairs, they might have defended
that passage and not let one sole man to pass. Within
a litde while after they came to a large campaign field
open, and full of variegated meadows. From here they
could perceive at a distance before them a parcel of
Indians, who stood on the top of a mountain, very near
the way by which the Pirates were to pass. They sent a
troop of fifty men, the nimblest they could pick out, to
see if they could catch any of them, and afterwards force
them to declare whereabouts their companions had their
mansions. But all their industry was in vain, for they
escaped through their nimbleness, and presently after-
A GREAT rain: 215
wards showed themselves in another place, hallooing to
the English, and crying : A la savana, d hi savana
c'oruudos, pcrros Ingieses ; that is, To the plain, to the
plain, ye cuckolds, ye English dogs I While these things
passed, the ten Pirates that were wounded a little before
were dressed and plastered up.
At this place there was a wood, and on each side
thereof a mountain. The Indians had possessed them-
selves of the one, and the Pirates took possession of the
other that was opposite to it. Captain Morgan was per-
suaded that in the wood the Spaniards had placed an
ambuscade, as lying so conveniently for that purpose.
Hereupon he sent before two hundred men to search it.
The Spaniards and Indians perceiving the Pirates to
descend the mountains, did so too, as if they designed to
attack them. But being got into the wood, out of sight
of the Pirates, they disappeared, and were seen no more,
leaving the passage open to them.
About night there fell a great rain, which caused the
Pirates to march the faster and seek everywhere for
houses wherein to preserve their arms from being wet.
But the Indians had set fire to every one thereabouts,
and transported all their cattle to remote places, to the
end that the pirates, finding neither houses nor victuals,
might be constrained to return homewards. Notwith-
standing, after diligent search, they found a few little huts
belonging to shepherds, but in them nothing to eat.
These not being capable of holding many men, they
placed in them out of every company a small number, who
kept the arms of all the rest of the army. Those who
remained in the open field endured much hardship that
night, the rain not ceasing to fall until the morning.
The next morning, about break of day, being the
ninth of this tedious journey. Captain Morgan continued
his march while the fresh air of the morning lasted.
For the clouds then hanging as yet over their heads were
much more favourable to them than the scorching rays
2i6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of the sun, by reason the way was now more difficult
and laborious than all the preceding. After two hours'
march, they discovered a troop of about twenty Spaniards,
who observed the motions of the Pirates. They en-
deavoured to catch some of them, but could lay hold on
none, they suddenly disappearing, and absconding them-
selves in caves among the rocks, totally unknown to the
Pirates. At last they came to a high mountain, which,
when they ascended, they discovered from the top there-
of the South Sea. This happy sight, as if it were the
end of their labours, caused infinite joy among all the
Pirates, Hence they could descry also one ship, and six
boats, which were set forth from Panama, and sailed to-
wards the islands of Tovago and Tovagilla. Having
descended this mountain, they came to a vale, in which
they found great quantity of cattle, whereof they killed
good store. Here while some were employed in killing
and flaying of cows, horses, -bulls and chiefly asses, of
which there was greatest number, others busied them-
selves in kindling of fires and getting wood wherewith to
roast them. Thus cuttinof the flesh of these animals into
convenient pieces, or gobbets, they threw them into the
fire, and, half carbonadoed or roasted, they devoured
them with incredible haste and appetite. For such was
their hunger that they more resembled cannibals than
Europeans at this banquet, the blood many times running
down from their beards to the middle of their bodies.
Havino- satisfied their hunsfer with these delicious
meats. Captain Morgan ordered them to continue the
march. Here again he sent before the main body fifty
men, with intent to take some prisoners, if possibly they
could. For he seemed now to be much concerned that
in nine days time he could not meet one person who
might inform him of the condition and forces of the
Spaniards. About evening they discovered a troop of
two hundred Spaniards, more or less, who hallooed to the
Pirates, but these could not understand what they said.
ASSAULT ON PANAMA. 217
A little while after they came the first time within sight
of the highest steeple of , Panama. This steeple they no
sooner had discovered than they began to show signs of
extreme joy, casting up their hats into the air, leaping for
mirth, and shouting, even just as if they had already ob-
tained the victory and entire accomplishment of their
designs. All their trumpets were sounded and every
drum beaten, in token of this universal acclamation and
huge alacrity of their minds. Thus they pitched their
camp for that night with general content of the whole
army, waiting with impatience for the morning, at which
time they intended to attack the city. This evening
there appeared fifty horse, who came out of the city,
hearing the noise of the drums and trumpets of the
Pirates, to observe, as it was thought, their motions.
They came almost within musket-shot of the army, being
preceded by a trumpet that sounded marvellously well.
Those on horseback hallooed aloud to the Pirates, and
threatened them, saying, Perros ! nos veremos, that is,
Ye dogs f we shall meet ye. Having made this menace,
they returned into the city, excepting only seven or eight
horsemen who remained hovering thereabouts, to watch
what motions the Pirates made. Immediately after, the
city began to fire and ceased not to play with their
biggest guns all night long against the camp, but with
little or no harm to the Pirates, whom they could not
conveniendy reach. About this time also the two hun-
dred Spaniards whom the pirates had seen in the after-
noon appeared again within sight, making resemblance
as if they would block up the passages, to the intent no
Pirates might escape the hands of their forces. But the
Pirates, who were now in a manner besieged, instead of
conceiving any fear of their blockades, as soon as they
had placed sentries about their camp, began every one
to open their satchels, and without any preparation of
naj^kins or plates, fell to eating very heartily the remain-
ing pieces of bulls and horses flesh which they had re-
2i8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
served since noon. This being done, they laid them-
selves down to sleep upon the grass with great repose
and huge satisfaction, expecting only with impatience
the dawning of the next day.
On the tenth day, betimes in the morning, they put all
their men in convenient order, and with drums and trum-
pets sounding, continued their march directly towards the
city. But one of the guides desired Captain Morgan
not to take the common highway that led thither, fearing
lest they should find in it much resistance and many
ambuscades. He presently took his advice, and chose
another way that went through the wood, although very
irksome and difficult. Thus the Spaniards, perceiving
the Pirates had taken another way, which they scarce
had thought on or believed, were compelled to leave their
stops and batteries, and come out to meet them. The
Governor of Panama put his forces in order, consisting of
two squadrons, four regiments of foot, and a huge num-
ber of wild bulls, which were driven by a great number
of Indians, with some negroes and others, to help them.
The Pirates, being now upon their march, came to the
top of a little hill, whence they had a large prospect of
the city and campaign country underneath. Here they
discovered the forces of the people of Panama, extended
in battle array, which, when they perceived to be so
numerous, they were suddenly surprised with great fear,
much doubting the fortune of the day. Yea, few or none
there were but wished themselves at home, or at least
free from the obligation of that engagement, wherein
they perceived their lives must be so narrowly concerned.
Having been some time at a stand, in a wavering con-
dition of mind, they at last reflected upon the straits they
had brought themselves into, and that now they ought of
necessity either to fight resolutely or die, for no quarter
could be expected from an enemy against whom they had
committed so many cruelties on all occasions. Hereupon
they encouraged one another, and resolved either to
ASSAULT ON PANAMA. 219
conquer, or spend the very last drop of blood in their
bodies. Afterwards they divided themselves into three
battalions, or troops, sending before them one of two
hundred buccaneers, which sort of people are infinitely
dextrous at shooting with guns. Thus the Pirates left
the hill and descended, marching directly towards the
Spaniards, who were posted in a spacious field, waiting
for their coming. As soon as they drew near them, the
Spaniards began to shout, and cry. Viva cl Rey ! God
save the King ! and immediately their horse began to
move against the Pirates. But the field being full of
quags and very soft under foot, they could not ply to
and fro and wheel about, as they desired. The two hun-
dred buccaneers who went before, every one putting one
knee to the ground, gave them a full volley of shot,
wherewith the battle was instantly kindled very hot.
The Spaniards defended themselves very courageously,
acting all they could possibly perform, to disorder the
Pirates. Their foot, in like manner, endeavoured to
second the horse, but were constrained by the Pirates to
separate from them. Thus finding themselves frustrated
of their designs, they attempted to drive the bulls against
them at their backs, and by this means put them into
disorder. But the greatest part of that wild cattle ran
away, being frightened with the noise of the battle. And
some few that broke through the English companies
did no other harm than to tear the colours in pieces ;
whereas the buccaneers, shooting them dead, left not
one to trouble them thereabouts.
The battle having now continued for the space of
two hours, at the [end thereof the greatest part of the
Spanish horse was ruined and almost all killed. The
rest fled away. Which being perceived by the foot, and
that they could not possibly prevail, they discharged the
shot they had in their muskets, and throwing them on
the ground, betook themselves to flight, every one which
way he could run. The Pirates could not possibly follow
220 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
them, as being: too much harassed and wearied with the
long journey they had lately made. Many of them, not
being able to fly whither they desired, hid themselves
for that present among the shrubs of the sea-side. But
very unfortunately ; for most of them being found out by
the Pirates, were instandy killed, without giving quarter
to any. Some religious men were brought prisoners
before Captain Morgan ; but he being deaf to their cries
and lamentations, commanded them all to be immediately
pistoled, which was accordingly done. Soon after they
brought a captain to his presence, whom he examined
very strictly about several things ; particularly, wherein
consisted the forces of those of Panama. To which he
answered : Their whole strength did consist in four
hundred horse, twenty-four companies of foot, each being
of one hundred men complete, sixty Indians and some
neeroes, who were to drive two thousand wild bulls and
cause them to run over the English camp, and thus by
breaking their files put them into a total disorder and con-
fusion. He discovered more, thaf in the city they had
made trenches, and raised batteries in several places, in
all which they had placed many guns, and that at the
entry of the highway which led to the city they had
built a fort, which was mounted with eight great guns of
brass, and defended by fifty men.
Captain Morgan, having heard this information, gave
orders instandy they should march another way. But
before setting forth, he made a review of all his men,
whereof he found both killed and wounded a considerable
number, and much greater than had been believed. Of
the Spaniards were found six hundred dead upon the
place, besides the wounded and prisoners. The Pirates
were nothing discouraged, seeing their number so much
diminished, but rather filled with greater pride than be-
fore, perceiving what huge advantage they had obtained
against their enemies. Thus having rested themselves
some while, they prepared to march courageously towards
ASSAULT ON PANAMA. 221
the city, plighting their oaths to one another in general
they would fight till never a man was left alive. With
this courage they recommenced their march, either to
conquer or be conquered, carrying with them all the
prisoners.
They found much difficulty in their approach to the
city. For within the town the Spaniards had placed
many great guns, at several quarters thereof, some of
which were charged with small pieces of iron, and others
with musket-bullets. With all these they saluted the
Pirates, at their drawing nigh to the place, and gave them
full and frequent broadsides, firing at them incessantly.
Whence it came to pass that unavoidably they lost, at
every step they advanced, great numbers of men. But
neither these manifest dangers of their lives, nor the
sight of so many of their own as dropped down con-
tinually at their sides, could deter them from advancing
farther, and gaining ground every moment upon the
enemy. Thus, although the Spaniards never ceased to
fire and act the best they could for their defence, yet
notwithstanding they were forced to deliver the city
after the space of three hours' combat. And the Pirates,
having now possessed themselves thereof, both killed and
destroyed as many as attempted to make the least op-
position against them. The inhabitants had caused the
best of their goods to be transported to more remote and
occult places. Howbeit they found within the city as
yet several warehouses, very well stocked with all sorts
of merchandize, as well silks and cloths as linen, and
other thinofs of considerable value. As soon as the first
fury of their entrance into the city was over. Captain
Morgan assembled all his men at a certain place which
he assigned, and there commanded them under very
great penalties that none of them should dare to drink or
taste any wine. The reason he gave for this injunction
was, because he had received private intelligence that it
had been all poisoned by the Spaniards. Howbeit it was
222 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
the Opinion of many that he gave these prudent orders
to prevent the debauchery of his people, which he foresaw
would be very great at the beginning, after so much
hunger sustained by the way — fearing withal lest the
Spaniards, seeing them in wine, should rally their forces
and fall upon the city, and use them as inhumanly as
they had used the inhabitants before.
CHAPTER VI.
Captain Morgan sends several canoes a7id boats to the South Sea.
He sets fire to the City of Panama. Robberies and cruelties
committed there by the Pirates till their return to the Castle of
Chagre.
Captain Morgan, as soon as he had placed guards at
several quarters where he thought necessary, both within
and without the city of Panama, immediately comman-
ded twenty-five men to seize a great boat, which had
stuck in the mud of the port for want of water at a
low tide, so that she could not put out to sea. The
same day, about noon, he caused certain men privately
to set fire to several great edifices of the city, nobody
knowing whence the fire proceeded nor who were
the authors thereof, much less what motives persuaded
Captain Morgan thereto, which are as yet unknown
to this day. The fire increased so fast that before
night the greatest part of the city was in a flame. Cap-
tain Morgan endeavoured to make the public believe the
Spaniards had been the cause thereof, which suspicions
he surmised among his own people, perceiving they
reflected upon him for that action. Many of the
Spaniards, as also some of the Pirates, used all the means
possible either to extinguish the flame, or by blowing
up houses with gunpowder, and pulling down others, to
stop its progress. But all was in vain ; for in less than
half an hour it consumed a whole street. All the houses
of this city were built with cedar, being of very curious
and magnificent structure, and richly adorned within,
especially with hangings and paintings, whereof part was
224 THE BUCCANEERS OF A. If E RICA.
already transported out of the Pirates way, and another
great part was consumed by the voracity of the fire.
There belonged to this city (which is also the head of
a bishopric) eight monasteries, whereof seven were for men
and one for women, two stately churches and one hospital.
The churches and monasteries were all richly adorned
with altar-pieces and paintings, huge quantity of gold and
silver, with other precious things ; all which the ecclesias-
tics had hidden and concealed. Besides which ornaments,
here were to be seen two thousand houses of magnificent
and prodigious building, being all or the greatest part
inhabited by merchants of that country, who are vastly
rich. For the rest of the inhabitants of lesser quality
and tradesmen, this city contained five thousand houses
more. Here were also great number of stables, which
served for the horses and mules, that carry all the plate,
belonging as well to the King of Spain as to private men,
towards the coast of the North Sea. The neighbouring
fields belonging to this city are all cultivated with fertile
plantations and pleasant gardens, which afford delicious
prospects to the inhabitants the whole year long.
The Genoese had in this city of Panama a stately
and magnificent house, belonging to their trade and
commerce of negroes. This building likewise was com-
manded by Captain Morgan to be set on fire ; whereby it
was burnt to the very ground. Besides which pile of build-
ing, there were consumed to the number of two hundred
warehouses, and great number of slaves, who had hid
themselves therein, together with an infinite multitude of
sacks of meal. The fire of all which houses and build-
ings was seen to continue four weeks after the day it be-
gan. The Pirates in the meanwhile, at least the greatest
parts of them, camped some time without the city, fearing
and expecting that the Spaniards would come and fight
them anew. For it was known that they had an incom-
parable number of men more than the Pirates were.
This occasioned them to keep the field, thereby to pre-
PANAMA PRISONERS. 225
serve their forces united, which now were very much
diminished by the losses of the preceding batdes ; as also
because they had a great many wounded, all which they
had put into one of the churches which alone remained
standing, the rest being consumed by the fire. Moreover,
beside these decreases of their men. Captain Morgan had
sent a convoy one hundred and fifty men to the Castle
of Chagre, to carry the news of his victory obtained
against Panama.
They saw many times whole troops of Spaniards cruize
to and fro in the campaign fields, which gave them occa-
sion to suspect their rallying anew. Yet they never had
the courage to attempt anything against the Pirates.
In the afternoon of this fatal day Captain Morgan re-
entered again the city with his troops, to the intent that
every one might take up his lodgings, which now they
could hardly find, very few houses having escaped the
desolation of the fire. Soon after they fell to seeking
very carefully among the ruins and ashes for utensils of
plate or gold, which peradventure were not quite wasted
by the flames. And of such things they found no small
number in several places, especially in wells and
cisterns, where the Spaniards had hid them from the
covetous search of the Pirates.
The next day Captain Morgan dispatched away two
troops of Pirates, of one hundred and fifty men each,
being all very stout soldiers and well armed, with or-
ders to seek for the inhabitants of Panama who were
escaped from the hands of their enemies. These men,
having made several excursions up and down the
campaign fields, woods and mountains, adjoining to
Panama, returned after two days' time, bringing with
them above two hundred prisoners, between men,
women and slaves. The same day returned also the
boat above mentioned, which Captain Morgan had
sent into the South Sea, bringing with her three other
boats, which they had taken in a little while. But all
VOL. I. Q
226 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
these prizes they could willingly have given, yea, although
they had employed greater labour into the bargain, for
one certain galleon, which miraculously escaped their
industry, being very richly laden with all the King's plate
and great quantity of riches of gold, pearl, jewels and
other most precious goods, of all the best and richest
merchants of Panama. On board of this galleon were
also the religious women, belonging to the nunnery of
the said city, who had embarked with them all the orna-
ments of their church, consisting in great quantity of gold,
plate and other things of great value.
The strength of this galleon was nothing considerable,
as having only seven guns, and ten or twelve muskets
for its whole defence, being on the other side very ill
provided of victuals and other necessaries, with great
want of fresh water, and having^ no more sails than the
uppermost sails of the main mast. This description of
the said ship, the Pirates received from certain persons,
who had spoken with seven mariners belonging to the
galleon, at such time as they came ashore in the cock-boat,
to take in fresh water. Hence they concluded for certain
they might easily have taken the said vessel, had they
given her chase, and pursued her, as they ought to have
done, especially considering the said galleon could not
long subsist abroad at sea. But they were impeded from
following this vastly rich prize, by gluttony and drunken-
ness, having plentifully debauched themselves with
several sorts of rich wines they found there ready to their
hands. So that they chose rather to satiate their appetite
with the things abovementioned, than to lay hold on the
occasion of such a huge advantage, although this only
prize would certainly have been of far greater value and
consequence to them than all they secured at Panama,
and other places thereabouts. The next day, repenting
of their negligence, and being totally wearied of the vices
and debaucheries aforesaid, they sent forth to sea another
boat well armed, to pursue with all speed imaginable the
THE BUCCANEERS IN PANAMA. 227
said galleon. But their present care and diligence was in
vain, the Spaniards who were on board the said ship
having received intelligence of the danger they were in
one or two days before, while the Pirates were cruizing
so near them, whereupon they fled to places more remote
and unknown to their enemies.
Notwithstanding, the Pirates found in the ports of the
islands of Tavoga and Tavogilla several boats that were
laden with many sorts of very good merchandize : all
which they took and brought to Panama ; where, being
arrived, they made an exact relation of all that had passed
while they were abroad to Captain Morgan. The
prisoners confirmed what the Pirates had said, adding
thereto, that they undoubtedly knew whereabouts the
said galleon might be at that present, but that it was very
probable they had been relieved before now from other
places. These relations stirred up Captain Morgan anew
to send forth all the boats that were in the port of
Panama, with design to seek and pursue the said galleon
till they could find her. The boats aforesaid, being in
all four, set sail from Panama, and having spent eight
days in cruizing to and fro, and searching several ports
and creeks, they lost all their hopes of finding what they
so earnestly sought for. Hereupon they resolved to
return to the isles of Tavoga and Tavogilla. Here they
found a reasonable good ship, that was newly come from
Payta, being laden with cloth, soap, sugar and biscuit, with
twenty thoustwid pieces of eight in ready money. This
vessel they instantly seized, not finding the least resist-
ance from any person within her. Near to the said ship
was also a boat, whereof in like manner they possessed
themselves. Upon the boat they laded great part of the
merchandizes they had found in the ship, together with
some slaves they had taken in the said islands. With
this purchase they returned to Panama, something better
satisfied of their voyage, yet withal much discontented
they could not meet with the galleon.
228 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
The convoy which Captain Morgan had sent to the
castle of Chao-re returned much about the same time,
o
bringing with them very good news. For while Captain
Morgan was upon his journey to Panama, those he had
left in the castle of Chagre had sent forth to sea two
boats to exercise piracy. These happened to meet with
a Spanish ship, which they began to chase within sight of
the castle. This being perceived by the Pirates that
were in the castle, they put forth Spanish colours, thereby
to allure and deceive the ship that fled before the boats.
Thus the poor Spaniards, thinking to refuge themselves
under the casde and the guns thereof, by flying into the
port, were caught in a snare and made prisoners, where
they thought to find defence. The cargo which was
found on board the said vessel, consisted in victuals and
provisions, that were all eatable things. Nothing could
be more opportune than this prize for the castle, where
they had begun already to experience great scarcity of
things of this kind.
This good fortune of the garrison of Chagre gave
occasion to Captain Morgan to remain longer time than
he had determined at Panama. And hereupon he ordered
several new excursions to be made into the whole coun-
try round about the city. So that while the Pirates at
Panama were employed in these expeditions, those at
Chagre were busied in exercising piracy upon the North
Sea. Captain Morgan used to send forth daily parties
of two hundred men, to make inroads into all the fields
and country thereabouts, and when one party came back,
another consisting of two hundred more was ready to go
forth. By this means they gathered in a short time a
huge quantity of riches, and no lesser number of prison-
ers. These, being brought into the city, were presently
put to the most exquisite tortures imaginable, to make
them confess both other people's goods and their own.
Here it happened, that one poor and miserable wretch
was found in the house of a gentleman of great quality,
TORTURE OF FR/SOA'ERS. 229
who had put on, amidst that confusion of things, a pair
of taffety breeches belonging to his master with a httle
silver key hanging at the strings thereof. This, being
perceived by the Pirates they immediately asked him
where was the cabinet of the said key ? His answer was :
he knew not what was become of it, but only that finding
those breeches in his master's house, he had made bold to
wear them. Not being able to extort any other con-
fession out of him, they first put him upon the rack,
wherewith they inhumanly disjointed his arms. After
this, they twisted a cord about his forehead, which they
wrung so hard, that his eyes appeared as big as eggs,
and were ready to fall out of his skull. But neither with
these torments could they obtain any positive answer to
their demands. Whereupon they soon after hung him
up, giving him infinite blows and stripes, wdiile he was
under that intolerable pain and posture of body. After-
wards they cut off his nose and ears, and singed his
face with burning straw, till he could speak nor lament
his misery no longer. Then losing all hopes of hear-
ing any confession from his mouth, they commanded
a negro to run him through with a lance, which put an
end to his life and a period to their cruel and inhuman
tortures. After this execrable manner did many others
of those miserable prisoners finish their days, the common
sport and recreation of these Pirates being these and
other tragedies not inferior.
They spared, in these their cruelties, no sex nor con-
dition whatsoever. For as to religious persons and
priests, they granted them less quarter than to others,
unless they could produce a considerable sum of money,
capable of being a sufficient ransom. Women themselves
were no better used, and Captain Morgan, their leader
and commander, gave them no good example in this
point. For as soon as any beautiful woman was brought
as a prisoner to his presence, he used all the means he
could, both of rigour and mildness, to bend her to his
230 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
pleasure : for a confirmation of which assertion, I shall
here give my reader a short history of a lady, whose
virtue and constancy ought to be transmitted to posterity,
as a memorable example of her sex.
Among the prisoners that were brought by the Pirates
from the islands of Tavoga and Tavogilla, there was
found a gentlewoman of good quality, as also no less
virtue and chastity, who was wife to one of the richest
merchants of all those countries. Her years were but
few, and her beauty so great as peradventure I may
doubt whether in all Europe any could be found to sur-
pass her perfections either of comeliness or honesty.
Her husband, at that present, was absent from home,
being gone as far as the kingdom of Peru, about great
concerns of commerce and trade, wherein his employ-
ments did lie. This virtuous lady, likewise, hearing that
Pirates were coming to assault the city of Panama, had
absented herself thence in the company of other friends
and relations, thereby to preserve her life, amidst the
dangers which the cruelties and tyrannies of those hard-
hearted enemies did seem to menace to every citizen.
But no sooner had she appeared in the presence of Cap-
tain Morgan than he commanded they should lodge her
in a certain apartment by herself, giving her a negress,
or black woman, to wait upon her, and that she should
be treated with all the respect and regale due to her
quality. The poor afflicted lady did beg, with multitude
of sobs and tears, she might be suffered to lodge among
the other prisoners, her relations, fearing lest that
unexpected kindness of the commander might prove to
be a design upon her chastity. But Captain Morgan
would by no means hearken to her petition, and all he
commanded, in answer thereto, was, she should be
treated with more particular care than before, and have
her victuals carried from his own table.
This lady had formerly heard very strange reports
concerning the Pirates, before their arrival at Panama,
TREATMENT OF A BEAUTIFUL PRISONER. 231
intimating to her, as if they were not men, but, as they
said, heretics, who did neither invoke the Blessed
Trinity, nor believe in Jesus Christ. But now she began
to have better thoughts of them than ever before, having
experienced the manifold civilities of Captain Morgan,
especially hearing him many times to swear by the name
of God, and of Jesus Christ, in whom, she was persuaded,
they did not believe. Neither did she now think them
to be so bad, or to have the shapes of beasts, as from the
relations of several people she had oftentimes heard.
For as to the name of robbers or thieves, which was
commonly given them by others, she wondered not much
at it, seeing, as she said, that among all nations of the
universe, there were to be found some wicked men, who
naturally coveted to possess the goods of others. Con-
formable to the persuasion of this lady was the opinion of
another woman, of weak understanding, at Panama, who
used to say, before the Pirates came thither, she desired
very much and had a great curiosity to see one of those
men called Pirates ; for as much as her husband had often
told her, that they were not men, like others, but rather
irrational beasts. This silly woman, at last happened to
see the first of them, cried out aloud, saying : Jesus bless
me ! these thieves are like its Spaniards.
This false civility of Captain Morgan, wherewith he
used this lady, was soon after changed into barbarous
cruelty. Por, three or four days being past, he came to
see her, and the virtuous lady constantly repulsed him.
with all the civility imaginable and many humble and
modest expressions of her mind. But Captain Morgan
still persisted in his disorderly request, presenting her
withal with much pearl, gold and all that he had got that
was precious and valuable in that voyage. But the lady
being in no manner willing to consent thereto, nor accept
his presents, and showing herself in all respects like
Susannah for constancy, he presently changed note, and
began to speak to her in another tone, threatening her
2.32 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
with a thousand cruelties and hard usages at his hands.
To all these things she gave this resolute and positive
answer, than which no other could be extorted from her :
SiJ', my life is in your hands ; bnt as to viy body, in re-
lation to that which you would persuade me to, my soul
shall sooner be separated from it, throttgh the violence of your
arms, then I shall condescend to your request. No sooner
had Captain Morgan understood this heroic resolution of
her mind than he commanded her to be stripped of the
best of her apparel, and imprisoned in a darksome and
stinking cellar. Here she had allowed her an extremely
small quantity of meat and drink, wherewith she had
much ado to sustain her life for a few days.
Under this hardship the constant and virtuous lady
ceased not to pray daily to God Almighty, for constancy
and patience against the cruelties of Captain Morgan.
But he being now throughly convinced of her chaste
resolutions, as also desirous to conceal the cause of her
confinement and hard usage, since many of the Pirates, his
companions, did compassionate her condition, laid many
false accusations to her charge, giving to understand she
held intelligence with the Spaniards, and corresponded
with them by letters, abusing thereby his former lenity
and kindness, I myself was an eye witness to these
things here related, and could never have judged such
constancy of mind and virtuous chastity to be found in
the world, if my own eyes and ears had not informed
me thereof But of this incomparable lady I shall say
something more hereafter in its proper place ; where-
upon I shall leave her at present, to continue my
history.
Captain Morgan, having now been at Panama the full
space of three weeks, commanded all things to be put in
order for his departure. To this effect, he gave orders
to every company of his men, to seek out for so many
beasts of carriage as might suffice to convey the whole
spoil of the city to the river where his canoes lay. About
MUTINY AMONG THE BUCCANEERS. 233
this time a great rumour was spread in the city, of a
considerable number of Pirates who intended to leave
Captain Morgan ; and that, by taking a ship which was
in the port, they determined to go and rob upon the
South Sea till they had got as much as they thought fit,
and then return homewards by the way of the East
Indies into Europe. For which purpose, they had already
gathered great quantity of provisions, which they had
hidden in private places, with sufficient store of powder,
bullets and all other sorts of ammunition : likewise some
great guns, belonging to the town, muskets and other
things, wherewith they designed not only to equip the
said vessel but also to fortify themselves and raise bat-
teries in some island or other, which might serve them
for a place of refuge.
This design had certainly taken effect as they intended,
had not Captain Morgan had timely advice thereof given
him by one of their comrades. Hereupon he instantly
commanded the mainmast of the said ship should be cut
down and burnt, together with all the other boats that
were in the port. Hereby the intentions of all or most
of his companions were totally frustrated. After this
Captain Morgan sent forth many of the Spaniards into
the adjoining fields and country, to seek for money
wherewith to ransom not only themselves but also all the
rest of the prisoners, as likewise the ecclesiastics, both
secular and regular. Moreover he commanded all the
artillery of the town to be spoiled, that is to say, nailed
and stopped up. At the same time he sent out a strong
company of men to seek for the Governor of Panama,
of whom intelligence was brought that he had laid several
ambuscades in the way, by which he ought to pass at his
return. But those who were sent upon this design re-
turned soon after, saying they had not found any sign or
appearance of any such ambuscades ; for a confirmation
whereof, they brought with them some prisoners they
had taken, who declared that the said Governor had had
234 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
an intention of making some opposition by the way, but
that the men whom he had designed to effect it were
unwilHng to undertake any such enterprize ; so that for
want of means, he coukl not put his design in execu-
tion.
On the 24th of February of the year 1671 Captain
Morgan departed from the city of Panama, or rather
from the place where the said city of Panama did stand ;
of the spoils whereof he carried with him one hundred
and seventy-five beasts of carriage, laden with silver,
gold and other precious things, besides six hundred
prisoners, more or less, between men, women, child-
ren and slaves. That day they came to a river that
passes through a delicious campaign field, at the dis-
tance of a league from Panama. Here Captain Mor-
gan put all his forces into good order of martial array,
in such manner that the prisoners were in the middle of
the camp, surrounded on all sides with Pirates. At which
present conjuncture nothing else was to be heard but
lamentations, cries, shrieks and doleful sighs, of so many
women and children, who were persuaded Captain
Morgan designed to transport them all, and carry them
into his own country for slaves. Besides that, among all
those miserable prisoners, there was extreme hunger
and thirst endured at that time ; which hardship and
misery Captain Morgan designedly caused them to sus-
tain, with intent to excite them more earnestly to seek
for money wherewith to ransom themselves, according
to the tax he had set upon every one. Many of the
women begged of Captain Morgan upon their knees,
with infinite sighs and tears, he would permit them to
return to Panama, there to live in company of their dear
husbands and children, in little huts of straw which they
would erect, seeing they had no houses until the rebuild-
ing of the city. But his answer was : he came not thither
to hear lamentations and cries, but rather to seek
money. Therefore they ought to seek out for that in
THE BEAUTIFUL PRISONER AGAIN. 235
the first place, wherever it were to be had, and brhig it
to him, otherwise he would assuredly transport them all
to such places whither they cared not to go.
The next day, when the march began, those lamen-
table cries and shrieks were renewed, in so much as it
would have caused compassion in the hardest heart to
hear them. But Captain Morgan, a man little given
to mercy, was not moved therewith in the least. They
marched in the same order as was said before ; one party
of the Pirates preceding in the van, the prisoners in the
middle, and the rest of the Pirates in the rear-guard, by
whom the miserable Spaniards were, at every step,
punched and thrust in their backs and sides, with the
blunt end of their arms, to make them march the faster.
That beautiful and virtuous lady, of whom we made
mention heretofore for her unparalleled constancy and
chastity, was led prisoner by herself, between two Pirates
who guarded her. Her lamentations now did pierce the
skies, seeing herself carried away into foreign captivity,
often crying to the Pirates, and telling them : That she
had given order to two re ligiotis persons, in whom she had
relied, to go to a certain place, and fetch so much mo7icy as
her ransom did amount to. That they had promised
faithfully to do it, but having obtained the said money,
instead of bringing it to her, they had employed it another
way, to ransom some of their oivn and particular friends.
This ill action of theirs was discovered by a slave, who
brought a letter to the said lady. Her complaints, and
the cause thereof, being brought to the ears of Captain
Morgan, he thought fit to enquire thereinto. Having
found the thing to be true, especially hearing it confirmed
by the confession of the said religious men, though under
some frivolous excuses, of having diverted the money
but for a day or two, within which time they expected
more sums to repay it, he gave liberty to the said lady,
whom otherwise he designed to transport to Jamaica.
But in the meanwhile he detained the said religious men,
236 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
as prisoners in her place, using them according to the
deserts of their incompassionate intrigues.
As soon as Captain Morgan arrived, upon his march,
at the town called Cruz, situated on the banks of the
river Chagre, as was mentioned before, he commanded
an order to be published among the prisoners, that with-
in the space of three days every one of them should
bring in his ransom, under the penalty aforementioned
of being transported to Jamaica, In the meanwhile he
gave orders, for so much rice and maize to be collected
thereabouts as was necessary for the victualling all his
ships. At this place some of the prisoners were ransomed,
but many others could not bring In their moneys in so
short time. Hereupon he continued his voyage, leav-
ing the village on the 5th day of March next following,
and carrying with him all the spoil that ever he could
transport. From this village he likewise led away some
new prisoners, who were inhabitants of the said place.
So that these prisoners were added to those of Panama
who had not as yet paid their ransoms, and all trans-
ported. But the two religious men, who had diverted
the money belonging to the lady, were ransomed three
days after their imprisonment, by other persons who had
more compassion for their condition than they had
showed for hers. About the middle of the way to the
castle of Chagre, Captain Morgan commanded them to
be placed in due order, according to their custom, and
caused every one to be sworn, that they had reserved
nor concealed nothing privately to themselves, even not
so much as the value of sixpence. This being done,
Captain Morgan having had some experience that those
lewd fellows would not much stickle to swear falsely
in points of interest, he commanded every one to be
searched very stricdy, both in their clothes and satchels
and everywhere it might be presumed they had reserved
anything. Yea, to the Intent this order might not be ill
taken by his companions, he permitted himself to be
DIVISION OF THE BOOTY. 237
searched, even to the very soles of his shoes. To this
effect, by common consent, there was assigned one out
of every company, to be the searchers of all the rest.
The French Pirates that went on this expedition with
Captain Morgan, were not well satisfied with this new
custom of searching. Yet their number being less than
that of the English, they were forced to submit to it, as
well as the others had done before them. The search
being over, they re-embarked in their canoes and boats,
which attended them on the river, and arrived at the
castle of Chagre on the 9th day of the said month of
March. Here they found all things in good order, ex-
cepting the wounded men, whom they had left there at
the time of their departure. For of these the greatest
number were dead, through the wounds they had re-
ceived.
From Chagre, Captain Morgan sent presently after
his arrival, a great boat to Porto Bello, wherein were all
the prisoners he had taken at the Isle of St. Catharine,
demanding by them a considerable ransom for the castle
of Chagre, where he then was, threatening otherwise to
ruin and de^nolish it even to the o-round. To this mes-
sage those of Porto Bello made answer : They would not
give one farthing towards the ransom of the said castle,
and that the English might do with it as they pleased.
This answer being come, the dividend was made of all
the spoil they had purchased in that voyage. Thus every
company, and every particular person therein included,
received their portion of what was got : or rather,
what part thereof Captain Morgan was pleased to give
them. For so it was, that the rest of his companions,
even of his own nation, complained of his proceedings in
this particular, and feared not to tell him oj^enly to his
face, that he had reserved the best jewels to himself.
For they judged it impossible that no greater share
should belong to them than two hundred pieces of eight
per capita, of so many valuable booties and robberies
238 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
as they had obtained. Which small sum they thought
too little reward for so much labour and such huge and
manifest dangers as they had so often exposed their lives
to. But Captain Morgan was deaf to all these and many
other complaints of this kind, having designed in his
mind to cheat them of as much as he could.
At last Captain Morgan finding himself obnoxious to
many obloquies and detractions among his people, began
to fear the consequence thereof, and hereupon thinking it
unsafe to remain any longer time at Chagre, he comman-
ded the ordnance of the said casde to be carried on board
his ship. Afterwards he caused the greatest part of the
walls to be demolished, and the edifices to be burnt, and
as many other things spoiled and ruined as could con-
veniendy be done in a short while. These orders being
performed, he went secredy on board his own ship, with-
out giving any notice of his departure to his companions,
nor calling any council, as he used to do. Thus he set
sail, and put out to sea, not bidding anybody adieu, being
only followed by three or four vessels of the whole fleet.
These were such (as the French Pirates believed) as
went shares with Captain Morgan, towards the best and
greatest part of the spoil which had been concealed from
them in the dividend. The Frenchmen could very
willingly have revenged this affront upon Captain Morgan
and those that followed him, had they found themselves
with sufficient means to encounter him at sea. But they
were destitute of most things necessary thereto. Yea,
they had much ado to find sufficient victuals and pro-
visions for their voyage to Jamaica, he having left them
totally unprovided of all things.
CHAPTER VIL
Of a voyage made by the Author, along the coasts of Costa Rica, at
his return toivards famaica. What happened most remark-
able in the said voyage. Some observations made by him at
that time.
Captain Morgan left us all in such a miserable con-
dition, as might serve for a lively representation of what
reward attends wickedness at the latter end of life.
Whence we ought to have learned how to regulate and
amend our actions for the future. However it was, our
affairs being reduced to such a posture, every company
that was left behind, whether English or French, were
compelled to seek what means they could to help them-
selves. Thus most of them separated from each other,
and several companies took several courses, at their
return homewards. As for that party to which I be-
longed, we steered our voyage along the coast of Costa
Rica, where we intended to purchase some provisions, and
careen our vessel in some secure place or other. For
the boat wherein we were, was now grown so foul as to
be rendered totally unfit for sailing. In few days we
arrived at a great port, called Boca del Toro, where are
always to be found huge quantity of good and eatable
tortoises. The circumference hereof is ten leagues, more
or less, being surrounded with little islands, under which
vessels may ride very secure from the violence of the
winds.
The said islands are inhabited by Indians, who never
could be subjugated by the Spaniards, and hence they
give them the name of Indios bravos, or Wild Indians.
240 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
They are divided, according to the variety of idioms
of their language, into several customs and fashions
of people, whence arise perpetual wars against one
another. Towards the east side of this port are
found some of them, who formerly did much trade with
the Pirates, selling to them the flesh of divers animals
which they hunt in their countries, as also all sorts of
fruits that the land produces. The exchange of which
commodities was iron instruments, that the Pirates
brouo-ht with them, beads and other toys, whereof thev
made great account for wearing, more than of precious
jewels, which they knew not nor esteemed in the least.
This commerce afterwards failed, because the Pirates
committed many barbarous inhumanities against them,
killing many of their men on a certain occasion, and
takincy away their women. These abuses gave sufficient
cause for a perpetual cessation of all friendship and
commerce between them and the Pirates.
We went ashore, with design to seek provisions, our
necessity being now almost extreme. But our fortune
was so bad that we could find nothing else than a few
eo-o-s of crocodiles, wherewith we were forced to con-
tent ourselves for that present. Hereupon we left those
quarters, and steered our course eastwards. Being upon
this tack, we met with three boats more of our own com-
panions, who had been left behind by Captain Morgan.
These told us they had been able to find no relief for the
extreme hunger they sustained ; moreover, that Captain
]\Iorgan himself and all his people were already reduced
to such misery, that he could afford them no more allow-
ance than once a day, and that very short too.
We therefore hearing from these boats that litde or no
good was like to be done by sailing farther eastward,
chano-ed our course, and steered towards the west. Here
we found an excessive quantity of tortoises, more than
we needed for the victualling our boats, should we be
never so long without any other flesh or fish. Having
ATTACK BY THE INDIANS. 241
provided ourselves with this sort of victuals, the next
thing we wanted was fresh water. There was enough to
be had in the neighbouring islands, but we scarce dared
to land on them, by reason of the enmity above men-
tioned between us Pirates and those Indians. Notwith-
standing, necessity having no law, we were forced to do
as we could, rather than as we desired to do. And
hereupon we resolved to go all of us together to one of
the said islands. Being landed, one party of our men
went to range in the woods, while another filled the
barrels with water. Scarce one whole hour was past,
after our people were got ashore, when suddenly the
Indians came upon us, and we heard one of our men cry :
Arm! Arm! We presently took up our arms, and
began to fire at them as hot as we could. This caused
them to advance no farther, and in a short while put
them to flight, sheltering themselves in the woods. We
pursued them some part of the way, but not far, by
reason w^e then esteemed rather to get in our water than
any other advantages upon the enemy. Coming back,
we found two Indians dead upon the shore, whereof
the habiliments of one gave us to understand he was a
person of quality amongst them. For he had about his
body a girdle, or sash, very richly woven ; and on his
face he wore a beard of massive gold — I mean, a small
planch of gold hung clown at his lips by two strings
(which penetrated two little holes, made there on pur-
pose), that covered his beard, or served instead thereof
His arms were made of sticks of palmetto-trees, being
very curiously wrought, at one end whereof was a kind
of hook, which seemed to be hardened with fire. We
could willingly have had opportunity to speak with some
of these Indians, to see if we could reconcile their minds
to us, and by this means renew the former trade with them,
and obtain provisions. But this was a thing impossible,
through the wildness of their persons and savageness of
their minds. Notwithstanding, this encounter hindered
R
-42 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
US not from filling our barrels with water, and carrying
them aboard.
The night following we heard from the shore huge
cries and shrieks among the Indians. These lamenta-
tions caused us to believe, because they were heard so far,
they had called in much more people to aid them against
us ; as also, that they lamented the death of those two men
who were killed the day before. These Indians never
come upon the waters of the sea, neither have they ever
o-iven themselves to build canoes or any other sort ot
vessels for navigation — not so much as fisher-boats, of
which art of fishery they are totally ignorant. At last, hav-
ing nothing else to hope for in these parts, we resolved
to depart thence for Jamaica, whither we designed to go.
Being set forth, we met with contrary winds, which
caused us to make use of our oars, and row as far as the
river of Chagre. When we came near it, we perceived
a ship that made towards us, and began to give us chase.
Our apprehensions were that it was a ship from Car-
tao-ena, which might be sent to rebuild and retake posses-
sion of the castle of Chagre, now all the Pirates were
departed thence. Hereupon we set all our sail and ran
before the wind, to see if we could escape or refuge our-
selves in any place. But the vessel, being much swifter
and cleaner than ours, easily got the wind of us, and
stopped our course. Then approaching near us, we
discovered what they were, and knew them to be our
former comrades, in the same expedition of Panama, who
were but lately set out from Chagre. Their design was
to go to Nombre de Dios, and thence to Cartagena, to
seek some purchase or other, in or about that frequented
port. But the wind at that present being contrary to
their intention, they concluded to go in our company
towards the same place where we were before, called
Boca del Toro.
This accident and encounter retarded our journey, in
the space of two days, more than we could regain in a
THE SEA-COW. 243
whole fortnieht. This was the occasion that oblio-ed us
to return to our former station, where we remained for a
few clays. Thence we directed our course for a place
called Boca del Dragon, there to make provisions of flesh,
especially of a certain animal which the Spaniards call
manati,^ and the Dutch, sea-coius, because the head,
nose and teeth of this beast are very like those of a cow.
They are found commonly in such places, as under the
depth of the waters are very full of grass, on which, it is
thought, they pasture. These animals have no ears, and
only in place of them are to be seen two little holes, scarce
capable of receiving the litde finger of a man. Near to
the neck they have two wings, under which are seated
two udders or breasts, much like the breasts of a woman.
The skin is very close and united together, resembling
the skin of a Barbary, or Guinea Dog. This skin upon
the back is of the thickness of two fingers, which, being
dried, is as hard as any whale-bone, and may serve to
make walking-staffs with. The belly is in all things like
that of a cow, as far as the kidneys, or reins. Their
manner of engendering, likewise, is the same with the
usual manner of a land cow, the male of this kind being
in similitude almost one and the same thing with a bull.
Yet, notwithstanding, they conceive and breed but once.
But the space of time that they go with calf, I could not
as yet learn. These fishes have the sense of hearing
extremely acute, in so much that in taking them the
fishermen ought not to make the least noise, nor row,
unless it be very slightly. For this reason they make
use of certain instruments for rowing, which the Indians
call pagayos, and the Spaniards name canclchns, with
which although they row, yet it is performed without any
noise that can fright the fish. While they are busied in
^ The name manati was first applied to this animal by the early
Spanish colonists in regard to the hand-like use of its fore limbs ; a
good description of it is to be found in Dampier's Letters. It is of the
order Sirenia ; there are two varieties— one (M. Latirostris) inhabits the
West Indies and Florida, the other (M. australis) the coast of Brazil.
244 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
this fishery, they do not speak to one another, but all is
transacted by signs. He that darts them with the javelin,
uses it after the same manner as when they kill tortoises.
Howbeit, the point of the said javelin is somewhat
different, having two hooks at the extremity, and these
longer than that of the other fishery. Of these fishes,
some are found to be of the length of twenty to
twenty-four foot. Their flesh is very good to eat, being
very like in colour that of a land cow, but in taste, that
of pork. It contains much fat, or grease, which the
Pirates melt and keep in earthen pots, to make use there-
of instead of oil.
On a certain day, wherein we were not able to do any
good at this sort of fishery, some of our men went into
the woods to hunt, and others to catch other fish. Soon
after we espied a canoe, wherein were two Indians.
These no sooner had discovered our vessels than they
rowed back with all the speed they could towards the
land, being unwilling to trade or have anything to do
with us Pirates. We followed them to the shore, but
through their natural nimbleness, being much greater than
ours, they retired into the woods before we could over-
take them. Yea, what was more admirable, they drew on
shore, and carried with them their canoe into the wood,
as easily as if it were made of straw, although it weighed
above two thousand pounds. This we knew by the canoe
itself, which we found afterwards, and had much ado to
get into the water again, although we were in all eleven
persons to pull at it.
We had at that time in our company a certain pilot,
who had been divers times in those quarters. This man,
seeing this action of the Indians, told us that, some few
years before, a squadron of Pirates happened to arrive at
that place. Being there, they went in canoes, to catch a
certain sort of little birds, which inhabits the sea-coast,
under the shade of very beautiful trees, which here are
to be seen. While they were busied at that work, certain
RIO DE ZUERA. 245
Indians who had climbed up into the trees to view their
actions, seeing now the canoes underneath, leaped down
into the sea, and with huge celerity seized some of the
canoes and Pirates that kept them, both which they
transported so nimbly into the remotest parts of the
woods, that the prisoners could not be relieved by their
companions. Hereupon the admiral of the said squadron
landed presently after with five hundred men, to seek and
rescue the men he had lost. But they saw such an
excessive number of Indians flock together to oppose
them, as obliged them to retreat with all possible diligence
to their ships, concluding among themselves that if such
forces as those could not perform anything towards the
recovery of their companions, they ought to stay no
longer time there. Having heard this history, we came
away thence, fearing some mischief might befall us,
and bringing with us the canoe aforementioned. In this
we found nothing else but a fishing-net, though not very
large, and four arrows, made of palm-tree, of the length
of seven foot each and of the figure, or shape, as follows.
^^
T^
These arrows, we believed, to be their arms. The
canoe we brought away was made of cedar, but very
roughly hewn and polished, which caused us to think that
those people have no instruments of iron.
We left that place, and arrived in twenty four hours at
another called Rio de Zuera, where we found some few
houses belonging to the city of Cartagena. These houses
are inhabited by Spaniards, whom we resolved to visit, not
being able to find any tortoises, nor yet any of their eggs.
The inhabitants were all fled from the said houses, having
left no victuals, nor provisions behind them, in so much
that we were forced to content ourselves with a certain
246 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
fruit, which there is called platano. Of these platanos
we filled our boats, and continued our voyage, coasting
along the shore. Our design was to find out some creek
or bay, wherein to careen our vessel, which now was
very leaky on all sides. Yea, in such a dangerous con-
dition, that both night and day we were constrained to
employ several men at the pump, to which purpose we
made use of all our slaves. This voyage lasted a whole
fortnio-ht, all which time we lay under the continual
frights of perishing every moment. At last we arrived
at a certain port, called The Bay of Bleevelt, being so
named from a Pirate who used to resort thither, with the
same design that we did. Here one party of our men
went into the woods to hunt, while another undertook to
refit and careen our vessel.
Our companions who went abroad to hunt found here-
abouts porcupines, of a huge and monstrous bigness.
But their chief exercise was killing of monkeys, and
certain birds called by the Spaniards faisanes, or phea-
sants. The toil and labour we had in this employment
of shooting, seemed at least to me, to be sufficiently com-
pensated with the pleasure of killing the said monkeys.
For at these we usually made fifteen to sixteen shots
before we could kill three or four of them, so nimbly
would they escape our hands and aim, even after being
desperately wounded. On the other side, it was delight-
ful to see the female monkeys carry their little ones upon
their backs, even just as negresses do their children.
Likewise, if shooting at a parcel of them, any monkey
happens to be wounded, the rest of the company will
fiock about him, and lay their hands upon the wound,
to hinder the blood from issuing forth. Others will
gather moss that grows upon the trees, and thrust it into
the wound, and hereby stop the blood. At other times
they will gather such or such herbs, and, chewing them
in their mouth, apply them after the manner of a poultice,
or cataplasm. All which things did cause in me great
INDIAN ARROW. 247
admiration, seeing such strange actions in those irrational
creatures, which testified the fidelity and love they had
for one another.
On the 9th day after our arrival at that place, our
women-slaves being busied in their ordinary employments
of washing dishes, sewing, drawing water out of wells,
which we had made on the shore, and the like things, we
heard great cries of one of them, who said she had seen
a troop of Indians appear towards the woods, whereby
she began immediately to cry out : Indians, Indians.
We, hearing this rumour, ran presently to our arms, and
their relief. But, coming to the wood, we found no
person there, excepting two of our women-slaves killed
upon the place, with the shot of arrows. In their bodies
we saw so many arrows sticking as might seem they had
been fixed there with particular care and leisure ; for
otherwise we knew that one of them alone was sufficient
to bereave any human body of life. These arrows were
all of a rare fashion and shape, their length being eight
foot, and their thickness of a man's thumb. At one of
the extremities hereof, was to be seen a hook made of
wood, and tied to the body of the arrow with a string.
At the other end was a certain case, or box, like the case
of a pair of tweezers, in which we found certain little
pebbles or stones. The colour thereof was red, and
very shining, as if they had been locked up some con-
siderable time. All which, we believed, were arms be-
longing to their captains and leaders.
D
mriiwwfiii^— —
A. A marcaslie, which was tied to the extremity of the arrow.
B. A hook, tied to the same extremity.
C. The arrotv.
D. The case, at the other end.
248 THE BUCCA.\EERS OF AMERICA.
These arrows were all made without instruments of
iron. For whatsoever the Indians make, they harden
it first very artificially with fire, and afterwards polish it
with flints.
As to the nature of these Indians, they are extremely
robust of constitution, strong and nimble at their feet.
We sought them carefully up and down the woods, but
could not find the least trace of them, neither any of their
canoes, nor floats, whereof they make use to go out to fish.
Hereupon we retired to our vessels, where, having
embarked all our goods, we put off from the shore, fearing
lest finding us there they should return in any con-
siderable number, and overpowering our forces tear us
all in pieces.
CHAPTER VIII.
The Author departs tozvards the Cape of Gracias a Dios. Of the
Commerce zuhich here the Pirates exercise zvitJi the Indians.
His arrival at the Island De las Finos ; and finally, his
returii to famaica.
The fear we had, more than usual, of those Indians
above mentioned, by reason of the death of our two
women-slaves, of which we told you in the former chap-
ter, occasioned us to depart as fast as we could from that
place. We directed our course thence, towards the Cape
of Gracias a Dios, where we had fixed our last hopes of
finding provisions. For thither do usually resort many
Pirates, who entertain a friendly correspondence and
trade with the Indians of those parts. Being arrived at
the said cape, we hugely rejoiced, and gave thanks to
God Almighty, for having delivered us out of so many
dangers, and brought us to this place of refuge, where we
found people who showed us most cordial friendship, and
provided us with all necessaries whatsoever.
The custom of this island is such that, when any
Pirates arrive there, every one has the liberty to buy for
himself an Indian woman, at the price of a knife, or any
old axe, wood-bill or hatchet. By this contract the
woman is obliged to remain in the custody of the Pirate
all the time he stayeth there. She serves him in the
meanwhile, and brings him victuals of all sorts, that the
country affords. The Pirate moreover has liberty to go
when he pleases, either to hunt, or fish, or about any
other divertisements of his pleasure ; but withal is not to
commit any hostility, or depredation upon the inhabitants,
250 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
seeinor the Indians bring; him in all that he stands in need
of, or that he desires.
Through the frequent converse and familiarity these
Indians have with the Pirates, they sometimes go to sea
with them, and remain among them for whole years,
without returning home. Whence it comes that many of
them can speak English, and French, and some of the
Pirates their Indian language. They are very dextrous
at darting with the javelin, whereby they are very useful
to the Pirates, towards the victualling their ships, by the
fishery of tortoises, and manitas, a sort of fish so called
by the Spaniards. For one of these Indians is alone
sufficient to victual a vessel of an hundred persons. We
had among our crew two Pirates who could speak very
well the Indian language. By the help of these men, I
was so curious as to enquire into their customs, lives and
policy, whereof I shall give you here a brief account.
This island contains about thirty leagues in circum-
ference, more or less. It is governed after the form of a
little commonwealth, they having no king nor sovereign
prince among them. Neither do they entertain any
friendship or correspondence with other neighbouring
islands, much less with the Spaniards. They are in
all but a small nation, whose number does not exceed
sixteen or seventeen hundred persons. They have
amonof them some few nes^roes, who serve them in
quality of slaves. These happened to arrive there, swim-
ming, after shipwreck made upon that coast. For being
bound for Terra Firma, in a ship that carried them to be
sold in those parts, they killed the captain and mariners,
with design to return to their country. But through
their ignorance in marinery, they stranded their vessel
hereabouts. Although, as I said before, they make but
a small nation, yet they live divided, as it were, into two
several provinces. Of these, the one sort employ them-
selves in cultivating the ground, and making several
plantations. But the others are so lazy that they have
CAPE OF CR AC/AS A BIOS. 251
not courage to build themselves huts, much less houses,
to dwell in. They frequent chiefly the sea-coast, wan-
dering disorderly up and down, without knowing, or
caring so much as to cover their bodies from the rains,
which are very frequent in those parts, unless it be with
a few palm-leaves. These they put upon their heads,
and keep their backs always turned to the wind that
blows. They use no other clothes than an apron,
tied to their middle ; such aprons are made of the rinds
of trees, which they strongly beat upon stones till they
are softened. Of these same they make use for bed-
clothes, to cover themselves when they sleep. Some
make to themselves bed-clothes of cotton, but these are
but few in number. Their usual arms are nothing but
azagayas, or spears, which they make fit for their use
with points of iron or teeth of crocodiles.
They know, after some manner, that there is a God,
yet they live without any religion or divine worship.
Yea, as far as I can learn, they believe not in nor serve
the devil, as many other nations of America do both
believe, invoke and worship him. Hereby they are not
so much tormented by him, as other nations are. Their
ordinary food, for the greatest part, consists in several
fruits ; such as are called bananas, racoven, ananas,
potatos, cassava; as also crabs, and some few fish of other
sorts, which they kill in the sea with darts. As to their
drink, they are something expert in making certain plea-
sant and delicate liquors. The commonest among them
is called acJiioc. This is made of a certain seed of palm-
tree, which they bruise, and afterwards steep or infuse in
hot water, till it be setded at the bottom. This liquor
being strained off has a very pleasant taste, and is very
nourishing. Many other sorts of liquors they prepare,
which I shall omit for brevity. Only I shall say some-
thing, in short, of that which is made oS. platanos. These
they knead betwixt their hands with hot water, and after-
wards put into great calabashes, which they fill up with
252 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
cold water, and leave in repose for the space of eight
days, during which time it ferments as well as the best
sort of wine. This liquor they drink for pleasure, and
as a great regale, in so much that when these Indians
invite their friends or relations they cannot treat them
better than to give them some of this pleasant drink.
They are very unskilful in dressing of victuals ; and
hence it is that they very seldom treat one another with
banquets. For this purpose, when they go or send to
any house, to invite others, they desire them to come and
drink of their liquors. Before the invited persons come
to their house, those that expect them comb their hair
very well, and anoint their faces with oil of palm, mingled
with a certain black tincture which renders them very
hideous. The women, in like manner, daub their faces
with another sort of stuff, which cause them to look as
red as crimson. And such are the greatest civilities they
use in their ornaments and attire. Afterwards, he that
invites the other takes his arms, which are three or four
azagayas, and goes out of his cottage the space of three
or four hundred steps, to wait for and receive the persons
that are to come to visit him. As soon as they draw
near him, he falls down upon the ground, lying flat on
his face, in which posture he remains without any motion,
as if he were dead. Being thus prostrate before them,
the invited friends take him up and set him upon his feet,
and thus they go altogether to the hut. Here the per-
sons who are invited use the same ceremony, falling
down on the ground, as the inviter did before. But he
lifts them up one by one, and, giving them his hand,
conducts them into his cottage, where he causes them to
sit. The women on these occasions perform few or no
ceremonies.
Being thus brought into the house, they are presented
every one with a calabash full of the liquor abovemen-
tioned, made of platanos, which is very thick, almost like
water-gruel, or children's pap, wherein is contained four
MARRIAGE AND BIRTH CUSTOMS. 253
quarts, more or less, of the said liquor. These they are
to drink off as well as they can, and get down at any rate.
The calabashes being emptied into their stomachs, the
master of the house, with many ceremonies, goes about
the room, and gathers his calabashes. And this drinking
hitherto is reckoned but for one welcome, whereas every
invitation ought to contain several welcomes. After-
wards, they begin to drink of the clear liquor above-
mentioned, for which they were called to this treat.
Hereunto follow many songs and dances and a thousand
caresses to the women that are present.
They do not marry any young maid without the con-
sent of her parents. Hereupon, if any one desires to
take a wife, he is first examined by the damsel's father
concerning several points relating to good husbandry.
These are most commonly : whether he can make
azagayas, darts for fishing or spin a certain thread which
they use about their arrows. Having answered to
satisfaction, the examiner calls to his daua:hter, for a
little calabash full of the liquor above mentioned. Of ' »
this he drinks first ; then gives the cup to the young
man ; and he finally to the bride, who drinks it up ; and
with this only ceremony the marriage is made. When
any one drinks to the health of another, the second person
ought to drink up the liquor which the other person has
left in the calabash. But in case of marriage, as was said
before, it is consumed alone among those three, the
bride obtaining the greatest part to her share.
When the woman lies in, neither she nor her hus-
band observe the time, as is customary among the
Caribbees. But as soon as the woman is delivered, she
goes instantly to the next river, brook or fountain, and
washes the new-born creature, swaddling it up afterwards
in certain rollers, or swaddling bands, which there are
called cabalas. This beinof done, she s^oes about her
ordinary labour, as before. At their entertainments it is
usual, that when the man dies, his wife buries him with
254 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
all his azagayas, aprons and jewels that he used to wear
at his ears. Her next obligation is, to come every day
to her husband's grave, bringing him meat and drink for
a whole year together. Their years they reckon by the
moons, allowing fifteen to every year, which make their
entire circle, as our twelve months do ours.
Some historians, writing of the Caribbee Islands,
affirm that this ceremony of carrying victuals to the dead
is generally observed among them. Moreover, that the
devil comes to the sepulchres, and carries away all the
meat and drink which is placed there. But I myself am
not of this opinion, seeing I have oftentimes with my
own hands taken away these offerings, and eaten them
instead of other victuals. To this I was moved, because
1 knew that the fruits used on these occasions were the
choicest and ripest of all others, as also the liquors of the
best sort they made use of for their greatest regale and
pleasure. When the widow has thus completed her year,
she opens the grave, and takes out all her husband's
bones. These she scrapes and washes very well, and
afterwards dries against the beams of the sun. When
they are sufficiently dried, she ties them all together, and
puts them into a cabala, being a certain pouch or satchel,
and is obliged for another year to carry them upon her
back in the daytime, and to sleep upon them in the night,
until the year be completely expired. This ceremony
being finished, she hangs up the bag and bones against
the post of her own door, in case she be mistress of any
house. But having no house of her own, she hangs
them at the door of her next neighbour, or relation.
The widows cannot marry a second time, according to
the laws or customs of this nation, until the space of the
two years above mentioned be completed. The men are
bound to perform no such ceremonies towards their
wives. But if any Pirate marries an Indian Woman, she is
bound to do with him, in all things, as if he were an Indian
man born. The negroes that are upon this Island, live
FISHING AND HUNTING. 255
here In all respects according to the customs of their
own country. All these things I have thought fit to take
notice of in this place, though briefly, as judging them
worthy the curiosity of some judicious and inquisitive
persons. Now I shall continue the account of our
voyage.
After we had refreshed and provided ourselves, as well
as we could, at the island aforesaid, we departed thence,
and steered our course towards the island De los Pinos.
Here we arrived in fifteen days, and were constrained to
refit again our vessel, which now the second time was
very leaky and not fit for sailing any farther. Hereupon
we divided ourselves, as before, and some went about
that work of careening the ship, while others betook
themselves to fishing. In this last we were so successful
as to take in six or seven hours as much fish as would
abundantly suffice to feed a thousand persons. We had
in our company some Indians from the cape of Gracias a
Dios, who were very dextrous both in hunting and
fishing. With the help of these men we killed likewise,
in a short while, and salted, a huge number of wild cows,
sufficient both to satiate our hungry appetites and to
victual our vessel for the sea. These cows were formerly
brought into this island by the Spaniards, with design
they should here multiply and stock the country with
cattle of this kind. We salted, in like manner, a vast
number of tortoises, whereof in this island huge quantities
are to be found. With these things our former cares and
troubles began to dissipate, and our minds to be so far
recreated as to forget the miseries we had lately endured.
Hereupon, we began to call one another again by the
name of brothers, which was customary amongst us but
had been disused in our miseries and scarce remembered
without regret.
All the time we continued here, we feasted ourselves
very plentifully, without the least fear of enemies. For
as to the Spaniards that were upon the island, they were
256 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
here in mutual league and friendship with us. Thus
we were only constrained to keep watch and ward every
night, for fear of the crocodiles, which are here in great
plenty all over the island. For these, when they are
hungry, will assault any man whatsoever, and devour
him ; as it happened in this conjuncture to one of our
companions. This man being gone into the wood, in
company with a negro, they fell into a place where a
crocodile lay concealed. The furious animal, with in-
credible agility, assaulted the Pirate, and fastening upon
his leg, cast him upon the ground, the negro being fled,
who should assist him. Yet he, notwithstanding, being
a robust and courageous man, drew forth a knife he had
then about him, and with the same, after a dangerous
combat, overcame and killed the crocodile. Which
having done, he himself, both tired with the batde, and
weakened with the loss of blood, that ran from his
wounds, lay for dead upon the place, or at least beside
his senses. Being found in this posture some while after
bv the negro, who returned to see what was become of
his master, he took him upon his back, and brought him
to the sea-side, distant thence the space of a whole league.
Here we received him into a canoe, and conveyed him
on board our ship.
After this misfortune, none of our men dared be so
bold as to enter the woods without good company. Yea,
we ourselves, desirous to revenge the disaster of our
companion, went in troops the next day to the woods,
with design to find out crocodiles to kill. These animals
would usually come every night to the sides of our ship,
and make resemblance of climbing up into the vessel.
One of these, on a certain night, we seized with an iron
hook, but he instead of flying to the bottom, began to
mount the ladder of the ship, till we killed him with other
instruments. Thus, after we had remained there some
considerable time, and refitted ourselves with all things
necessary, we set sail thence for Jamaica. Here we
RECALL OF THE GOVERNOR OF JAMAICA. 257
arrived within few days, after a prosperous voyage, and
found Captain Morgan, who was got home before us, but
had seen as yet none of his companions whom he left
behind, we being the first that arrived there after him.
The said Captain at that present was very busy, en-
deavouring to persuade and levy people to transport to
the isle of St. Catharine, which he designed to fortify
and hold as his own, thinkinof to make it a common
refuge to all sorts of Pirates, or at least of his own nation,
as was said before. But he was soon hindered in the
prosecution of this design, by the arrival of a man-of-war
from England. For this vessel brought orders from his
Majesty of Great Britain, to recall the Governor of
Jamaica from his charge over that island, to the court of
England, there to give an account of his proceedings
and behaviour in relation to the Pirates whom he had
maintained in those parts, to the huge detriment of the
subjects of the King of Spain. To this purpose, the said
man-of-war brought over also a new Governor of Jamaica,
to supply the place of the preceding. This gentleman,
being possessed of the government of the island, pre-
sently after gave notice to all the ports thereof, by
several boats which he sent forth to that intent, of the
good and entire correspondence which his master the
King of England designed henceforwards to maintain in
those Western parts of the world towards his Catholic
Majesty and all his subjects and dominions. And that
to this effect, for the time to come, he had received from
his Sacred Majesty and Privy Council strict and severe
orders, not to permit any Pirate whatsoever to set forth
from Jamaica, to commit any hostility or depredation
upon the Spanish nation, or dominions, or any other
people of those neighbouring islands.
No sooner these orders were sufficiently divulged than
the Pirates, who as yet were abroad at sea, began to fear
them, insomuch that they dared not return home to the
said island. Hereupon they kept the seas as long
s
258 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
as they could, and continued to act as many hostili-
ties as came in their way. Not long after, the same
Pirates took and ransacked a considerable town, seated
in the Isle of Cuba, called La Villa de los Cay os, of which
we made mention in the description of the said island.
Here they committed again all sorts of hostility, and
inhuman and barbarous cruelties. But the new Governor
of Jamaica behaved himself so constant to his duty, and
the orders he had brought from England, that he appre-
hended several of the chief actors herein, and condemned
them to be hanged, which was accordingly done. From this
severity many others still remaining abroad took warning,
and retired to the isle of Tortuga, lest they should fall
into his hands. Here they joined in society with the
French Pirates, inhabitants of the said island, in whose
company they continue to this day.
CHAPTER IX.
The Relation of the shipwreck, zvhich Monsieur Bertram Ogeron,
Governor of the Isle of Tortuga, suffered near the Isles of
Guadanillas. How both he and his co7npanions fell into the
hands of the Spaniards. By what arts he escaped their hands,
and preserved his life. The enterprize which he undertook
against Porto Rico, to deliver his people. The unfortunate
success of that design.
After the expedition of Panama abovementioned, the
inhabitants of the French islands in America, in the year
1673 (while the war was so fierce in Europe between
France and Holland) gathered a considerable fleet, to go
and possess themselves of the islands belonging to the
States-General of the United Provinces in the West
Indies. To this effect, their admiral called together and
levied all the Pirates and volunteers that would, by any
inductions whatsoever, sit down under his colours. With
the same design the Governor of Tortuga caused to be
built in that island a good strong man-of-war, to which
vessel he gave the name of Ogeron. This ship he pro-
vided very well with all sorts of ammunition, and manned
with five hundred buccaneers, all resolute and courageous
men, as being the vessel he designed for his own safety.
Their first intention was to go and take the Isle of
Curacoa, belonging to the said States of Holland. But
this design met with very ill success, by reason of a
shipwreck, which impeded the course of their voyage.
Monsieur Ogeron set sail from the port of Tortuga as
soon as all things were in readiness, with intent to jom
the rest of the said fleet and pursue the enterprize afore-
mentioned. Being arrived on the West side of the Island
259
26o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of St. John de Puerto Rico, he was suddenly surprized
with a violent storm. This increased to such a degree,
that it caused his new frigate to strike against the rocks
that neighbour upon the islands, called Guadanillas,
where the vessel broke into a thousand pieces. Yet
being near the land of Porto Rico, all his men escaped,
by saving their lives in boats, which they had at hand.
The next day, all being now got on shore, they were
discovered by Spaniards who inhabit the island. These
instantly took them to be French Pirates, whose intent
was to take the said island anew, as they had done
several times before. Hereupon they alarmed the whole
country, and, gathering their forces together, marched
out to their encounter. But they found them unprovided
of all manner of arms, and consequendy not able to make
any defence, craving for mercy at their hands, and beg-
ging quarter for their lives, as the custom is. Yet not-
withstanding, the Spaniards, remembering the horrible
and cruel actions those Pirates had many times com-
mitted against them, would have no compassion on their
condition. But answering them Ha ! ye thievish dogs,
here s no quarter for you : they assaulted them with all
the fury imaginable, and killed the greatest part of the
company. At last perceiving they made no resistance,
nor had any arms to defend themselves, they began to
relent in their cruelty, and stay their blows, taking
prisoners as many as remained alive. Yet still they
would not be persuaded but that those unfortunate were
come thither with design to take again and ruin the
island.
Hereupon they bound them with cords, by two and
two or three and three together, and drove them through
the woods, into the campaign, or open fields. Being
come thus far with them, they asked them : What was
become of their captain and leader ? Unto these questions
they constantly made answer : he was drowned in the
shipwreck at sea ; although they knew full well it was
BERTRAM OGERON. 261
false. For Monsieur Ogeron, being unknown to the
Spaniards, behaved himself among them as if he were
a fool and had no common use of reason. Notwith-
standing, the Spaniards, scarce believing what the
prisoners had answered, used all the means they could
possibly to find him, but could not compass their desires.
For Monsieur Ogeron kept himself very close, to all the
features and mimical actions that might become any
innocent fool. Upon this account, he was not tied as
the rest of his companions, but let loose, to serve the
divertisement and laughter of the common soldiers.
These now and then would give him scraps of bread and
other victuals, whereas the rest of the prisoners had
never sufficient wherewith to satisfy their hungry
stomachs. For as to the allowance they had from the
Spaniards, their enemies, it was scarce enough to pre-
serve them alive.
It happened there was found among the French
Pirates a certain surgeon, who had done some remarkable
service to the Spaniards In consideration of these
merits, he was unbound, and set at liberty, to go freely
up and down, even as Monsieur Ogeron did. To this
surgeon Monsieur Ogeron, having a fit opportunity
thereto, declared his resolution of hazarding his life, to
attempt an escape from the cruelty and hard usage of
those enemies. After mature deliberation, they both
performed it, by flying to the woods, with design there
to make something or other that might be navigable,
whereby to transport themselves elsewhere, although to
this effect they neither had nor could obtain any other
thing in the world that could be serviceable in building
of vessels than one hatchet. Thus they joined company,
and began their march towards the woods that lay near-
est the sea-coast. Having travelled all day long, they
came about evening to the sea-side almost unexpectedly.
Here they found themselves without anything to eat, nor
any secure place wherein to rest their wearied lunbs.
202 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
At last they perceived nigh the shore a huge quantity
of fishes, called by the Spaniards corlabados. These
frequently approach the sands of the shore, in pursuit of
other little fishes that serve them for their food. Of
these they took as many as they thought necessary, and,
by rubbing two sticks tediously together, they kindled
fire, wherewith they made coals to roast them. The
next day they began to cut down and prepare timber,
wherewith to make a kind of small boat, in which they
might pass over to the Isle of Santa Cruz, which belongs
to the French.
While they were busied about their work, they dis-
covered, at a great distance, a certain canoe, which steered
directly towards the place where they were. This occa-
sioned in their minds some fears lest they should be
found, and taken again by the Spaniards ; and hereupon
they retired into the woods, till such time as they could
see thence and distinguish what people were in the
canoe. But at last, as their good fortune would have it,
they perceived them to be no more than two men, who
in their disposition and apparel seemed to be fishermen.
Having made this discovery, they concluded unanimously
betwixt themselves to hazard their lives, and overcome
them, and afterwards seize the canoe. Soon after they
perceived one of them, who was a mulatto, to go with
several calabashes hanging at his back towards a spring,
not far distant from the shore, to take in fresh water.
The other, who was a Spaniard, remained behind, wait-
ing for his return. Seeing them divided, they assaulted
the mulatto first, and discharging a great blow on his head
with the hatchet, they soon bereaved him of life. The
Spaniard, hearing the noise, made instantly towards the
canoe, thinking to escape. But this he could not per-
form so soon, without being overtaken by the two, and
there massacred by their hands. Having now compassed
their design, they went to seek for the corpse of the
mulatto, which they carried on board the canoe. Their
ARRIVAL AT SAMANA. 263
intent was to convey them into the middle of the sea,
and there cast them overboard, to be consumed by the
fish, and by this means conceal this fact from being
known to the Spaniards, either at a short or long distance
of time.
These things being done, they took in presendy as
much fresh water as they could, and set sail to seek some
place of refuge. That day they steered along the coast
of Porto Rico, and came to the cape called by the
Spaniards Cabo Roxo. Hence they traversed direcdy
to the Isle of Hispaniola, where so many of their own
comrades and companions were to be found. Both the
currents of the waters and winds were very favourable to
this voyage, in so much that in a few days they arrived
at a place called Samana, belonging to the said island,
where they found a party of their own people.
Monsieur Ogeron, being landed at Samana, gave
orders to the surgeon to levy all the people he could
possibly in those parts, while he departed to revisit his
government of Tortuga. Being arrived at the said
port, he used all his endeavours to gather what vessels
and men he could to his assistance. So that withm a
few days he compassed a good number of both.^ very well
equipped and disposed to follow and execute his designs.
These were to go to the Island of St. John de Puerto
Rico, and deliver his fellow prisoners, whom he had
left in the miserable condition as was said before. After
having embarked all the people which the surgeon had
levied at Samana, he made them a speech, exhorting
them to have good courage, and telling them : Yoil may
all expect gi^eat spoil and riches from this enterprize, and
therefore let all fear and coivardice be set on side. On
the contrary, fill your hearts with courage and valour, for
thus you will find yourselves soon satisfied, of zahat, at
present, bare hopes do promise. Every one relied much on
these promises of Monsieur Ogeron, and, from his words,
conceived no small joy in their minds. Thus they set
204 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
sail from Tortuga, steering their course directly for the
coasts of Porto Rico. Being come within sight of land,
they made use only of their lower sails, to the intent they
might not be discovered at so great a distance by the
Spaniards, till they came somewhat near the place where
they intended to land.
The Spaniards, notwithstanding this caution, had
intelligence beforehand of their coming, and were pre-
pared for a defence, having posted many troops of horse
all along the coast, to watch the descent of the French
Pirates. Monsieur Ogeron, perceiving their vigilance,
gave order to the vessels to draw near the shore, and
shoot off many great guns, whereby he forced the cavalry
to retire to places more secure within the woods. Here
lay concealed many companies of foot, who had prostrated
themselves upon the ground. Meanwhile the Pirates
made their descent at leisure, and began to enter among
the trees, scarce suspecting any harm to be there, where
the horsemen could do no service. But no sooner were
they fallen into this ambuscade than the Spaniards arose
with great fury, and assaulted the French so courageously
that in a short while they destroyed great part of them.
And thus leaving great numbers of dead on the place, the
rest with difficulty escaped by retreating in all haste to
their ships.
Monsieur Ogeron, although he escaped this danger,
yet could willingly have perished in the fight, rather than
suffer the shame and confusion the unfortunate success
of this enterprize was like to bring upon his reputation,
especially considering that those whom he had attempted
to set at liberty were now cast into greater miseries
through this misfortune. Hereupon they hastened to set
sail, and go back to Tortuga the same way they came,
with great confusion in their minds, much diminished in
their number, and nothing laden with those spoils, the
hopes whereof had possessed their hearts, and caused
them readily to follow the promises of unfortunate Mon-
MISERY OF THE FRENCH PRISONERS. 265
sieur Ogeron. The Spaniards were very vigilant, and
kept their posts near the sea-side, till such time as the
fleet of Pirates was totally out of sight. In the mean-
while they made an end of killing such of their enemies
as being desperately wounded could not escape by flight.
In like manner, they cut off several limbs from the dead
bodies, with design to show them to the former prisoners,
for whose redemption these others had crossed the seas.
The fleet being departed, the Spaniards kindled bon-
fires all over the island, and made great demonstrations
of joy for the victory they had obtained. But the French
prisoners who were there before had more hardship
showed them from that day than ever. Of their misery
and misusage was a good eye witness, Jacob Binkes,
Governor at that time in America for the States-General
of the United Provinces. For he happened to arrive in
that conjuncture at the Island of Porto Rico, with some
men-of-war, to buy provisions and other necessaries for
his fleet. His compassion on their misery was such as
caused him to bring away by stealth five or six of the
said prisoners, which served only to exasperate the minds
of the Spaniards. For soon after they sent the rest of
the prisoners to the chief city of the island, there to work
and toil about the fortifications which then were making,
forcing them to bring and carry stones and all sorts of
materials belonging thereto. These being finished, the
Governor transported them to Havana, where they em-
ployed them in like manner, in fortifying that city. Here
they caused them to work in the day-time, and by
night they shut them up as close prisoners, fearing lest
they should enterprize upon the city. For of such
attempts the Spaniards had had divers proofs on other
occasions, which afforded them sufficient cause to use
them after that manner.
Afterwards at several times, wherein ships arrived
there from New Spain, they transported them by degrees
into Europe, and landed them at the city of Cadiz. But
266 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
notwithstanding this care of the Spaniards to disperse
them, they soon after met almost all together in France,
and resolved among themselves to return again to
Tortuga with the first opportunity should proffer. To
this effect, they assisted one another very lovingly with
what necessaries they could spare, according to every
one's condition : so that in a short while the greatest
part of those Pirates had nested themselves again at
Tortuga, their common place of rendezvous. Here,
some time after, they equipped again a new fleet, to re-
venge their former misfortunes on the Spaniards, under
the conduct of one Le Sieur Maintenon, a Frenchman
by nation. With this fleet he arrived at the Island of
Trinidad, situated between the Isle of Tobago and the
neighbouring coasts of Paria. This island they sacked,
and afterwards put to the ransom of ten thousand pieces
of eight. Hence they departed, with design to take and
pillage the city of Caracas, situated over against the
Island of Curacoa, belonging to the Hollanders.
CHAPTER X.
A relation of zuhat encounters lately happened at the Islands of
Cayajia and Tobago, betiueen the Count de Estres, Admiral
of France, in America, a?id the Heer facob Binkes, Vice-
Admiral of tJie United Provinces, in the same parts.
It is a thing already known to the greatest part of
Europe that the Prince of Courland began to establish a
colony in the Island of Tobago. As also, that some-
while after, his people, for want of timely recruits from
their own country, abandoned the said island, leaving it
to the first that should come and possess it. Thus it fell
into the hands of the Heers Adrian and Cornelius Lamp-
sius, natives of the city of Flushing, in the province of
Zeeland. For being arrived at the said Island of Tobago,
in the year 1654, they undertook to fortify it, by com-
mand of their sovereigns, the States-General. Hereupon
they built a goodly casde, in a convenient situation,
capable of hindering the assaults of any enemies that
might enterprize upon the island.
The strength of this casde was afterwards sufficiently
tried by Monsieur de Estres, as I shall presendy relate,
after I have first told you what happened before at
Cayana, in the year 1676. This year the States-General
of the United Provinces sent their Vice- Admiral, Jacob
Binkes, to the Island of Cayana, then in possession of the
French, to retake the said island, and hereby restore it
to the dominions of the United Provinces aforemen-
tioned. With these orders he set forth from Holland.
on the 1 6th day of March in the said year, his fleet con-
sisting of seven men-of-war, one fireship and five other
2C7
268 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
small vessels of less account. This fleet arrived at
Cayana the 4th day of the month of May next following.
Immediately after their arrival, the Heer Binkes landed
nine hundred men, who, approaching the castle, summoned
the Governor to surrender, at their discretion. His
answer was : He thought of nothing less than surrender-
ing, but that he and his people were resolved to defend
themselves, even to the utmost of their endeavours.
The Heer Binkes having received this answer, presently
commanded his troops to attack the castle on both sides
at once. The assault was very furious. But at length,
the French being few in number and overwhelmed with
the multitude of their enemies, surrendered both their
arms and the castle. In it were found thirty-seven
pieces of cannon. The Governor, who was named
Monsieur Lesi, together with two priests, were sent into
Holland. The Heer Binkes lost in the combat fourteen
men only, and had twenty two wounded.
The King of France no sooner understood this success
than he sent in the month of October following the
Count de Estres, to retake the said island from the
Hollanders. He arrived there in the month of Decem-
ber, with a squadron of men-of-war, all very well
equipped and provided. Being come on his voyage as
far as the river called Aperovaco, he met there with a
small vessel of Nantes, which had set forth from the said
Island of Cayana but a fortnight before. This ship gave
him intelligence of the present state and condition,
wherein he miMit be certain to find the Hollanders at
Cayana. They told him there were three hundred men
in the castle ; that all about it they had fixed strong
palisades, or empalements ; and that within the castle
were mounted twenty-six pieces of cannon.
Monsieur de Estres, being enabled with this intelli-
gence to take his own measures, proceeded on his voyage,
and arrived at a port of the said island, three leagues
distant from the castle. Here he landed eight hundred
COUNT DE E STRES. 269
men, whom he divided into two several parties. The
one he placed under the conduct of the Count de Blinac,
and the other he gave to Monsieur de St. Faucher. On
board the fleet he left Monsieur Gabaret, with divers
other principal troops, which he thought not fit or
necessary to be landed. As soon as the men were set on
shore, the fleet weighed anchor, and sailed very slowly
towards the castle, while the soldiers marched by land.
These could not travel otherwise than by night, by
reason of the excessive heat of the sun and intolerable
exhalations of the earth, which here is very sulphurous,
and consequently no better than a smoky and stinking
oven.
On the 19th day of the said month the Count de
Estres sent Monsieur de Lesi (who had been Governor
of the island, as was said before ), demanding of them, to
deliver the casde to the obedience of the King, his
master, and to him in his sovereign's name. But those
who were within resolved not to deliver themselves up,
but at the expense of their lives and blood, which answer
they sent to Monsieur de Estres. Hereupon the French,
the following night, assaulted and stormed the castle on
seven several sides thereof all at once. The defendants,
having performed their obligation very stoutly, and
fought with as much valour as was possible, were as last
forced to surrender. Within the castle were found thirty-
eight persons dead, besides many others that were
wounded. All the prisoners were transported into
France, where they were used with great hardship.
Monsieur de Estres, having put all things in good
order at the Isle of Cayana, departed thence for that of
Martinique. Being arrived at the said island, he was told
that the Heer Binkes was at that present at the Island
of Tobago, and his fleet lay at anchor in the bay.
Having received this intelligence. Monsieur de Estres
made no long stay there, but set sail again, steering his
course directly for Tobago. No sooner was he come
270 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
near the island than Vice-Aclmiral Binkes sent his land-
forces, together with a good number of mariners, on
shore, to manage and defend the artillery that was there.
These forces were commanded by the Captains Van der
Graef, Van Dongen and Ciavone, who laboured very
hard all that night in raising certain batteries and filling
up the palisades, or empalements, of the fortress called
Sterreschans.
Two days after, the French fleet came to an anchor in
the Bay of Palmit, and immediately, with the help of
eighteen boats, they landed all their men. The Heer
Binkes, perceiving the French to appear upon the hills,
gave orders to burn all the houses that were near the
castle, to the intent the French might have no place to
shelter themselves thereabouts. On the 23rd day of
February, Monsieur de Estres sent a drum over to the
Hollanders, to demand the surrender of the fort, which
was absolutely denied. In this posture of affairs things
continued until the 3rd of March. On this day the
French fleet came with full sail, and engaged the Dutch
fleet. The Heer Binkes presently encountered them,
and the dispute was very hot on both sides. In the
meanwhile the land-forces belonging to the French being
sheltered by the thickness of the woods, advanced to-
wards the castle, and began to storm it very briskly,
with more than ordinary force, but were repulsed by the
Dutch with such vigor as caused them after three distinct
attacks to retire, with the loss of above one hundred and
fifty men, and two hundred wounded. These they carried
off, or rather dragged away, with no small difficulty, by
reason of their disorderly retreat.
All this while the two fleets continued the combat, and
fought very desperately, until on both sides some ships
were consumed between Vulcan and Neptune. Of this
number was Monsieur de Estres' own ship, mounted
with twenty-seven guns of prodigious bigness, besides
other pieces of lesser port. The battle continued from
FRENCH ENTERPRIZE AGAINST TOBAGO. 271
break of day until the evening. A little before which
time, Monsieur de Estres quitted the bay with the rest of
his ships, unto the Hollanders, excepting only two, which
were stranded under sail, as having gone too high within
the port. Finally, the victory remained on the side of
the Hollanders, howbeit with the loss of several of their
ships that were burnt.
Monsieur de Estres finding himself under the shame
of the loss of this victory, and that he could expect no
advantage for that present, over the Island of Tobago,
set sail from those quarters the i8th day of March, and
arrived the 21st day of June next following at the port
of Brest in France. Having given an account of these
transactions to his most Christian Majesty, he was pleased
to command him to undertake again the enterprize of
Tobago. To this effect, he gave orders for eight great
men-of-war to be equipped with all speed, together with
eiofht others of smaller account : with all which vessels
o
he sent again Monsieur de Estres into America the same
year. He set sail from the said port of Brest on the 3rcl
day of October following, and arrived the ist of Decem-
ber at the Island of Barbados. Afterwards, having re-
ceived some recruits from the Isle of Martinique, he sent
beforehand to review the Island of Tobago, and consider
the condition thereof This being done, he weighed
anchor and set sail directly for the said island, where he
arrived the 7th day of the said month of December with
all his fleet.
Immediately after his arrival he landed five hundred
men, under the conduct of Monsieur de Blinac, Governor
of the French islands in America. These were followed
soon after by one thousand more. The 9th day of the
said month they approached within six hundred paces of
a certain post called Le Cort, where they landed all the
artillery designed for this enterprize. On the loth day
Monsieur de Estres went in person to take a view of the
castle, and demanded of the Heer Binkes, by a mes-
272 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
senger, the surrender thereof, which was generously-
denied. The next day the French began to advance
towards the castle, and on the 12 th of the said month,
the Dutch from within began to fire at them with great
perseverance. The PVench made a beginning to their
attack by casting fire-balls into the castle with main
violence. The very third ball that was cast in happened
to fall in the path- way that led to the store-house, where
the powder and ammunition was kept, belonging to
the castle. In this path was much powder scattered
up and down, through the negligence of those that
carried it to and fro for the necessary supplies of the
defendants. By this means the powder took fire in the
path, and thence ran in a moment as far as the store-
house above mentioned, so that suddenly both the store-
house was blown up, and with it Vice-Admiral Binkes
himself, then Governor of the island, and all his officers.
Only Captain Van Dongen remained alive. This mis-
chance being perceived by the French, they instantly ran
with five hundred men, and possessed themselves of the
castle. Here they found three hundred men alive, whom
they took prisoners, and transported into France.
Monsieur de Estres after this commanded the castle to
be demolished, together with other posts that might serve
for any defence, as also all the houses standing upon the
island. This being done, he departed thence the 27th
day of the said month of December, and arrived again in
France, after a prosperous voyage.
PART IV.
Containing the dangerous voyage and bold assaults
OF Captain Bartholomew Sharp and others,
performed in the South Sea, for
the space of two years, etc.
VOL. II.
— f' y..- . — «^r-
TlleTropickofCanc.
-^c5g^.,f^^^\;i
Mare
Equinoaial
C'
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
PART IV.
CHAPTER I.
Captain Coxon, Saivkins, Sharp and others set forth in a fleet
tozvards the province of Darien, upon the co?itinent of
America. Their designs to pillage and phinder in those
parts. Number of their ships, and strength of their forces
by sea and land.
At a place called Boca del Toro was the general
rendezvous of the fleet, which lately had taken and
sacked Porto Bello the second time; that rich place
having been taken once before, under the conduct of Sir
Henry Morgan, as is related above. At this place also
were two other vessels ; the one belonging to Captain
Peter Harris, and the other to Captain Richard Sawkins ;
both Englishmen and privateers. Here therefore a
report was made to the fleet of a peace concluded be-
tween the Spaniards and the Indians of the land of
Darien, who for the most part wage incessant wars
against one another. Also, that since the conclusion of
the said peace, they had been already tried, and found
very faithful to Captain Bournano, a French commander,
in an attempt on a certain place called Chepo, near the
South Sea. Further, that the Indians had promised to
conduct him to a great and very rich place, named Toca-
mora : upon which he had likewise promised them to
>76
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
return in three months time with more ships and men.
Hereupon we all agreed to go and visit the said place,
and thus dispersed ourselves into several coves (by the
Spaniards called nlevas, or hollow creeks under the
coasts), there to careen and fit our vessels for that pur-
pose. In this place, Boca del Toro, we found plenty of fat
tortoises, the pleasantest meat in the world. When we had
refitted our vessels, we met at an island, called by us
the Water-key ; and this was then our strength, as
follows :
Capta
Capta
Capta
Capta
Capta
Capta
Capta
Capta
Capta
n Coxon in a ship of
n Harris
n Bournano
n Sawkins
n Sharp
n Cook
n Alleston
n Row
n Macket
Tons
Guns
Men
80
8
97
150
25
107
90
6
S6
16
I
35
25
2
40
35
0
43
18
0
24
20
0
25
14
0
20
We sailed thence March 23rd, 1679, and in our way
touched at the islands called Samballas. These are
certain islands reaching eight leagues in extent, and
lying fourteen leagues westward of the river of Darien.
Being here at anchor, many of the Indians, both men
and women, came to see us. Some brought plantains,
others other fruits and venison, to exchange with us for
beads, needles, knives, or any trifling bauble whereof
they stand in need. But what they most chiefly covet
are axes and hatchets to fell timber with. The men
here go almost naked. They wear as an ornament in
their noses a golden or silver plate, in shape like a half-
moon, which, when they drink they hold up with one
hand, while they lift the cup with the other. They
paint themselves sometimes with streaks of black ; as the
women do in like manner with red. These have in their
noses a pretty thick ring of gold or silver ; and for cloth-
THE SAMBALLAS ISLANDS. 277
ing they cover themselves with a blanket. They are
generally well-featured women : among them I saw
several fairer than the fairest of Europe, with hair like
the finest flax. Of these it is reported, they can see far
better in the dark than in the light.
These Indians misliked our design for Tocamora, and
dissuaded us from it, asserting it would prove too tedious
a march, and the way so mountainous, and uninhabited
that it would be extremely difficult to get provisions for
our men. Withal they proffered to guide us, undescried,
within a few leagues of the city of Panama, in case we
were pleased to go thither ; where we could not choose
but ourselves know we should not fail of making a good
voyage. Upon these and other reasons which they gave
us, we concluded to desist from the journey of Tocamora,
and to proceed to Panama. Having taken these reso-
lutions. Captain Bournano and Captain Row's vessels
separated from us, as being all French, and not willing
to go to Panama, they declaring themselves generally
against a long march by land. Thus we left them at
the Samballas. Thence an Indian captain or chief com-
mander, named Androeas, conducted us to another island,
called by the English the Golden Island, situated some-
what to the westward of the mouth of the great river of
Darien. At this island we met, being in all seven sail,
on April 3rd, 1680.
Here at the Golden Island, the Indians gave us notice
of a town called Santa Maria, situated on a great river,
which bears the same name, and which runs into the
South Sea by the Gulf of San Miguel. In the town was
kept a garrison of four hundred soldiers ; and from this
place much gold was carried to Panama, which was
gathered from the mountains thereabouts. In case we
should not find sufficient booty there, we might thence
proceed by sea to Panama, where we could not easily fail
of our designs. This motion of the Indians we liked so
well, that we landed three hundred and thirty-one men,
278 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
on April 5th, 1680, leaving Captains Alleston and Macket
with a party of seamen to guard our ships in our absence
with which we intended to return home.
The men that were landed had each of them three
or four cakes of bread (called by the English dough-
boys) for their provision of victuals ; and for drink,
the rivers afforded enough. At the time of our landing
Captain Sharp was very faint and weak, having had a
great fit of sickness lately, from which he had scarcely
recovered. Our several companies that marched were
distinguished as follows. First, Captain Bartholomew
Sharp with his company had a red flag, with a bunch
of white and green ribbons. The second division led
by Captain Richard Sawkins, with his men had a red
flag striped with yellow. The third and fourth, led by
Captain Peter Harris, had two green flags, his company
being divided into two several divisions. The fifth and
sixth, led by Captain John Coxon, who had some of
Alleston's and Mackett's men joined to his, made two
divisions or companies, and had each of them a red flag.
The seventh was led by Captain Edmund Cook with red
colours striped with yellow, with a hand and sword for
his device. All or most of them, were armed with fuzee,
pistol and hanger.
CHAPTER II.
They march tozvards the tozvn of Santa Maria with design to
take it. The Indian King of Da^'ien meets them by the
%uay. Difficulties of this march, with other occurrences till
they arrive at the place.
Being landed on the coast of Darien, and divided into
companies, as was mentioned in the preceding chapter,
we began our march towards Santa Maria, the Indians
serving us for guides in that unknown country. Thus
we marched at first through a small skirt of a wood, and
then over a bay almost a league in length. After that,
we went two leagues directly up a woody valley, where
we saw here and there an old plantation, and had a very
good path to march in. There we came to the side of a
river, which in most places was dry, and built us houses,
or rather huts, to lodge in.
To this place came to us another Indian, who was a
chief commander and a man of great parts, named
Captain Antonio. This Indian officer encouraged us
very much to undertake the journey to Santa Maria, and
promised to be our leader, saying he would go along with
us now, but that his child lay very sick. However, he
was assured it would die by the next day, and then he
would most certainly follow and overtake us. Withal,
he desired we would not lie in the grass for fear of
monstrous adders, which are very frequent in those
places. Breaking some of the stones that lay in the
river, we found them shine with sparks of gold. These
stones are driven down from the neighbouring mountains
2 So THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
in time of floods. This day four of our men tired, and
returned to the ships. So we remained in all 327 men,
with six Indians to conduct us. That night some
showers of rain fell.
The next day of our march we mounted a very steep
hill, and on the other side at the foot thereof we rested
on the bank of a river, which Captain Andrceas told us
ran into the South Sea, being the same river on which
the town of Santa Maria was situated. Hence we con-
tinued our march until noon, and then ascended another
mountain very much higher than the former. Here we
ran much danger oftentimes and in many places, the
mountain being so perpendicular, and the path so narrow,
that but one man at a time could pass. We arrived by
the dark of the evening to the other side of the moun-
tain, and lodged again by the side of the same river,
having marched that day, according to our reckoning,
about eighteen miles. This night likewise some rain
fell.
The next morning being April 7th, we marched all
along the river aforementioned, crossing it often, almost
at every half-mile, sometimes up to the knees and at
other times up to the middle, in a very swift current.
About noon we came to a place where we found some
Indian houses. These were very large and neat : the
sides were built with cabbage-trees, and the roofs of
wild canes, thatched with palmetto royal, but far neater
than ours at Jamaica. They had many divisions into
rooms, though no ascent by stairs into chambers. At
this place were four of these houses together, that is,
within a stone's throw one of another, each of them hav-
ing a large plantain walk before it. At the distance of
half a mile from this place lived the king or chief captain
of these Indians of Darien, who came to visit us in royal
robes, with his queen and family. His crown was made
of small white reeds, which were curiously woven, having
no other top than its lining, which was of red silk.
THE INDIANS OF DARIEN. 281
Round about the middle of it was a thin plate of gold,
more than two inches broad, laced behind ; whence did
stick two or three ostrich feathers. About this plate
went also a row of golden beads, which were bigger than
ordinary peas ; underneath which the red lining of the
crown was seen. In his nose he wore a large plate of
gold in the form of a half moon, and in each ear a great
golden ring, nearly four inches in diameter, with a round
thin plate of gold of the same breadth, having a small
hole in the centre, by which it hung to the ring. He
was covered with a thin white cotton robe, reaching
to the small of his legs, and round its bottom a fringe
of the same, three inches deep. So that by the length
of this robe, our sight was impeded, that we could
see no higher than his naked ankles. In his hand he
had a long bright lance, as sharp as any knife. With
him he had three sons, each of them having a white
robe, and their lances in their hands, but standing bare-
headed before him ; as also were eight or nine persons
more of his retinue, or guard. His queen wore a red
blanket, which was closely girt about her waist, and
another that came loosely over her head and shoulders,
like our old-fashioned striped hangings. She had a
young child in her arms, and two daughters walked by
her, both marriageable, with their faces almost covered
with stripes or streaks of red, and almost laden about
their neck and arms with small beads of several colours.
These Indian women of the province of Darien, are
generally very free, airy and brisk ; yet withal very
modest, and cautious in their husbands' presence, of
whose jealousy they stand in fear. With these Indians
we made an exchange, or had a truck, as it is called, for
knives, pins, needles, or any other such like trifles ; but
in our dealing with them we found them to be very
cunning. Here we rested ourselves for the space of one
day, and withal chose Captain Sawkins to lead the For-
lorn, to whom, for that purpose, we gave the choice of
282 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
fourscore men. The king ordered us each man to have
three plantanis, with sugar-canes to suck, by way of a
present. But when these were consumed, if we could
not truck we must have starved, for the king himself did
not refuse to deal for his plantains. This sort of fruit is
first reduced to mash, then laid between leaves of the
same tree, and so used with water ; after which prepara-
tion they call it Miscelaw.
On April 9th, we continued our march along the
banks of the river abovementioned, finding on our way,
here and there a house. The owners of the said houses
would most commonly stand at the door, and give, as we
passed by, to every one of us, either a ripe plantain, or
some sweet cassava-root. Some of them would count us
by dropping a grain of corn for each man that passed be-
fore them ; for they know no greater number, nor can
count no farther than twenty. That night we arrived
at three great Indian houses, where we took up our
lodgings, the weather being clear and serene all night.
The next day Captain Sharp, Captain Coxon, and
Captain Cook, with about threescore and ten of our men,
embarked themselves in fourteen canoes upon the river.
to glide down the stream. Among this number I also
embarked, and we had in our company our Indian Cap-
tain Andrceas, of whom mention was made above, and
two Indians more in each canoe, to pilot or guide us
down the river. But if we had been tired whilst travel-
ling by land before, certainly we were in a worse con-
dition now in our canoes. For at the distance of almost
every stone's cast, we were constrained to quit and get
out of our boats, and haul them over either sands or
rocks, and at other times over trees that lay across and
filled up the river so that they hindered our navigation ;
yea, several times over the very points of land itself.
That very night we built ourselves huts for shelter upon
the riverside, and rested our wearied limbs until next
morning.
THE INDIANS SUSPECTED OF TREACHERY. 283
This being come, we prosecuted our journey all day
long with the same fatigue and toil, as we had done the
day before. At night came a tiger and looked on us for
some while, but we did not dare to fire at the animal,
fearing we should be descried by the sound of our
fuzees ; the Spaniards, as we were told, not being at any
great distance from that place.
But the next day, which was April 12th, our pain and
labour was rather doubled than diminished; not only
for the difficulties of the way, which were intolerable,
but chiefly for the absence of our main body of men,
from whom we had parted the day before. For now
hearing no news of them, we grew extremely jealous of
the Indians and their councils, suspecting a design of
those people thus to divide our forces, and then by
cutting us off, to betray us to the Spaniards our implac-
able enemies. That night we rested ourselves by build-
ing huts, as we had done, and as has been mentioned
before.
On Tuesday morning, the next ensuing day, we con-
tinued our navigation down the river, and arrived at a
beachy point of land, at which place another arm joins
the same river. Here as we understood, the Indians of
Darien did usually rendezvous, whensoever they drew up
in a body, with intention to fight their ancient enemies,
the Spaniards. Here also we made a halt, or waited for
the rest of our forces and company, the Indians having
now sent to seek them, as being themselves not a litde
concerned at our dissatisfaction and jealousies. In the
afternoon our companions came up with us, and were
hugely glad to see us, they having been in no less fear
for us than we had been at the same time for them. We
remained and rested there that night also, with design to
fit our arms for action, which now, as we were told, was
near at hand.
We departed thence early the next morning, which
was the last day of our march, having in all now the
284 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
number of threescore and eight canoes, wherein were
embarked 327 of us Englishmen, and 50 Indians, who
served us for guides. To the point abovementioned the
Indians had hitherto guided our canoes with long poles
or sticks ; but now we made ourselves oars and paddles
to row with, thus to make what speed we could. Thus
we rowed with all haste imaginable, and upon the river
we happened to meet two or three Indian canoes that
were laden with plantains. About midnight we arrived
and landed at the distance of half a mile, more or less,
from the town of Santa Maria, whither our march was all
along intended. The place where we landed was deeply
muddy, insomuch that we were constrained to lay our
paddles on the mud to wade upon, and withal lift our-
selves up by the boughs of the trees to support our
bodies from sinking. Afterwards we were forced to cut
our way through the woods for some space, where we
took up our lodgings for that night, for fear of being
discovered by the enemy, to whom we were so near.
CHAPTER III.
They take the toivn of Santa Maria with no loss of men, and but
small booty of what they fought for. Description of the
place, country and river adjacent. They resolve to go and
plunder for the second time the city of Panama.
The next morning, which was Thursday, April 15th,
about break of day, we heard from the town a small arm
discharged, and after that a drum beating a travailler.
With this we were roused from our sleep, and taking up
our arms we put ourselves in order and marched towards
the town. As soon as we came out of the woods into
the open ground, we were descried by the Spaniards,
who had received intelligence before-hand of our coming,
and were prepared to receive us, having already con-
veyed away all their treasure of gold, and sent it to
Panama. They ran immediately into a large palisaded
fort, having each pale or post twelve feet high, and
began to fire very briskly at us as we came. But our
vanguard ran up to the place, and pulling down two or
three of their palisades, entered the fort incontinently,
and made themselves masters thereof. In this action
not fifty of our men had come up before the fort was
taken, and on our side only two were wounded, and not
one killed. Notwithstanding within the place were
found two hundred and threescore men, besides which
number two hundred others were said to be absent,
having gone up into the country to the mines to fetch
down gold, or rather to convey away what was already in
the town. This golden treasure comes down another
a85
286 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
branch of this river to Santa Maria, from the neighbour-
ing mountains, where are thought to be the richest mines
of the Indies, or, at least, of all these parts of the western
world. Of the Spaniards we killed in the assault twenty-
six, and wounded to the number of sixteen more. But
their governor, their priest, and all, or most of their chief
men, made their escape by flight.
Having taken the fort, we expected to find here a con-
siderable town belonging to it. But it proved to be
only some wild houses made of cane, the place being
chiefly a garrison designed to keep in subjection the
Indians, who bear a mortal hatred towards, and are often
apt to rebel against, the Spaniards. But bad as the
place was, our fortune was much worse. For we came
only three days too late to meet with three hundred
weight of gold, which was carried thence to Panama in a
bark, that is sent thence twice or thrice every year, to
fetch the gold brought to Santa Maria from the moun-
tains. This river called by the name of the town,
is hereabouts twice as broad as the river Thames at
London, and flows above three score miles upwards,
rising to the height of two fathom and a half at the town
itself. As soon as we had taken the place, the Indians
who belonged to our company, and had served us for
guides, came up to the town. For whilst they heard the
noise of the guns, they were in great consternation, and
dared not approach the palisades, but hid themselves
closely in a small hollow, so that the bullets, while we
were fighting, flew over their heads.
Here we found and redeemed the eldest daughter of
the King of Darien, of whom we made mention above.
She had, as it should seem, been forced away from her
father's house by one of the garrison (which rape had
hugely incensed him against the Spaniards) and was
with child by him. After the fight the Indians destroyed
as many of the Spaniards as we had done in the assault,
by taking them into the adjoining woods, and there
CAPTURE OF SANTA MARIA. SMALL BOOTY. 287
Stabbing them to death with their lances. But so soon
as we learnt of this barbarous cruelty, we hindered them
from taking any more out of the fort, where we confined
them every one prisoners. Captain Sawkins, with a
small party of ten more, put himself into a canoe, and
went down the river, to pursue and stop, if it were pos-
sible, those that had escaped, for they were the chief
people of the town and garrison. But now, our great
expectations of taking a huge booty of gold at this place
being totally vanished, we were unwilling to have come
so far for nothing, or to go back empty-handed, es-
pecially considering what vast riches were to be had at
no great distance. Hereupon, we resolved to go to
Panama, which place, if we could take, we were assured
we should get treasure enough to satisfy our hungry
appetite for gold and riches, that city being the recep-
tacle of all the plate, jewels, and gold that is dug out
of the mines of all Potosi and Peru. For this purpose
therefore, and to please the humours of some of our
company, we made choice of Captain Coxon as our
general or commander-in-chief. Before our departure,
we sent back what small booty we had taken here by
some prisoners, under the charge of twelve of our men
to convey it to the ships.
Thus we prepared to go forward on that dangerous
enterprise of Panama. But the Indians who had con-
ducted us having got from us what knives, scissors, axes,
needles and beads they could, would not stay any longer,
but all, or the greater part of them, returned to their
home. Which notwithstanding, the king himself, Captain
Androeas, Captain Antonio, the king's son, called by the
Spaniards Bonete de Oro, or King Golden-cap, as also
his kinsman, would not be persuaded by their falling off
to leave us, but resolved to go to Panama, out of the
desire they had to see that place taken and sacked.
Yea, the king promised, if there should be occasion, to
join fifty thousand men to our forces. Besides which
288 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
promises, we had also another very considerable encour-
agement to undertake this journey. For the Spaniard
who had forced away the king's daughter, as was men-
tioned above, fearing lest we should leave him to the
mercy of the Indians, who would have but little on him,
having shown themselves so cruel to the rest of his
companions, for the safety of his life had promised to
lead us, not only into the town, but even to the very bed-
chamber door of the governor of Panama, and that we
should take him by the hand and seize both him and the
whole city, before we should be discovered by the
Spaniards, either before or after our arrival.
CHAPTER IV.
The Buccaneers leave the town of Santa Maria, and proceed by
sea to take Panama. Extreme difficulties, zvith simdry acci-
dents and dangers of that voyage.
Having been in possession of the town of Santa Maria
only the space of two days, we departed thence on
Saturday, April 17th, 1680. We all embarked in thirty-
five canoes, and a periagua, which we had taken here
lying at anchor before the town. Thus we sailed or
rather rowed down tlie river in quest of the South Sea,
upon which Panama is seated, towards the Gulf of
Belona, whereat we were to disembogue into that ocean.
Our prisoners, the Spaniards, begged very earnestly that
they might be permitted to go with us, and not be left
to the mercy of the Indians, who would show them no
favour, and whose cruelty they so much feared. But we had
much ado to find a sufficient number of boats for ourselves,
the Indians that left us having taken with them, either by
consent or stealth, so many canoes. Yet notwithstand-
ing this they found soon after either bark logs, or old
canoes, and by that means shifted so well for their lives,
as to come along with us. Before our departure we
burnt both the fort, the church and the town, which was
done at the request of the king, he being extremely in-
censed against it.
Among these canoes it was my misfortune to have one
that was very heavy, and consequently sluggish. By
this means we were left behind the rest a litde way, there
being only four men besides myself, that were embarked
VOL. II. ^'^ u
290 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
therein. As the tide fell, it left several shoals of sand
naked, and hence, we not knowing of the true channel,
amongst such a variety of streams, happened to steer with-
in a shoal, for above two miles, before we perceived our
error. Hereupon, we were forced to lay by until high
water came, for to row in such heavy boats against
the tide is totally impossible. As soon as the tide began
to turn, we rowed away in prosecution of our voyage,
and withal made what haste we could, but all our en-
deavours were in vain, for we neither could find nor
overtake our companions. Thus at about ten o'clock
at night, the tide being low, we stuck up an oar in the
river, and slept by turns in our canoe, several showers of
rain falling all the night long, which pierced us to the
skin.
But the next morning, no sooner had day come than
we rowed away down the river as before, in pursuit of our
people. Having gone about the space of two leagues,
we were so fortunate as to overtake them. For they had
lain that night at an Indian hut, or embarcadero, that is
to say landing place, and had been taking in water till
then. Being arrived at the place they told us that we
must not omit to fill our jars there with water, otherwise
we should meet with none in the space of six days' time.
Hereupon we went every one of us the distance of a
quarter of a mile from the enibarcadej^o, to a little pond,
to fill our water in calabashes, making what haste we
could back to our canoe. But when we returned, we
found not one of our men, they all being departed and
already got out of sight. Such is the procedure of these
wild men that they care not in the least whom they lose
of their company, or leave behind. We were now more
troubled in our minds than before, fearing lest we should
fall into the same misfortune we had so lately overcome.
Hereupon we rowed after them, as fast as we possibly
could, but all in vain. For here are found such huge
numbers of islands, greater and lesser, as also keys about
A SORROWFUL NIGHT. 291
the mouth of the river, that it was not difficult for us,
who were unacquainted with the river, to lose ourselves
a second time amongst them. Yet notwithstanding,
though with much trouble and toil, we found at last that
mouth of the river, that is called by the Spaniards Boca
chica, or the Little Mouth. But as it happened, it was
now young flood, and the stream ran very violently
against us ; so that though we were not above a stone's
cast from the said mouth, and this was within a league
broad, yet we could not by any means come near it.
Hence we were forced to put ashore, which we did ac-
cordingly, until high-water. We hauled our canoe close
by the bushes, and when we got out, we fastened our
rope to a tree, which the tide had almost covered, for
it flows here nearly four fathom deep.
As soon as the tide began to turn, we rowed away
from there to an island, distant about a league and a half
from the mouth of the river, in the Gulf of San Miguel.
Here in the gulf it went very hard with us, whensoever
any wave dashed against the sides of our canoe, for it
was nearly twenty feet in length, and yet not quite one
foot and a half in breadth where it was at the broadest,
so that we had only just room enough to sit down in her,
and a little water would easily have both filled and over-
whelmed us. At the island aforesaid, we took up our
resting-place for that night, though it was, from the loss
of our company, and the great dangers we were in, the
sorrowfullest night that until then, I had ever experienced
in my whole life. For it rained impetuously all night long,
insomuch that we were wet from head to foot and had not
one dry thread about us ; neither, through the violence
of the rain, were we able to keep any fire burning where-
with to warm or dry ourselves. The tide ebbs here a
good half-mile from the mark of high-water, and leaves
bare wonderfully high and sharp-pointed rocks. We
passed this heavy and tedious night without one minute
of sleep, being all very sorrowful to see ourselves so far
292 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and remote from the rest of our companions, as also
totally destitute of all human comfort ; for a vast sea
surrounded us on one side, and the mighty power of our
enemies, the Spaniards, on the other. Neither could we
descry at any hand the least thing to relieve us, all that
we could see being the wide sea, high mountains and
rocks ; while we ourselves were confined to an egg-shell,
instead of a boat, without so much as a few clothes to
defend us from the injuries of the weather. For at that
time none of us had a shoe to our feet. We searched
the whole key to see if we could find any water, but
found none.
CHAPTER V.
SJdpivreck of Mr. Ringrose, the author of this narrative. He
is taken by the Spaniards and miraculously by them preserved.
Several other accidents and disasters zuhich bef el him after
the loss of his companions till he found them again. De-
scription of the Gulf of Vallona.
On Monday, April 19th, at break of day, we hauled
our canoe into the water again, and departing from the
island aforementioned : wet and cold as we were, we
rowed away towards the Punta de San Lorenzo, or Point
St. Lawrence. In our way we met with several islands
which lie straggling thereabouts. But now we were again
so hard put to it, by the smallness of our vessel, and
being in an open sea, that it had become the work of one
man, yea sometimes of two, to cast out the water, which
came in on all sides of our canoe. After struggling for
some time with these difficulties, as we came near one of
those islands, a heavy sea overturned our boat, by which
means we were all forced to swim for our lives. But we
soon got to the shore, and to the same place our canoe
came tumbling after us. Our arms were very fast lashed
to the inside of the boat, and our locks were as well
cased and waxed down as was possible ; so were also our
cartouche boxes and powder-horns. But all our bread
and fresh water was utterly spoilt and lost.
Our canoe being tumbled on shore by the force of the
waves, our first business was to take out and clear our
arms. This we had scarcely done, when we saw another
canoe fall into the same misfortune at a little distance to
294 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
leeward of us, amongst a great number of rocks that
bounded the island. The persons that were cast away-
proved to be six Spaniards of the garrison of Santa
Maria, who had found an old canoe, and had followed
us to escape the cruelty of the Indians. They presendy
came to us, and made us a fire which being done, we
got our meat and broiled it on the coals, and all of us
ate amicably together. But we stood in great need of
water, or other drink to our victuals, not knowing in the
least where to get any. Our canoe was thrown up by
the waves to the edge of the water, and there was no
great fear of its splitting, being full six inches in thick-
ness, on the sides thereof. But that in which the
Spaniards came, split itself against the rocks, being old
and slender, into an hundred pieces. Though we were
thus shipwrecked and driven ashore, as I have related,
yet otherwise, and at other times, is this Gulf of San
Miguel a mere mill-pond for smoothness of water.
My company was now altogether for returning, and
proceeding no farther, but rather for living amongst the
Indians, in case we could not reach the ships we had
left behind us in the Northern Sea. But with much ado
I prevailed with them to go forward, at least one day
longer, and in case we found not our people the next
day, that then I would be willing to do anything which
they should think fit. Thus we spent two or three hours
of the day in consulting about our affairs, and withal
keeping a man to watch and look out on all sides, for
fear of any surprisal by the Indians, or other enemies.
About the time that we were come to a conclusion in our
debates, our watchman by chance spied an Indian ; who,
as soon as he saw us, ran into the woods. I sent imme-
diately two of my company after him, who overtook him,
and found that he was one of our friendly Indians. Thus
he led them to a place not far distant, where seven
more of his company were, with a great canoe which
they had brought with them. They came to the place
SHIPWRECKED IN THE GULF OF SAN MIGUEL. 295
where I was with the rest of my company, and seemed
to be glad to meet us on that island. I asked them by
signs for the main body of our company, and they gave
me to understand, that if we would go with them in their
canoe, which was much bigger than ours, we should be
up with the party by the next morning. This news, as
may easily be supposed, not a little rejoiced our hearts.
Presently after this friendly invitation, they asked who
the other six men were, whom they saw in our company,
for they easily perceived us not to be all of one and
the same coat and lingua. We told them they were
Wankers, which is the name they commonly give to
the Spaniards in their own language. Their next ques-
tion was, if they should kill those Spaniards } but I an-
swered them, No, by no means, I would not consent to
have it done. With which answer they seemed to be
satisfied for the present. But a litde while after, my
back being turned, my company thinking that they
should thereby oblige the Indians, beckoned to them to
kill the Spaniards. With this, the poor creatures per-
ceiving the danger that threatened them, made a sad
shriek and outcry, and I came in time to save all their
lives. But withal, I was forced to give way and consent
that they should have one of them for to make their
slave. Hereupon I gave the canoe that I came in to
the five Spaniards remaining, and bid them get away
and shift for their lives, lest those cruel Indians should
not keep their word, and they should run the same
danger again they had so lately escaped. Having sent
them away whilst I rested myself here, I took a survey
of this gulf, and the mouth of the river, which I finished
the same day, and do here present to the view of the
reader.
But now, thanks be to God, joining company with
those Indians, we got into a very large canoe, which
for its bigness, was better able to carry twenty men,
than our own that we had brought to carry five. The
296
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Indians had also fitted a very good sail to the said
canoe ; so that having now a fresh and strong gale of
wind, we set sail from thence, and made therewith brave
way, to the infinite joy and comfort of our hearts, seeing
ourselves so well accommodated, and so happily rid of the
miseries we but lately had endured. We had now a
^nJLj
%.
0^1 U^cjcnption op.
\aiuL
smooth and easy passage, after such tedious and labour-
some pains as we had sustained in coming so far since
we left Santa Maria. Under the point of St. Lawrence,
mentioned above, is a very great rippling of the sea,
occasioned by a strong current which runs hereabouts,
and which often almost filled our boat with its dashes,
as we sailed. This evening, after our departure from the
TAKEN BY THE SPANIARDS. 297
island where we were cast away, it rained vehemendy
for several hours, and the night proved to be very dark.
About nine o'clock that night we descried two fires on
the shore of the continent, over against us. These
fires were no sooner perceived by the Indians of our
canoe, than they began to shout for joy and cry out.
Captain Antonio, Captain Androeas, the names of their
Indian captains and leaders ; and to affirm they were
assured those fires were made by their companions.
Hence they made for the shore towards those fires, as
fast as they could drive. But so soon as our canoe came
among the breakers near the shore, there came out
from the woods about threescore Spaniards with clubs
and other arms, and laying hold of our canoe on both
sides thereof, hauled it out of the water quite dry. So
that by this means we were all suddenly taken and made
their prisoners. I laid hold of my gun, thinking to
make some defence for myself, but all was in vain, for
they suddenly seized me between four or five of them
and hindered me from action. Meanwhile our Indians
leaped overboard, and got away very nimbly into the
woods ; my companions standing amazed at what had
happened, and the manner of our surprisal. I asked
them presently if any of them could speak either French
or English ; but they answered, No. Hereupon as well
as I could, I discoursed to some of them, who were more
intelligent than the rest, in Latin, and by degrees came
to understand their condition. These were Spaniards
who had been turned ashore here by our English party,
who left them upon this coast, lest by carrying them
nearer to Panama any of them should make their escape
and discover our march towards that city. They had me
presendy after I was taken into a small hut which they
had built, covered with boughs, and made there great
shouts for joy, because they had taken us. designing in
their minds to use us very severely for coming into those
parts, and especially for taking and plundering their town
298 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of Santa Maria. But while the captain of those Spaniards
was examining me, in came the poor Spaniard that was
come along with us, and reported how kind I had been
to him, and the rest of his companions, by saving their
lives from the cruelty of the Indians.
The captain having heard him, arose from his seat
immediately and embraced me, saying, that we English-
men were very friendly enemies, and good people, but
that the Indians were very rogues, and a treacherous
nation. Withal, he desired me to sit down by him, and
to eat part of such victuals as our companions had left
them when they were turned ashore. Then he told me,
that for the kindness I had showed to his countrymen, he
gave us all our lives and liberties, which otherwise he
would certainly have taken from us. And though he
could scarcely be persuaded in his mind to spare the
Indians' lives, yet for my sake he pardoned them all,
and I should have them with me in case I could find
them. Thus he bid me likewise take my canoe, and go
in God's name, saying withal, he wished us as fortunate
as we were generous. Hereupon I took my leave of
him, after some little stay, though he invited me to tarry
all night with him. I searched out, and at last found my
Indians, who for fear had hid themselves in the bushes
adjoining to the neighbouring woods where they lay con-
cealed. Having found them, the captain led me very
civilly down to the canoe, and bidding my companions
and the Indians get in after me ; as they at first hauled
us ashore, so now again they pushed us off to sea, by a
sudden and strange vicissitude of fortune. All that
night it rained very hard, as was mentioned above ;
neither durst we put ashore any more at any place, it
being all along such, as by mariners is commonly called
an iron coast.
The next morning being come, we sailed, and paddled,
or rowed, till about ten o'clock. At which time we espied
a canoe making towards us with all speed imaginable.
THEY FIND THEIR COMPANY AGAIN. 299
Being come up with us, and in view, it proved to be of
our own English Company, who mistaking our canoe for
a Spanish periagua, was coming in all haste to attack us.
We were infinitely glad to meet them, and they presently
conducted us to the rest of our company, who were at
that instant coming from a deep bay which lay behind
a high point of rocks, where they had lain at anchor all
that night and morning. We were all mutually rejoiced
to see one another again, they having given both me and
my companions up for lost.
CHAPTER VI.
The Buccaneers prosecute their voyage, till they come within sight
of Panama. They take several barks a)td prisoners by the
way. Are descried by the Spaniards before their arrival.
They order the Indians to kill the prisoners.
From the place where we rejoined our English forces,
we all made our way towards a high hummock of land,
as it appeared at a distance, but was nothing else than
an island seven leagues distant from the bay afore-men-
tioned. On the highest part of this island the Spaniards
keep a watch or look-out (for so it is termed by the sea-
men) for fear of pirates or other enemies. That evening
we arrived at the island, and being landed, went up a
very steep place, till we came to a little hut where the
watchman lodged. We took by surprisal the old man who
watched in the place, but happened not to see us, till we
were got into his plantain walk before the lodge. He
told us in his examination, that we were not as yet de-
scried by the Spaniards of Panama or any others that he
knew, which relation of the old fellow much encouraged us
to go forwards with our design of surprising that rich
city. This place, if I took its name rightly, is called
Parol de Plantanos, or in English, Plantain-watch.
Here, not long before it was dark that evening, a
certain bark came to an anchor at the outward side of
the island, which instantly was descried by us. Here-
upon we speedily manned out two canoes, who went
under the shore and surprised the said boat. Having
examined the persons that were on board, we found she
THE VOYAGE TO PANAMA PROSECUTED. 301
had been absent the space of eight days from Panama,
and had landed soldiers at a point of land not far distant
from this island, with intention to fight and curb certain
Indians and negroes, who had done much hurt in the
country thereabouts. The bark being taken, most of
our men endeavoured to get into her, but more especially
those who had the lesser canoes. Thus there embarked
thereon to the number of one hundred and thirty-seven
of our company, together with that sea-artist, and valiant
commander, Captain Bartholomew Sharp. With him
went also on board Captain Cook, whom we mentioned
at the beginning of this history. The remaining part of
that night we lay at the quay of the said island, expect-
ing to prosecute our voyage the next day.
Morning being come, I changed my canoe and em-
barked myself on another, which, though it was some-
thing lesser than the former, yet was furnished with
better company. Departing from the island, we rowed
all day long over shoal water, at the distance of about a
league from land, having sometimes not above four foot
water, and white ground. In the afternoon we descried
a bark at sea, and instantly gave her chase. But the
canoe wherein was Captain Harris happened to come up
the first with her, who after a sharp dispute took her.
Being taken, we put on board the said bark thirty men.
But the wind would not suffer the other bark, in chasing,
to come up with us. This pursuit of the vessel did so
far hinder us in our voyage, and divide us asunder, that
night soon coming on, we lost one another, and could no
longer keep in a body together. Hereupon we laid our
canoe ashore, to take up our rest for that night at the
distance of two miles, more or less, from high-water
mark, and about four leagues to leeward of the island of
Chepillo, to which place our course was then directed.
The next morning, as soon as the water began to
float us, we rowed away for the fore-mentioned island
Chepillo, where by assignation our general rendezvous
302 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
was to be. On our way as we went, we spied another
bark under sail, as we had done the day before. Captain
Coxon's canoe was now the first that came up with this
vessel. But a young breeze freshening at that instant,
she got away from him after the first onset, killing in the
said canoe one Mr. Bull, and wounding two others. We
presently conjectured that this bark would get before
us to Panama, and give intelligence of our coming to
those of the town ; all which happened as we had fore-
seen. It was two o'clock in the afternoon before all
our canoes could come together, and join one another
as it was assigned at Chepillo. We took at that island
fourteen prisoners, between Negros and Mulattos ; also
great store of plantains and good water, together with
two fat hogs. But now believing that ere this we had
been already descried at Panama by the bark afore-men-
tioned, we resolved among ourselves to waste no time,
but to hasten away from the said island, to the intent we
might at least be able to surprise and take their shipping,
and by that means make ourselves masters of those seas,
in case we could not get the town which now we judged
almost impossible to be done. At Chepillo we took also
a periagua, which we found at anchor before the island,
and presently we put some men on board her. Our stay
here was only of few hours, so that about four o'clock in
the evening, which now was coming on, we rowed away,
designing to reach Panama before the next morning, to
which place we had now only seven leagues to go, it
being no farther distant from Chepillo. But before we
departed from the said island, it was judged convenient
by our commanders, for certain reasons which I could
not dive into, to rid their hands of the prisoners which
we had taken. And hereupon orders were given unto
our Indians, who they knew would perform them very
willingly, to fight, or rather to murder and slay the said
prisoners upon the shore, and that in view of the whole
fleet. This they instantly went about to do, being glad
ORDERS TO KILL THE PRISONERS. 303
of this opportunity to revenge their hatred against their
enemies, though in cold blood. But the prisoners,
although they had no arms wherewith to defend them-
selves, forced their way through those barbarous Indians,
in spite of their lances, bows and arrows, and got into
the woods of the island, only one man of them being
killed. We rowed all night long, though many showers
of rain ceased not to fall.
CHAPTER VII.
They arrive tvithin sight of Panama. A re encountered by three
small men-of-iuar. They fight them with only sixty-eight
men, and bitterly defeat them, taking two of the said vessels.
Description of that bloody fight. They take several ships at
the Isle of Perico before Panama.
The next morning, which was on April 23rd, 1680,
that day being dedicated to St. George, our Patron of
Eneland, we came before sunrise within view of the
city of Panama, which makes a pleasant show to the
vessels that are at sea from off the shore. Soon after
we saw also the ships belonging to the said city which
lay at anchor at an island called Perico, distant only two
leagues from Panama. On the aforesaid island are to be
seen several storehouses which are built there, to receive
the goods delivered out of the ships. At that time there
rode at anchor at Perico five great ships, and three pretty
big barks, called Barcos de la Armadilla, or litde men-
of-war ; the word Armadilla signifying a Litlle Fleet.
These had been suddenly manned with design to fight
us, and prevent any further attempts we should make
upon the city or coasts of those seas. As soon as they
spied us, they instantly weighed anchor, and got under
sail, coming directly to meet us whom they expected
very shordy, according to the intelligence they had
received of our coming. Our two periaguas being heavy
could not row so fast as we that were in the canoes, and
hence we were got pretty far before them. In our five
canoes (for so many we were now in company) we had
304
PREPARATIONS FOR THE ENGAGEMENT. 305
only thirty-six men, in a very unfit condition to fight,
being tired with so much rowing, and so few in number,
in comparison with the enemy that came against us.
They sailed towards us direcdy before the wind, inso-
much that we feared lest they should run us down before
it. Hereupon we rowed up into the wind's eye, as the
seamen term it, and got close to windward of them.
While we were doing this, our lesser periaguas, in which
were thirty-two or more of our company, came up with
us. So that we were in all sixty-eight ^ men that were
engaged in the fight of that day, the king himself, who
was in the periagua aforementioned, being one of our
number. In the vessel that was admiral of these three
small men-of-war, were fourscore and six Biscayners,
who have the repute of being the best mariners, and also
the best soldiers amongst the Spaniards. These were
all volunteers, who came designedly to show their valour,
under the command of Don Jacinto de Barahona, who
was High Admiral of those seas. In the second were
seventy-seven negroes, who were commanded by an old
and stout Spaniard, a native of Andalusia in Spain,
named Don Francisco de Peralta. In the third and last
were sixty-five Mestizos, or Mulattos, or Tawnymores,
commanded by Don Diego de Carabaxal. So that in
all they made the number of two hundred and twenty-
eight men. The commanders had strict orders given
them, and their resolution was to give quarter to none of
the pirates or buccaneers. But such bloody commands
as these seldom or never do happen to prosper.
1 There seems to be some confusion as to the number of buccaneers
who took part in this action. Ringrose no doubt states accurately the
number of canoes and men engaged, but fails to account for the absence
of the greater portion. On April 14th the numbers are precisely stated
as three hundred and twenty-seven English and fifty Indians, yet on
the 23rd only sixty-eight men are said to have joined in the engage-
ment with the Spaniards. Another account gives the force of the
pirates as a little under two hundred. It is evident that Sharp and his
company were absent, for they are described as being away in the bark
in search of water, rejoining on the 25th.
VOL. II. X
3o6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
The canoe of Captain Sawkins, and also that wherein
I was, were much to leeward of the rest. So that the
ship of Don Diego de Carabaxal came between us two,
and fired presently on me to windward, and on him to
leeward, wounding with these broadsides, four men in
his canoe, and one in that I was in ; but he paid so dear
for his passage between us, that he was not very quick
in coming about again and making the same way. For
we killed with our first volley of shot, several of his men
upon the decks. Thus we also got to windward, as the
rest were before. At this time the Admiral of the
Armadilla, or Little Fleet, came up with us suddenly,
scarce giving us time to charge, and thinking to pass by
us all, with as litde or less damage as the first of his
ships had done. But as it happened it fell out much
worse with him, for we were so fortunate as to kill the
man at the helm, so that his ship ran into the wind, and
her sails lay a-back, as is usually said in marinery. By
this means we had time to come all up under his stern,
and firing continually into his vessel, we killed as many
as came to the helm, besides which slaughter we cut
asunder his main sheet and brace with our shot. At this
time the third vessel, in which Captain Peralta was, was
coming up to the aid of their general. Hereupon Cap-
tain Sawkins, who had changed his canoe, and was gone
into the periagua, left the Admiral to us four canoes (for
his own was quite disabled) and met the said Peralta.
Between him and Captain Sawkins the dispute, or fight,
was very hot, lying board on board together, and both
giving and receiving death unto each other as fast as they
could charge. While we were thus engaged, the first
ship tacked about, and came up to relieve the Admiral.
But we perceiving that, and foreseeing how hard it would
o-o with us if we should be beaten from the Admiral's
stern, determined to prevent his design. Hereupon tw^o
of our canoes, to wit, Captain Springer's and my own,
stood off to meet him. He made up directly towards
THE ENGAGEMENT. 307
the Admiral, who stood upon the quarter-deck, waving
to him with a handkerchief so to do. But we engaged
him so closely, in the middle of his way, that had he
not given us the helm, and made away from us, we had
certainly been on board him. We killed so many of
them, that the vessel had scarce men enough left alive,
or unwounded, to carry her off Yet the wind now
blowing fresh, they made shift to get away from us, and
hereby saved their lives.
The vessel which was to relieve the Admiral being
thus put to flight, we came about again upon the
Admiral, and all together gave a loud halloo, which was
answered by our men in the periagua, though at a dis-
tance from us. At that time we came so close under the
stern of the Admiral, that we wedged up the rudder; and
withal, killed both the Admiral himself and the chief
pilot of his ship, so that now they were almost quite
disabled and disheartened likewise, seeing what a bloody
massacre we had made among them with our shot.
Hereupon, two-thirds of their men being killed, and
many others wounded, they cried for quarter, which had
several times been offered unto them, and as stoutly
denied until then. Captain Coxon entered on board the
Admiral, and took with him Captain Harris, who had
been shot through both his legs, as he boldly adventured
up along the side of the ship. This vessel being thus
taken, we put on board her also all the rest of our
wounded men, and instandy manned two of our canoes
to go and aid Captain Sawkins, who now had been three
times beaten from on board by Peralta, such valiant de-
fence had he made. And indeed, to give our enemies
their due, no men in the world did ever act more bravely
than these Spaniards.
Thus coming up close under Peralta's side, we gave
him a full volley of shot, and expected to have the like
return from him again, but on a sudden we saw his
men blown up, that were abaft the mast ; some of them
3o8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
falline on the deck, and others into the sea. This dis-
aster was no sooner perceived by their valiant Captain
Peralta, than he leaped overboard, and in spite of all our
shot, got several of them into the ship again, though he
was much burnt in both his hands himself. But as one
misfortune seldom comes alone, whilst he was recover-
ing these men to reinforce his ship withal, and renew the
fight, another jar of powder took fire forward, and blew
up several others upon the forecasde. Among this
smoke, and under cover thereof. Captain Sawkins laid
them on board and took the ship. Soon after they were
taken, I went on board Captain Peralta, to see what con-
dition they were in, and indeed such a miserable sight
I never saw in my life, for not one man there was found,
but was either killed, desperately wounded, or horribly
burnt with powder, insomuch, that their black skins
were turned white in several places, the powder having
torn it from their flesh and bones. Having compas-
sionated their misery, I went afterwards on board the
Admiral, to observe likewise the condition of his ship
and men. Here I saw what did much astonish me, and
will scarcely be believed by others than ourselves who
saw it. There were found on board this ship but
twenty-five men alive, whose number before the fight
had been fourscore and six, as was said above. So that
threescore and one, out of so small a number, were
destroyed in the batde. But what is more, of these
twenty-five men only eight were able to bear arms, all
the rest being desperately wounded, and by their wounds
totally disabled to make any resistance, or defend them-
selves. Their blood ran down the decks in whole streams,
and scarce one place in the ship was found that was free
from blood.
Having possessed ourselves of these two Armadilla
vessels, or little luen-of-wai', Captain Sawkins asked the
prisoners how many men there might be on board the
greatest ship that we could see, lying in the harbour
SUCCESSFUL END OF THE ENGAGEMENT. 309
of the island of Perlco above-mentioned, as also in the
others that were something smaller. Captain Peralta
hearing these questions, dissuaded him as much as he
could from attempting them, saying that in the biggest
alone there were three hundred and fifty men, and that
he would find the rest too well provided for defence
against his small number. But one of his men, who lay
a-dying upon the deck, contradicted him as he was
speaking, and told Captain Sawkins there was not one
man on board any of those ships that were in view ; for
they had all been taken out of them to fight us in these
three vessels called the Armadilla, or Little Fleet. To
this relation we gave credit, as proceeding from a dying
man ; and steering our course to the island, we went on
board them, and found, as he had said, not one person
there. The biggest ship of these, which was called La
Santissima Trinidad, or the Blessed Trinity, they had
set on fire, made a hole in her, and loosened her foresail,
but we quenched the fire with all speed, and stopped the
leak. This being done, we put our wounded men on
board her, and thus constituted her for the time being
our hospital.
Having surveyed our own loss and damages, we found
that eighteen of our men had been killed in the fight, and
twenty-two were wounded. These three captains against
whom we fought, were esteemed by the Spaniards to be
the valiantest in all the South Seas. Neither was this
reputation undeservedly conferred upon them, as may
easily be inferred from the relation we have given of this
bloody engagement. As the third ship was running
away from the fight, she met with two more that were
coming out to their assistance, but gave them so little
encouragement that they returned back, and dared not
engage us. We began the fight about half an hour
after sunrise, and by noon had finished the batde, and
quite overcome them. Captain Peralta, while he was
our prisoner, would often break out in admiration of our
3IO THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
valour, and say, " Surely we Englishmen were the
valiantest men in the whole world, who designed always
to fight open, whilst all other nations invented all the
ways imaginable to barricade themselves, and fight as
close as they could." And yet, notwithstanding, we killed
more of our enemies than they of us.
Two days after our engagement, we buried Captain
Peter Harris, a brave and stout soldier, and a valiant
Englishman, born in the county of Kent, whose death
we very much lamented. He died of the wounds he
received in the battle, and besides him only one man
more ; all the rest of our wounded men recovered.
Being now come before Panama, I here inquired of Don
Francisco de Peralta, our prisoner, many things concern-
ing the state and condition of this city, and the neigh-
bouring country, and he satisfied me in manner following.
CHAPTER VUL
Description of the state and condition of Panama, and the parts
adjacent. What vessels they took while they blocked 7ip the
said Port. Captain Coxon with seventy more returns home.
Satvkins is chosen in chief
The famous city of Panama Is situated in the latitude of
nine degrees north. It stands in a deep bay, belonging
to the South Sea. It is in form round, excepting only
that part where it runs along the sea-side. Formerly it
stood four miles more to the east, when it was taken by
Sir Henry Morgan, as is related in the " History of the
Buccaneers." But then being burnt, and three times
more since that time by casualty, they removed it to the
place where it now stands. Yet notwithstanding, there
are some poor people still inhabiting the old town, and
the cathedral church is still kept there, the beautiful
building whereof makes a fair show at a distance, like
that of St. Paul's in London. This new city of which
I now speak, is much bigger than the old one, and is
built for the most part of brick, the rest being of stone,
and tiled. As for the churches belonging thereto, they
are not as yet finished. These are eight in number,
whereof the chief is called Santa Maria. The extent
of the city comprehends better than a mile and a half
in length, and above a mile in breadth. The houses
for the most part are three stories in height. It is well
walled round about, with two gates belonging thereto,
excepting only where a creek comes into the city, the
which at hiirh-water lets in barks, to furnish the inhabi-
tants with all sorts of provisions and other necessaries.
312 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Here are always three hundred of the King's soldiers
to garrison the city ; besides which number, their
militia, of all colours, are one thousand one hundred.
But at the time that we arrived there, most of their
soldiers were out of town, insomuch, that our coming put
the rest into great consternation, they having had but
one night's notice of our being in those seas. Hence we
were induced to believe, that had we gone ashore, instead
of fighting their ships, we had certainly rendered our-
selves masters of the place ; especially considering, that
all their chief men were on board the Admiral ; I mean,
such as were undoubtedly the best soldiers. Round
about the city, for the space of seven leagues, more or
less, all the adjacent country is Savanna, as they call it
in the Spanish language, that is to say, plain and level
ground, as smooth as a sheet, for this is the signification
of the word Savanna. Only here and there is to be seen
a small spot of woody land, and everywhere this level
ground is full of vacadas or beef stations^ where whole
droves of cows and oxen are kept, which serve as well
as so many look-outs or watch towers, to descry if an
enemy is approaching by land. The ground whereon
the city stands, is very damp and moist, which renders
the place of bad repute for the concern of health. The
water is also very full of worms, and these are much pre-
judicial to shipping ; which is the cause that the King's
ships lie always at Lima, the capital city of Peru, unless
when they come down to Panama to bring the King's
plate, which is only at such times as the fleet of galleons
comes from Old Spain to fetch and convey it thither.
Here in one night after our arrival, we found worms of
three-quarters of an inch in length, both in our bed-
clothes and other apparel.
At the Island of Perico above-mentioned we seized in
all five ships ; of these, the first and biggest was named,
1 The word in the text is stantions, evidently the Spanish word
estancia. The Australian term station has been substituted.
RETIREMENT OF CAPTAIN COX ON. 313
as was said before, the Trinidad, and was a great ship,
of the burden of four hundred tons. Her lading consisted
of wine, sugar, sweetmeats (whereof the Spaniards in
those hot countries make infinite use), skins, and soap.
The second ship was of about three hundred tons burden,
and not above half laden with bars of iron, which is one
of the richest commodities that are brought into the
South Sea. This vessel we burnt with the lading in
her, because the Spaniards pretended not to want that
commodity, and therefore would not redeem it. The
third was laden with sugar, being of the burden of one
hundred and fourscore tons, more or less. This vessel
was given to be under the command of Captain Cook.
The fourth was an old ship of sixty tons burden, which
was laden with flour of meal. This ship we likewise
burnt with her lading ; esteeming both bottom and cargo,
at that time, to be useless to us. The fifth was a ship of
fifty tons, which, with a periagua, Captain Coxon took
along with him when he left us.
Within two or three days after our arrival at Panama,
Captain Coxon being much dissatisfied with some reflec-
tions which had been made upon him by our company,
determined to leave us, and return back to our ships in
the Northern Seas, by the same way he came thither.
Unto this effect, he persuaded several of our company,
who sided most with him, and had had the chief hand
in his election, to fall off from us, and bear him company
in his journey or march, overland. The main cause of
those reflections was his backwardness in the last engage-
ment with the Armadilla, concerning which point some
sticked not to defame, or brand, him with the note of
cowardice. He drew off with him threescore and ten of
our men, who all returned back with him in the ship and
periagua above-mentioned, towards the mouth of the
river of Santa Maria. In his company also went back
the Indian King, Captain Antonio, and Don Androeas,
who, being old, desired to be excused from staying any
314 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
longer with us. However, the Kingf desired we would
not be less vigorous in annoying their enemy and ours,
the Spaniards, than if he were personally present with
us. And to the intent we might see how faithfully he
intended to deal with us, he at the same time recom-
mended both his son and nephew to the care of Captain
Sawkins, who was now our newly-chosen General or
Commander-in-Chief, in the absence of Captain Sharp.
The two Amiiadilla ships which we took in the en-
gagement we burnt also, saving no other thing of them
both but their rigging and sails. With them also we
burnt a small bark, which came into the port laden with
fowls and poultry.
On Sunday, which was April 25th, Captain Sharp
with his bark and company came in and joined us again.
His absence was occasioned by want of water, which
forced him to bear up to the King's Islands. Being
there, he found a new bark, which he at once took,
and burnt his old one. This vessel did sail excellently
well. Within a day or two after the arrival of Captain
Sharp, came in likewise the people of Captain Harris,
who were still absent. These had also taken another
bark, and cut down the masts of their old one by the
board, and thus without masts or sails turned away the
prisoners they had taken in her. The next day we took
in like manner another bark, which arrived from Nata,
being laden with fowls, as before. In this bark we
turned away all the meanest of the prisoners we had on
board us.
Having continued before Panama for the space of ten
days, being employed in the affairs afore-mentioned, on
May 2nd we weighed from the Island of Perico, and
stood off to another island, distant two leagues farther
from thence, called Tavoga. On this island stands a
town which bears the same name, and consists of a
hundred houses, more or less. The people of the town
had all fled on seeing our vessels arrive. While we were
THE ISLAND OF TAVOGA. 31S
here, some of our men being drunk on shore, happened
to set fire to one of the houses, the which consumed
twelve houses more before any could get ashore to quench
it. To this island came several Spanish merchants
from Panama, and sold us what commodities we needed,
buying also of us much of the goods we had taken in
their own vessels. They gave us likewise two hundred
pieces of eight for each negro we could spare them, of
such as were our prisoners. From this island we could
easily see all the vessels that went out, or came into the
Port of Panama ; and here we took likewise several barks
that were laden with fowls.
Eight days after our arrival at Tavoga, we took a ship
that was coming from Truxillo, and bound for Panama.
In this vessel we found two thousand jars of wine, fifty
jars of gunpowder, and fifty-one thousand pieces of eight.
This money had been sent from that city, to pay the
soldiers belonging to the garrison of Panama. From the
said prize we had information given us, that there was
another ship coming from Lima with one hundred thou-
sand pieces of eight more ; which ship was to sail ten or
twelve days after them, and which they said could not
be long before she arrived at Panama. Within two
days after this intelligence we took also another ship
laden with flour from Truxillo, belonging to certain
Indians, inhabitants of the same place, or thereabouts.
This prize confirmed what the first had told us of that
rich ship, and said, as the others had done before, that
she would be there in the space of eight or ten days.
Whilst we lay at Tavoga, the president, that is to say,
the Governor of Panama, sent a message by some mer-
chants to us, to know what we came for into those parts.
To this message Captain Sawkins made answer, "That
we came to assist the King of Darien, who was the true
Lord of Panama and all the country thereabouts. And
that since we were come so far, there was no reason but
that we should have some satisfaction. So that if he
3i6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
pleased to send us five hundred pieces of eight for each
man, and one thousand for each commander, and not
any farther to annoy the Indians, but suffer them to use
their own power and Hberty, as became the true and
natural lords of the country, that then we would desist
from all further hostilities, and go away peaceably ;
otherwise that we should stay there, and get what we
could, causing to them what damage was possible." By
the merchants also that went and came to Panama, we
understood, there lived then as Bishop of Panama one
who had been formerly Bishop of Santa Martha, and
who was prisoner to Captain Sawkins, when he took the
said place about four or five years past. The Captain
having received this intelligence, sent two loaves of
sugar to the bishop as a present. On the next day
the merchant who carried them, returning to Tavoga,
brought to the Captain a gold ring for a retaliation
of said present. And withal, he brought a message to
Captain Sawkins from the President above-mentioned, to
know farther of him, since we were Englishmen, "from
whom we had our commission, and to whom he ought to
complain for the damages we had already done them "^ "
To this message Captain Sawkins sent back for answer,
"That as yet all his company were not come together;
but that when they w^ere come up we would come and
visit him at Panama, and bring our commissions on the
muzzles of our guns, at which time he should read them
as plain as the flame of gunpowder could make them."
At this Island of Tavoga, Captain Sawkins would fain
have stayed longer, to wait for the rich ship above-men-
tioned, that was coming from Peru ; but our men were
so importunate for fresh victuals, that no reason could
rule them, nor their own interest persuade them to any-
thing that might conduce to this purpose. Hereupon,
on May 15th we weighed anchor, and sailed thence
to the Island of Otoque, Being arrived there, we lay
by it while our boat went ashore and fetched off fowls
THE BAY OF PANAMA.
317
and hogs and other things necessary for sustenance.
Here at Otoque I finished a draught, from point Gara-
chine, to the bay of Panama, etc. Of this I may dare
to affirm, that it is in general more correct and true
than any the Spaniards have themselves, for which
cause I have here inserted it, for the satisfaction of those
that are curious in such things.
From Otoque we sailed to the island of Cayboa, which
is a place very famous for the pearl fishery thereabouts,
and is at the distance of eight leagues from another place
called Puebla Nueva, on the mainland. In our way to
this island we lost two of our barks, the one whereof had
fifteen men in her, and the other seven. Being arrived,
we cast anchor at the said island.
S*f7darzA
2e Kjjo^ cf Janarrza
ana iniis cjT^aJ/o
^.
Cxclit
J^> -I
P»
CHAPTER IX.
Captain Sawkins, chief commander of the Buccaneers, is killed
before Puebla Nueva. They are repulsed from the said place.
Captain Sharp chosen to be their leader. Many more of their
company leave them and return home overland.
While we lay at anchor before Cayboa, our two chief
commanders, Captain Sawkins and Captain Sharp, taking
with them threescore men, more or less, went in the ship
of Captain Cook to the mouth of the river where Puebla
Nueva is situated. The day of this action, as I fmd it
quoted in my journal, was May 22nd, 1679. When
they came to the river's mouth, they put themselves into
canoes, and were piloted up the river towards the town
by a negro, who was one of our prisoners. I was chosen
to be concerned in this action, but happened not to land,
being commanded to remain in Captain Cook's ship
while they went up to assault the town. But here at
Puebla Nueva the inhabitants were too well prepared for
the reception of our party, for at the distance of a mile
below the town, they had cut down great trees, and laid
them across the river, with design to hinder the ascent
of any boats. In like manner on shore before the town
itself, they had raised three strong breastworks, and
made other things for their defence. Here therefore
Captain Sawkins running up to the breastworks at the
head of a few men was killed ; a man who was as valiant
and courageous as any could be, and likewise next to
Captain Sharp, the best beloved of all our company, or
the most part thereof. Neither was this love undeserved
by him, for we ought justly to attribute to him the
31S
THE BUCCANEERS REPULSED FROM PUEBLA NUEVA. 319
greatest honour we gained in our engagement before
Panama, with the Spanish Arjnadilla, or Little Fleet,
especially, considering that as has been said above.
Captain Sharp was by accident absent at the time of that
great and bloody fight.
We that remained behind on board the ship of Captain
Cook carried her within the mouth of the river of Puebla
Nueva, and entered close by the east shore, which here
is crowned with a round hill. Here within two stone's
cast of shore, we had four fathom water. Within the
point opens a very large and fine river, which falls from
a sandy bay, at a small distance from thence. But as we
were getting in, being strangers to the place, we unwit-
tingly ran our ship aground, nigh to a rock which lies
on the westward shore : for the true channel of the said
river is nearer to the east than the west shore. With
Captain Sawkins, in the unfortunate assault of this place,
there died two men more, and three were wounded in the
retreat, which they performed to the canoes in pretty good
order. On their way down the river. Captain Sharp took
a ship, whose lading consisted of indigo, otto, manteca,
or butter, and pitch, and likewise burnt two vessels more,
as being of no value. With this he returned on board
our ships, much troubled in his mind, and grieved for
the loss of so bold and brave a partner in his adven-
tures as Sawkins had constantly shown himself to be.
His death was much lamented, and occasioned another
party of our men to mutiny, and leave us, returning
overland, as Captain Coxon and his company had done
before.
Three days after the death of Captain Sawkins,
Captain Sharp, who was now Commander-in-Chief, gave
the ship which he had taken in the river of Puebla Nueva,
which was of the burden of one hundred tons, more or
less, to Captain Cook, to command and sail in. Order-
ing withal that the old vessel which he had, should go
with those men that designed to leave us ; their mutiny
320 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and our distraction being now grown very high. Here-
upon Captain Sharp coming on board La Trinidad, the
greatest of our ships, asked our men in full council, who
of them were willing to go or stay, and prosecute the
design Captain Sawkins had undertaken, which was to
remain in the South Sea, and there to make a complete
voyage ; after which, he intended to go home round about
America, through the Straits of Magellan. He added
withal, that he did not as yet fear, or doubt in the least,
but to make each man who should stay with him, worth
one thousand pounds, by the fruits he hoped to reap of
that voyage. All those who had remained after the de-
parture of Captain Coxon, for love of Captain Sawkins,
and only to be in his company and under his conduct,
thinking thereby to make their fortunes, would stay no
longer, but pressed to depart. xA.mong this number I
acknowledge myself to have been one, being totally
desirous in my mind, to quit those hazardous adventures,
and return homewards with those who were now oroinof
to leave us. Yet being much afraid and averse to
trust myself among wild Indians any farther, I chose
rather to stay, though unwilling, and venture on that long
and dangerous voyage. Besides which danger of the
Indians, I considered that the rains were now already up,
and it would be hard passing so many gullies, which of
necessity would then be full of water, and consequently
create more than one single peril to the undertakers of
that journey. Yet notwithstanding, sixty-three men of
our company were resolved to encounter all these hard-
ships, and to depart from us. Hereunto they took their
leave of us, and returned homewards, taking with them
the Indian king's son, and the rest of the Indians for
their guides overland.^ They had, as was said above,
^ There is again much want of precision in reckoning the number of
buccaneers who finally stayed with Captain Sharp. Ringrose does not
give the figures, but from another account it would appear that one
hundred and forty-six in all remained to accompany Sharp in his voyage.
TORTOISES. RED DEER. ALLIGATORS. 321
the ship wherein Captain Cook sailed to carry them, and
out of our provisions as much as would serve for treble
their number.
Thus on the last clay of May they departed, leaving us
employed about taking in water and cutting down wood
at the island of Cayboa afore-mentioned, where this
mutiny happened. Here we caught very good tortoises
and red deer. We killed also alligators of a very large
size, some of them being above twenty feet in length.
But we could not find but that they were very fearful of
a man, and would fly from us very hastily when we
hunted them. This island lies S.S.E. from the mouth
of the river above-mentioned. On the south-east side
of the island is a shoal or spit of sand, which stretches
itself the space of a quarter of a league into the sea.
Here therefore, just within this shoal, we anchored in
fourteen fathom water. The island on this side thereof
makes two great bays, in the first of which we watered,
at a certain pond not distant above the cast of a stone
from the bay. In this pond, as I was washing myself,
and standing under a mancanilla tree, a small shower
of rain happened to fall on the tree, and from thence
dropped on my skin. These drops caused me to break
out all over my body into red spots, of which I was
not well for the space of a week after. Here I ate
very large oysters, the biggest that ever I ate in my life,
insomuch that I was forced to cut them into four pieces,
each quarter of them being a good mouthful.
Three days after the departure of the mutineers. Cap-
tain Sharp ordered us to burn the ship that they hitherto
had sailed in, only out of design to make use of the iron-
work belonging to the said vessel. Withal, we put all
the Hour that was her lading into the last prize, taken in
the river of Puebla Nueva, and Captain Cook, as was
said before, was ordered to command her. But the men
belonging to his company would not sail any longer
under his command. Hereupon he quitted his vessel
VOL. II. Y
322 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and came on board our Admiral, the great ship above-
mentioned, called La Trinidad, determining to rule over
such unruly company no longer. In his place was put
one, whose name was John Cox, an inhabitant of New
England, who forced kindred, as was thought, upon
Captain Sharp, out of old acquaintance, in this conjunc-
ture of time, only to advance himself. Thus he was
made, as it were, Vice-Admiral to Captain Sharp.
The next day three of our prisoners, viz. an Indian, who
was Captain of a ship, and two mulattos, ran away from
us, and made their escape.
After this it was thought convenient to send Captain
Peralta prisoner in the Admiral, on board the ship of Mr.
Cox. This was done to the intent he might not hinder
the endeavours of Captain Juan, who was commander of
the money-ship we took, as was mentioned at the island
of Tavoga. For this man had now promised to do great
things for us, by piloting and conducting us to several
places of great riches, but more especially to Guayaquil,
where he said we might lay down our silver, and lade
our vessels with gold. This design was undertaken by
Captain Sawkins, and had not the head-strongness of his
men brought him to the island of Cayboa, where he lost
his life, he had certainly effected it before now. That
night we had such thunder and lightning as I never
had heard before in all my life. Our prisoners told us
that in these parts it very often causes great damages
both by sea and land. And my opinion led me to
believe that our mainmast received some damage on this
occasion. The rainy season being now entered, the wind
for the most part was at N.W. though not without some
calms.
CHAPTER X.
They depart from the Island of Cayboa to the Isle of Gorgona,
where they careen their vessels. Description of this Isle.
They resolve to go and plunder Arica, leaving their design of
Guayaquil.
Having got in all things necessary for navigation, we
were now in readiness to depart, on Sunday, June 6th,
1680. That day some rain fell, which now was very
frequent in all places. About five o'clock in the even-
ing we set sail from the island of Cayboa, with a small
breeze, the wind being at S.S.W. Our course was E.S.
by E. and S.E. having all night a very small, or lltde
wind. The same calmness of weather continued all the
next day, insomuch, that we lay and drove only as the
current horsed us to N.W.
Litde better than a calm we had also the third day of
our navigation. Meanwhile a current drove us to the
westward. About sunrising we descried Ouicara, which
at that time bore N.W. by W. from us at the distance of
five leagues, more or less. With the rising of the sun an
easy gale of wind sprung up, so that at noon we had
altered our bearing, which was then N. by E. being six
leagues distant, and appearing thus, as is underneath
demonstrated.
QUICARA. Lat. 7 Deg. 4°. N.
324 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
These are two several islands, whereof the least is to
the southward of the other. The land is a low table
land these islands being more than three leagues in
length. About six o'clock that evening, we were nigh
ten leagues distant W.S.W. from them. Much like the
former weather we had the fourth day of our sailing,
with little wind in the forenoon, and rather less than more
in the afternoon. I judged about the middle of the day,
we were at the distance of twenty leagues S.S.W. from
the said islands.
Thursday, June loth, we had very small and variable
winds. This day I reckoned that we had made hitherto
a S. by E. way, and a S. by W. from our departure ;
being driven by a current, according to the observation I
made, into lat. 6° 30".
This day we saw many tortoises floating upon the sea.
Hereupon we hoisted out our boat, and came to one of
them, who offered not to stir until she was struck, and
even then not to sink to the bottom, but rather to swim
away. The sea hereabouts is very full of several sorts of
fish, as dolphins, bonitos, albicores, mullets, and old wives,
etc., which came swimming about our ship in whole
shoals. The next day, which was Friday, we had like-
wise very little wind, which was no more than we had all
Thursday night, with some showers of rain. That day
we had an observation which was lat. 6° N. In the
evening a fresh wind came up at S.W., our course being
S.S.E. On Saturday we had in like manner, about
seven in the morningf, a fresh breeze at S. So we stood
W.S.W. with cloudy weather, and several showers of
rain. This day our Spanish prisoners informed us we
must not expect any settled wind until we came within
the latitude of three degrees, for all along the western
shore of these seas there is little wind, which is the cause
that those ships that go from Acapulco to the islands
called de las Philipinas, do coast along the shore of
California, until they get into the height of forty-five de-
DOLPHIN AND ALBICORE FISHING. 325
grees, yea, sometimes of fifty degrees latitude. As the
wind varied, so we tacked several times, thereby to make
the best of our way that was possible to the southward.
As our prisoners had informed us, so we found it by
experience. For on the next day, which was Sunday,
June 13th, we had very little wind, and most commonly
none, for the space of twenty-four hours. That day we
tried the current of the sea, and found it very strong
to the eastward. The same day we had much rain, and
in the afternoon a small breeze at W., and W.S.W., but
mosdy at W. Yet notwithstanding all this calmness of
weather, the next day in the morning very early, by a
sudden gale of wind which arose, we made shift to split
our main top-sail. We had all the night before and that
day, continual and incessant showers of rain, and made
a S.W. and by S. way ; seeing all along as we went a
multitude of dolphins, bonitos, and several other sorts of
fish floating upon the seas, whereof in the afternoon we
caught many, the weather being now changed from
stormy to calm again ; insomuch that we could fish as we
sailed along, or rather as we lay tumbling in the calm.
Tuesday, June 15th, the morning continued calm as
the clay before ; and this day also we saw multitudes of
fish of several sorts, whereof we caught some for our
table as we were wont to do. By an observation which
was made this day, we found ourselves to be now in lat.
4° 21'. At this time the course of our navigation and
our whole design, was to go and careen our vessels at
the islands commonly called by the Spaniards, de los
Galapagos, that is to say, of the Tortoises, being so de-
nominated from the infinite number of those animals
swarminor and breedins: thereabouts. These islands are
situated under the equinoctical line, at the distance of a
hundred leagues more or less from the main continent of
o ,
America, in the South Sea. In the afternoon of this
day we had a small breeze to push us forwards.
June 1 6th being Wednesday, we made our way this
326 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
day, and for the four and twenty hours last past, E.S.E.
with much rain, which ceased not to fall, as in all this
voyage, since our departure from Cayboa. This day
likewise we caught several dolphins, and other sorts of
fish, but in the evening we had again a fresh breeze at
S. by W. our course being, as was just now said, E.S.E.
The next day, which was June 17th, about five in the
morning, we descried land, which appeared all along to
be very low, and likewise full of creeks and bays. We
instantly asked our pilot what land that was before us .'^
but he replied, he knew it not. Hereupon, being doubt-
ful of our condition, we called Mr. Cox on board us, who
brought Captain Peralta with him. This gentleman
being asked, presently told us the land we saw was the
land of Barbacoa, being almost a wild country all over.
Withal, he informed us, that to leeward of us, at the dis-
tance of ten leagues, or thereabouts, did lie an island
called by the name of Gorgona, the which island, he said,
the Spaniards did shun, and very seldom come nigh to,
by reason of the incessant and continual rains there fall-
ing, scarce one day in the year being dry at that place.
Captain Sharp having heard this information of Captain
Peralta, judged the said island might be the fittest place
for our company to careen at, considering, that if the
Spaniards did not frequent it, we might in all probabi-
lity lie there undescried, and our enemies the Spaniards,
in the meantime might think, that we were gone out of
those seas. At this time it was, that I seriously repented
my staying in the South Seas, and that I did not return
homewards in company of them that went before us.
For I knew, and could easily perceive, that by these
delays the Spaniards would gain time and be able to send
advice of our coming to every port all along the coast,
so that we should be prevented in all, or most of our
attempts and designs wheresoever we came. But those
of our company, who had got money by the former prizes
of this voyage, over swayed the others who had lost all
THE ISLAND OF GORGONA. 327
their booty at gaming. Thus we bore away for the island
aforesaid of Gorgona, and at the distance of six leagues
and a half, at S.W.I, observed it to make the appearance
following.
GORGONA. Lat. i. o^ N,
On the mainland over against this island of Gorgona,
we were told by our prisoners, that up a great laguna,
or lake, is seated an Indian town, where they have great
quantity of sand grains of gold. Moreover, that five
days' journey up a river, belonging to the said laguna,
do dwell four Spanish superintendents, who have each
of them the charge of overseeing fifty or sixty Indians,
who are employed in gathering that gold which slips
from the chief collectors, or finders thereof. These are
at least threescore and ten, or fourscore Spaniards, with
a great number of slaves belonging to them, who dwell
higher up than these four superintendents, at a distance
of twenty-five or thirty days' journey on the said river.
That once every year, at a certain season, there comes
a vessel from Lima, the capital city of Peru, to fetch the
gold that here is gathered, and to bring to these people
such necessaries as they want. By land it is nothing
less than six weeks travel from thence to Lima.
The mainland to windward of this island is very low,
and full of rivers. All along the coast it rains most
desperately. The island is only four leagues distant
from the continent. While we lay at it, I took the whole
circumference thereof, which is according to what is here
underneath described.
52S THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
; •^•'-•vi^^s^i'^^^''^^
'or^ona
or CaJ: hfuzrpc^ Jjle
.•♦??
^y^y
^W
Captain Sharp gave to this island the name of Sharp's
Isle, by reason we careened at this place. We anchored
on the south side of the island, at the mouth of a very
fine river, which there disgorges itself into the sea.
There belong to this island about thirty rivers and rivu-
lets, which all fall from the rocks on the several sides of
the island. The whole circumference thereof is about
three leagues and a half, being all high and mountainous
land, excepting only on that side where we cast anchor.
Here therefore we moored our ship in the depth of
eighteen or twenty fathom water, and begun to unrig the
vessel. But we were four or five days space before we
could get our sails dry, so as to be able to take them from
the yards, there falling a shower of rain almost every
hour of the day and night. The mainland to the east of
the island, and so stretching northward, is extremely high
A LARGE SNAKE. WHALES. GRAMPUSES. 329
and towering, and perpetually clouded, excepting only
at the rising of the sun, at which time the tops of those
hills are clear. From the south side of this island where
we anchored, as was said above, we could see the low-
land of the main, at least a point thereof which lies
nearest to the island. The appearance it makes, is as
it were of trees growing out of the water.
Friday, July 2nd, as we were heaving down our
ship, our mainmast happened to crack. Hereupon our
carpenters were constrained to cut out large fishes, and
fish it, as the usual terms of that art do name the thing.
On the next day after the mischance of our main-
mast, we killed a snake which had fourteen inches in
circumference, and eleven feet in length. About the
distance of a league from this island runs a ledge of
rocks, over which the water continually breaks ; the
ledge being about two miles, more or less in length.
Had we anchored but half a mile more northerly, we
had ridden in much smoother water ; for here where we
were, the wind came in upon us in violent gusts. While
we were there, from June 30th to July 3rd, we had dry
weather, which was esteemed as a rarity by the Spaniards,
our prisoners. And every day we saw whales and gram-
puses, who would often come and drive under our ship.
We fired at them several times, but our bullets rebounded
from their bodies. Our choice and best provisions here,
were Indian conies, monkeys, snakes, oysters, conchs,
periwinkles, and a few small turtle, with some other sorts
of good fish. Here in like manner we caught a sloth,
a beast well deserving that name, given it by the Span-
iards, by whom it is called pcrcza. from the Latin word
pigritia.
At this island died Josephe Gabriel, a Spaniard, born
in Chili, who was to have been our pilot to Panama.
He was the same man who had stolen and married the
Indian king's daughter, as was mentioned above. He
had all along been very true and faithful to us, in dis-
330 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
covering several plots and conspiracies among our pris-
oners, either to get away or destroy us. His death was
occasioned by a calenture, or malignant fever, which
killed him after three days' sickness, having lain two
days senseless. During the time of our stay at this is-
land, we lengthened our topsails, and got up topgallant
masts ; we made two staysails, and refitted our ship very
well. But we wanted provisions extremely, as having
nothing considerable of any sort, but flour and water.
Being almost ready to depart, Captain Sharp, our com-
mander, gave us to understand he had changed his reso-
lution concerning the design of going to Guayaquil, for
he thought it would be in vain to go thither considering
that in all this time we must of necessity have been des-
cried before now. Yet notwithstanding he himself before
had persuaded us to stay. Being very doubtful among
ourselves what course we should take, a certain old man,
who had long time sailed among the Spaniards, told us
he could carry us to a place called Arica, to which town,
he said, all the plate was brought down from Potosi,
Chiquisaca, and several other places within the land,
where it was dug out of the mountains and mines, and that
he doubted not, but that we might get there of purchase
at least two thousand pounds every man. For all the
plate of the South Sea lay there, as it were, in store,
being deposited at the said place until such time as the
ships did fetch it away. Being moved with these reasons,
and having deliberated thereupon, we resolved in the end
to go to the said place. At this island of Gorgona afore-
mentioned, we likewise took down our round-house coach,
and all the high carved work belonging to the stern of
the ship, for when we took her from the Spaniards
before Panama, she was high as any third-rate ship in
England.
CHAPTER XL
Tlie Buccaneers depart from the Isle of Gorgona, zvith design to
plunder Arica. They lose one another by the way. They
touch at the Isle of Plate, or Drake s Isle, where they meet
again. Description of this Isle. Some memoirs of Sir
Francis Drake. An account of this voyage, and the coasts
all along. They sail as far in a fortnight, as the Spaniards
visually do in three months.
On Sunday, July 25th, in the afternoon, all things being
now in readiness for our departure, we set sail, and stood
away from the island of Gorgona, or Sharp's Isle, with a
small breeze which served us at N.W. But as the sun
went down that day, so our breeze died away by degrees.
Yet already we could begin to experiment, that our ship
sailed much better, since the taking down of her round
house, and the other alterations which we made in her.
The next day about two o'clock in the morning we had
a land breeze to help us, which lasted for the space of six
hours, more or less. So that at noon we found ourselves
to be five leagues and a half distant to the south west
from Gorgona. This day the Spaniards, our prisoners,
told us, in common discourse, that in most part of this
lowland coast they find threescore fathom water. In
the afternoon we had a very strong land breeze : mean-
while we continued making short trips off and in. That
night we had much rain for the greatest part of the night,
which occasioned the next morning, being the third day
of our navigation, to be very cloudy until ten o'clock.
About that hour it cleared up, and then we saw the
island of Gorgona at E.N.E. being distant about twelve
leagues more or less from us. We had the wind all this
332 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
day at S.W. where it continued, seldom varying above
two points of the compass to the westwards. Night
being come, about two o'clock, Captain Sharp ordered
me to speak to Captain Cox, and bid him go about and
stand off from the shore, for he feared less Cox should
come too nigh to it. But he replied, he knew well that
he might stand in until two o'clock. The next day
very early in the morning, we saw him not, the morning
being cloudy and stark calm. Yet notwithstanding at
eight o'clock it cleared up, and neither then could we
see him. Hence we concluded, and so it proved, that
we had lost him in the obscurity of the night, through
his obstinacy in standing in too long, and not coming
about when we spoke to him. Thus our Admiral's
ship was left alone, and we had not the company of
Captain Cox any longer in this voyage, till we arrived
at the Isle of Plate, where we had the good fortune to
find him again, as shall be mentioned hereafter. The
weather being clear this morning, we could see Gorgona,
at a distance of at least fifteen or sixteen leagues to the
E.N.E. All this day it continued calm, till about four in
the afternoon, at which time we had a W.S.W. wind,
which continued to blow all that night
Thursday, July 29th, 1679. This day the wind con-
tinued pretty fresh all day long. About four in the after-
noon we came within sight of the island del Gallo, which
I guessed to be nigh twenty-eight leagues distant from
that of Gorgona, the place of our departure S.W. It is
about nine leagues distant E. from the main. So that
the island with the mainland S.W. from it appears thus.
GALLO. Lat. 2. 12. N.
All this day the weather continued clear, and the wind
W.S.W.
GORGONILLA. GALLO. 333
The next day, July 30th, the wind blew very fresh
and brisk ; insomuch, that we were in some fear for
the heads of our low masts, being very sensible that
they were but weak. About three or four in the after-
noon, we saw another island, six or seven leagues dis-
tant from Gallo, called Gorgonilla. At E. by S. from
us it made the appearance which I have here adjoined.
All the mainland hereabouts lies very low and flat, and
is in very many places overflowed and drowned every
high-water.
GORGONILLA.
On Saturday July 31st in the morning, the island del
Gallo, at E.N.E. being distant about eight leagues, gave
us this appearance.
GALLO, Another Prospect thereof.
The point of Mangroves is a low and level point, run-
ning out S.S.W. This day, and the night before it, we
lost by our computation three leagues of our way, which
I believe happened because we stood out too far from
the land, having stood off all night long.
August I St, which was Sunday, we had a very fresh
wind at W.S.W. This was joined also with several
small showers of rain which fell that day. In the mean-
while we got pretty well to windward with it, by making
small trips to and fro, which we performed most com-
monly, by standing in three glasses, and as many out.
334
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
The next day, August 2nd, in the morning, we came
up into the highland of Santiago, where begins the
highland of this coast. We kept at the distance of
ten leagues from it, making continual short trips, as was
mentioned before. The next day likewise we continued
to do the same. But the weather was cloudy, and for
the most part full of rain.
Wednesday, August 4th, we continued still turning
in the wind's eye, as we had done for two days before.
This day in the afternoon we discovered three hills at
E.N.E. of our ship. These hills make the land of San
Matteo, which gives this following appearance :
SAN MATTEO.
All the coast along hereabouts is highland. That
evening also we saw the cape of San Francisco. At first
this cape appeared like two several islands. But two
hours after, at the distance of twelve leagues, at S. by
W. it looked thus.
CAPE OF SAN FRANCISCO.
Thursday, August 5 th, we being then about the cape,
it looked very like to Beachy Head in England. It is full
of white cliffs on all sides. The land turns off here to
E. of S., and makes a large and deep bay, the circum-
ference whereof is full of pleasant hills. In the bight of
CAPE PAS SA O. 335
the bay are two high and rocky islands, which represent
exactly two ships with their sails full. We were now
come out of the rainy countries, into a pleasant and fair
region, where we had for the most part a clear sky, and
dry weather. Only now and then we could here find
a small mist, which soon would vanish away. In the
meanwhile, every night a great dew used to fall, which
supplied the defect of rain.
The two next days following, we continued plying to
windward with fair weather, nothing else remarkable
happening in them which might deserve any notice to be
taken thereof
On Sunday, August 8th, w^e came close under a wild
and mountainous country. This day likewise we saw
Cape Passao, at the distance of ten leagues more or less
to windward of us. Ever since we came on this side
Mangrove point, we had observed a windward current
did run all along as we sailed. Under shore the land is
full of white cliffs and groves, lower towards the pitch of
the cape.
The next day we had both a fair day and a fresh wind
to help us on our voyage. We observed that Cape
Passao makes three points, between which are two bays.
The leeward-most of the two, is of the length of three
leagues, and the other of four. Adjoining to the bays is
seen a pleasant valley. Our prisoners informed us, that
northward of these capes live certain Indians, who sell
maize, and other provisions to any ships that happen to
come in there. The Cape itself is a continuous cliff,
covered with several sorts of shrubs and low bushes.
Under these cliffs lies a sandy bay of the depth of forty
feet. The Spaniards say, that the wind is always here
between the S.S.W. and W.S.W. The cape represents
with much likeliness the brow of an alligator or cay-
man. At S. Cape Passao appears thus :
336 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
CAPE PASS A O. Lat. i. 30. S.
Tuesday, August loth. This morning the sky was so
thick and hazy, that we could not see the highland ;
though it were just before us, and not altogether two
leagues distant from us. But as soon as it cleared up,
we stood in towards the land, until we came within a
mile of the shore. Here having sounded, we found seven
fathom and a half of water, under which was a light and
clayey ground. The coast all along is very mountainous,
and likewise full of high and towering cliffs. When we
sounded, the tide was almost at low-water. Here it ebbs
and flows nearly four fathom perpendicular. From this
cape the land runs along S.E. for the space of three or
four leagues, with huge highland cliffs, like those of
Calais over against England. Being past this cape, the
highland S. from us is Cape St. Lawrence.
August nth, we found ourselves N.N.W. from Monte
de Christo, a very high and round hill. Thence to wind-
ward is seen a very pleasant country, with spots here and
there of woody land ; which causes the country all over,
to look like so many enclosures of ripe cornfields. To
leeward of the said hill, the land is all high and hilly,
with white cliffs at the sea-side. The coast runs S.W.
till it reaches to a point of land, within which is the
port of Manta, as it is called. This port of Manta is
nothing else than a settlement of Spaniards and Indians
together where ships that want provisions call in, and are
furnished with several necessaries. About six or seven
leagues to windward of this port is Cape St. Lawrence,
butting out into the sea, being in form like the top of a
MONTE DE CHRIST O. CAPE ST. LAWRENCE. 337
church. Monte de Christo gives this appearance at
sea :
MONTE DE CHRISTO. Lat. 50. S.
The cape rises higher and higher from the port of
Manta. As we sailed along we saw multitudes of gram-
puses every day ; also water-snakes of divers colours.
Both the Spaniards and Indians are very fearful of these
snakes, believing there is no cure for their bitings. At
the distance of eight leagues, or thereabouts, to leeward
of Cape St. Lawrence, it appears thus :
CAPE ST. LAWRENCE.
Lat. 55. S.
This day before night we came within sight of Manta.
Here we saw the houses of the town belonging to the
port, which were not above twenty or thirty Indian houses,
lying under the windward and the mount. We were not
willing to be descried by the inhabitants of the said place,
and stood off to sea again.
On Thursday, August 12th, in the morning, we saw
the island of Plate at S.W. at the distance of five leagues
more or less. It appeared to us to be an even land.
Having made this island, we resolved to go thither and re-
fit our rigging, and get some goats which there run wild
up and down the country. For, as was said before, at
this time we had no other provision than flour and water,
VOL, II. z
338
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
The island itself is indifferent highland and off at sea
looks thus, as is here described :
ISLE OF PLATE. Lat. 2. 42. S.
But the highland of Cape Passao, of which we have
spoken before, at the distance of fifteen leagues to N.,
gives in several hummocks this appearance :
HIGHLAND OF CAFE FASSAO.
12
The land of Cape St. Lawrence is all white cliffs ; the
head of the cape running N. and S. This day several
great whales came up to us, and dived under our ship.
One of these whales followed our ship, from two in the
afternoon till dark night.
The next morning very early, at about six o'clock, we
came under the aforesaid Isle of Plate, and here unex-
pectedly, to our great joy, we found at anchor the ship
of Captain Cox, with his whole company, whom we had
lost at sea for the space of a whole fortnight before. We
found they had reached this island, and had been there
at anchor four days before us, being now just ready to
depart thence. At about seven we came to anchor,
and then the other vessel sent us a live tortoise, and a
goat to feast upon that day, telling us withal, of great
store of tortoises to be found ashore upon the bays, and
of much fish to be caught hereabouts. The island is very
steep on all sides, insomuch, that there is landing only on
the N.E. side thereof, where is a gully, nigh to which
we anchored in twelve fathom water. Here at the dis-
THE ISLE OF PLATE, OR DRAKE'S ISLE. 339
tance of a furlong, or little more from the shore as you
go to land, you will see on the left hill a cross still stand-
ing, there erected in former times. No trees are to be
found on the whole island, but only low shrubs, on which
the goats feed, which cattle is here very numerous. The
shore is bold and hard, neither is there any water to be
found upon it, excepting only on the S.W. side of the
island, where It cannot be come at, lying so much enclosed
by the rocks, and too great a sea hindering the approach
to it in boats.
This Island received its name from Sir Francis Drake
and his famous actions, for here it is reported by tradition
that he made the dividend, or sharing of that quantity of
plate which he took in the Artnada of this sea, distribut-
ing it to each man of his company by whole bowls full.
The Spaniards affirm to this day that he took at that
time twelve score tons of plate, and sixteen bowls of
coined money a man, his number then being forty-five
men in all. Insomuch that they were forced to heave
much of it overboard, because his ship could not carry It
all. Hence was this island called by the Spaniards them-
selves the Isle of Plate, from this great dividend, and by
us Drake's Isle.
All along as we sailed, we found the Spanish pilots to
be very Ignorant of the coasts. But they plead thus much
for their ignorance, that the merchants, their employers,
either of Mexico, Lima, Panama, or other parts, will not
entrust one penny worth of goods on that man's vessel
that corks her, for fear she should miscarry. Here our
prisoners told us likewise, that In the time of Oliver
Cromwell, or the commonwealth of England, a certain
ship was fitted out of Lima with seventy brass guns,
having on board her no less than thirty millions of dollars,
or pieces of eight, all which vast sum of money was given
by the merchants of Lima, and sent as a present to our
gracious king (or rather his father) who now relgneth, to
supply him in his exile and distress, but that this great
340
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and rich ship was lost by keeping along the shore in the
Bay of Manta above-mentioned, or thereabouts. What
truth there may be in this history, I cannot easily tell,
at least, it seems to me as scarce deserving any credit.
At this island we took out of Mr. Cox's ship the old
Moor (for of that nation he was), who pretended he
would be our pilot to Arica. This was done, lest we
should have the misfortune of losing the company of
Cox's vessel, as we had done before, our ship being the
biggest in burden, and having the greatest number of
men. Captain Peralta admired oftentimes that we were
got so far to windward in so little space of time ;
whereas they had been, he said, many times three or four
months in reaching to this distance from our departure.
Their long and tedious voyages, he added, were occa-
sioned by their keeping at too great a distance from the
shore. Moreover, he told us, that had we gone to the
islands of Galapagos, as we were once determined to
do, we had met in that voyage with many calms, and
such currents, that many ships have by them been lost
and never heard of to this day. This island of Plate is
about two leagues in length, and very full of both deep
and dangerous bays, as also such as we call gullies in
these parts. The circumference and description of the
said island is exactly thus :
We caught at this island and salted, good number of
COATS AND TORTOISEF. 341
,2^oats and tortoises. One man standing here on a litde
bay in one day turned seventeen tortoises ; besides which
number our mosquito strikers brought us in several more.
Captain Sharp, our commander, showed himself very in-
genious in striking them, he performing it as well as the
tortoise strikers themselves. For these creatures here are
so litde fearful, that they offer not to sink from the fisher-
men, but lie still until such time as they are struck. But
we found that the tortoises on this side were not so large,
nor so sweet to the taste, as those on the north side of
the island. Of goats we have taken, killed, and salted,
above a hundred in a day, and that without any labour.
While we stayed here, we made a square maintopsail yard.
We cut also six feet off our bowsprit, and three feet more
off our head. Most of the time that w^e remained here,
we had hazy weather. Only now and then the sun would
happen to break out, and then to shine so hot that it
burnt the skin off the necks of several of our men. As
for me, my lips were burnt in such a manner that they
were not well in a whole week afterwards.
CHAPTER XII.
Captain Sharp and his company depart from the hie of Plate, in
prosecution of their voyage toiuards Arica. They take tivo
Spanish vessels by the zuay, and learn intelligence from the
enemy. Eight of their company destroyed at the Isle of Gallo.
Tediotisness of this voyage, and great hardships they endtired.
Description of the coast all along, and their sailings.
Having taken in at the Isle of Plate what provisions
and other necessaries we could get, we set sail thence
on Tuesday, August 17th, 1679, in prosecution of our
voyage and designs above-mentioned, to take and plunder
the vasdy rich town of Arica. This day we sailed so
well, and the same we did for several others afterwards,
that we were forced to lie by several times, besides
reefing our topsails, to keep our other ship company,
lest we should lose her again.
The next morning about break of day, we found our-
selves to be at the distance of seven or eight leagues to
the westward of the island whence we had departed,
standing W. by S. with a S. by W. wind. About noon
that day we had laid the land. After dinner the wind
came at S.S.W. at which time we were forced to stay
more than once for the other vessel belonging to our
company.
On the following day we continued in like manner a
west course all the day long. Sometimes this day the
wind would change, but then in a quarter of an hour it
would return to S.S.W. again. Hereabouts where we
now were, we observed great ripplings of the sea.
August 20th, yesterday in the afternoon about six
o'clock, we stood in S.E., but all night and all this day,
DEPARTURE FROM THE ISLE OF PLATE. 343
we had very small winds. We found still that we
gained very much on the small ship, which did not a
little both perplex and hinder us in our course.
The next day likewise we stood in S.E. by S. though
with very little wind, which sometimes varied, as was men-
tioned above. That day I finished two quadrants, each
of which were two feet and a half radius. Here we had
in like manner, as has been mentioned on other days
of our sailings, very many dolphins, and other sorts of
fish swimming about our ship.
On the morning following, we saw again the island of
Plate at N.E. of our ship, giving us this appearance at
that distance of prospect :
ISLE OF PLATE.
The same day at the distance of six leagues more or
less from the said island, we saw another island, called
Solango. This isle lies close in by' the mainland. In
the evening we observed it to bear E.N.E. from us. Our
course was S.E. by S. and the wind at S.W. by S.
This day likewise we found that our lesser ship was still
a great hindrance to our sailing, being forced to lie by,
and stay for her two or three hours every day. We
found likewise, that the farther from shore we were, the
less wind we had all along, and that under the shore we
were always sure of a fresh gale, though not so favour-
able to us as we could wish it to be. Hitherto we had
used to stand off forty leagues, and yet notwithstand-
ing, in the space of six days, we had not got above ten
leagues on our voyage, from the place of our departure.
August 23rd, this day the wind was S.W. by S. and . /
S.S.W. In the morning we stood off. The island of
Solango, at N.E. by N. appears thus:
344 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
ISLE OF SOLANGO.
t4
At S. by W. and about six leagues distance from us,
we descried a long and even hill. I took it to be an
island, and conjectured it might be at least eight leagues
distant from the continent. But afterwards we found it
was a point of land joining to the main, and is called
Point St. Helena, being continued by a piece of land
which lies low, and in several places is almost drowned
from sight, so that it cannot be seen at two leagues
distance. In this lowland the Spaniards have conveni-
ences for making pitch, tar, salt, and some other things,
for which purpose they have several houses here, and a
friar, who serves them as their chaplain. From the
island of Solango, to this place, are reckoned eleven
leagues, more or less. The land is hereabouts in-
different high, and is likewise full of bays. We had this
day very litde wind to help us in our voyage, excepting
what blasts came now and then in snatches. These
sometimes would prove pretty fair to us, and allow us
for some litde while a south course. But our chief
course was S.E. by S. The point of St. Helena at S.
half E., and at about six leagues distance, gives exactly
this appearance as follows :
PUNTA DE SANTA HELENA.
Here we found no great current of the sea to move
anyway. At the isle of Plata, afore described, the sea
ebbs and flows nearly thirteen feet perpendicular.
About four leagues to leeward of this point is a deep
bay, having a key at the mouth of it, which takes up the
SAINT HELENA. 345
better part of its width. In the deepest part of the bay
on shore, we saw a great smoke, which was at a village
belonging to the bay, to which place the people were
removed from the point above-mentioned. This after-
noon we had a small westerly wind, our course being
S.S.W. Hereabouts it is all along a very bold shore.
At three o'clock in the afternoon, we tacked about to
clear the point. Being now a little way without the
point, we spied a sail, which we conceived to be a bark.
Hereupon we hoisted out our canoe, and sent in pursuit
of her, which made direcdy for the shore. But the
sail proved to be nothing else than a pair of bark-logs,^
which arriving on shore, the men spread their sail on
the sand of the bay to dry. At the same time there
came down on the shore an Indian on horseback, who
hallooed to our canoe, which had followed the logs.
But our men fearing to discover who we were, in case
they went too near the shore, left the design and returned
back to us. In these parts the Indians have no canoes,
nor any wood indeed that may be thought fit to make
them of. Had we been descried by these poor people,
they would in all probability have been very fearful of
us. But they offered not to stir, which gave us to under-
stand they knew us not. We could perceive from the
ship a great path leading to the hills, so that we be-
lieved this place to be a look-out, or watch-place, for
the security of Guayaquil. Between four and five we
doubled the point, and then we descried the Point
Chandy, at the distance of six leagues S.S.E. from this
point. At first sight it seemed like to a long island,
but withal, lower than that of St. Helena.
Tuesday, August 24th, at noon we took the other ship,
wherein Captain Cox sailed in tow, she being every day
1 This is no doubt the native craft Balsa still used in the vicinity.
It is a raft bearing one or two large sails and provided with sliding keels
in the shape of large planks drawn up or let down according to circum-
stances. Perhaps the earliest example of the use of sliding keels.
346 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
a greater hindrance than before to our voyage. Thus,
about three in the afternoon we lost sight of land, in
standing over for Cape Blanco. Here we found a strong
current to move to the S.W. The wind was at S.W.
by S., our course being S. by E. At the upper end of
this gulf, which is framed by the two capes aforemen-
tioned, stands the city of Guayaquil, being a very rich
place, and the emba7'cadei'o or sea-port to the great
city of Quito. To this place likewise, many of the
merchants of Lima do usually send the money they
design for Old Spain in barks, and by that means save
the custom that otherwise they would pay to the king
by carrying it on board the fleet. Hither comes much
gold from Quito, and very good and strong broadcloth,
together with images for the use of the churches, and
several other things of considerable value. But more
especially cacao-nut, whereof chocolate is made, which is
supposed here to be the best in the whole universe. The
town of Guayaquil consists of about one hundred and
fifty great houses, and twice as many little ones. This
was the town to which Captain Sawkins intended to
make his voyage, as was mentioned above. When ships
of greater burden come into this gulf, they anchor out-
side Lapina, and then put their lading into lesser vessels
to carry it to the town. Towards the evening of this
day, a small breeze sprang up, varying from point to
point, after which, about nine o'clock at night, we tacked
about, and stood off to sea, W. by N.
As soon as we had tacked, we happened' to spy a
sail N.N.E. from us. Hereupon we instantly cast off
our other vessel which we had in tow, and stood round
about after them. We came very near to the vessel
before the people saw us, by reason of the darkness of
the night. As soon as they spied us, they immediately
clapped on a wind, and sailed very well before us ; inso-
much, that it was a pretty while before we could come
up with them, and within call. We hailed them in
CAPTURE OF A SPANISH BARK. 347
Spanish, by means of an Indian prisoner, and commanded
them to lower their top-sails. They answered they would
soon make us to lower our own. Hereupon, we fired
several guns at them, and they as thick at us again with
their Harquebuses. Thus they fought us for the space
of half an hour or more, and would have done it longer,
had we not killed the man at the helm, after which, none
of the rest dared to be so hardy as to take his place-
With another of our shot we cut in pieces and disabled
their main-top halliards. Hereupon they cried out for
quarter, which we gave them, and entered their ship.
Being possessed of the vessel, we found in her five and
thirty men, of which number twenty-four were natives of \
Old Spain. They had one and thirty fire-arms on board j
the ship, for their defence. They had only fought us,_y^
as they declared afterwards, out of bravado, having
promised on shore so to do, in case they met us at sea.
The captain of this vessel was a person of quality, and
his brother, since the death of Don Jacinto de Barabona.
killed by us in the engagement before Panama, was now
made admiral of the sea armada. With him we took also
in this bark, five or six other persons of quality. They
did us in this fight, though short, very great damage in
our rigging, by cutting it in pieces, besides which, they
wounded two of our men, and a third man was wounded
by the negligence of one of our own men, occasioned by
a pistol which went off unadvisedly. About eleven
o'clock this night we stood off to the west.
The next morning about break of day, we hoisted out
our canoe, and went aboard the bark which we had
taken the night before. We transported on board our
own ship more of the prisoners taken in the said vessel,
and began to examine them, to learn what intelligence
we could from them. The captain of the vessel, who was
a very civil and meek gentleman, satisfied our desires in
this point very exactly, saying to us : Gentlemen, I am
now your prisoner at war by the over-7'uling providence
348 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of fortune ; and moreover, am very zuell satisfied that no
money whatsoever can procure my ransom, at least f or the
present at yonr hands. Hence I am persuaded, it 2S not
my interest to tell you a lie, which if I do, I desire you to
punish me as severely as you shall think fit. We heard
of your taking and destroying our Armadilla, and other
ships at Panama, about six zueeks after that engagement,
by two several barks which andved here from thence. But
they could not inform 7is zvhether you designed to come any
farther to the southivard ; but rather, desired we would
send them speedily all the help by sea that lue could. Here-
upon, we sejit the noise and rumottr of your being in these
seas, by land to Lima, desiring they woidd expedite what
succours they could send to join with ours. We had
at that time in our harbour two or three great ships, but
all of them very unfit to sail. For this 7'eason at Lima,
the Viceroy of Peru pressed three gi^eat me7'chant ships,
into the biggest of which he put fourteen brass guns, into
the second, ten, and in the other, six. To these he added
two barks, and put seven htmdred and fifty soldiers on
board them all. Of this number of men they landed eight-
score at Point St. Helena ; all the rest being cari'ied down
to Panama, with design to fight you there. Besides these
forces, two other men of war, bigger than the afore-men-
tioned, are still lying at Lima, and fitting out there in all
speed to follow and pursue you. One of these men of war
is equipped zuith thirty-six brass guns, and the other with
thirty. These ships, beside their complement of seamen,
have four hundred soldiers added to them by the Viceroy.
Another man of war belonging to this number, and lesser
tha7t the afore-mentioned, is called the Patache. This ship
consists of twenty-four guns, and zvas sent to Arica to
fetch the King s plate thence. But the Viceroy, having
received intelligence of your exploits at Panama, sent for
this ship back from thence with such haste, that they came
away and left the money behind them. Hence the Patache
nozv lies at the Port of Callao, ready to sail on the first
THE SPANISH CAPTAIN'S RELATION. 349
occasion, or news of yoitr arrival thereabouts, they havino-
for this purpose sent to all parts very strict oi'ders to keep
a good look-out on all sides, and all places along the coasts.
Since this, from Manta, they sent ns zvord that they
had seeii two ships at sea pass by that place. And from
the Goat Key also we heard that the Indians had seen
yon, and that they were assured, one of your vessels zvas
the ship called la Trinidad, which you had taken before
Panajna, as being a ship very zuell knozun in these seas.
Hence lue concluded that yotir design was to ply, and make
your voyage thereabouts. Nozu this bark, wherein you
took ns prisoners, being bound for Panama, the Governor
of Guayaquil sent us out before her departiLre , if possible,
to discover you, which if we did, we were to run the bark
on shore and get azuay, or else to fight yoic zuith these
soldiers and firearms that you see. As soon as zve heard
of your being in these seas, we built tzuo forts, the one of
six guns, arid the other of four, for the defence of the
tozun. At the last muster taken in the tozun of Guayaquil
zve had the?'e eight hundred and fifty men, of all colours ;
but when we came out, zve left only two hundred men that
were actually imder arms. Thus ended the relation of
that worthy gentleman. About noon that day we un-
rigged the bark which we had taken, and after so doing
sunk her. Then we stood S.S.E., and afterwards S. by
W. and S.S.W. That evening we saw point St. Helena
at N. half E., at the distance of nine leagues, more or less.
The next day, being August 26th, in the morning we
stood S. That day we cried out all cur pillage, and
found that it amounted to 3,276 pieces of eight, which
was accordingly divided by shares amongst us. We also
punished a friar, who was chaplain to the bark afore-men-
tioned, and shot him upon the deck, casting him over-
board before he was dead. Such cruelties, though I
abhorred very much in my heart, yet here was I forced
to hold my tongue and contradict them not, as having
not authority to oversway them. At ten o'clock this
350 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
morning we saw land again, and the pilot said we were
sixteen leagues to leeward of Cabo Blanco. Hereupon
we stood off, and on, close under the shore, which all
appeared to be barren land.
The morning following we had very little wind, so that
we advanced but slowly all that day. To windward of
us we could perceive the continent to be all high land,
being whitish clay, full of white cliffs. This morning,
in common discourse, our prisoners confessed to us, and
acknowledged the destruction of one of our little barks,
which we lost on our way to the Island of Cay boa. They
stood away, as it appeared by their information, for the
Goat Key, thinking to find us there, as having heard
Captain Sawkins say that he would go thither. On their
way they happened to fall in with the island of Gallo,
and understanding its weakness by their Indian pilot,
they ventured on shore, and took the place, carrying
away three white women in their company. But after a
small time of cruising, they returned again to the afore-
said island, where they stayed two or three days, after
which they went out to sea again. Within three or four
days they came to a little key four leagues distant from
this isle. But whilst they had been out and in thus
several times, one of their prisoners made his escape to
the mainland, and brought off thence fifty men with fire-
arms. These, placing themselves in ambush, at the first
volley killed six of the seven men that belonged to the
bark. The other man that was left, took quarter of
the enemy, and he it was that discovered to them our
design upon the town of Guayaquil. By an observation
which we made this day, we found ourselves to be in
lat. 3° 50". At this time, our prisoners told us, there
was an embargo laid on all the Spanish ships, command-
ing them not to stir out of the ports, for fear of their
falling into our hands at sea.
Saturday, August 28th. This morning we took out
all the water, and most part of the flour that was in
CAPE BLANCO.
Captain Cox's vessel. The people in like manner came
on board our ship. Having done this, we made a hole
in the vessel, and left her to sink, with a small old canoe
at her stern. To leeward of Manta, a league from shore,
in eighteen fathom water, there runs a great current
outwards. About eleven in the forenoon we weighed
anchor, with a wind at W.N.W. turning it out. Our
number now in all being reckoned, we found ourselves
to be one hundred and forty men, two boys, and fifty-
five prisoners, being all now in one and the same bottom.
This day we got six or seven leagues in the wind's eye.
All the day following w^e had a very strong S.S.W.
wind, insomuch that we were forced to sail with two
reefs in our main-top sail, and one also in our fore-top
sail. Here Captain Peralta told us that the first place
which the Spaniards settled in these parts, after Panama,
was Tumbes, a place that now was to leeward of us, in
this gulf where we now were. That there a priest went
ashore with a cross in his hand, while ten thousand
Indians stood gazing at him. Being landed on the
strand, there came out of the woods two lions ; and he
laid the cross gently on their backs, and they instantly fell
down and worshipped it : and moreover, that two tigers
following them, did the same ; whereby these animals
gave to the Indians to understand the excellency of the
Christian religion, which they soon after embraced.
About four in the evening we came abreast the cape,
which is the highest part of all. The land hereabouts
appeared to be barren and rocky. At three leagues dis-
tance east from us, the cape showed thus :
Cape BLANCO.
353 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Were it not for a windward current which runs
under the shore hereabouts, it were totally impossible for
any ships to get about this cape, there being such a great
current to leeward in the offing. In the last bark which
we took, of which we spoke in this chapter, we made
prisoner one Nicolas Moreno, a Spaniard by nation, and
who was esteemed to be a very good pilot of the South
Sea. This man did not cease continually to praise
our ship for her sailing, and especially for the alterations
we had made in her. As we went along, we observed
many bays to lie between this cape and Point Parina, of
which we shall soon make mention hereafter.
In the night the wind came about to S.S.E. and we
had a very stiff gale of it. So that by break of day the
next morning, we found ourselves to be about five leagues
distant to windward of the cape afore mentioned. The
land hereabouts makes three or four several bays, and
grows lower and lower the nearer we came to Punta
Parina. This point looks at first sight like two islands.
Between four and five of the clock that evening we were
W. from the said point.
The next day likewise, being the last day of August,
the wind still continued S.S.E. as it had done the whole
day before. This day we thought it convenient to stand
farther out to sea, for fear of being descried at Paita,
which now was not very far distant from us. The morn-
ing proved to be hazy- — but about eleven we spied a
sail, which stood then just as we did E. by S. Coming
nearer to it, by degrees we found her to be nothing
else than a pair of bark logs^ under a sail, which were
going that way. Our pilot advised us not to meddle
with those logs, nor mind them in the least, for it was
very doubtful whether we should be able to come up
with them or not, and then by giving chase to them,
we should easily be descried and known to be the
English pirates, as they called us. These bark logs sail
1 See note on p. 345.
POINT PARINA. LA SILLA DE PAITA. 353
excellently well for the most part, and some of them are
of such a size that they will carry two hundred and fifty
packs of meal from the valleys to Panama, without wet-
ting any of it. This day, by an observation made, we
found ourselves to be in lat. 4° 55' S ; point Parina at
N.E. by E. and at the distance of six leagues, more or
less, gives this following appearance :
Punta PARINA.
At the same time La Silla de Paita bore from us S.E.
by E. being distant only seven or eight leagues. It had
the form of a high mountain, and appeared thus to us :
La Silla de PAITA.
The town of Paita itself is situated in a deep bay,
about two leagues to leeward of this hill. It serves for
an Embarcadcro, or port town, to another great place
which is distant thence about thirteen leagues higher in
the country, and is called Piura, seated in a very barren
country.
On Wednesday, September ist, our course was S. by
W. The midnight before this day we had a landwind
that sprang up. In the afternoon La Silla de Paita, at
the distance of seven leagues, at E. by N. appeared thus :
La Silla de PI AT A.
VOL. II.
A A
354 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
All along hereabouts is nothing but barren land, as was
said before ; likewise, for three or four days last past, we
observed along the coasts many seals.
That night as we sailed we saw something that ap-
peared to us to be as it were a light. And the next
morning we spied a sail, whence we judged the light
had come. The vessel was at the distance of six leagues
from us, in the wind's eye, and thereupon we gave her
chase. She stood to windward as we did. This day we
had an observation, which gave us lat. 5° 30' S. At night
we were about four leagues to leeward of her, but so
great a mist fell, that we suddenly lost sight of her. At
this time the weather was as cold with us as in England
in November. Every time we went about with our ship
the other did the like. Our pilot told us that this ship
set forth from Guayaquil eleven days before they were
taken, and that she was laden with rigging, woollen and
cotton cloth, and other manufactures, made at Quito.
Moreover, that he had heard that they had spent a mast
and had put into Paita to refit it.
The night following they showed us several lights
through their negligence, which they ought not to have
done, for by that means we steered directly after them.
The next morning she was more than three leagues in
the wind's eye distant from us. Had they suspected us,
it could not be doubted, but they would have made away
towards the land, but they seemed not to fly nor stir for
our chase. The land here all along is level, and not
very high. The weather was hazy, so that at about
eleven o'clock that morning we lost sight of her. At
this time we had been for the space of a whole week,
at an allowance of only two draughts of water each day,
so scarce were provisions with us. That afternoon we
saw the vessel again, and at night we were not full two
leagues distant from her, and not more than half a league
to leeward. We made short trips all the night long.
On Saturday, September 4th, about break of day,
CAPTURE OF A SPANISH VESSEL. 355
we saw the ship again, at the distance of a league,
more or less, and not above a mile to windward of us.
They stood out as soon as they espied us, and we stood
directly after them. Having pursued them for several
hours, about four of the clock in the afternoon, we
came up within the distance of half our small arms shot,
to windward of them. Hereupon they, perceiving who
we were, presently lowered all their sails at once, and we
cast dice among ourselves for the first entrance. The lot
fell to larboard ; so that twenty men belonging to that
watch entered her. In the vessel were found fifty packs
of cacao-nut, such as chocolate is made of, many packs of
raw silk, Indian cloth, and thread stockings ; these things
being the principal part of her cargo. We stood out
S.W. by S. all the night following.
The next day being come, we transported on board
our ship the chief part of her lading. In her hold we
found some rigging, as had been told us by Nicholas
Moreno, our pilot, taken in the former vessel off of
Guayaquil, but the greatest part of the hold was fiill of
timber. We took out of her also some Osnaburgs, of
which we made top-gallant sails, as shall be said here-
after. It was now nineteen days, as they told us, since
they had set sail from Guayaquil, and then they had only
heard there of our exploits before Panama, but did not
so much as think of our coming so far to the southward,
which did not give them the least suspicion of us, though
they had seen us for the space of two or three days be-
fore at sea, and always steering after them, otherwise
they had made for the land, and endeavoured to escape
our hands.
The next morning, likewise, we continued to take in
the remaining part of what goods we desired out of our
prize. When we had done we sent most of our prisoners
on board the said vessel, and left only their foremast
standing, all the rest being cut down by the board. We
gave them a foresail to sail withal, all their own water,
356 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
and some of our flour to serve them for provisions, and
thus we turned them away, as not caring to be troubled or
encumbered with too many of their company. Notwith-
standingr we detained still several of the chief of our
prisoners. Such were Don Thomas de Argandona, who
was commander of the vessel taken before Guayaquil,
Don Christoval, and Don Baltazar, both gentlemen of
quality, taken with him. Captain Peralta, Captain Juan
Moreno, the pilot, and twelve slaves, of whom we intended
to make good use, to do the drudgery of our ship. At
this time I reckoned that we were about the distance of
thirty-five leagues, little more or less, from land, more-
over, by an observation made this day, we found lat.
7^ i' S. Our plunder being over, and our prize turned
away, we sold both chests, boxes, and several other
things at the mast, by the voice of a crier.
On the following day we stood S.S.W. and S.W. by
S. all day long. That day one of our company died,
named Robert Montgomery, the same man who was
shot by the negligence of one of our own men with a pistol
through the leg at the taking of the vessel before Guaya-
quil, as was mentioned above. We had an observation
also this day, by which we now found lat. 7° 26' S. On
the same day likewise we made a dividend, and shared all
the booty taken in the last prize. This being done, we
hoisted into our ship the launch w^hich we had taken in
her, as being useful to us. All these days last past it
was observed that we had every morning a dark cloud in
the sky, the which in the North Sea would certainly fore-
tell a storm, but here it always blew over.
Wednesday, September 8th, in the morning, we
threw our dead man above-mentioned into the sea, and
gave him three French volleys for his funeral ceremony.
In the night before this day, we saw a light belonging to
some vessel at sea, but we stood away from it, as not
desiring to see any more sails to hinder us in our voyage
towards Arica, whither now we were designed. This
VOYAGE TOWARDS A RICA. 357
light was undoubtedly from some ship to leeward of us,
but on the next morning we could descry no sail. Here
I judged we had made a S.W. by S. way from Paita,
and by an observation found 8^ oo' S.
CHAPTER XIII.
A continuation of t]ieir long and tedious voyage to Arica, with a
description of the coasts and sailings tJiereimto. Great hard-
ship they endured for ivant of zvater and other pi'ovisions.
They are descried at A rica, and dare not land there ; the
country being all in arms before them. They retire from
thence, and go to Puerto de Hilo, close by A rica. Here they
land, take the town ivith little or no loss on their side, refresh
themselves ïuith provisions ; but in the end are cheated by
the Spaniards, and for cd shamefully to retreat from thence.
On September 9th we continued still to make a S.W. by
S. way, as we had done the day before. By a clear and
exact observation, taken the same day, we found now lat,
8° 12' S. All the twenty-four hours last past afforded
us but little wind, so that we advanced but little on our
voyage and were forced to tack about every four or five
hours.
The next day, by another observation taken, we found
then lat. 9° 00' S. Now the weather was much warmer
than before, and with this warmth we had small and
misty rains that frequently fell. That evening a strong
breeze came up at S.E. by E.
The night following likewise we had a very great dew
that fell, and a fresh wind continued to blow. At this
time we were all hard at work to make small sails of the
Osnaburgs we had taken in the last prize, as being much
more convenient for their lightness. The next morn-
ing being Saturday, September nth, we lay by to mend
our rigging. These last twenty-four hours we had made
a S. by W. way. And now we had an observation that
gave us lat. 10° 9' S. I supposed this day that we were
358
VOYAGE TO A RICA. 359
west from Cosmey, about the distance of eighty-nine
leagues and a half.
September 12th. This day we reckoned a S.S.W.
way, and that we had made thirty-four leagues and three-
quarters, or thereabouts. Also that all our westing from
Paita was eighty-four leagues, We supposed ourselves
now to be in lat. 1 1° 40' S. But the weather being hazy
no observation could be made.
September 13th. Yesterday in the afternoon we had
a great eclipse of the sun, which lasted from one o'clock
till three after dinner. From this eclipse I then took the
true judgment of our longitude from the Canary Islands,
and found myself to be 285' 35', in lat. 11° 45' S. The
wind was now so fresh that we took in our top-sails,
making a great way under our courses and sprit- sail.
September 14th we had a cloudy morning, which con-
tinued so all the first part thereof. About eight it cleared
up, and then we set our fore-topsail and, about noon, our
main-topsail likewise. This was observable, that all this
great wind precedent did not make anything of a great
sea. We reckoned this day that we had run by a S.W.
by W. way, twenty-six leagues and two-thirds.
The next day, in like manner, we had close weather,
such as the former morning. Our reckoning was twenty-
four leagues and two-thirds, by a S.W. by W. way. But,
by observation made, I found myself to be 23° S. of my
reckoning, as being in the lat. of is'' 17' S.
On the 1 6th we had but small and variable winds.
For the twenty-four hours last past we reckoned twenty-
four leagues and two-thirds, by a S.W. by S. way. By
observation we had lat. 16° 41'. That evening we had
a gale at E.S.E. which forced us to hand our top-sails.
The 17th likewise, we had many gusts of wind at
several times, forcing us to hand our top-sails often. But
in the forenoon we set them with a fresh gale at E.S.E.
My reckoning this day was thirty-one leagues, by a
S.S.W. way. All day long we stood by our top-sails.
36o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
On the 1 8th we made a S. by W. way. We reckoned
ourselves to be in lat. 19^ 33' S. The weather was hazy,
and the wind began to die this day by degrees.
The next day, being the 19th, we had very small wind.
I reckoned thirteen leagues and a half, by a S.W. by S.
way, and our whole westing from Paita to be 164 leagues
in lat. 20° 06' S. All the afternoon we had a calm, with
drizzling rain.
Monday, September 20th. Last night we saw the
clouds, which are so famous among the mariners Magellan
of these southern seas. The least of these clouds was
about the bigness of a man's hat. After this sight the
morning was very clear. We had run at noon at E.S.E.
thirteen leagues and a half, and, by an observation then
made, we found lat. 20^ 15' S. This day the wind began
to freshen at W. by S. Yet, notwithstanding, we had a
very smooth sea.
But on the next morning, the wind came about to S.W.
and yet slackened by degrees. At four this morning
it came to S. by E., and at ten the same day, to S.E by
S. We had this day a clear observation, and by it lat.
20° 25' S. We stood now E. by N. with the wind at S.E.
September 22nd. This morning the wind was at
E.S.E. By a clear observation we found lat. 19^ 30' S.
Likewise on a N.E. by E. way, . . . and two leagues
and two-thirds.
September 23rd. We had a fresh wind and a high
sea. This morning early the wind was at E. and about
ten at E.N.E. From a clear observation we found our
latitude to be 20° 35' S. The way we made was S. by W.
That morning we happened to split our sprit-sail.
Next morning the wind was variable and inconstant,
and the weather but hazy. We reckoned a S. by E.
way ; this day we bent a new main-topsail, the old one
serving for a fore-topsail. In the afternoon we had but
little wind, whereupon we lowered our top-sails, having,
in like manner, a very smooth sea.
VOVAGE TO A RICA. 361
The following day, likewise, brought us calm and
warm weather, which occasioned us to set up our shrouds
both fore and aft. An observation taken this day afforded
us lat. 21° 57'. That evening we bent a sprit-sail.
On September 26th an observation gave us lat. 22°
05' S. At noon we had a breeze at N.N.E., our course
being E.S.E. In the afternoon w^e set up a larboard
top-sail studding-sail. In the evening the wind came
about at N. pretty fresh.
The next day we had a smooth sea, and took in four
studding-sails. For yesterday in the afternoon we had
put out, besides that above mentioned, another studding-
sail, and two main studding-sails more. This day we
had by observation 22"" 45' S., having made by an E.S.E.
way, thirty-five leagues and a half Our whole meridian
difference sixty-eight leagues and a half.
September 28th. All the forenoon w^e had very little
wind, and yet withal a great southern sea. By observa-
tion we had lat. 22° 40' S.
September 29th. All the night past we had much
wind, with three or four fierce showers of rain. This
was the first that we could call rain, ever since we
left Cape Francisco above-mentioned, This day our
allowance was shortened,, and reduced to three pints and
a half of water, and one cake of boiled bread to each man
for a day. An observation this clay gave us lat. 21° 59'
S. by a N.E. by E. way.
On September 30th we had a cloudy day, and the
wind very variable, the morning being fresh. Our way
was N.E. half N. wherein w^e made eighteen leagues.
October ist. All the night past and this day we had
a cloudy sky, and not much wind. We made a N.E. by
E. way, and by it seventeen leagues and two miles.
This day we began at two pints and a half of water for a
day.
The 2nd, we made a E.N.E. way, and by it twenty-
six leagues, more or less. Our observation this day gave
3Ö2 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
US lat. 20° 29' S. I reckoned now that we were ten
leagues and a half to E. of our meridian, the port of
Paita, so that henceforward our departure was eastward.
The wind was this day at S.E. by S.
On the 3rd we had both a cloudy morning, a high sea,
and drizzling weather. An observation which we had
this day, gave us lat. 19° 45' S. In the afternoon the wind
blew so fresh that we were forced to hand our top-sails
and sprit-sail.
The 4th, likewise, we had a high sea and a cold wind.
At break of day we set our top-sails. An observation
made afforded us lat. 19° 8' S. Here we supposed our-
selves fifty-nine leagues D.M.
The 5 th, we had still a great sea, and sharp and cold
winds, forcing us to our low sails. By a N.E. by E.
way, we reckoned this day twenty-six leagues and a half.
But on the 6th we had great gusts of wind. Inso-
much, that this morning our ring-bolts gave way, which
held our main-stay, and had like to have brought our
main-mast by the board. Hereupon we ran three or four
glasses west before the wind. By an observation we
found lat. 19° 4' S.
On October 7th the wind had somewhat fallen. We
had both a cloudy day and variable winds.
The 8th of the said month we had again a smooth sea,
and small whiffling winds. This morning we saw a
huge shoal of fish, two or three water-snakes, and several
seals.
On the next day we had in like manner a very smooth
sea, and withal a cloudy day. Our course was E.
October loth. We had likewise a cloudy day, with
small and variable winds, and what is consequent to
these, a smooth sea. Our way was S. by E. This day
we spied floating upon the sea several tufts of sea-grass,
which gave us good hopes that we were not far from
shore. In the afternoon we had a N.E. by E. wind that
sprang up ; the night was very cold and cloudy.
VOYAGE TO A RICA. 363
On the I ith we had a fresh wind at S.E. and E.S.E.
together with a cloudy day, such as we had experienced
for* several days before. We reckoned this day thirty-
two leagues by a N.E. by E. way. Here our pilot told
us that the sky is always hazy near the shore upon these
coasts where we now were.
On October 12th we had a clear day, and N.E. way.
The 13th we had but litde wind. This day we saw a
Avhale, which we took for an infallible token that we were
not far distant from land, which now we hoped to see in a
few days. We made an E.S.E. way, and by it we reckoned
nineteen leagues. All the evening was very calm.
Thursday, October 14th, we had both a calm and close
day until the afternoon. Then the weather became very
hot and clear. This day we saw several land-fowls, being
but small birds, concerning which our pilot said, that they
use to appear about one or two days' sail from the land.
Our reckoning was eleven leagues by an E.S.E. way.
In the evening of this day we thought that we had seen
land, but it proved to be nothing else than a fog bank.
October 15th. Both the night past and this day, was
very clear. We made an observation this day, which
gave us lat. 18° 00' S.
The 1 6th. Last night and this day were contrary to
the former, both cloudy. Our way was N.E. by E.
whereof we reckoned thirteen leagues.
Sunday, October 1 7th, the wind blew very fresh, our
course being E.N.E. About five that morning we saw
land, but the weather was so hazy, that at first we could
scarce perceive whether it was land or not. It was dis-
tant from us about eight leagues, and appeared as a high
and round hill, being in form like a sugar-loaf. We
saw land afterwards all along to the S.E. by E. from it.
In the evening, we being then within five leagues of the
shore, the land appeared very high and steep.
October i8th. All the night last past we stood off to
sea with a fresh wind. This morning we could just see
364
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
land at N.N.E. We reckoned a S.E. by E. way, and
by observation we found lat. 17° 17' S.
Tuesday, October 1 9th. We had very cloudy weather,
finding what our pilot had told us to be very true con-
cerning the haziness of this shore. We saw all along as
we went very high land, covered with clouds ; insomuch
that we could not see its top.
On W^ednesday, the next day, we had likewise cloudy
weather, and for the most part calm. The same weather
being very cloudy, as before, continued in like manner
on Thursday.
Friday, October 22nd. This morning we saw the
land plain before us. Our pilot being asked what land
that was, answered, it was the Point of Hilo. At N.N.E.
and about six or seven leagues distance it appeared thus
to us :
rimia de HILO.
Lat. 1 8° 4' S.
There is every morning and evening a brightness over
the point, which lasted for two or three hours, being
caused by the reflection of the sun on the barren land, as
it is supposed. This day we had but little wind, and the
huQfe want of water we were now under, occasioned much
disturbance among our men. As for my part, I must
acknowledge I could not sleep all night long through the
greatness of my drought. We could willingly have
landed here to seek for water, but the fear of being dis-
covered and makincT ourselves known, hindered us from
so doing. Thus we unanimously resolved to endure our
thirst for a little longer. Hereabouts is a small current
that runs under the shore. This morning we had but
little wind at S., our course being E.S.E. The point
VOYAGE TO A RICA.
365
at the distance of five leagues N.E. looks on the follow-
inof side thus :
Fun fa de 11/ LO.
Our wind continued to blow not above six hours each
day. We reckoned the difference of our meridian to be
this day, one hundred and eighty leagues. Very great
was our aftiiction now for want of water, we having but
half a pint a day to our allowance.
October 23rd. This day we were forced to spare one
measure of water, thereby to make it hold out the
longer, so scarce it became with us. At three this after-
noon the point looked thus :
Fiinta de HILO.
Mora de SAMA.
Here the point looks like an island, and Mora de
Sama to the southward thereof, gives this appearance :
Mora de SAMA.
366
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
At about nine o'clock at night we had a land wind,
and with it we stood S.E. by S., but all the night after
we had but little wind.
October 24th. All the night past we had very cloudy
and dark weather, with mizzling rain. The morning
being come it cleared up, but all the land appeared
covered with clouds. Yet, notwithstanding, in the after-
noon it gave us again this appearance :
Mora de SAMA.
Lat. 18" 29' S.
Under the hill of Mora de Sama are eighteen or nine-
teen white cliffs which appear in the form thus described.
This day we resolved that one hundred and twelve men
should go ashore, and, at about eight this evening, we
sent our launch and four canoes, with four score men, to
take three or four fishermen at a certain river, close by
Mora de Sama, called El Rio de Juan Diaz, with intent
to gain what intelligence we could as to how affairs stood
at present on the coast and country thereabouts.
Monday, October 25th. Last night being about the
distance of one league and a half from shore, we sounded,
and found forty-five fathom water, with a hard ground
at the bottom. This morning our people and canoes,
that were sent to take the fishermen, returned, not being
able to find either their houses or the river. They re-
ported withal, they had had a very fresh wind all the
nicrht loncy under shore, whereas we had not one breath
of wind all night on board.
Tuesday, October 26th. Last night being the night
before this day, about six o'clock, we departed from the
ship to go to take Arica, resolving to land about the
VOYAGE TO A RICA. 367
distance of a league to windward of the town. We were
about six leagues distant from the town when we left our
ship, whereby we were forced to row all night, that we
might reach the place of our landing before day. To-
wards morning the canoes left the launch, which they
had had all night in tow, and wherein I was, and made
all the speed they possibly could for the shore, with de-
sign to land before the launch could arrive. But being
come nigh the place where we designed to land, they
found, to our great sorrow and vexation, that we were
descried, and that all along the shore, and through the
country they had certain news of our arrival. Yet, not-
withstanding our discovery, we would have landed, if we
could by any means have found a place to do it in. But
the sea ran so high, and with such a force against the
rocks, that our boats must needs have each been staved
into one thousand pieces, and we in great danger of wet-
ting our arms, if we should adventure to go on shore.
The bay all round, and likewise the tops of the hills, was
possessed by several parties of horse which seemed to
be gathered there by a general alarm through the whole
country, and they waited only for our landing, with
design to make a strong opposition against us. They
fired a gun at us, but we made them no answer, but
rather returned to our ship, giving over this enterprise
until a fairer opportunity. The hill of Arica is very
white, being occasioned by the dung of multitudes of
fowls that nest themselves in the hollow thereof. To
leeward of the said hill lies a small island, at the dis-
tance of a mile, more or less, from the shore. About
half a league from that island we could perceive six ships
to ride at anchor, four of which had their yards taken
down from their masts, but the other two seemed to be
ready to sail. We asked our pilot concerning these
ships, and he told us that one of them was mounted with
six guns, and the other with only four. Being dis-
appointed of our expectations at Arica, we now resolved
368 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
to bear away thence to the village of Hilo, there to take
in water and other provisions, as also to learn what intel-
ligence we could obtain. All that night we lay under a
calm.
On October 27th, in the morning, we found ourselves
to be about a league to windward of Mora de Sama.
Yet, notwithstanding, the weather was quite calm, and
we only drove with the current to leeward. The land
between Hilo and Mora de Sama forms two several
bays, and the coast runs along N.W. and S.E. as may
appear by the following demonstration. Over the land
we could see from our ship, as we drifted, the coming or
rising of a very high land, at a great distance far up in
the country.
October 28th. The night before this day we sent
away our four canoes with fifty men in them, to seize and
plunder the town of Hilo. All that day was very calm,
as the day before.
The next morning, about break of day, a fair breeze
sprang up, with which we lay right in with the port.
About one in the afternoon we anchored, and the port
lies thus, as is here described :
Fort of HILO.
We cast anchor at the distance of two miles from the
village, and then we perceived two flags, which our men
had put out, having taken the town, and set up our Eng-
lish colours. The Spaniards were retreated to the
hills, and there had done the same. Being come to an
anchor, our Commander, Captain Sharp, sent a canoe on
board of us, and ordered that all the men our ship could
spare, should come ashore. Withal they told us, that
CAPTURE OF HILO. 369
those of our party that landed the mornuig before, were
met by some horsemen on the shore, who only exchanged
some few vollies of shot with our men, but were soon
put to flight. That hereupon our forces had marched
directly to the town, where the Spaniards expecting we
should have landed at first, had made a breastwork, thirty
paces long, of clay and banks of sand. Here, in a small
skirmish, we happened to kill an Indian, who told us be-
fore he died, that they had received news of our coming
nine days ago, from Lima, and but one day before from
Arica. Having taken the town, we found therein great
quantity of pitch, tar, oil, wine and flour, with several
other sorts of provisions. We endeavoured to keep as
good a watch as the Spaniards did on the hills, fearing
lest they should suddenly make an attempt to destroy us.
On the next day, October 30th, we chose out three-
score men of them who were the fittest to march, from
among the rest, and ordered them to go up and search
the valley adjoining and belonging to the town. We
found the said valley to be very pleasant, being all over
set with fig, olive, orange, lemon, and lime-trees, with
many other fruits agreeable to the palate. About four
miles up, within the valley, we came to a great sugar-
work, or Ingenio d'asucar, as it is called by the
Spaniards, where we found great store of sugar, oil, and
molasses, but most of the sugar the owners had hidden
from us in the cane itself. As we marched up the valley,
the Spaniards marched along the hills, and observed our
motion. From the tops of the hills they often tumbled
down great stones upon us, but with great care we en-
deavoured to escape those dangers, and the report of our
gun would suddenly cause them all to hide their heads.
From this house, I mean the sugar-work above-men-
tioned, Mr. Cox, myself, and one Cannis, a Dutchman
(who was then our interpreter), went to the Spaniards
with a flag of truce. They met us very civilly, and
promised to give us fourscore beeves as ransom of the
VOL. II. B B
370 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
sugar-work, upon condition that it should not be spoilt
nor demolished. We agreed with them, that they
should be delivered to us at the port, next day at noon.
Hereupon Captain Sharp, in the evening, sent down to
the port twenty men, with strict orders that our forces
there should offer no violence to those that brought down
the beeves.
Sunday, October 31st. This day being employed in
casting up some accounts belonging to our navigation,
I reckoned that Hilo was to the eastward of Paita, one
hundred and eighty seven leagues. This morning the
captain of the Spaniards came to our commander. Cap-
tain Sharp, with a flag of truce, and told him that sixteen
beeves were already sent down to the port, and that
the rest should certainly be there the next morning.
Hereupon we were ordered to prepare ourselves to re-
treat, and march back to the port, and there embark
ourselves on board our ship. My advice was to the con-
trary, that we should rather leave twenty men behind to
keep the house of the sugar- work, and that others should
possess themselves of the hills, thereby to clear them of
the Spaniards and their look-out. But my counsel not
being regarded, each man took away what burden of
sugar he pleased, and thus we returned to our vessel.
Being come there, we found no beeves had been brought
down at all, which occasioned us much to suspect some
double dealing would in the latter end be found in this
case.
The next morning, November 1st, our captain went
to the top of the hills afore-mentioned, and spoke with
the Spaniards themselves, concerning the performance
of their agreement. The Spaniards made answer that
the cattle would certainly come down this night, but in
case they did not, that the master or owner of the sugar-
work had now returned from Potosi, and we might go
up and treat with him, and" make, if we pleased, a new
bargain for the preservation of his house and goods, it
HOSTILE SPANIARDS. 371
being his interest, more than theirs, to save it from being
demolished. With this answer our men returned to us,
and we decided to wait until the next day for the delivery
of the beeves.
On the following day about eight in the morning, there
came in to us a flag of truce from the enemy, telling us,
that the winds were so high, that they could not drive
the cattle, otherwise they had been delivered before now.
But withal, that by noon we should in no manner fail to
have them brought to us. Noon being come, and no
cattle appearing, we, now having filled our water, and
finished other concerns, resolved to be revenged on the
enemy, and do them what mischief we could, at least, by
setting fire to the sugar-work. Hereupon, threescore men
of us marched up the valley, and burnt both the house,
the canes, and the mill belonging to the ingenio. We
broke likewise the coppers, coggs, and multitudes of great
jars of oil that we found in the house. This being done,
we brought away more sugar, and returned to the port
over the hills or mountains ; the which we found to be
very pleasant, smooth, and level after once we had as-
cended them. It fell out very fortunately to us that we
returned back this way, for otherwise our men at the sea-
side had inevitably been cut off and torn in pieces by the
enemy, they being at that time dispersed and straggling
up and down in parties of two and three. For from the
hills we spied coming from the northward of the bay,
above three hundred horsemen, all riding at full speed
towards our men, who had not as yet descried them, and
little thought of any such danger from the enemy so nigh
at hand. Being alarmed with this sight, we threw down
what sugar we had, and ran incontinently to meet them,
thereby to give our other men time to rally, and put them-
selves into a posture of defence. " We being in good rank
and order, fairly proffered them battle upon the bay, but as
we advanced to meet them, they retired and rode towards
the mountains to surround us, and take the rocks from us
372 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
if they possibly could. Hereupon, perceiving their in-
tentions, we returned back and possessed ourselves of the
said rocks, and also of the lower town, as the Spaniards
themselves did of the upper town (at the distance of half
a mile from the lower), the hills and the woods adjoining
thereunto. The horsemen being now in possession of
these quarters, we could perceive, as far as w^e could see,
more and more men resort to them, so that their forces
increased hourly to considerable numbers. We fired one
at another as long as we could reach, and the day would
permit. But in the meanwhile we observed, that several
of them rode to the watch-hill, and looked out often to
the sea-board. This gave us occasion to fear, that they
had more strength and forces coming that way, which
they expected every minute. Hereupon, lest we should
speed worse than we had done before, we resolved to
embark silently in the dark of the night, and go off from
the coast where we had been so early descried, and the
enemy was so much prepared against us. We carried off
a great chest of sugar, whereof we shared seven pound
weight and a half each man ; thirty jars of oil, and great
plenty of all sorts of garden herbs, roots, and most ex-
cellent fruit.
373
CHAPTER XIV.
The Buccaneers depart from the Port of Hilo, and sail to that
of Coqinmbo. They are descried before their arrival. Not-
withstanding they land : are ejicountered by the Spaniards,
and put them to flight. They take, plunder, and fire the City
of la Serena. A description thereof A Stratagem of the
Spaniards in endeavouring to fire their ship, discovered and
prevented. They are deceived again by the Spaniards, and
forced to retire from Coquimbo, zvithout any ransom for the
City, or considerable pillage. They release several of their
chief Prisoners.
The next morning (being Wednesday, November 3rd,
1679), about seven o'clock, we set sail from Hilo, stand-
ing directly off to sea, with a small land-wind. Upon
the shore we could not discover this morning, above fifty
men of our enemies forces, which caused us to suspect
the rest were run away from their colours, and had de-
serted in the dark of the night. If this were so we were
equally afraid of each other, and as we quitted the land,
being jealous of their multitudes, so they abandoned their
stations for fear of our encounters. All the while we lay
in the port of Hilo, we had a fresh wind, but now being
come out thence, we found it was almost stark calm.
Hereabouts runs a great sea all along this coast, as
we experimented at Arica ; insomuch that there is no
landing except under the favour of some rock or other.
November 4th, in the morning, we saw the port of
Hilo at E.N.E. at the distance of nine leagues more or
less, from the land. The white sand gives a bright re-
flection over the land, which we could see after we had
lost sieht of the land itself
0
375
376 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
The next clay to this, we had an indifferent fresh
wind at S.S.E. We reckoned a S.W. half W. way, and
by it, that we had made twenty leagues. The day was
very fair and sunshiny, and the sea very smooth.
November 6th. We had a clear night the last past,
and the day proved very fair and clear, like the former.
We reckoned by a S.W. by W. way, about twenty-one
leagues. In the afternoon it was almost stark calm.
On the following day we had in like manner very little
wind, no more than the last twenty-four hours. We were
now about this time many of us very much troubled and
diseased with the scurvy. It proceeded as we judged, from
the great hardship and want of provisions which we had
endured for several months past, as having had only
bread and water, as was mentioned above. Only at Hilo
we killed a mule, which gave to those who would eat
of the flesh a very good meal, as we esteemed it, the
Spaniards having swept away with them all other pro-
visions of flesh. But there we had plundered some small
quantity of good chocolate, whereof the Spaniards make
infinite use. So that now we had each morning a dish
of that pleasant liquor, containing almost a pint.
Next day likewise we had very little wind, as before.
We made an observation this day, and found lat. 20° 05'
S.
November 9th we had still very little wind, and that
variable. We took almost every hour an observation,
and found ourselves to be in lat. 20" 18' S.
The loth we had in like manner but little wind, as for
so many days before. We observed an E.S.E current,
or nearest to it, to run hereabouts. This day we saw
the homing of a very high land, which we much admired,
for at this time I conceived we could not be less than
thirty-five or forty leagues distant from land. We sup-
posed it to be Mora Tarapaca. That day we set up our
shrouds.
Upon the iith an indifferent gale of wind sprang up
DEPARTURE FROM HILO. 377
at S.W by S., by which we made twenty-five leagues
and one third. We had now a great S.S.W. sea. In
the night the wind we found, came one or two points
from the land. This morning we saw the like homing of
land, whereby we were made sensible that it was no land
which we had seen the day before.
On the 1 2th we had several mists of rain, with windy
weather. We made by a S.S.W. half S. way, twenty-
five leagues and one third. We had likewise a great and
rolling S.S.W. sea, as the day before.
The 1 3th of the said month we had both cloudy and
misty weather. We made a S.S.W. and one quarter S.
way by which we ran fifty leagues.
But the next day, fair and clear weather came about
again. We had likewise an easy gale of wind, by which
we made a S.W. way, and advanced twenty-two leagues
and a half.
On November 15th, we had also clear weather, and
an indifferent gale of wind. Our way was S.W. by W.,
by which we reckoned eighteen leagues. Likewise that
our westing from Hilo, whence we had set forth, was one
hundred and fourteen leagues and one third. By obser-
vation we found lat. 23° 25'. I took now the declination-
table used and made by the cosmographer of Lima.
Tuesday, November i6th. Last night we had a
shower or two of rain. By observation, we found lat.
23° 35' s.
The 17th we made a S.W. by W. half S. way. By
observation we found lat. 23° 46' S. with very litde wind.
The 1 8th upon a S.W. by W. way, we made twenty-
one leagues. By observation we found lat. 24° 20' S.
Friday, November 19th, 1680. This morning about
an hour before day, we observed a comet to appear a de-
gree N. from the bright in Libra. The body thereof
seemed dull, and its tail extended itself eighteen or
twenty degrees in length, being of a pale colour, and
pointing direcdy N.N.W. Our prisoners hereupon re-
378 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
ported to us that the Spaniards had seen very strange
sights, both at Lima, the capital city of Peru, Guayaquil,
and other places, much about the time of our coming into
the South Seas. I reckoned this day we had run twenty
leagues by a S.W. way.
The day following the appearance of the comet, we had
many storms of wind at S.S.E. and E.S.E. Our reckon-
ing by a S.W. by W. way, was twenty-two leagues.
Sunday, November 21st, we had likewise many gusts
of wind, such as the day before, with frequent showers of
rain. The wind varied, to and fro, according as the
clouds drew it here and there. We reckoned a S.S.W.
way, and by it twenty-one leagues and a half. In all,
W. from Hilo, we judged ourselves to be one hundred
and seventy-eight leagues and two thirds. We had this
day a great S.W. Sea, and cloudy weather. I sup-
posed our latitude to be 26° 53' S.
November 22nd we had in like manner cloudy
weather, and now but little wind. We reckoned a S.
way, and fifty one leagues.
The 23rd we had very little wind, all the storm, after
the appearance of the comet, being now quite allayed.
We reckoned we had made a S.E. by E. way. By
observation, found lat. 27° 46' S.
Wednesday, November 24th. All the last twenty-four
hours we had a N.W. wind. Our way was S.E. half. S.
by which we reckoned thirty-one leagues and one third.
The 25th. Last night the wind blew at W.S.W. but
this morning it came about again at N.W. as the day be-
fore. Our reckoning this day was a S.E. and one quarter
E. way, twenty-nine leagues and one third. Lat., by
observation, 39° 57' S. Our difference of meridian 135^.
November 26th. In the night the wind started to
S.S.W., but this day at noon we had litde better than a
calm. I reckoned an E.S.E. half E. way, and by it
twenty-three leagues.
Saturday 27th. Yesterday in the evening the wind
DEPARTURE FROM HILO. 379
came to S. I reckoned an E., and something S. way,
and by that, twenty-three leagues, as the day before this.
November 28th. All the last twenty-four hours we
enjoyed a fresh wind at S.S.E. having a high S.W.
sea. Our reckoning was an E. by N. and half N. way,
and withal twenty-four leagues. By observation, lat.
30^ 16' S. and meridian distance eighty-eight leagues.
At noon the wind came at S. half E.
On the 29th we had a very great S.W. sea ; and withal
cloudy weather. My reckoning was by an E. one third
S. way, twenty leagues and one third. This day we
happened to see two or three great fowls flying in the
air, concerning which our pilot told us, that they used
to appear seventy or eighty leagues off from the island,
called Juan Fernandez. The day before this. Captain
Peralta, our prisoner, was taken very frantic, his dis-
temper being occasioned, as we thought, through too
much hardship and melancholy. Notwithstanding, this
present day he became indifferent well again.
The following day we had likewise cloudy weather.
We made, according to our account, an E. half N. way,
and by it sixteen leagues and two thirds. Our meridian
difference fifty-two leagues.
December ist. We had hazy weather, and withal an
indifferent good wind at S., yea, sometimes S. by W.
Our way was E. by S. by which we reckoned twenty-
two leagues. The night before this day, we sailed over
white water like banks, of a mile in length, or more.
But these banks, upon examination, we found to be only
great shoals of anchovies.
On December 2nd, very early in the morning, we
espied land, which appeared to be very high. About
noon this day we were six leagues distance from it.
All the preceding night we had so much wind that we
were forced to make use only of a pair of courses. By
an observation made this day, we found lat. 30° 35' S.
We went away largely, driving better than nine leagues
38o THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
every watch. With this wind we made all the sail we
possibly could, designing by this means to get into
Coquimbo, upon which coast we now were, before night.
But the wind was so high, that sometimes we were forced
to lower all our sail, it blowing now a mere fret of wind.
Towards the evening it abated by degrees, insomuch,
that at midnight it was stark calm again. At that time
we hoisted out our launch and canoes, and putting into
them one hundred men, we rowed away from the ship,
with design to take by surprisal a considerable city, situ-
ated nigh to the coast, called by the Spaniards, la
Ciudad de la Serena.
Friday, December 3rd, 1679. When we departed
from the ship, we had above two leagues, more or less, to
row to the shore. But as it happened, the launch
(wherein I was) rowed so heavily in comparison to the
canoes, that we could not keep pace with the said boats.
For this reason, and no other, it was broad day before we
got to a certain store-house, situated upon the shore ;
the which we found our men had passed by in the dark
of the night, without perceiving it. They being landed,
immediately marched away from their canoes, towards the
city aforementioned of la Serena, but they had not pro-
ceeded far on their march, when they found, to the great
sorrow and chagrin of us all, that we were discovered
here also, as we had been at the other two places before,
to wit, Arica and Hilo. For as they marched in a body
together, being but thirty-five men in all, who were all
those that were landed out of the canoes, they were sud-
denly encountered and engaged by a whole troop of an
hundred Spanish horse. We that were behind hearing
the noise of the dispute, followed them at their heels, and
made all the haste we possibly could to come up to their
relief. But before we could reach the place of battle,
they had already routed the Spaniards, and forced them
to fly away towards the town.
Notwithstanding this rout given to the horse, they
CAPTURE AND PLUNDER OF LA SERENA. 381
rallied again, at a distance of about a mile from that
place, and seemed as if they did wait for us, and would
engage us anew. But as soon as all our forces were come
together, whereof we could make but fourscore and eight
men in all, the rest being left behind to guard the boats,
we marched towards them and offered them battle. As
we came nigh to them we clearly found they designed
no such thing, for they instantly retired and rode away
before us, keeping out of the reach of our guns. We
followed them as they rode, being led by them de-
signedly clear out of the road that went to the town, that
we might not reach nor find it so soon. In this engage-
ment with the horse, our company had killed three of
their chief men, and wounded four more, kilHng also four
of their horses. When we found that we had been led
by this stratagem of the enemy out of the way of the
town, we left the bay, and crossed over the green fields
to find it ; wading oftentimes over several branches of
water, which there serve to enclose each plot of ground.
Upon this march we came to several houses, but found
them all empty, and swept clean both of inhabitants and
provisions. We saw likewise several horses and other
heads of cattle in the fields, as we went along towards the
City. This place of la Serena our pilot had reported
to us to be but a small town, but being arrived there,
we found in it no fewer than seven great churches and one
chapel belonging thereto. Four of these churches
were monasteries or convents, and each church had its
organ for the performance of divine service. Several of
the houses had their orchards of fruit, and gardens, be-
longing to them, both houses and gardens being as well
and as neatly furnished as those in England. In these
gardens we found strawberries as big as walnuts, and
very delicious to the taste. In a word, everything in this
city of la Serena, was most excellent and delicate, and far
beyond what we could expect in so remote a place. The
town was inhabited by all sorts of tradesmen, and besid'es
382 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
them, had its merchants, some of which were accounted
to be very rich.
The inhabitants of la Serena, upon our approach and
discovery, were all fled, carrying with them whatever
was most precious of their goods and jewels, or less cum-
bersome to them. Much of their valuable things they
had likewise concealed or buried, having had time since
we were first discovered, so to do. Besides, they had
had warning enough to beware of us, sent them over
land from Arica, and several other places where we had
landed or been descried at sea. Notwithstanding, we
took in the town one friar, and two Chilenos, or Span-
iards, natives of the Kingdom of Chile, which adjoins
that of Peru, towards the Straits of Magellan. These
prisoners related to us, that the Spaniards, when they
heard of our coming, had killed most of the Chilian
slaves, fearing lest they should run or revolt from them
to us. Moreover, that we had been descried from their
coasts four days before our arrival, or descent upon
land ; all which time they had employed in carrying
away their plate and goods. To this information they
added, that for their defence they had received a supply
of sixty men from Arica. Having taken possession of
the town, that evening there came a Negro to us, run-
ning away from the Spaniards. He likewise informed
us, that when we were before Panama, we had taken a
Negro, who was esteemed to be the best pilot in all the
South Sea, but more especially for this place and all the
coasts of Coquimbo. Moreover, that if the Spaniards
had not sent all the Negroes belonging to this city
farther up into the country, out of our reach and com-
munication, they would all undoubtedly have revolted
to us.
That night about midnight our boatswain, accompanied
by forty men, and having a Chilian for their guide, went
out of the town some miles within the country, with
design to find out the places where the Spaniards lay con-
383
COQUJMBO. 385
cealed, and had hid their goods and plate. But before
they came, the Spaniards had received intelligence thereof
from some secret spies they had in the town, and both
the men and their women were all fled to places that were
more occult and remote. So that by this search, they
only found an old Indian woman and three children, but
no gold nor plate, nor yet any other prisoners. This
morning our ship came to an anchor, by the store-house
above-mentioned, named Tortuga, at the distance of a
furlong from shore, in seven fathom water. While we
were quartered in the town, I took this following ground-
plate thereof.
The next morning, being Saturday, December 4th,
there came into the town a flag of truce from the enemy.
Their message was to proffer a ransom for the town to
preserve ft from burning ; for now they began to fear we
would set fire to it, as having found no considerable
booty or pillage therein. The captains, or chief com-
manders of both sides, met about this point, and agreed
betwixt them for the sum of 95,000 pieces of eight to be
the price of the whole ransom. In the afternoon of this
day, I was sent down to the bay of Coquimbo, with a
party of twenty men, to carry thither both goods taken in
the town, and provisions for the ship. It is two leagues
and a half from the town to the port ; one league on
the bay, the rest being a very great road, which leads
from the bay to the city. The Spaniards promised
that the ransom should be collected and paid in by the
next day. This day also there died one of our Negro
slaves on board the ship.
The following day in the morning, I returned back to
the town, with the men I had brought down the day
before. Only six of them I left behind, to look after our
canoes at the end of the bay. When I came up into the
city, I found that the Spaniards had broken their
promise, and had not brought in the ransom they had
agreed for ; but had begged more time until to-morrow
VOL. II. c c
386 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
at eight in the forenoon. This evening another party of
our men went down to the ship, to carry goods, such
as we had pillaged in the town. Moreover, that night
about nine o'clock, happened an earthquake, which we
were very sensible of, as we were all together in the
church of San Juan, where our chief rendezvous and
Corps du Garde was kept. In the night the Spaniards
opened a sluice, and let the water run in streams about
the town, with intent either to overflow it, and thereby
force us out of the place, or at least that they might the
easier quench the flame, in case we should fire the town.
On the next morning we set fire to the town, perceiv-
ing it to be overflowed, and that the Spaniards had not
performed, or rather that they never designed to perform
their promise. We fired, as nigh as we could, every house
in the whole town, to the intent it might be totally
reduced to ashes. Thus we departed from la Serena,
carrying with us what plunder we could find, having sent
two parties before, loaded with goods to the ship, as
was mentioned above. As we marched down to the
bay, we beat up an ambuscade of two hundred and fifty
horse, which lay by the way in private, with an intent to
fall on our men, in case we had sent down any other party
again with goods to the ship. When we came to the
sea-side, being half way to our ship, we received advice
that the Spaniards had endeavoured, by an unusual
stratagem, to burn our ship, and by these means destroy
us all. They acted thus : They blew up a horse's hide
like a bladder, and upon this float a man ventured to
swim from shore, and come under the stern of our ship.
Being arrived there, he crammed oakum and brimstone,
and other combustible matter, between the rudder and the
stern-post. Having done this, he fired it with a match,
so that in a small time, our rudder was on fire, and all
the ship in a smoke. Our men both alarmed and amazed
with this smoke, ran up and down the ship, suspecting the
prisoners to have fired the vessel, thereby to get their
RELEASE OF PRISONERS. 387
liberty and seek our destruction. At last they found out
where the fire was, and had the good fortune to quench
it before its going too far. As soon as they had put it
out, they sent the boat ashore, and found both the hide
afore-mentioned, and the match burning at both ends,
whereby they became acquainted with the whole matter.
When we came to the store-house on the shore-side, we
set at liberty the friar, our prisoner, and another gentle-
man who was become our hostage for the perform^ance
of the ransom. Moreover, when we came aboard, we
sent away and set at liberty Captain Peralta, Don Thomas
de Argandona, Don Baltazar, Don Christoval, Captain
Juan, the Pilot's Mate, the old Moor, and several others
of our chief prisoners. To this release of our prisoners
we were moved, partly because we knew not well what
to do with them, and partly because we feared lest by the
example of this stratagem, they should plot our destruc-
tion in earnest, and by the help of so many men, especi-
ally persons of quality, be able to go through with it.
CHAPTER XV.
The Buccmieers depart from Coquimbo for the Isle of fuan
Fernandez. An exact account of this voyage. Misery they
endnre, and great dafigers they escape very narrowly there.
They mutiny amotig themselves, and choose Watling to be
their chief commafider. Description of the island. Three
Spanish men-of-war meet with the buccaneers, at the said
island ; but these outbrave them on the one side, and give
them the slip on the other.
Being all embarked again, as was mentioned in the
preceding chapter, the next morning, which was Tues-
day, December 7th, twenty of us were sent ashore to
observe the motion of the enemy. We went to the
look-out, or watch-hill, but could learn nothing thence.
Hereupon about noon we returned on board the ship,
and at two in the afternoon we weighed anchor and set
sail, directing our course for the Isle of Juan Fernandez,
not far distant from the coast of Coquimbo. At night
we were five leagues distant thence at N.W. by N.
The southermost island of those which are called De los
Paxaros, or the Islands of Birds, was then N.N.W. from
us. Before our departure, I took this draft of the bay
of Coquimo and city of La Serena.
December 8th we had but very little wind and a lee-
ward current here, which we perceived did heave us to the
Northward. The afore-mentioned island, de los Paxaros,
at three in the afternoon, bore N.E. of us. At the dis-
ss*
389
DEPARTURE FROM COQUIMBO. 391
tance of three leagues, more or less, it appeared thus : —
Isle de los PAX AR OS.
It is distant from the main continent four leagues, and
from the next island of the same name, about two. The
mainland is extremely high and mountainous hereabouts.
At evening we were west from the said island five
leagues. About eight or nine leagues to windward of
Coquimbo are certain white cliffs, which appear from the
shore to those that are off at sea.
On December 9th, we had likewise but little wind,
as the day before. I supposed myself this day to be
about thirteen leagues W. from the island above-men-
tioned. The weather was cloudy, with mizzling rain,
so that no observation could be taken. However, this
day it was thought convenient to put us to an allowance
of water ; for we had taken in little or none at Coquimbo.
The same weather, or very like it, we had the next day,
being the tenth ; that is to say, stark calm and cloudy.
On December iith, we had some small rain in the
forepart of the day. But in the afternoon it cleared up,
so that the weather was very hot. We had still but
little wind.
The next day, December 12th, we had very fair
weather, and by a clear observation made this day, we
found lat. 30° 06' S.
December 13th. By a W.S.W. way, we made forty-
two leagues. By observation we found lat. 30° 45' S.
D.M. four leagues and two thirds.
392 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
On the 14th in the morning, we had a handsome
shower of rain, which continued for some while. Then,
about eight o'clock, there sprang up a S.S.W. breeze.
My reckoning was by an E.S.E. way, fourteen leagues.
And by observation, we found this day ^,0° 30' S.
In the afternoon of this day, died one of our men,
whose name was William Cammock. His disease was
occasioned by a surfeit, gained by too much drinking on
shore at La Serena ; which produced in him a calenture,
or malignant fever and a hiccough. Thus in the evening
we buried him in the sea, according to the usual custom of
mariners, giving him three French vollies for his funeral.
The following day, we had an indifferent fresh wind
on both tacks. Our way was W.S.W., and by it we
reckoned thirty-four leagues. So likewise by an observa-
tion we had lat. 2)^^° 42' S. All the afternoon blew a S.
by W. wind very fresh, with a short topping S.W. sea.
But on the next ensuing day, we had no small breeze,
but rather hard gusts of wind. These grew so high, that
they forced us to take in our top-sails. We made a S.W.
half S. way, and forty-five leagues.
On the 1 7th we had likewise high winds, and withal
a S.W. sea. Our way W. by S. By observation this
day, lat. 30° 51' S. In the afternoon we had a S.S.E.
wind, our course being S.W.
December i8th. This day we had the same high
winds as before, at S.S.E. We reckoned by a W.S.W.
way forty-five leagues. At noon the wind was somewhat
fallen, and then we had some rain.
The 19th we had both cloudy and windy weather. My
reckoning was a S.W. by S. way, and hereupon fifty-
eight miles. Yesterday we were assured by our pilot
that we were now in the meridian of the island of Juan
Fernandez, whither our course was directed for the pre-
sent. What occasioned him to be so positive in his
assertion, was the seeing of those great birds, of which
we made mention in the foregoing chapter.
THE ISLAND OF JUAN FERNANDEZ. 393
On the 20th, we had cloudy weather in the morning
on both tacks. We made a S.W. and half S. way, and
by it fifty-two leagues. By observation this day, lat.
32° 20' S. D.M. one hundred and twenty-three leagues.
The next day likewise we had cloudy weather ; yet by
observation we found a W. way. On the 22nd by obser-
vation we found an E. way proved.
Thursday, December 23rd. All the night past we
had a fresh wind. But in the morning, from top-mast
head, we descried a hummock of land. In the evening
we saw it again. We found afterwards that what we
had seen was the westernmost island of Juan Fernandez ;
which is nothing but a mere rock, there being no riding,
nor scarce landing, near to it.
Friday, December 24th. This morning we could
descry the island of Juan Fernandez itself S. by E., it
being at sixteen leagues distance when we saw it yester-
day. At seven this morning the island stood E., the
wind being N.W. or by N. At eight the same morning
the island, at the distance of five leagues, little more or
less, appeared thus :
Isle de JUA N FERNANDEZ.
Here my observation was that I could see neither fowl
nor fish near this island ; both which things are usually
to be seen about other islands. Having told my obser-
vation to our pilot, he gave me for answer, that he had
made many voyages by this island, and yet never saw
either fowl or fish any more than I. Our reckoning this
394 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
day was an E.S.E. way, and hereby thirty-six leagues.
By observation, lat. 'XiZ 3^' S.
Saturday, December 25th. Yesterday in the after-
noon, at three o'clock, we saw the other island, making
two or three hummocks of land. This morning we
were about eight leagues distant from it, the island
bearing E.S.E. from us. At eight the same morning
we were right abreast with it. Here therefore are two
islands together, the biggest whereof is three leagues and
a half in length, nearest N.W. and S.E., the other, and
lesser, is almost one league, and no more in circumfer-
ence. At ten o'clock we sent off from the ship one of our
canoes, to seek for the best landing and anchoring for
our vessel. As we approached, both islands seemed to
us nothing but one entire heap of rocks. That which
lies more to the N. is the highest, though we could not
now see the tops thereof, for the clouds which covered
it. In most places it is so steep that it becomes almost
perpendicular.
This day being Christmas-day, we gave in the morn-
ing early three vollies of shot for solemnization of that
great festival. I reckoned an E. by S. way. By a clear
observation from the middle of the island, lat. ■^'^° 45' S.,
and M.D. ninety-nine leagues. In the evening of this
day, we came to an anchor at the south end of the
island, in a stately bay that we found there, but which
lies open from the S, to the S.E. winds. We anchored
in eleven fathom water, and at the distance of only one
furlong from the shore. Here we saw multitudes of seals
covering the bay everywhere, insomuch that we were
forced to kill them to set our feet on shore.
Sunday, December 26th. This day we sent a canoe
to see if we could find any riding secure from the
southerly winds ; these being the most constant winds
that blow on these coasts. The canoe being gone, our
commander sent likewise what men we could spare on
shore, to drive goats, whereof there is great plenty in this
A TEMPEST. 395.
island. They caught and killed that day to the number
of threescore, or thereabouts. The canoe returning to
the ship made report that there was good riding in
another bay, situate on the North side of the island, in
fourteen fathom water, and not above one quarter of a
mile from the shore. Moreover that there was much
wood to be had, whereas in the place where we had first
anchored, not one stick of wood nor tuft of grass was to
be found.
The next day, being the 27th, between two and four
o'clock in the morning, we had a tempest of violent winds
and fierce showers of rain. The same clay we got in two
hundred jars of water, bringing them the full distance of
a league from the place of our riding. In the meanwhile,
others were employed to catch goats, as they had done
the day before.
On the 28th of the said month, in the morning, I went
with ten more of our company and two canoes, to fetch
water from the land. Being come thither, and having
filled our jars, we could not get back to the ship, by
reason of a southerly wind that blew from off the ocean,
and hindered our return. Thus we were forced to lie
still in a water-hole, and wait till the winds were over for
a safer opportunity. Meanwhile, the violence of the
wind increasing, our ship was forced to get under sail,
and make away, not without danger of being forced
ashore. Hereupon she sailed out of the harbour, to seek
another place of anchoring. At noon I ventured out, to
try if I could follow the ship, but was forced in again by
the wind and a raging sea. Thus we lay still for some
while longer, till the evening came on. This being come,
we ventured out again both canoes together ; but the
winds were then so high, that we were forced to throw
all our jars of water overboard to lighten our boats,
otherwise we had inevitably perished. I ought to bless
and praise God Almighty for this deliverance ; for in all
human reason, the least wave of that tempest must have
396 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
sunk US. Notwithstanding, we came that night to our
place or harbour, where we expected to have found our
ship (called False Wild Harbour) but found her not.
Hereupon, not knowing what to do, we went ashore, and
hauled up our canoes dry. Having done this, we as-
cended higher within the island, along a gulley, for the
space of half a mile, there to clear ourselves of the noise
and company of the seals, which were very trouble-
some on the shore. Here we kindled a fire, dried our
clothes, and rested ourselves all night, though with ex-
tremely hungry bellies, having eaten very little or nothing
all the day before. In the sides of the hill, under which
we lay, we observed many holes like coney-holes. These
holes are the nests and roosting-places of multitudes of
birds that breed in this island, called by the Spaniards
Pardelas. One of these birds, as we lay drying and
warming ourselves, fell down into our fire.
The next morning being come, very early before sun-
rise, we went farther to the northward, to seek for our
ship, which we feared we had lost. But we were not
gone far, when we soon spied her at sea. Hereupon
we passed a point of land, and entered a certain bay,
which was about a mile deep, and not above half a league
over. Into this bay we put, and instantly made a fire,
thereby to show the ship whereabouts we were. Here
we found good watering' and wooding close to the shore.
In this bay also we saw another sort of amphibious
animal, which I imagined to be the same that by some
authors is called a Sea^Lion.^ These animals are six
times bigger than seals. _JTheLr_Jieads are like that of a
lion, and they have four fins not unlike a tortoise. The
hinder parts of these creatures are much like fins, but
are drawn after them, being useless upon the shore.
They roared as if they had been lions, and were full of a
certain short and thick hair, which was of a mouse
colour ; but that of the young ones was somewhat lighter.
^ Or walrus.
WALRUSES. SEALS. y)7
The old ones of these sea-Hons are between twelve and
fourteen feet long, and about eleven or twelve feet in
circumference. A seal is very easily killed, as we often
experimented, but two of our men with great stones
could not kill one of these animals.
That day in the afternoon there came a canoe from on
board the ship with provisions for us, they fearing lest
we should be starved. In like manner the launch came
with men to cut wood. They told us that the ship came
to an anchor in the other bay, but that within half an
hour the cable broke, and they were forced to leave their
anchor behind them and get out to sea again. Night
being come, we made our beds of fern, whereof there
is huge plenty upon this island ; together with great
multitudes of trees like our English box, which bear a
sort of green berries, smelling like pimento, or pepper.
All this day the ship was forced to ply off at sea, not
being able to get in.
December 30th. The morning of this day we em-
ployed in filling water and cutting down wood. But in
the afternoon, eight of us eleven went aboard the ship,
all in one and the same canoe, sending her ashore again
with provisions for the men that were there. This day
in like manner we could not get into the harbour, for no
sooner the ship came within the parts of land but the
wind, coming out of the bay, blew us clear out again.
Thus we were forced to ply out all that night and great
part of the following day.
On the next day, having overcome all difficulties and
many dangers, we came to an anchor in the afternoon, in
fifteen fathom water, at the distance of a cable's length
from shore. Here it was observable that we were forced
to keep men ashore on purpose to beat off the seals, while
our men filled water at the sea-side, at high-water mark,
for the seals covet hugely to lie in fresh water. About
this island fish is so plentiful that, in less than one hour's
time, two men caught enough for our whole company.
398 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Saturday, January ist, 1681. This day we put up a
new main-top, larger than the old one, and we caught
cray-fish that were bigger than our English lobsters.
The next day, being January 2nd, died a chief man of
our company, whose name was John Milliard. This
man, until our weighing anchor from the port of Coquim-
bo, had been our Master all the space of this voyage. But
from that time we chose John Cox for the starboard, and
John Fall for the larboard watch. The disease whereof
he died was the dropsy. That evening we buried our
dead companion, and gave him a volley for his funeral,
according to the usual custom.
On January 3rd we had terrible gusts of wind from
the shore every hour. This day our pilot told us that
many years ago a certain ship was cast away upon this
island, and only one man saved, who lived alone upon
the island five years before any ship came this way to
carry him off. The island has excellent land in many
valleys belonging thereunto. This day likewise we
fetched our anchor which we left in the other bay when
the ship broke her cable.
Tuesday, January 4th, 1681. This day we had such
terrible flaws of wind, that the cable of our ship broke,
and we had undoubtedly been on shore had not the
other held us fast. At last it came home and we drove
outward. By the way it caught hold of a rock, and
held some time, but at last we hauled it up, and the
wind came with so much violence that the waves flew
as high as our main-top, and made all the water of a
foam.
January 5th, the same huge gusts of wind continued
all the night last past, notwithstanding which this day at
noon it was brave and calm. But in the morning the
anchor of our ship gave way again, and we drove to the
eastward more than half a mile ; till at last we happened
to fasten again in sixty fathom water. Here in this bay,
where we rode at anchor, did run a violent current,
MUTINY AMONG THE BUCCANEERS. 399
sometimes into and at other times out of the bay, so that
all was uncertain with us. But our greatest discomfort
was, that our men were all in a mutiny against each other,
and much divided among themselves, some of them
being for going home towards England, or our foreign
plantations, and that round about America through the
Straits of Magellan, as Captain Sawkins had designed
to do ; others of them being for staying longer, and
searching farther into those seas, till such time as they
had got more money. This day at noon our anchor
drove again ; whereupon to secure ourselves from that
dangerous place, we sailed thence into the West bay,
anchored there in twenty-five fathom water ; and moored
our ship one quarter of a mile from shore.
On Thursday, January 6th, our differences being now-
grown to a great height, the mutineers made a new
election of another person to be our chief captain and
commander, by virtue whereof they deposed Captain
Sharp, whom they protested they would obey no longer.
They chose therefore one of our company, whose name
was John Watling, to command in chief, he having been
an old privateer, and gained the esteem of being a stout
seaman. The election being made, all the rest were
forced to give their assent to it, and Captain Sharp gave
over his command, whereupon they immediately made
articles with Watling, and signed them.
The following day, being the 7th, we burnt and tal-
lowed the starboard side of our ship. In this bay where
we now anchored, we found a cross cut in the bark of a
tree, and several letters besides. Hereupon, in another
tree up the gulley, I engraved the two first letters of my
name, with a cross over them. This day likewise William
Cook, servant to Captain Edmund Cook, being searched,
we found a paper with all our names written in it, which
it was suspected he designed to have given to the Spanish
prisoners. For these reasons this evening our Captain
thought it convenient to put him in irons, which was
400 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
accordingly done. The next day we finished the other
side of our ship.
Sunday, January 9th. This day was the first Sunday
that ever we kept by command and conimon consent,
since the loss and death of our valiant commander, Cap-
tain Sawkins. This generous-spirited man threw the
dice overboard, finding them in use on the said day,
January loth. This day the weather was very clear
and settled again. We caught every day in the bay
where we now were great plenty of fish ; and I saw the
same day a shoal of fish a mile and more long.
On the next day, being the iith, we filled our water
and carried our wood on board the ship. Moreover, our
two canoes went to the other side of the island to catch
goats, for on the barren side thereof are found and caught
the best ; and by land it is impossible to go from one side
of the island to the other.
Wednesday, January 12th. This morning our canoes
returned from catching goats, firing guns as they came
towards us to give us warning. Being come on board,
they told us they had espied three sail of ships, which
they conceived to be men-of-war, coming about the
island. Within half an hour after this notice given by
our boats, the ships came in sight to leeward of the
island. Hereupon we immediately slipped our cables
and put to sea, taking all our men on board that were
ashore at that time. Only one, William, a Mosquito
Indian, was then left behind on the island, because he
could not be found at this our sudden departure.^ Upon
the Island of Juan Fernandez grow certain trees that are
called by the name of bilby-trees. The tops of these
trees are excellent cabbage, and of them is made the
same use that we do of cabbage in England. Here fish
abound in such quantity, that on the surface of the water
^ From this statement and the subsequent remark of the Spanish
pilot it is clear that Alexander Selkirk was not the first nor the only
solitary who had inhabited this Island.
SPANISH MEN-OF-WAR. 401
I have taken fish with a bare and naked hook, that is to
say unbaited. Much fish is taken here of the weight of
twenty pounds ; the smallest that is taken in the bay
being almost two pound weight. Very good timber for
building of houses and other uses is likewise found upon
the island. It is distant from the main continent ninety-
five leagues, or thereabouts, being situate in ■x^'^" 40' S.
The plats of the island lie N.W. and S.E.
Being got out of the bay we stood off to sea, and kept
to windward as close as we could. The biggest of these
Spanish men-of-war, for such they proved to be, was of
the burden of eight hundred tons, and was called El
Santo Christo, being mounted with twelve guns. The
second, named San Francisco, was of the port of six
hundred tons, and had ten guns. The third was of the
carriage of three hundred and fifty tons, whose name I
have forgot. As soon as they saw us, they instantly put
out their bloody flags, and we, to show them that we
were not as yet daunted, did the same with ours. We
kept close under the wind, and were, to confess the
truth, very unwilling to fight them, by reason they kept
all in a knot together, and we could not single out any
one of them, or separate him from the rest. Especially
considering that our present commander Watling had
showed himself at their appearance to be faint-hearted.
As for the Spaniards themselves, they might have easily
come to us, since we lay by several times ; but un-
doubtedly they were cowardly given, and peradventure
as unwilling to engage us as we were to engage them.
The following day, being January 13th, in the morn-
ing we could descry one of the fore-mentioned men-of-
war under the leeward side of the island ; and we be-
lieved that the rest were at anchor thereabouts. At W.
by S. and at the distance of seven leagues the island
appeared thus :
VOL. II. D D
402 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Isle of JUAN FERNANDEZ. Lat. 33° 40 S.
At noon that day we stood towards the island, making
as if that we intended to be in with them. But in the
afternoon our commander propounded the question to
us, whether we were wilHng now that the fleet was to
windward, to bear away from them ? To this we all
agreed with one consent. And hereupon, night being
come, with a fresh wind at S.S.E. we stood away N.E.
by N., and thus gave them handsomely the slip, after
having outbraved them that day and the day before.
CHAPTER XVI.
The Buccaneers depart from the Isle of Juan Fernandez to that of
Iqiiiqne. Here they take several prisoners, and learn intelli-
gence of the posture of affairs at Arica. Cruelty committed
upon one of the said prisoners, zvho had rightly informed
them. They attempt Arica the second time, and take the
town, but are beaten 02U of it again before they could plunder,
zuith great loss of men, many of them being killed, ivounded,
and made prisoners. Captain Watling, their chief Comman-
der, is killed in this attack, and Captain Sharp presently
chosen again, ivho leads them off, and through mountains oj
difficulties, makes a bold retreat to the ship.
Having bid our enemies adieu, after the manner as was
said in the precedent chapter, the next morning, being
January 14th, we bore N.E. We reckoned this day a
N.N.E. one quarter S. way, and by it thirty leagues.
404 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
We \vere four leagues E. from the Island of Juan
Fernandez, when I took our departure.
Saturday, January 15th, we had hazy weather. This
day we made by a N.E. by N. way eleven leagues. The
same hazy weather continued in like manner the i6th.
But about ten that morning the wind died away. Our
reckoning was a N.E. by N. way, and thirty-six leagues.
On the 1 7th we had a soft gale, and a clear observation.
We found by it lat. 28' 47' S. easting seventy leagues.
The next day we had likewise a clear day, and we
reckoned by a N.E. by N. way, thirty-one leagues. By
observation lat. 27° 29' S.
Wednesday, January 19th, we had a clear day, as be-
fore, and reckoned a N.E. by N. way, and thirty-five
leagues and two thirds. By observation we took lat. 25^"
00' S. This day we put up our top-gallant masts and
sails, which we had taken down at the island of Juan
Fernandez, when we thought to have gone directly thence
for the Straits of Magellan. But now our resolutions
were changed, and our course was bent for Arica, that
rich place, the second time, to try what good we could do
upon it by another attempt, in order to make all our for-
tunes there. In the evening of this day we saw land at a
great distance.
January 20th, about midnight, we had a small land-
wind that sprang up and reached us. At break of day
we could descry land again, at the distance of nine or ten
leagues, more or less. This day was very hot and calm,
easting ninety-two leagues.
On the 2ist, we had very little wind, and all along as
we went we could descry high land, and that barren.
We sailed N. by E, and N.N.E. along the coast of the
continent.
The next day being Saturday, January 22nd, we had
very hot weather. This day we sailed N. and N. by
E. and looked out continually for the island of Iquique,
which our pilot told us was hereabouts. We kept at a
THE ISLAND OF I QUI QUE. 405
just distance from land, for fear of being descried by the
enemy.
On the following day, Sunday, 23rd, we sailed in
like manner N.N.E. along the coast, which seems to be
very full of bays hereabouts. By observation this day
we took lat. 21° 49' S.
Monday, January 24th. This day we had an indiffer-
ent gale of wind, and we stood N. and by E. the wind
being S.S.E. By observation, lat. 2i°02' S. Our whole
easting, I reckoned to be ninety-two leagues and a half.
In the afternoon of this day Captain Watling, our com-
mander, and twenty-five men more departed from the
ship in two canoes, with design to seek for and take the
island of Iquique, and there to gain intelligence of the
posture of affairs at Arica. We were at the distance of
twelve leagues from shore, when they went away from
the ship.
The next day by a clear observation, lat. 20^ 40' S.
At four in the afternoon this day, one of our canoes
returned, bringing word that they could not find the
island, though they had searched for it very diligently.
At night came the other, being brought back by a wrong
sign given us by the first canoe. This second canoe had
landed upon the continent, and there found a track,
which they followed for some little space. Here they met
a dead whale, with whose bones the Spaniards had built
a hut, and set up a cross. There lay also many pieces of
broken jars. They observed likewise that hereabouts
upon the coast were many bays, good landings, and
anchoring for ships. That evening, about seven o'clock,
a fresh gang departed from the ship to seek for the same
island, while we lay becalmed all night, driving about a
league to leeward.
Wednesday, January 26th, we had extremely hot
weather. This day the Spanish pilot told us that on the
continent over against us, and at the distance of a very
little way within the land, are many rich mines of silver.
4o6 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
but that the Spaniards dared not open them for fear of
an invasion from some foreign enemy or other. We
sailed N., at the distance of about two leagues from
shore. At noon by observation, found lat. 20° 2\' S.
At four o'clock we saw a smoke made by our men, close
by a white cliff, which proved to be the island. Here-
upon we immediately sent away another canoe with
more men, to supply them in their attempts. But in the
meanwhile the first canoe, which had departed the even-
ing before this day, came aboard, bringing with them four
prisoners, two old white men and two Indians.
The other canoe, which set out last, brought back
molasses, fish, and two jars of wine. To windward of
the said island is a small village of eighteen or twenty
houses, having a small chapel near it, built of stone, and
for adornment thereof, it is stuck full of hides or the skins
of seals. They found about fifty people in this hamlet,
but the greatest part of them made their escape at the
arrival of the canoe. To this island frequently come
barks from Arica, which city is not far distant, to fetch
clay, and they have already transported away a consider-
able part thereof The poor Indians, inhabitants or
natives of this island, are forced to bring all the fresh
water they use the full distance of eleven leagues, that is
to say, from a river, named Camarones, which lies to
leeward of the island. The barque wherein they used to
bring it, was gone for water when our men landed upon
the place. The island all over is white, but the bowels
thereof are of a reddish sort of earth. From the shore
is seen here a great path which leads over the mountains
into the country. The Indians of this island eat much
and often a sort of leaves that are of a taste much like
our bay-leaves in England, insomuch that their teeth are
dyed a green colour by the continual use of it.^ The
1 This is no doubt the famous coca or cuca, erythroxylon coca (the
betel of South America), and universally in request by the Indian popu-
lation of the West Coast of South America. It is a shrub which grows
MURDER OF AN OLD MESTIZO INDIAN. 407
inhabitants go stark naked, and are very robust and
strong people ; yet notwithstanding they Hv^e more like
beasts than men,
Thursday, January 27th. This morning on board the
ship we examined one of the old men, who were taken
prisoners upon the island the day before. But finding
him in many lies, as we thought, concerning Arica, our
commander ordered him to be shot to death, which was
accordingly done. Our old commander, Captain Sharp,
was much troubled in his mind and dissatisfied at this
cruel and rash proceeding ; whereupon he opposed it as
much as he could. But seeing he could not prevail, he
took water and washed his hands, saying, " Gentlemen, I
am clear of the blood of this old man ; and I will war-
rant you a hot day for this piece of cruelty, whenever we
come to fight at Arica." These words were found at the
latter end of this expedition of Arica to contain a true
and certain prophesy, as shall be related hereafter.
The other old man being under examination, informed
us that the island of Iquique afore-mentioned belonged to
the Governor of Arica, who was proprietor thereof ; and
that he allowed these men a little wine and other neces-
saries, to live upon for their sustenance. That he himself
had the superintendence of forty or fifty of the governor's
slaves, who caught fish and dried it, for the profit of the
said governor ; and he sold it afterwards to the inland
towns, and reaped a considerable benefit thereby. That
by a letter received from Arica eight days ago, they un-
derstood there was then in the harbour of Arica three
ships from Chile, and one bark. That they had raised
there a fortification mounted with twelve copper guns.
But that when we were there before, they had conveyed
to the height of six or eight feet. The leaves stripped of their stallcs^
with the addition of a httle unslaked lime (or of the ashes of the quinoa
plant, chenopodium quinoa) are chewed like betel. It has a warm
pungent taste, is a powerful nervous stimulant, and is also said to be a
remedy for rheumatic affections. From the plant is also obtained the
alkaloid cocaine well known in modern medicine.
4o8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
out of the town to the neighbouring stations all their
plate, gold and jewels, burying it there in the ground and
concealing it after several manners and ways, which
whether it were now returned or not, he could not easily
tell. That there were two great places, the one at ten,
the other at twenty-five leagues distance from Arica, at
which towns lay all their strength and treasure. That
the day before had passed a post to declare our having
been at Coquimbo. That the embargo laid on all vessels
going northward was now taken off; so that a free pas-
sage was allowed them. That by land it was impossible
to go hence to Arica in less than four or five days, foras-
much as they must carry water for themselves and horses
for the whole journey. And lastly, that those arms that
were brought from Lima to Arica, as was mentioned
above, were now carried away to Buenos Ayres. All
these things pleased us mighty well to hear. But, how-
ever, Captain Sharp was still much dissatisfied, because
we had shot the old man. For he had given us informa-
tion to the full, and with all manner of truth, how that
Arica was greatly fortified, and much more than before ;
but our misfortune was that we took his information to be
all contrary to the truth.
The leaves of which we made mention above are
brought down to this island in whole bales, and then dis-
tributed to the Indians by a short allowance given to each
man. This day we had very hot weather, and a S.W.
sea. By observation we found lat. 20° 13' S. Besides
the things above-mentioned, our prisoners informed us
that at Arica the Spaniards had built a breastwork round
about the town, and one also in every street, that in case
one end of the town were taken, they might be able to
defend the other. We stood off and on for the greatest
part of this day. In the afternoon we were eight leagues
and a half distant from shore, with a fresh wind. That
morning, moreover, we took the bark that was at the
river of Camarones, to fill water for the island.
ATTACK ON A RICA. 409
Friday, January 28th. Last night about midnight we
left the ship, and embarked ourselves in the bark afore-
mentioned, the launch, and four canoes, with design to
take Arica by surprise. We rowed and sailed all night,
making in for the shore.
Saturday, January 29th. About break of day we got
under shore, and there hid ourselves among the rocks for
all the day long, fearing lest we should be descried by the
enemy, before we came to Arica. At this time we were
about five leagues to southward of Arica, near Ouebrada
de San Vitor, a place so-called upon that coast. Night
being come, we rowed away from there.
Sunday, January 30th, 1680. This day (being the day
that is consecrated in our English Calendar, to the
Martyrdom of our glorious King Charles the First) in
the morning about sun-rise, we landed amongst some
rocks at some distance of four miles, more or less, to the
southward from Arica. We put on shore ninety-two
men in all, the rest remaining in the boats, to keep and
defend them from being surprised by the enemy, with the
intent we might leave behind us a safe retreat, in case of
necessity. To these men we left strict orders, that if we
made one smoke from the town, or adjoining fields, they
should come after us towards the harbour of Arica with
one canoe ; but in case we made two, that they should
bring all away, leaving only fifteen men in the boats.
As we marched from our landing-place towards the town,
we mounted a very steep hill, and saw thence no men nor
forces of the enemy ; which caused us to hope we were
not as yet descried, and that we should utterly surprise
them. But when we were come about half of the way to
the town, we spied three horsemen, who mounted the
look-out hill ; and seeing us upon our march, they rode
down full speed towards the city, to give notice of our
approach. Our commander Wading chose out forty of
our number, to attack the fort, and sent us away first
thitherwards, the rest being designed for the town. We
4IO THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
that were appointed for the fort had ten hand grenades
among us when we gave the assault, and with them, as
well as with our other arms, we attacked the castle, and
exchanged several shot with our enemies. But at last,
seeing our main body in danger of being overborne with
the number of our enemies, we gave over that attempt
on the fort, and ran down in all haste to the valley, to
help and assist them in the fight. Here the battle was
very desperate, and they killed three, and wounded two
more of our men from their out-works, before we could
gain upon them. But our rage increasing with our
wounds, we still advanced, and at last beat the enemy out
of all, and filled every street in the city with dead bodies.
The enemy made several retreats to several places, from
one breastwork to another ; and we had not a sufficient
number of men wherewith to man all places taken. In-
somuch, that we had no sooner beat them out of one
place, than they came another way, and manned it again
with new forces and fresh men.
We took in every place where we vanquished the
enemy, great number of prisoners, more indeed than per-
adventure we ought to have done or knew well what to
do with ; they being too many for such a small body as
ours was to manage. These prisoners informed us that
w^e had been descried no less than three days before, from
the island of Iquique, whereby they were in expectation
of our arrival every hour, knowing we still had a design
to make a second attempt upon that place. That into the
city were come four hundred soldiers from Lima, who,
besides their own, had brought seven hundred arms for
the use of the country-people ; and that in the town they
had six hundred armed men, and in the fort three
hundred.
Being now in possession of the city, or the greatest
part thereof, we sent to the fort, commanding them to
surrender, but they would not vouchsafe to send us any
answer. Hereupon we advanced towards it, and gave
DEFEAT AND HEAVY LOSS OF THE BUCCANEERS. 411
it a second attack, wherein we persisted very vigorously
for a long time. Not being able to carry it, we got
upon the top of a house that stood near it, and from
there fired down into the fort, killing many of their men
and wounding them at our ease and pleasure. But while
we were busied in this attack, the rest of the enemy's
forces had taken again several posts of the town, and be-
gan to surround us in great numbers, with design to cut
us off. Hereupon we were constrained to desist the
second time as before, from assaulting the fort, and
make head against them. This we no sooner had done
than, their numbers and vigour increasing every moment,
we found ourselves to be overpowered, and consequently
we thought it convenient to retreat to the place where
our wounded men were, under the hands of our surgeons,
that is to say, our Hospital. At this time our new com-
mander, Captain Watling, both our quartermasters and a
great many others of our men were killed, besides those
that were wounded and disabled. So that now the enemy
rallying against us and beating us from place to place, we
were in a very distracted condition, and in more likeli-
hood to perish every man than escape the bloodiness of
that day. Now we found the words of Captain Sharp to
bear a tjue prophesy, being all very sensible that we had
had a day too hot for us, after that cruel heat in killing and
murdering in cold blood the old Mestizo Indian whom we
had taken prisoner at Iquique, as before was mentioned.
Being surrounded with difficulties on all sides, and in
great disorder, having no head or leader to give orders
for what was to be done, we were glad to turn our eyes
to our good and old commander. Captain Bartholomew
Sharp, and beg of him very earnestly to commiserate
our condition and carry us off It was a great while
that we were reiterating our supplications to him, before
he would take any notice of our request in this point, so
much was he displeased with the former mutiny of our
people against him, all which had been occasioned by the
412 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
instigation of Mr. Cook. But Sharp is a man of an un-
daunted courage, and of an excellent conduct, not fearing
in the least to look an insulting enemy in the face, and a
person that knows both the theory and practical parts of
navigation as well as most do. Hereupon, at our request
and earnest petition, he took upon him the command-in-
chief again, and began to distribute his orders for our
safety. He would have brought off our surgeons, but
that they had been drinking while we assaulted the fort,
and thus would not come with us when they were called.
They killed and took of our number twenty-eight men ;
eighteen more that we brought off w^ere desperately
wounded. At this time we were extremely faint for
want of water and victuals, whereof we had had none
all that day. Moreover, we were almost choked with the
dust of the town ; this being so much raised by the work
that their great guns had made that we could scarcely
see each other. They beat us out of the town, and then
followed us into the Savannas, or open fields, still charg-
ing us as fast as they could. But when they saw that we
rallied again, resolving to die one by another, they then
ran from us into the town, and sheltered themselves
under their breastworks. Thus we retreated in as good
order as we could possibly observe in that confusion.
But their horsemen followed us as we retired, and fired
at us all the way, though they would not come within
reach of our guns ; for their own reached farther than
ours, and out-shot us more than one third. We took the
seaside for our greater security ; which, when the enemy
saw, they betook themselves to the hills, rolling down
great stones and whole rocks to destroy us. In the mean-
while those of the town examined our surgeons, and other
men whom they had made prisoners. These gave them
-our signs that we had left to our boats that were behind
us, so that they immediately blew up two smokes, which
were perceived by the canoes. This was the greatest af
our dangers. For had we not come at the instant that
FLIGHT OF THE BUCCANEERS. 413
we did to the seaside, our boats had been gone, they
being already under sail ; and we had inevitably perished
every man. Thus we put off from the shore, and got on
board about ten o'clock at night ; having been involved
in a continual and bloody fight with the enemy all that
day long.
CHAPTER XVII.
A description of the Bay of Arica. They sail hence to the Port
of Gnasco, ivhere they get provisions. A draft of the said
port. They land again at Hilo to revenge the former affronts,
and take zvhat they con Id find.
Having ended our attempt at Arica, the next day, being
January the last, we pUed to and fro in sight of the port,
to see if they would send out the three ships we had seen
in the harbour to fight us. For upon them we hoped to
revenge the defeat and disappointment we had received
at the town the day before. But our expectations in this
point also were frustrated, for not one of those vessels
offered to stir.
The houses of this town of Arica are not above eleven
feet high, being built of earth, and not of brick or timber.
The town itself is four-square in figure, and at one corner
stands the Casde, which may easily be commanded even
with small arms from the hill which lies close to it.
This place is the Embarcadero, or port town of all the
mineral towns that lie hereabouts, and hence is fetched all
the plate that is carried to Lima, the head city of Peru.
I took the bay of Arica as it appeared to me.
On Tuesday, February ist, we had a clear observation,
and by it we found lat. 19" 06' S. This day we shared
the old remains of our plate, taken in some of our former
booties. Our shares amounted only to thirty-seven pieces
of eight to each man.
N.B. — Here I ivoidd have my reader take notice that
from this day forward I kept no constant Diary or
Journal, as I had done before, at least for some consider-
DEPARTURE FROM ARICA. 417
able Space of time, as yon see hereafter ; viy disease and
sickness^ sea being the occasion of intermitting i<.<hat I
had neverfailed to do in all the course of this voyage till
now. Only some feiv meniorandmns, as my weakness gave
leave, I nozu and then committed to paper, which I shall
give yon as I find them, towards a continuance of this
history. Thus : —
Monday, February 14th. This night betvv^cen eleven
and twelve o'clock died on board our ship William Cook,
who was the servant afore-mentioned to Captain Edmund
Cook, of whom likewise mention has been often made
in this Journal.
February i6th, 1680. This day we found ourselves
to be in lat. if 30' S. We had a constant breeze at
S.E. and S.S.E. till we got about two hundred leagues
from land. Then, at the eclipse of the moon, we had a
calm for two or three days ; and then a breeze at N. for
the space of two days ; after which we had a calm again
for two or three days more.
March ist. By observation, lat. 34' 01' S. At this
time begins the dirty weather in these seas. We lay
under a pair of courses, the wind being at S.E. and
E.S.E. with a very great sea at S.S.E.
March 3rd. All hands were called up, and a council
held ; wherein considering it was now dirty weather and
late in the year, we bore up the helm and resolved to go
to the main for water, and thence to leeward, and so
march overland towards home, or at least to the North
Sea. But God directed us from following this resolution,
as you shall hear hereafter. We being tluis determined
that day, we stood N.E. with a strong wind at S.E. and
E.S.E.
On March 5th died our Coquimbo Indian. The seventh
we had a West-wind, our course being E. by N. The
eighth of the said month we were put to an allowance,
having only one cake of bread a day. March loth, we
had a strong South-wind.
VOL. II. ^' ^
41 8 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
On March 12th we fell in with the main-land, some-
what to leeward of Coquimbo. Within the island of
Paxaros are double lands, in whose valleys are fires for the
melting of copper, with which metal these hills abound.
Off to sea-board it is a rocky land, and within it is sandy.
About the distance of eight leagues to leeward is a rocky
point with several keys or rocks about it. About one
half mile to leeward of this point turns in the port of
Guasco. Right against the anchoring are three rocks,
close under the shore.
Being arrived here, we landed on shore threescore
men of our company, with design to get provisions, and
anything else that we could purchase. The people of the
country all ran away as soon as they saw us. There was
building on shore in this port a fire bark of sixteen or
eighteen tons burden, with a cock-boat belonging to it.
We took one Indian prisoner, and with him went up the
space of six or seven miles into the country to an Indian
town of threescore or fourscore houses. Thence we came
back to the church, which is distant four miles from the
seaside, and lodged there all night. Here are multitudes
of good sheep and goats in the country adjoining this
port, and it is watered with an excellent fresh-water
river ; but the getting of the water is very difficult, the
banks being very high or otherwise inaccessible. How-
ever, we made a shift to get in five hundred jars of water.
Furthermore, we brought away one hundred and twenty
sheep and fourscore goats, with which stock we victualled
our vessel for a while. As for oxen, they had driven
them away farther up into the country. The jurisdiction
of Guasco itself is governed by a Tenente, or Deputy-
Governor and a Friar, and is in subjection to the city of
La Serena above-mentioned, being a dependence upon
it. Here grows corn, peas, beans and several other
sorts of grain ; and for fruits this place is not inferior to
Coquimbo. Here we found likewise a mill to grind corn,
and about two hundred bushels thereof ready ground ;
THE PORT OF GUASCO.
421
which we conveyed on board our ship. Every house of
any account has branches of water running through its
yards or courts. The inhabitants had hidden their wine
and other best things, as plate and jewels, having descried
us at sea before our landing : so that our booty here,
besides provisions, was inconsiderable. However, we
caught some few fowls, and eat five or six sheep and like-
wise a great hog, which tasted very like our English
pork. The hills are all barren, so that the country which
bears fruit is only an excellent valley, being four times
as broad as that of Hilo above-mentioned. These people
of Guasco serve the town of Coquimbo with many sorts
of provisions. We gave the Indian whom we had taken
his liberty, and I took the port of Guasco.
Tuesday, March 15th, 1680. This morning we de-
parted from the port of Guasco afore-mentioned, with
very little wind, having done nothing considerable there,
excepting only the taking in the few provisions above-
related. We were bent therefore to seek greater matters,
having experienced but ill success in most of our attempts
hitherto. On March 20th, Moro de Horse, being high
doubled land, and at E. by N. appeared thus to us. in
lat. 24° S.
Moro de Horse.
Lat. 24° S.
At N., and at the distance of ten leagues, more or
less, we saw the great and high hill of Moro Moreno,
It is a dark hill, but
beine so called from its colour
o
4:2 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
much higher and bigger than the other afore-mentioned,
and appears Hke an island, thus :
Moro Moreno. Lat. 23*^ 30' S.
We had now very dark weather all along the coast.
On March 21st, we were \V. from the bay of Mexil-
lones. The point of this bay one league upwards repre-
sents exactly a sugar-loaf.
March 22nd. This day our boat and canoes went
from the ship, well manned, to find the river Loa.
They went also about two leagues to leeward of it, to a
fishing village, but could find no place fit for landing ;
whereupon they returned without doing anything. The
next day another canoe of our company went out upon
the same exploit, but found the same success. Yet not-
withstanding, here Sir Francis Drake watered, and built
a church, as we were told by our pilot. This church is
now standing on the seaside by the river, whose mouth
is now dry. There are several huts to windward of it ;
and from the said church or chapel a great path goes up
the hills, which leads to Pica.
On Thursday, March 24th, by observation, lat. 20° 10'
S. This day also we saw land, at eighteen leagues dis-
tance more or less.
Sunday, March 27th, we saw Mora de Sama, and
Lacumba at some distance. The same day we had an
observation, and found by it lat. 18" 17' S. That even-
ing we departed from the ship with our boats and canoes
towards the coast of Hilo, upon which we now were.
We landed and took the village of Hilo undescried, they
scarce suspecting we could have any design upon that
place the second time. We caught the friar who was^
CAPTURE OF HILO. 423
chaplain to the town and most of the inhabitants asleep,
making them prisoners of war. Here we heard a flying
report, that five thousand English had lately taken
Panama the second time, and kept it. But this rumour,
as it should seem, proved to be a falsity. At this time
the river came out, and was overflowed, it being near the
time of the freshes. Here the prisoners told us, that in
Arica ten of our men were still alive, whereof three were
surgeons, all the rest being dead of their wounds. The
Spaniards sent word to Hilo, that we had killed seventy
men and wounded three times as many of their forces.
Here the inhabitants said that of forty-five men sent
to the relief of Arica from hence, there came home but
only two alive. We filled what water we pleased here,
but a small boat that we brought from Guasco broke
loose from us, and was staved to pieces on the rocks.
Here we took eighteen jars of wine, and good store of
new figs. On Tuesday following we went up to the
sugar-work, mentioned in our former expedition against
Hilo, and found all fruits just ripe and fit for eating.
There we laded seven mules downwards with molasses
and sugar. The inhabitants told us, moreover, that
those who came to fight us when we were here the first
time, were most of them boys, and had only fifty firearms
amongst them, they being commanded by an English
rj-entleman who is married at Arequipa. Likewise that
the owner of the sugar-work afore-mentioned was now
engaged in a suit-at-law against the town of Hilo, pre-
tending it was not the English who robbed him and spoilt
his Ingenio, when we were there before, but the towns-
men themselves. This day in the evening we sailed
from Hilo with dark weather and little wind, which con-
tinued for several days afterwards.
CHAPTER XVllI.
TJiey depart from the Port of Hilo to the Gulf of Nicoya, -where
tliey take doivn their decks and mend the sai/h/^'- of their
ship. Forty-seven of their companions leave tJieni, and go
home over land. A description of the Gidf of Nicoya. They
take two barks and some prisoners tJiere. Several other
remarks belonging to this voyage.
From the time that we set sail from the port of Hilo,
until Sunday, April loth, 1681, nothing happened to us
that might be accounted remarkable ; neither did I take
any notes all this while, by reason of my indisposition
afore-mentioned. This day we could hear distinctly the
breaking of the seas on the shore, but could see no land,
the weather being extremely dark and hazy. Notwith-
standing, about noon it cleared up, and we found our-
selves to be in the bay called de Malabrigo. The land
in this bay runs due E. and W. By an observation
made, we found this day 6° 35' S. We saw from here
the leeward island of Lobos, or Seals, being nothing but
a rocky and scraggy place. On the S.W. side thereof is
a red hill, which is a place about the said island, which
the Indian fishermen much frequent. It is situated in
lat. 6' 1 5' S. This day likewise in the evening we saw
the point called Aguja.
On Saturday, April i6th, we came within a league
distance of the west-end of the island of Plate, above des-
cribed. The next day to this, being Sunday, April 17th,
1 68 1, our mutineers broke out again into an open dissen-
sion, they having been much dissatisfied all along the
course of this voyage, but more especially since our un-
CAPTURE OF DOLPHINS.
425
fortunate fight at Arica, and never entirely reconciled to
us since they chose Captain Watling, and deposed Sharp
at the isle of Juan Fernandez, as was related above.
Nothing now could appease them, nor serve their turn,
but a separation from the rest of the company, and a de-
parture from us. Hereupon this day they departed from
the ship, to the number of forty-seven men, all in com-
pany together, with design to go over land by the same
way they came into those seas. The rest who remained
behind, did fully resolve, and faithfully promise to each
other, they would stick close together. They took five
slaves in their company, to guide and do them other
service in that journey.^ This day we had lat. i' 30' S.
We sailed N.N.W. before the wind.
The next day after their departure, being April i8th,
we began to go to work about taking down one of our
upper decks, thereby to cause our ship still to mend her
sailing. We now made a N.W. by N. way, by obser-
vation, lat 25° N., the wind being at S.W.
On April 19th we made a N.W\ by N. way. By obser-
vation, lat. 2^ 45' N. In the afternoon we had cloudy
weather. The following day likewise we made the same
way, and by it seventy miles, according to my reckoning.
On the 2ist in the morning we had some small showers
of rain, and but little wind. We saw some turtle upon
the surface of the water, and great quantity of fish. We
caught twenty-six small dolphins. By a N.W. by N.
way, we reckoned this day forty miles.
April 22nd. This day we caught seven large dolphins
and one bonito. We saw likewise whole multitudes of
turtle swimming upon the water, and took five of them.
1 This party, among whom were WiUiam Dampier and Lionel Wafer,
proceeded in boats to the Gulf of San Miguel, where they landed and
crossed the Isthmus. Dampier published in the first volume of his
voyages a short account of Sharp's expedition, and of their return
across the Isthmus to the ^^'est Indies. Waler being accidently injured
on the land passage remained some months with the Indians of Darien,
and afterwards published his experiences among them.
426 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
By observation, lat. 5° 28' N. Hereabouts runs a great
and strong current. This day we lowered the quarter
deck of our ship, and made it even to the upper deck.
The following day we had but small wind, and yet
great showers of rain. Hereupon every man saved
water for himself, and a great quantity was saved for the
whole company. In the morning of this day we caught
eight bonitos, and in the evening ten more.
On April 24th we had both cloudy and rainy weather.
By observation, lat 7° ^il' N. M.D. ninety-two leagues.
This morning we caught forty bonitos, and in the even-
ing thirty more. In the afternoon we stood N., the
wind being at S.W. by S.
Monday, April 25th. All the night before this day we
had huge gusts of wind and rain. At break of day we
were close in with land, which upon examination proved
to be the island of Cano. To westward thereof is very
high land. About noon this day it cleared up, and we had
lat. 8° 34' N. In the evening we sent a canoe to search
the island. In it they found good water, and even ground,
but withal, an open road. At night we stood off the first
watch, and the last we had a land wind.
The next day following, at daylight we stood in, and
about noon we came to an anchor at the east side of the
island afore-mentioned, which is not in breadth above one
league. In the afternoon we removed from our former
anchoring place, and anchored again within shot of the
N.E. point of the island. In this place grows great
number of cacao trees, all over the greatest part of the
isle. On the north side thereof are many rivulets of
good water to be found in sandy bays. We saw more-
over some good hogs on shore, whereof we killed one,
and two pigs. Here are great numbers of turtle-doves,
and huge store of fish, but withal, very shy to be caught.
To northward of the island it looks thus :
THE ISLAND OF CANO.
I si a DEL CANO.
April 27th, we had some rain and wind the forepart
of the day, but the afternoon was fair. The next day in
like manner we had great quantity of rain. On Satur-
day, the 30th, about seven o'clock in the morning, we
weighed anchor from the aforesaid island with little wind,
and stood N,W, That day fell much rain, with great
thunder and lightning.
Monday, May 2nd. This day we observed and found
lat. 9° N. The coast all along appeared to us very high
and mountainous, and scarce six hours did pass but we
had thunder, lightning, and rain ; the like continued for
the two days following, wherein we had nothing but
almost continual thunder and rain.
On May 5th we had an indifferent fair day, and that
evening we were right off of the Gulf of Nicoya,
Friday, May 6th, This morning we saw the cape
very plain before us, N. by E, from it, are certain keys
at eight leagues distance, close under the main. We
steered N.N.W. towards the biggest of them, at whose
E.S.E. side are tw^o or three small rocks. The main
eastward is fine savanna, or plain and even land, through
which goes a very great road, which is to be seen from
the sea. At noon the port of Caldero, commonly called
Puerto Caldero, bore N, from us. At which time the
ebb forced us to sound in the middle of the gulf, where
we found fourteen fathom water. After this we anchored
nearer to the eastern keys, in nineteen fathom, where
we had oozy ground.
Saturday, May 7th. The night before this day was
very fair all night long. In the morning we went in a
428 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
canoe, being several in company, to seek for a place to
lay our ship in. Amongst the islands along the shore,
we found many brave holes, but little or no water in them,
which caused us to dislike what we had found. On one
of the said islands we happened to find a hat, and many
empty jars of water, which showed us that some people
had been lately there. About eight in the evening our
ship weighed anchor at young flood, and about three
in the afternoon we anchored again in six fathom
water.
Sunday, May 8th, 1681. The night before this day,
we had much rain, with thunder and lightning. The
morning being come, our commander, Captain Sharp,
departed from the ship in two canoes, with twenty-two
men in his company, out of design to surprise any vessels
or people they could meet hereabouts. In the mean-
while, in the evening we drove up with the tide (there
being no wind) in the ship, for the space of two or three
leagues hioher, till we found but three fathom at high
water. Here we backed astern. At this time we saw-
one of our canoes coming off from the island, that was
ahead of us (which was named Chira) calling for more
men and arms, and saying there were two ships to be
seen higher up the gulf. Hereupon eight of us went
away with them ashore, whereof two joined the party
afore-mentioned, and the six remaining were appointed
to guard the prisoners they had taken. To these we
showed ourselves very kind, as finding that they were
very sensible of the cruelties of the Spaniards towards
them and their whole nation. Here we found eight or
nine houses, and a small chapel standing. These people
have been in former times a considerable and great
nation, but are now almost destroyed and extinguished
by the Spaniards. We ascended a creek of the sea for
a league, or thereabouts, and took two barks by surprisal,
which were the two sail they had told us of before.
One of these barks was the same we had taken before at
THEY MEND THEIR SHIP. 429
Panama, of which I made mention at the beginning of
this history.
On INIonday following this day, we weighed anchor
with our barks, and drove down the creek, with the tide
at ebb, towards our ship. The prisoners that we had
taken here, informed us, that when we were to westward
in these seas before, there lay one hundred men at the
port of Santa Maria. That our men who left us at the
island of Cayboa, as was mentioned above, met the other
bark that we lost at sea, as we were sailing thither, and
thus all went over land together. That in the North
Seas, near Porto Bello, they had taken a good ship, and
that for this cause, ever since the Spaniards had kept at
the mouth of the river of Santa Maria, three Armadilla
barks, to stop and hinder others from going that way.
On Monday night our captain, with twenty-four men,
went from the ship into another creek, and there took
several prisoners, among whom was a shipwright and his
men, who were judged able to do us good service in the
altering of our ship ; these carpenters being there actually
building two great ships for the Spaniards. Having
taken these men, they made a float of timber to bring
down the tools and instruments they were working
withal. Here it happened that they put several tools,
and some quantity of iron-work, into a dory, to be con-
veyed dow^n the river with the float. But this dory sank
by the way, being overladen with iron, and one of our
company, by name John Alexander, a Scotchman, was
unfortunately drowned by this means.
On Thursday following, May 12th, we sent a canoe
from the ship, and found the dory that had been sunk.
That evening likewise drove down the body of our
drowned man afore-mentioned. Hereupon we took him
up, and on Friday morning following threw him over-
board, giving him three French vollies for his custo-
mary ceremony. Both this day and the day before, we
fetched water from a point near the houses, on the island
430 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
of Chira afore-mentioned. From the ship also we sent
away a Spanish merchant, whom we had taken among
the prisoners, to fetch a certain number of beeves, that
might serve for a ransom of the new bark taken here.
This day the weather was fair, but on Sunday following
it rained from morning until night.
On Monday, May i6th, we began to work all hands
together on our ship. On Tuesday an Indian boy named
Peter ran away from us. He belonged to Captain Saw-
kins, and waited on him as his servant. On Wednes-
day died an Indian slave, whose name was Salvador.
On Thursday we heard thirty or forty guns fired on the
main, which caused us to think that these would also turn
to Hilo beeves. On Friday we caught cockles, which
were as large as both our fists. At night there fell such
dreadful rain, with thunder, lightning, and wind, that for
the space of two hours the air was as light as day ; the
thunder not ceasing all the while. On Sunday we con-
tinued to work ; the night before which day we had more
thunder, lightning, and rain.
Wednesday, May 25th. This day we finished our
great piece of work, viz. the taking down the deck of our
ship. Besides which, the length of every mast was shor-
tened, and all was now served and rigged. Insomuch
that it would seem incredible to strangers, could they but
see how much work we performed in the space of a fort-
night or less. The same day likewise we set at liberty
our Spanish carpenters, who had been very serviceable
to us all this while, the old pilot, the old Spaniard taken
at the isle of Iquique, and several others of our Spanish
prisoners and slaves. To these people, but chiefly
to the Spanish carpenters as a reward for their good
service, we gave the new bark which we had taken at
this place. But the old bark we thought fit to keep, and
sail in our company, as we did, putting into her for this
purpose six of our own men and two slaves. The next
day we fell down as low as Vanero, a place so called
THE GULF OF NICO Y A. 433
liereabouts, and would have sailed away again that very
evening, but that our tackle gave way in hoisting our
anchor, whereby we lay still. In the Gulf of Nicoya we
experienced most commonly a fresh breeze, and at night
a land wind.
Friday, May 27th. This day likewise we drove down
with the tide as low as Cavallo, another place so named
in the gulf Here we stayed and watered that day ; and
here one Cannis Marcy, our interpreter, ran away from
us.
On May 28th in the morning we sailed from thence,
and came within twenty-nine leagues of that rich and
rocky shore. Yet notwithstanding we had but seven
fathom water. Here I saw this day a white porpoise.
Behind this island is a town called New Cape Blanco.
At Puerto Caldero above-mentioned is but one store-
house to be seen. We came to an anchor in the depth of
seven fathom water, at the distance of a league from
shore, and caught five turtle.
May 29th. This day we saw Cape Blanco. Both
this day and the day following we continued tacking out
of the gulf, against a south wind. Here I took the en-
suing demonstration of the Gulf of Nicoya, which, for the
use of the reader, I have hereunto annexed.
VOL. II. F F
CHAPTER XIX.
They depart from the Gulf of Nicoya to Golf o Duke, 'where
they careen their vessel. An account of their sailings alo7ig
the coast. Also a description of Golf o Duke. The Spaniards
force the Indians of Darien to a peace, by a stratagem con-
trived in the name of the English.
Wednesday, June ist, 1681. This day we had very
fair weather, and yet but litde wind. Hereupon the tide,
or current, drove us to the westward of Cape Blanco.
Off this Cape, and at the distance of two miles within
the sea, is situate a naked and nothing but barren quay.
At E. by N., and at four leagues distance. Cape Blanco
gave us this appearance :
Cabo BLANCO.
Lat. 9" 30' N.
The coast here along runs N.W. half W., and grows
lower and lower towards Cape Guyones. This cape at
seven leagues distance, and at N.W. by N., appeared
thus to us :
Cabo de GUYONES.
Lat. 10° 00' N.
PUERTO DE VELAS.
435
At first sight the cape appeared very like two islands.
The latter part of this day was cloudy, which hindered
much our prospect.
June 2nd. This morning we saw land, which ap-
peared like several keys to us at N.W. by N., and at
seven leagues distance. It was the land of Puerto de
Velas, and appeared thus :
Puerto de VELAS.
This evening our captain called us together, and asked
our opinions concerning the course we ought to steer.
Having discussed the points by him proposed amongst
us, we all resolved to bear up for Golfo Dulce, and there
careen our vessels. This being done, we concluded to
go from thence to the cape, and cruise thereabouts
under the equinoctial. We observed this day that our
bark taken at the gulf of Nicoya sailed much better than
our ship.
Friday, June 3rd. The night before this day was very
fair, and we had a fresh wind, our course being S.E.
This morning we saw no land. In the evening the wind
came about at S.S.W. and S.W. by S.
June 4th. This day we stood E. and E. by N., the
wind being W. and W. by N. In the evening we stood
N.E., and descried land at the distance of twenty-four
leagues, more or less, from Cape Blanco.
Sunday, June 5th. Last night we lay by for all, or the
greater part thereof. This morning we saw the island of
Cano above described, which bore E.S.E. from us. We
saw likewise multitudes of fish, but they would not bite.
Also water-snakes of divers colours.
436 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
June 6th. All last night we had rain, and with it but
little wind, yea, scarce enough to carry us clear off from
the island afore-mentioned. Towards morning we had a
fresh wind at N.N.W. So then we stood out S. until
morning, and this being come, we stood N.E. by E, The
land runs from Punta .Mala to Golfo Dulce, and Punta
Borrica, E.S.E. half S. At nine leagues distance we laid
the island of Cano. Punta Borrica at the same distance,
or thereabouts, looks thus :
Punta Borrica. Lat. 8 oo' N.
The west end of Golfo Dulce is very high land, and a
hio-h rock lies close off it. Besides which, two other
rocks lie farther out ; the outermost of which is a mile
distant from the shore. The east side is also high, but
breaks into small points and bays, growing lower and
lower to Punta Borrica. We came about a mile within
the mouth of the gulf, then anchored in eight fathom
and a half water. The mouth of the gulf is almost three
leagues over.
The next day, being June 7th, we weighed anchor
again at young flood, and got about two leagues higher.
At evening we came again to anchor in seven fathom
and a half water. It rained this day until eight o'clock,
more like the pouring down of water from the clouds,
than the usual falling of drops.
Wednesday, June 8th, at daybreak we weighed anchor
again, with a fresh sea-breeze. The higher up we went,
the deeper w^e found the gulf, and at last no ground even
with thirty fathom of line. This day we sent our canoe
away to seek water and a good place to lay our ship in.
Having landed, they found one Indian and two boys,
INDIANS TAKEN PRISONERS. A37
which they made prisoners and brought aboard ; we used
them very kindly, giving them victuals and clothes, for
they had no other than the bark of a tree to cover their
nakedness withal. Being examined, they informed us
that a Spanish priest had been amongst them, and had
made peace with their nation, ordering them strictly not
to come near any ship nor vessel that had red colours ;
forasmuch as that they were Englishmen, and would
certainly kill them. Being asked where now the priest
was, they answered that he was gone to a great Spanish
town, which was distant thence four sleeps up in the
country. After this the Indian left the two boys, his
children, with us, and went to fetch more Indians to us,
from a plantain-walk or grove, situated by a river a
league off, or thereabouts. We came to an anchor in a
bay close by one of the Indian quays, where two fresh
rivers were within a stone's throw of each other, in
twenty-seven fathom and a half water, and at a cable's
length from the mark of low water. The Indians whom
our prisoner went to seek, came to us several times,
selling to us honey, plantains, and other necessaries that
we usually bought of them, or trucked for with other
things. We also made use of their bark logs in tallow-
ing our ship, in which concern they did us good service.
Their darts are headed with iron as sharp as any razor.
Here one of the prisoners which we took at the gulf of
Nicoya, informed us by what means, or rather stratagem
of war, the Spaniards had forced a peace upon the Indians
of the province of Darien, since our departure thence.
The manner was as follows : A certain Frenchman
who ran from us at the island of Taboga to the
Spaniards, was sent by them in a ship to the river's
mouth, which disembogueth from that province into the
South Sea. Being arrived there, he went ashore by
himself in a canoe, and told the Indians that the English
who had passed that way, were come back from their
adventures in the South Sea. Withal, he asked them, if
438 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
they would not be so kind and friendly to the English-
men, as to come aboard and conduct them on shore.
The poor deceived Indians were very joyful to under-
stand this good news, and thus forty of the chief men
among them went on board the Spanish vessel, and
were immediately carried prisoners of war to Panama.
Here they were forced to conclude a peace, though upon
terms very disadvantageous to them, before they could
obtain their liberty.
These poor and miserable Indians of Golfo Dulce,
would come every day into our company, and eat and
drink very familiarly with us all the time we were there.
We laid our ship on ground, but the water did not ebb
low enough to see her keel. Whilst we were careening
our vessel, we built a house upon the shore, both to
lodge and eat in, and every day we caught plenty of good
fish. On Sunday, June 12th, the work of careening our
ship going on in due order, we came to cleanse our hold,
and here on a sudden, both myself and several others
were struck totally blind with the filth and nastiness of
the said place. Yet soon after we recovered our sight
again without any other help than the benefit of the fresh
and open air, which dissipated those malignant vapours
that had oppressed our eyes. On June 14th, we had a
great and fierce tornado, with which our cable broke, and
had it not then happened to be high water at that instant,
we had been lost inevitably. However, we had the
good fortune to shore her up again, and by that means
secure ourselves from farther danger. On June 21st we
weighed anchor again, and went a league higher than the
former place. Here we watered, and in the meanwhile
left men below to cut wood.
Thursday, June 23rd. This day ran away from us
two negroes ; the name of one of them was Hernando ;
who was taken with Don Thomas de Argandona on
the coast of Guayaquil, as was mentioned above. The
other was named Silvestre, having been taken at the
KING CHARLES' HARBOUR. 441
town of Hilo. Following the example of these afore-
mentioned, on Monday, June 27th, that is, four days
after, two more of our prisoners endeavoured to make
their escape, both of them slaves. One of these was
named Francisco, who was a negro, and had been taken
in the cacao-ship mentioned before. The name of the
other was also Francisco, and he was an Indian born,
who was taken before Panama. Their attempts to escape
succeeded not, for we caught them both again before
they got on shore. On Tuesday following I went to sail
up and down the gulf, in the little bark belonging to our
ship ; and having viewed all places, took this description
of Golfo Dulce here inserted. Our captain gave this
gulf the name of King Charles, his Harbour.
CHAPTER XX.
TJiey depart from Golfo Diilce, to go and cruise under the
Equinoctial. Here they take a ricJi Spanish vessel zuith
37,000 Pieces of Eight, besides plate and other goods. They
take also a Packet-boat bound from Panama to Lima. An
account of their sailings and the coasts along.
Our vessel being now careened, and all things in a
readiness for our departure, on Tuesday, June 28th, in
the afternoon, we weighed anchor to go to sea again,
turning out towards the mouth of Golfo Dulce. Our
design was to cruise under the equinoctial, as had been
concluded upon before, thereby to get what purchase we
could by sea, seeing the greatest part of our attempts
on land had proved hitherto very unsuccessful to us.
Wednesday, June 29th. Both the night last past and
this day we had rainy weather. About three in the
afternoon a fresh gale sprang up at S.W. and S.S.W.,
our course being S.E. and S.E. by S. At five this
evening the gulf bore N.W. by W., seven leagues dis-
tant, and Punta Borrica three leagues and a half distant.
Thursday, June 30th. All night past we enjoyed a
fresh gale at S.S.W. We sailed in the bark (where I
was) better than the man-of-war, for so we called the
Trinity vessel, notwithstanding that she was newly
cleansed and tallowed. This day we had hazy weather,
and I reckoned myself from Punta Borrica S.S.E. eigh-
teen leagues and a half.
July I St, 1 68 1. Last night we had two or three
tornados. I reckoned this day a S.S.E. way, and by a
clear observation found lat. 6° 10' N. We saw great
quantities of fish as we sailed this day.
July 2nd. We made a S.E. way, and our reckoning was
DEPARTURE FROM GOLFO DULCE. 443
64 by it. By observation I found lat. 5"^ 20' N. At noon
the same day we had a fresh gale at S.W., with some rain.
July 3rd. We had hazy weather. We made a S.E. by
S. way, and 2)7-
Monday, July 4th. The night just past was windy,
with rain, which forced us to hand our top sails. Our
reckoning this day was a S.E. way, and a hundred miles.
July 5th. We had a clear night, and, withal, a fresh
gale. By this we made a S.E. way. Our latitude this
day gave us 2° 20' N. This morning we saw land south-
ward of us, lying in low hummocks. It was the point, so
called, of Manglares.
Wednesday, July 6th. We turned up along shore, and
by observation took this day lat. 2° 02' N. Hereabouts
with every new moon is experienced a windward current.
In the evening of this day we were close in with low
land. We had windy weather and a great sea.
Thursday, July 7th. This day by observation we
found lat. 01° 48' N. In the evening of the said day
we lost sight of the said ship.
The next day, being July 8th, we saw the ship again,
whose loss began to create some concern in our minds.
This day we made very high land all along as we went.
And the port, or rather bay, of San Mateo, or St. Mat-
thew, appeared to us like several islands.
Saturday, July 9th. This morning we stood fair in
with the port of Tucames. Off the highest part of the
land there seems to lie a key. At the north-east point
of the port it appears exactly thus :
Puerto dc Tucames.
444 THE BUCCANEERS O E AMERICA.
This day at noon we had a clear observation, which
(jave us lat. oi° 22' N.
Sunday, July loth. Last night we stood off to sea,
thereby to keep clear of the shore. This day observation
showed us lat. 01° 31' N. About noon the same day we
happened to spy a sail, to which immediately we gave
chase. We bore up one point of the compass, thereby to
hinder her lasking away ; but notwithstanding in the
evening lost sight of her again. However, our great
ship got up with her, and at about eight o'clock at night
made her a prize. She proved to be the same ship,
named San Pedro, which we had taken the last year,
being then bound from Truxillo to Panama, and laden
with wine, gunpowder, and pieces of eight, whereof
mention was made in its due place. Thus this same bot-
tom became doubly fortunate to us, being twice taken by
us in the space of fourteen months. For she had on
board her now twenty-one thousand pieces of eight, in
eight chests, and in bags sixteen thousand more, besides
plate.
Monday and Tuesday, the nth and 12th of the said
month, we made in for the shore. Our prize was so
deeply laden, that she seemed to be buried in the water.
She had forty men on board her, besides some merchants
and friars. On Tuesday an observation gave us lat.
r 20' N.
Wednesday, July 13th. This day we dared not ad-
venture into the bay of San Mateo, because we saw some
Indians, who had made a great fire on shore, which, as
we judged, was designedly done to give intelligence of
our arrival. Hereupon we bore away for the river of
Santiago, six leagues distant, more or less, from the
bay afore-mentioned, to the north-east. Thursday, Fri-
day, and Saturday of the said week, we spent in taking
out what parcels of cacao-nut we thought fit from on
board the prize, which was chiefly laden with the said
commodity. This being done, we cut down the main-
CAPTURE OF A RICH SPANISH VESSEL. 445
mast by the board, and gave them only their main-sail,
and thus turning the ship loose, sent away in her all our
old slaves, for the good service they had done us, taking
new ones from the prize in their room. One only we stili
detained, who was Francisco, the negro that attempted to
run away by swimming ashore, as was mentioned above.
Sunday, July 17th. This day we went from the ship,
and found the river of Santiago above-mentioned. At
the mouth of this river we stayed Monday and Tuesda\
following to take in water, which we now much wanted.
On the sides of the river we found good store of plan-
tains. Our fresh water we fetched the distance of four
miles up the river. We saw several Indians, but could
not speak with them they were so shy of us, being fore-
warned by the Spaniards not to come near us.
On Wednesday, July 20th, we shared our plunder
among ourselves, or rather this day made part of the
dividend of what we had taken, the rest being reserved
to another day. Our prisoners being examined, informed
us that the Spaniards had taken up our anchors and
cables which we left behind us at the isle of Juan
Fernandez. Also that they had surprised the Mosquito
Indian that we left behind us there on shore, by the light
of a fire which he made in the night upon the isle.
Tuesday, July 21st. All the last four-and-twenty hours
we stood off and on. The next day we shared the rest
of our things taken in the prize, as also the money that
was in the bags ; the rest we laid up to divide upon
another occasion, especially after such time as we were
got through the Straits of Magellan. Our dividend
amounted to the sum of 234 pieces of eight to each man.
Our prisoners informed us this day that a new Viceroy ot
Peru was arrived at Panama, and that he dared not
adventure up to Lima in a ship of twenty-five guns that
was at Panama, for fear of meeting with us at sea, but
had chosen rather to wait until the Armada came down
from Lima to safeguard and conduct him thither.
446
THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
July 23rd we had a fresh breeze at S.W., and the next
day a clear observation, which gave us only latitude
14' N. This day Cape San Francisco at N.E. appeared
thus to us :
Cabo de San Francisco.
Monday, July 25th. This day we observed latitude
01' 20' S., and we had a south-west wind.
July 26th. This morning we had a very great dew
fallen in the night last past. The weather in like man-
ner was very close.
On Wednesday, July 27th, Cape Passao, at S.S.W.
and at six leagues distance, appeared thus :
Cabo Fassao.
The same morning about seven o'clock we spied a
sail E.S.E. from us, under the shore. We presently
gave her close chase, as eagerly as we could, and about
noon came up with her. But several of the people
belonging to her were already got on shore, whereby
they made their escape from being taken our prisoners.
These were chiefly a friar, who was either a passenger or
chaplain to the vessel, and five negroes. She proved to
be a Barco d' Aviso, or Packet boat, that was going with
letters from Panama to Lima. In this bark we took
among other prisoners two white women who were pas-
sengers to the same place. Both these and the rest of
CAPTURE OF A PACKET BOAT. 447
the prisoners told us, they had heard at Panama that we
were all gone out of these seas homewards over land, and
that made them adventure now up towards Lima, other-
wise they had not come. This day and the Thursday
following, we spent in taking out of the packet-boat what
we could find in her, which all were things of no con-
siderable value, they having scarce brought any thing
with them but the packet. They told us, moreover, that
the new Viceroy of Peru, of whom we made mention
above, was setting forth from Panama under the conduct
of three sail of ships, the one of sixteen, the other of
eight, and the third of six guns. That a general peace
was all over Europe, excepting only that the English had
wars with the Algerines by sea, and the Spaniards by
land. Having got what we could out of the prisoners
and the vessel, we gave them their liberty, and sent them
away in the same bark, as being desirous not to en-
cumber ourselves with more than we could well manage.
That night we stood out to sea all night long, most ol
our men being fuddled.
CHAPTER XXI.
They take another Spanish ship richly laden under the eguifioctial.
They make several dividends of their booty among tJiemselves.
They ai'rive at the Isle of Plate, wJiere they are in danger of
being all massacred by their slaves aud prisoners. Their de-
parture thence for the port and bay of Paita, zuith design to
plunder the said place.
The next morning after we had turned away the packet-
boat afore-mentioned, the weather being very close, we
spied another sail creeping close under our lee. This
vessel looked mighty big ; so that we thought she had
been one of their chief men-of-war, who was sent to sur-
prise or destroy us. Notwithstanding, our brave com-
mander. Captain Sharp, resolved to fight her, and either
to take the said vessel, though never so big, or that she
should take us. To this effect, coming nearer to her, we
easily perceived she was a merchant-ship of great bulk,
as most of your Spanish vessels are, and very deeply
laden. Being up with them, those within her fired three
or four guns at us first, thinking to make their party
good against us. But we answered them briskly, with
a continual volley of small arms, so that they soon ran
down into the hold, and surrendered, crying aloud for
quarter. As it should seem we had killed in that volley
their captain and one seaman, and also wounded their
boatswain ; which loss of their commander daunted them
so suddenly, he being a man of good repute in those
seas. Captain Sharp, with twelve more of our company,
entered her the first. In this vessel I saw the most
beautiful woman that I ever saw in all the South Sea.
CAPTURE OF ANOTHER SPANISH SHIP. 449
The name of the captain of this vessel was Don Diego
Lopez, and the ship was called El Santo Rosario, or the
Holy Rosary. The men we found on board her were
about the number of forty, more or less.
Having examined our prisoners, they informed us that
the day before they set sail from El Callao from which
port they were going towards Panama, our men whom
they had taken prisoners at Arica were brought into that
place, and very civilly entertained there by all sorts of
people, but more especially by the women. That one
of our surgeons, whom we suspected to be Mr. Bullock,
was left behind, and remained still at Arica.
We lay at anchor from Friday, July 29th, which was
the day we took this prize, until Wednesday following, at
the same place under Cape Passao as we anchored before.
Here we sank the bark that we had taken at the Gulf
of Nicoya, being willing to make use of what rigging she
had, and also to contract our number of men. In the
meanwhile we took out of the prize much plate, and some
money ready coined, besides six hundred and twenty jars
of wine and brandy, and other things. Thus, leaving
only the foremast standing in the said vessel, we turned
her away, as we had done the others before, together
with all the prisoners in her, giving them their liberty
not to be encumbered with them, being desirous to spare
our provisions as much as we could. We detained only
one man, named Francisco, who was a Biscayner, be-
cause he reported himself to be the best pilot of those
seas. This being done, we shared all the plate and linen
taken in our prize, and weighed thence, standing S.S.E.
with a fresh wind that sprang up.
Friday, August 4th. This day we shared the ready
money taken in the Rosario, our last prize. Our dividend
<:ame to ninety-four pieces of eight each man. Cape
Passao, under which all these prizes were taken, at N.E.
appears thus :
VOL. II. G G
45° THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Caho Passao.
The land runs S.E. and is for five leagues together to
windward of this cape, all mountainous and high land.
The next day, being August 5th, we completed our
dividends, sharing this day all our odd money, ready-
coined, and plate, with some other things.
Saturday, August 6th. This day perusing some let-
ters taken in the last prize, I understood by them that the
Spaniards had taken prisoner one of the last party of our
men that left us. Also, that they were forced to fight all
their way over land as they went, both against the Span-
iards and the Indians, these having made peace with the
Spaniards since our departure, as was mentioned above.
That our Englishmen had killed, amongst other Span-
iards, the brother of Captain Assientos, and Captain
Alonso, an officer so-named. Moreover, that ten sail of
privateers were coming out of the North Sea, with intent
to march over-land into the South Sea, as we had done
before, but that they were prevented, being forced back
by the great rains that fell near the islands called
Samballas.
On August 7th we had very fair weather, notwith-
standing some strong winds from shore, and also a
strong current to leeward. This ran so fierce against
us the next day, August 8th, that in the space of the
last four and twenty hours we lost three leagues.
Tuesday, August 9th, we saw the port and town of
Manta ; this being nothing but sixteen or seventeen
straggling houses, with a large and high brick church
belonging to it. What we got in the day by the help of
the wind, we lost in the night by the current. The
same fortune we had the next day, for we still gained
no way all this while.
MUTINY AMONG THE SLAVES AND PRISONERS. 451
Thursday, August iith. All last night we had but
little wind ; this day we had a violent current to wind-
ward, as before, with some gusts of wind. However, by
the help of these we made shift to get to windward of the
isle of Plate.
August 1 2th, in the morning, we came to an anchor at
the aforesaid isle. We sent our boat ashore with men, as
we had done formerly, to kill goats, but we found them
to be extremely shy and fugitive, compared with what
they were the last year. Here it was that our quarter-
master, James Chappel, and myself fought a duel together
on shore. In the evening of this day, our slaves agreed
among themselves, and plotted to cut us all in pieces, not
giving quarter to any, when we should be buried in sleep.
They conceived this night afforded them the fittest oppor-
tunity, by reason that we were all in drink. But they
were discovered to our commander by one of their own
companions, and one of them named Santiago, whom
we brought from Iquique, leapt overboard ; who, not-
withstanding, was shot in the water by our captain, and
thus punished for his treason. The rest laid the fault on
that slave, and so it passed, we being not willing to en-
quire any farther into the matter, having terrified them
with the death of their companion. We lay at this isle
until Tuesday following, and in the meanwhile gave our
vessel a pair of boots and tops, being very merry all the
while with the wine and brandy we had taken in the
prize.
On Tuesday, August i6th, in the afternoon, we weighed
thence with a S.W. wind. The island at N.W. from us,
gave us this following appearance :
Isle de la Plata.
452 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Wednesday, August i 7th, the island at E., this morning
and at two leagues and an half distance appeared thus :
Island of Plate.
All the day long until the evening we had a leeward
current, but then I could not perceive any.
Thursday, August i8th. This morning we were to
windward of the island of Solango. In the night before
we had continual misty rain. At noon the aforesaid
island bore N. by E. of us, and at three leagues distance
appeared thus :
Isle de Solans^o.
About three leagues from Solango are two rocks,
called Los Ahorcados. They appear both high and
black to the view. Besides this N.N.E. from Point St.
Helena is a high rock, which to windward thereof runs
shoaling for the space of half a mile under water. It is
distant about eight leagues, more or less, from the said
point, and is called Chanduy. At this place, and upon
this rock, was lost the ship afore-mentioned, that was
ordered from these seas, to the aid of our most gracious
Sovereign, King Charles the First, late King of England.
Said ship had on board, as the Spaniards relate, to the
sum of many millions of pieces of eight ; all which quan-
tity of plate was sent as a present to our king, being then
in his troubles, by the worthy merchants of Lima. The
DEPARTURE FOR PA /TA. 453
rock afore-mentioned lies about two leagues distant from
the mainland.
August 19th. This day our pilot told us that since we
were to windward a certain ship that was coming from
Lima, bound for Guayaquil, ran ashore on Santa Clara,
losing there in money to the value of one hundred
thousand pieces of eight ; which otherwise, peradventure,
we might very fortunately have met with. Moreover, that
the Viceroy of Peru had beheaded their great Admiral
Ponce, for not coming to fight and destroy us, while we
were at Gorgona. This evening we saw point St. Helena,
at the distance often leagues to S.S.E. from us.
August 20th. This day we had both misty and cold
weather. In the afternoon we saw Point St. Helena, at
N.E, by N. and at seven leagues distance more or less.
On Sunday, August 21st, we had a fair and clear
day. I reckoned myself this day to be about twenty-five
leagues to the southward of St. Helena.
August 22nd. This morning about two o'clock we
came close in with the shore. We found ourselves to
leeward of a certain point called Punta de Mero, which
is nothing else than a barren and rocky point. Here
runs an eddy current under the shore.
Tuesday, August 23rd. This day in the morning we
had but little wind. At noon it blew fresh again. We
made all day but short trips, and reefed topsails.
Wednesday, August 24th. This morning a great dew
fell. At noon we were W. from Cape Blanco. We
found by observation lat. 4° 13' S. We resolved now to
bear up for Paita, and take it by surprise if possible,
thereby to provide ourselves with many necessaries that
we wanted.
CHAPTER XXII.
They arrive at Paita, where they are disappointed of their expecta-
tions, as not daring to land, seeing all the country alarmed
before them. They bear azvay for the Strait of Magellan.
Description of the bay and port of Paita, and Colan. A n ac-
count of their Sailings towards the Strait afore-mentioned.
Thursday, August 25th. The night before this day, we
stood off to sea for fear of the shore, and lest we should
be descried from the coast of Paita, to which we were
now pretty nigh. About noon this day we began to
stand in again, and saw the homing of the land, though
with hazy weather. The next day, being August 26th,
we had cold winds, great dews, and dry weather.
Saturday, August 27th. All this day, but more es-
pecially in the morning, we had many fogs. In the after-
noon we saw la Silla de Paita at W.S.W. being about
five leagues distant from it.
Sunday, August 28th. Last night about ten o'clock
we were close into land, at the distance of half a league
more or less to leeward of the island of Lobos, We
continued our course all that night, and about break of
day found ourselves close under Pena Horadada, a high
and steep rock so-called. From hence we sailed with a
landwind, and sent away from the ship two canoes well
manned and armed, with good hopes to have taken the
town of Paita undescried. But as it should seem, they
had already received news of our coming, or being upon
that coast, and also had received supplies of forces that
were sent them from the city of Piura, distant thence
twelve leagues up country. These supplies consisted
ARRIVAL AT PAITA. 455
chiefly of three companies of horse and foot, all of them
being armed with fire-arms. Besides this, they had made
a breast-work along the seaside for the defence of the
town, and the great church which lies at the outermost
part of the town. From these places, as also from a hill
that covers the town, they fired at our men, who were
innocently rowing towards shore with their canoes. This
preposterous firing was the preservation of our people,
for had the Spaniards permitted our men to come ashore,
they had assuredly destroyed them every man. But fear
always hinders that nation of victory, at least in most of
our attempts.
Our men perceiving themselves to be discovered, and
the enemy prepared for their reception, hereupon re-
treated, and came on board the ship again without
attempting to land, or do anything else in relation to the
taking of the place. We judged there could not be less
than one hundred and fifty fire-arms, and four times as
many lances upon the shore, all in readiness to hinder
our people from landing. Within the town our pilot told
us, there might be one hundred and fifty families.
Being disappointed of our expectations at Paita we
stood down the bay towards Golan. This is another
town so called, and which exceeds Paita three times.
It is chiefly inhabited by fishermen, and thence they
send fish to most inland towns of Peru ; and also serve
Paita with water from the river Colan, not far distant
from the town. It is two leagues more or less from the
town of Paita afore-mentioned to Colan, and thence to
the river, one league, although the houses of Colan do
reach almost to the river. The town of Colan itself is
only inhabited by Indians, and these are all rich ; be-
cause they will be paid in ready money for everything
they do for the Spaniards. But the town of Paita is
chiefly inhabited by Spaniards, though there be also some
Indians ; but the Spaniards do not suffer the Indians to
be any great gainers, or grow rich under them.
456 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
About ten o'clock a young breeze sprang up, and
with that we stood away W., and W. by S. Within a
little while it blew so fresh, that we were forced to reef
our topsails, the weather being very dark and hazy. I
took the port of Paita, and bay of Colan, as they lay
exactly situated (see map on next page).
Monday, August 29th. All our hopes of doing any
further good upon the coasts of the South Sea being now
frustrated, seeing we were descried before our arrival
wherever we came, we resolved unanimously to quit all
other attempts, and bear away for the Strait of Magellan
in order to return homewards either for England or some
of our plantations in the West Indies. This day we had
a great dew, and I reckoned myself W. S. W. from Paita
thirteen leagues and a half, with very little wind. So
we stood E.
The next day, August 30th, we had misty weather.
We made a W.S.W. way, and by it five leagues and one
third. In the afternoon of this day, the wind freshened
again, having been but little before, and we stood
E.S.E.
The last day of August we had very fair weather. I
believed now that the wind was settled at S.E. and
S.S.E. We made a S.S.W. way, and twenty-one
leagues and two thirds.
September ist. Last night was very cloudy, but
withal we had a fresh gale. Our reckoning was a S.W.
by S. way, and that we had made sixteen leagues and
two thirds.
September 2nd. We reckoned a S.W. way, and by it
twenty-six leagues and two thirds. This day we had an
observation, and found lat. 7° \o' S.
September 3rd brought us both cloudy and misty
weather. We made a W.S.W. way, and fourteen
leagues.
September 4th. This day the wind was at E.S.E.
and sometimes E. coming in many flaws. We had a
SAILINGS TOWARDS MAGELLAN. 459
S.W. by S. way, and reckoned twenty-three leagues and
two thirds. We had a great sea from S.
Monday, September 5th, we had great winds, and a
high and short sea. Our way was S.S.W. and half W.
by which we reckoned twenty-eight leagues and two
thirds of a league.
September 6th, we had a very fresh wind at S.E. by
E. with an indifferent smooth sea. By observation we
found this day latitude 12° 00' S. We made a S.W.
by S. way, and twenty-eight leagues and one third.
Wednesday, September 7th, we had a very fresh wind.
We reckoned a S.W. by S. way, and thirty-six leagues.
We observed latitude 13° 24' S. We make now for each
mess a plum pudding of salt water and wine lees.
On the eighth we enjoyed a fresh gale of wind,
though with hazy weather. Our reckoning was a S.W.
by S. way, and hereby twenty-five leagues, and one third
of a league.
September 9th, we made a S.W. by S. way, and
twenty-one leagues and a third. In the afternoon the
wind came about something more S., allowing us a S.W.
course.
Saturday, September loth. All last night past and
this morning the wind was very fresh at E. Our way
was S.S.W. and by our reckoning thirty-five leagues and
one third. The weather now was warm. An observa-
tion this day gave us latitude 16" 40' S.
September iith we had whiffling winds. A S.W.
half S. way, and thereby twelve leagues and two thirds.
By an observation we found 17° 10' S. Now we had a
very great sea, so that we took in our sprit sail.
September 12th. All the night before this day we
were under a pair of courses, yet this morning we heaved
out main topsail. We made a W.S.W. way, and seven-
teen leagues and one third. By observation we found
lat. 17° 30' S.
The 1 3th. During last night we had huge and great
46o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Storms of wind. In the morning our goose head gave
way, so that at about noon we were forced to He by till
four in the afternoon to mend it. Our course was S.W.
half W. and our reckoning twenty-nine leagues, and two
thirds of a league. Lat. by observation i8° 12' S.
Wednesday, September 14th. This day we had very
hazy weather. We made a S.S.W. way, and twenty
leagues.
September 15th. This day likewise we had a S.S.W.
way, and reckoned twenty-three leagues and one half.
Our observation taken this day gave us 20° 09' S.
On September i6th we had a clear day, a S.W. half
S. way, and made sixteen leagues and two thirds. We
found by observation, lat. 20° 48' S.
The 1 7th. Last night was very calm. Also this day,
it being a full moon. We reckoned a S.W. way, and
only by reason of the calmness of the weather nine leagues
and one third of a league, We had an observation which
afforded us 21° 08' S. lat.
Sunday, September i8th. Last night a wind sprang
up at S.S.E. which the morning of this day freshened at
S.E. We made a W.S.W. way, and by it eighteen
leagues. Moreover, this day we had a clear observation
that showed us lat. 21° 30' S.
September 19th. All last night we had a very fresh
wind, but this morning it came about to E. by S. and
E.S.E. with hazy weather. I reckoned a S.W. by S.
way, and twenty-two leagues.
September 20th. This day gave us a fresh wind, hazy
weather, a S. by W. way, and hereupon twenty-three
leagues and one third.
September 21st. This day also the fresh gale con-
tinued, with cloudy, and sometimes misty weather. Our
reckoning showed us a S. by W. way as the day before,
and by it twenty-eight leagues and one third. By an
observation made, we found lat. 25° 15' S.
Thursday, September 22nd. This day we had a very
SAILINGS TOWARDS MAGELLAN. 461
fresh wind. We reckoned a S. half W. way, and by that
twenty-nine leagues and two thirds. An observation
taken gave us lat. 26° 42' S. We observed this day a
N.E. sea, which seemed very strange to us.
The next day we had several showers of small rain.
My reckoning was a S. by W. way ; and thereupon
twenty-six leagues. We found by observation lat. 27°
57' s.
September 24th. We had hazy weather, and the wind
not so fresh at E.S.E., with a smooth sea. We made a
S.S.W. way half westerly, and twenty-three leagues and
two thirds. This day also an observation gave us lat.
28° 57' S. I reckoned now that we were distant from
Paita 302 leagues and two thirds.
Sunday, September 25th. This day we had not much
wind, and hazy weather. At noon the wind came E.,
then E.N.E. and then again N.E. by E. We reckoned
a S. by E. way, half E. and 55.
Monday 26th. We had hazy weather and a fresh wind
at N.E. We reckoned a S.E. half S. way, and twenty-four
leagues. In the afternoon we experienced a N.N.E. sea,
and then soon after a N.N.E. wind. After this a N.
wind, and that but very litde.
September 27th. All the night before this day we had
a fresh wind at N.N.E. About eight this morning, it
came about again to N.N.W. We made a S.E. by S.
way, and thirty-eight leagues. By observation I found
lat. 32° 30' S. Now we enjoyed a very smooth sea, and
fair weather.
Wednesday, September 28th. In the night past a
very fresh wind at N.N.W. and N.W. At break of day
we had a wind at . . . heaving us aback at once.
At noon again the wind was at S.W. our course being
S.E. This morning we took down our top gallant masts.
We made a S.E. by E. way, and on this road twenty-
seven leagues and two thirds. By observation, lat.
33° 16' S., a S.W. sea.
462 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
On the 29th we had very windy and hazy weather,
with some rain now and then. All last night we handed
our maintop sail. We made a S.E. by E. way, and
thirty-two leagues and two thirds. We had a S.W. sea
and wind.
Friday, September 30th. This day we had fresh
winds between S.W. and W. We reckoned a S.E. half
S. way, and thereupon forty-four leagues. By observa-
tion we found lat. 35° 54' S.
October ist. The wind this day was not very fresh,
but varying. My reckoning was a S.E. half S. way, and
twenty-four leagues. An observation gave us 36° 50' S.
This day I finished another quadrant, being the third
I finished in this voyage. We had a S.W. sea, with
showers of rain and gusts of wind.
Sunday, October 2nd. The wind this day was hang-
ing between W.N.W., and N.W. by N. We made a
S.E. by S. way, and thirty-three leagues and two thirds.
By observation we found t^Z"" 14' S. About noon we had
a fresh wind at N.W. and S.W.
October 3rd. Last night in the forepart thereof was
clear, but the latter was rainy. The wind very fresh at
N.W. by N., but this day we had litde wind, and
cloudy weather, a S.W. by W. wind, and a S.E. by S.
way, by which we reckoned thirty-three leagues and one
third.
October 4th. We had a clear night and very fresh
wind. We reckoned a S.E. by S. way, and thereby forty-
three leagues. By observation, lat. 41° 34' S. This day
also fell several showers of rain.
October 5th. We had a windy night, and a clear
day. We reckoned a S.S.E. half E. way. and forty-four
leagues and two thirds. By observation, lat. 43° 26' S.
The weather now was very windy, causing a huge tempes-
tuous sea. The wind at N.W. and N.W. by N. blowing
very high.
October 6th. This day the wind was still at N.W.
SAILINGS TOWARDS MAGELLAN. 463
and yet not so fresh as it was yesterday, the weather very
foggy and misty. As for the wind it came in gusts, so
that we were forced to hand our topsails, and spritsail.
We reckoned a S.E. half S. way, and thereby forty-three
leagues and one third. The seas now were not so high
as for some days past. In the evening we scudded away
under our fore course.
Friday, October 7th. Last night was very cloudy, and
this day both dark and foggy weather with small rain.
We made a S.E. way, and thirty leagues and two thirds.
A fresh wind at N.N.W. and N.W. We keep still under
a fore course, not so much for the freshness of the wind,
as the closeness of the weather.
October 8th. We had a clear night the night before
this day, and a strong gale ; insomuch that this day we
were forced to take in our foresail, and loosen our mizzen.
which was soon blown to pieces. Our eldest seamen said
that they were never in the like storm of wind before,
the sea was all in a foam. In the evening it dulled a
little. We made a S.E. half E. way, and eighteen
leagues, with very dark weather.
Sunday, October 9th. All the past night we had a
furious W.N.W. wind. We set our sail a drough, and so
drove to the southward very much, and almost incredibly
if an observation had not happened, which gave us lat.
48° 15' S. We had a very stiff gale at W.N.W. with a
great sea from W. which met with a S.S.W. sea as great
as it. Now the weather was very cold, and we had one
or two frosty mornings. Yesterday in the afternoon we
had a very great storm of hail. At noon we bent
another mizzen.
Monday, October loth. This day brought us a fresh
wind at N.W. and N.N.W. We made a S.E. half E.
way, and by it forty-four leagues. By observation we
found lat 49^ 41' S. I reckoned myself now to be east
from Paita sixty-nine leagues and a half.
Tuesday Oct. nth. Last night we had a small time
464 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
calm. This day was both cloudy and rainy weather
The wind at S.W. and S.S.W. so furious, that at ten
o'clock this morning we scudded under a main sail. At
noon we lowered our fore yard while we sailed. We
made a S.E. by E. way, and thirty leagues.
CHAPTER XXIII.
The Buccaneers arrive at a place incognito, to tvhich they give the
name of the Duke of York's Islands. A description of the
said islands, and of the gulf or lagoon, wherein they lie, so
far as it zvas searched. They remain there many days by
stress of iveather, not without great danger of being lost.
An account of some other remarkable things that happened
there.
Wednesday, October 12th. All the night before this
day we had many high winds. I reckoned an E.S.E.
way, and twenty leagues ; for our vessel drove at a great
rate. Moreover, we were in lat. 50° 50' S., so that
our easting from Paita by my account ought to be one
hundred and one leagues, or thereabouts.
This morning about two hours before day, we hap-
pened by great accident to spy land. It was the great
mercy of God, which had always attended us in this
voyage, that saved us from perishing at this time, for we
were close ashore before we saw it ; and our foreyard,
which we most needed on this occasion, was taken down.
The land we had seen was very high and towering ; and
here appeared to be many islands scattered up and down.
We steered in with what caution we could, betwe :>n
them and the main, and at last, God be praised, arrived
at a place or rather bay, where we perceived ourselv-s to
be land-locked, and, as we thought, pretty safe from the
danger of those tempestuous seas. From hence we sent
away our canoe to sound and search the fittest place for
anchoring. At this time one of our men, named Henry
VOL. II. ''' H H
466 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
Shergall, as he was going into our sprit-sail top, happened
to fall into the water, and was drowned before any help
could be had, though we endeavoured it as much as we
possibly could. This incident several of our company
interpreted as a bad omen of the place, which proved
not so, through the providence of the Almighty, though
many dangers were not wanting here to us, as I shall
relate.
We came to an anchor in the depth of forty fathom,
more or less, and yet at no greater distance than a
stone's cast from shore. The water where we anchored
was very smooth, and the high lands round about all
covered with snow. Having considered the time of the
year, and all other circumstances, we resolved, that in
case we could find a sufficient stock of provisions here,
we would stay longer, that is, until summer came, or
something more, before we prosecuted our intended
voyage homewards through the Straits of Magellan ;
which now we began to be careful how to find. That
day of our anchoring in this bay, we shot six or eight
brave geese, and some smaller fowl besides. Here we
found also many hundreds of mussel-banks ; all which
were very plentifully stocked with that kind of fish.
We buried our dead man on the shore, giving him seve-
ral vollies for his funeral-rites, according to the custom.
In the night of this day our anchor came home, so that
we were forced to let go a grappling to secure ourselves.
But still every flaw of wind drove us. Hereupon we set
our sprit-sail, and ran about a mile into another bay.
where we let go another anchor, and thus anchored
ag lin. The first anchor, which was also the biggest in
our ship, we lost by this accident, the cable being cut by
thj rocks. To these islands afore-mentioned our captain
gave the name of His Royal Highness the Duke of
Yo k's i slands.
'ih.irsday. Oc, ):)r'r 13th. This day we began to moor
THE DUKE OF YORK'S ISLAND. 467
our ship, she driving as we easily could perceive with
every flaw of wind that blew. The tide flows here full
seven feet up and down. We moored our vessel into a
rocky point, being a key whereof there are many in the
circumference of this bay. The ground of the bottom of
the said bay we found was hard and sandy, being here
and there rocky. This evening we brought on board
great store of limpets, of which we made a kettle of
broth that contained more than all our company could
eat.
On Friday, October 14th, we killed several geese, as
also many of another sort of fowl like an eagle, but hav-
ing a bigger beak, with their nostrils rising from the top
of the middle of their beak by a hand trunk. This
fowl lives on fish, but we saw none. Yesterday in the
eveninor there fell a great sleet of snow on the hills
round about the bay, but none where we were at anchor.
Moreover, this day in the evening we caught limpets m
great quantity, being three times as many as we could
eat. Our men in ranging the keys for game, found
grass plaited above a fathom long, and a knot tied at the
end thereof. In like manner on other keys they found
mussels and limpet shells. From these things we pre-
sendy concluded that these countries were inhabited,
and that some Indians or others were to be found here-
abouts.
Saturday, October 15th. Last night we had much
rain, with large hailstones. About midnight the wind
came to north with such great fury that the tree to which
our cable was fastened on shore gave way, and came up
by the roots. All those gusts of wind were mixed with
violent storms of rain and hail. Thus we fastened again
to other trees. But here it happened that our ship
coming up to the shore, our rudder touched, and there-
upon broke our goose-neck. Great was now our ex-
tremity, and greater it will be, if God send not better
468 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
weather. Scarce a minute now passed without flaws of
wind and rain.
Sunday, October i6th. Last night was rainy, as be-
fore. About nine o'clock our biggest hawser gave way
and broke. All this day likewise we had rain, with seve-
ral showers of hail, and but little wind to W. of N.
Monday, October 1 7th. All last night, until five this
morning, it ceased not to rain. Then until ten it
snowed. On the hills it snowed all the night long.
This day we hunted on the shore many tracks of people
hereabouts, but could find none hitherto, they having
fled and concealed themselves for fear of us, as we sup-
posed.
October i8th. In the past night we had much rain
and hail. But the day was very clear. Hereupon we
made an observation, which gave us lat. 50" 40' S.
Moreover, this day we had pretty warm weather.
October 19th. Both clear and frosty last night. This
day was hazy, and somewhat windy from the north quar-
ter. Every day we had plenty of limpets and mussels of
a very large size.
October 20th. Last night was rainy, and this day
windy, with very great gusts of wind at N.N.W. until
the afternoon. Then we had wind at N.W., being very
fresh and in gusts.
October 21st. All the past night was tempestuous, with
huge gusts of wind and showers of hail. Yesterday in
the evening we carried a cable ashore, and fastened it to
a tree. This being done, at midnight our biggest cable
broke in the middle. Towards morning we had much
snow. In the day, great gusts of wind with large hail-
stones ; and also great plenty of limpets.
October 22nd. Last night we had strange gusts of
wind from N.W., together with much hail and rain. This
day we killed a penguin ; and also began to carry water
on board.
ADVENTURE WITH INDIANS. 469
October 23rd. All the last twenty-four hours we
had much rain. The wind was but litde at \V. and
W.S.W.
October 24th. All this time until noon nothing but
rain. At that time it held up fair for the space of half an
hour, or thereabouts, and then it rained again all the rest
of the day.
October 25th. All this while we had not one minute
fair. Towards evening it held up from raining, but the
weather was cloudy, and withal much warmer than when
we came hither at first.
Wednesday, October 26th. All the past night, and
this forenoon, we had fair weather. But afternoon it
rained again. We found cockles like those we have in
England.
Thursday, October 27th. Last night we had much
rain, with very great gusts of wind, lasting for the whole
space thereof. Yet notwithstanding, this day proved to
be the fairest that we ever had since we came into this
place. In the evening of this day our canoe, which was
gone to search the adjacent places for Indians, or what
else they could find, returned to the ship, with a dory at
her stern. They had gone, as it should seem, beyond
the old bay where we first anchored, and thereabouts
happened to meet with this dory. In it were three
Indians, who perceiving themselves near being taken,
leaped overboard to make their escape. Our men m
pursuing them unadvisedly shot one of them dead. A
second, being a woman, escaped their hands. But the
third, who was a lusty boy about eighteen years of age,
was taken, and him they brought on board the ship. He
was covered only with a seal's skin, having no other
clothing about him. His eyes squinted, and his hair was
cut pretty short. In the middle of the dory they had a
fire burning, either for dressing victuals or some other
use. The dory itself was built sharp at both ends, and
470 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
flat bottomed. They had a net to catch penguins, and
a club hke our bandies, called by them a tomahawk.
His language we could not understand, but he pointed
up the lagoon, giving us to understand that there were
more people thereabouts. This was confirmed by our
men, who also said they had seen more. They had darts
to throw against an enemy, pointed with wood.
On the next day, being October 28th, in the evening
our canoe went from the ship again to seek for more
Indians. They went into several lagoons, and searched
them narrowly. But they could find nothing but two or
three huts, all the natives beinsf fled before our arrival.
In the evening they returned to the ship, bringing with
them very large limpets, and also mussels which were
six inches and a half long. Our Indian prisoner could
open these mussels with his fingers, which our men could
not so readily do with their knives. Both the night past
and this day we had very fair weather.
On the 29th we had in like manner a very fair day,
and also a smooth wind at S.S.E. Our Indian this day
pointed to us that there were men in this country, or not
far off from here, with great beards. He appeared to us
by his actions to be very innocent and foolish. But by
his carriage I was also persuaded that he was a man-
eater. This day likewise we caught limpets enough to
suffice us for the morrow.
Sunday, October 30th. This day was fair, and there
blew a small S.S.E. wind. In the morning we sent a
canoe over to the eastward shore, to seek either for
provisions or Indians, I myself could not go as I de-
sired, being, with two or three more, at that time very
much tormented with the gripes. I am persuaded that
this place where we now were, is not so great an island
as some hydrographers lay it down, but rather an
archipelago of smaller islands. We saw this day many
penguins, but they were so shy that we could not come
THE LAGOON OF THE DUKE OF YORK'S ISLAND. 471
near them. They paddle on the water with their whigs
Very fast, but their bodies are too heavy to be carried by
the said wings. The sun now made the weather very
Warm, insomuch that the snow melted apace.
October 31st. Both last night and this day were very
fair. At noon our canoe returned from the eastern
shore, bringing word that they had found several good
bays and harbours, that were deep even close to the
shore ; only that there lay in them several sunken rocks,
which we had also where we were. But these rocks are
not dangerous to shipping, by reason that they have
weeds which lie two fathoms in circumference about them.
This morning blew a small wind at N.N.E.
November ist. This day was also fair, and we had a
small wind as before, at N.N.E.
November 2nd. Last night I took the polar distance
of the South star of the cock's foot, and found it to be
28° 25'. I observed also the two Magellan clouds, of
which I made mention in this Journal before, and found
them to be as follows, viz., the lesser 14° 05', and the
greater 14° 25'. The morning of this day we hoisted on
end our top-masts, and also brought too a maintop-sail
and fore-sail, and finished our filling all the water we
needed. At the same time the wind hung easterly ;
and I was still much tormented with the gripes as before.
November 3rd. This morning we hung our rudder,
the greatest piece of work we had to do, after those
violent storms above-mentioned. In the afternoon we
hauled in our two biggest hawsers, and also our biggest
cable from the shore. For the last three days we had a
very great and dark fog between us and the eastward
shore. We had now very little wind in the cove where
we were, but abroad at sea there blew at the same time
a stiff gale at S.S.E. Moreover, we could perceive now,
the stormy weather being blown over, much small fry of
fish about the ship, whereof we could see none, as was
472 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
mentioned before. This day we had a very clear and
calm evening.
November 4th. Both all last night and this day we
had very calm weather. And this morning a small
breeze sprang up at N. and N.N.E., which afterwards
wheeled about to S. and S.S.E. This morning we
hoisted our main and fore-yards ; and likewise fetched off
from the shore our other hawser and cable, into eleven
fathom water. Our resolutions were now changed for
a departure, in order to seek the mouth of the Straits
of Magellan, seeing that we could not winter here for
want of provisions, which we could not find either on the
continent or about these islands afore-mentioned. The
weather now was very warm, or rather hot, and the birds
sung as sweetly as those in England. We saw here both
thrushes and blackbirds, and many other sorts of those
that are usually seen in our own country.
Saturday, November 5th. This morning brought us a
wind at N.N.E. hereupon ; we warped to a rocky point,
thereby to get out of the cove where we lay. For our
anchor came home to us as we were carrying our warp
out. At this time a second breeze came up very fresh in
our stern ; so that we took the opportunity thereof, and
went away before it. By noon this day we hoisted in
our canoes, and also turned away loose to the sea our
Indian dory. As for the Indian boy whom we had
taken in said dory we kept him still prisoner, and called
him Orson. Our cove at our departure from this place
looked thus, as I took then the description thereof.
When we were come out into the channel, the weather
grew dead calm. Only now and then we had a small
breeze, sometimes from one quarter and then from
another. By this slackness of wind we observed that the
current hoisted us to the southward. On the east side of
this lagoon we perceived the Indians make a great smoke
at our departure.
$njowy m^untatnes
SiWiV hills
Sprrnj J^
Ji^fza a/tt/e fc> tie JVorfijifard
ï:^^ ^en^utnyZaal
476
THE DUKE OF YORK'S ISLAND. 477
We- had a very fair day till six in the evening ; when
we got without the mouth of the gulf, it blew so hard,
that in an hour it forced us to hand our top-sails. Hav-
ing now a fit gale at N.W. and N.N.W., we stood S.W.
by W. to clear ourselves of some breaks which lie four
leagues from the gulf's mouth at S. and S.S. E. Here-
abouts we saw many reefs and rocks, which occasioned us
to stand close hauled. I have drawn here and given to
my reader so much as I have seen of the gulf itself ; the
rest must be completed in due time by them that have
greater opportunities of making a farther search into it
than I had at the time of our stay here under such tem-
pestuous weather as I have described, and the distemper
which hung upon me at the same time.
The Duke of York's Island is probably situated near the S. part of
the island of Madre de Dios, and English Gulf is the Brazo de la
Concepcion a little to the N. of Magellan's Straits on the Pacific side.
CHAPTER XXIV.
Tluy depart from the English Gulf in quest of the Straits of
Magellan tvhich they cannot find. They return home by an
unknozvn ïvay, never navigated before,
Sunday, November 6th. This morning we had lost the
sight of land, so that we could see it no more. All the
last night, and this day, we were under our two courses
and sprit-sail. The weather this day was hazy. My
reckoning was a S.W. half S. way, and by it twenty-
one leagues. We had now an indifferently high sea,
and a fresh wind at N.N.W.
November 7th. Last night was both rainy and foggy,
but in the morning it cleared up. The wind for the
most part was at W. and W.N.W. But at noon it came
about at W.S.W. Our reckoning was a S.W. by S. way,
and by it twenty leagues. We found by observation lat.
52° o^ . We now steered away S.S.E., the wind being
at that time at W.S.W. In the evening of this day I
found a variation of the needle to N.E. to the number of
15° or better. I was still troubled with the gripes as I
had been before.
November 8th. Last night was fair. About midnight
the wind came to N.N.W. At the break of day, we all
were persuaded that we had seen land, but at noon we
saw that it was none, but only a cloud. The wind was
now at N. My reckoning was a S.E. half E. way, and
thirty-two leagues and one third. We had an observa-
tion that gave us 53° 27' S. The whole day was very fine
and warm, and we saw great numbers of fowls and seals.
November 9th. Yesterday in the evening the weather
47S
DEPARTURE FOR MAGELLAN. 479
was cloudy. Hereupon we lay by under a main course.
After midnight we sailed East, and E. by N., with a fresh
wind at W.N.W. and not any great sea. The day itsel-
was cloudy, and toward noon we had some rain. So at
two in the afternoon we lay by under a main course, the
wind being fresh at N.W. I reckoned an E.N.E. way,
and thereby twenty-eight leagues.
Thursday, November loth. All last night we lay
under a main course, with a mere fret of wind at N.W.
and N.N.W. Day being come, the wind rather increased ;
insomuch that about noon our sail blew to pieces. Here-
upon we were forced to lower the yard, and unbend the
sail, lying for a little while under a mizzen. But that also
soon gave way : so that all the rest of this day we lay a
hull in very dark weather, foggy and windy, with a huge
sea, which oftentimes rolled over us. In the afternoon
it seemed to abate for some space of time ; but soon after
it blew worse than before, which compelled us to lower
our foreyard.
November loth. All last night we had furious windy
and tempestuous weather, from the points of N.W. and
N.N.W., together with seas higher and higher. In the
evening we set our mizzen. At which time the sun ap-
peared very watery ; but the wind now abated by degrees
and the seas also.
November 12th. This morning little wind was stir-
ring, but only some rain fell. About ten it cleared up,
by observation, lat. 55^ 25'. The sea was now much
fallen, and a fresh wind sprung up at W. and W.S.W.
We experienced also a very great current to the S.W.
In the afternoon of this day we set our sails again, re-
solving now unanimously to make for the Straits of St.
Vincent, otherwise called the Straits of Fernando de
Magellan. We had a fresh wind at W.N.W., our course
being S.S.E. under our spritsail, foresail, and foretopsail.
This day we saw many fishes, or rather fowls, who had
heads like Muscovy ducks, as also two feet like them.
48o THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
They had two fins like the fore-fins of turtles : white
breasts and bellies, their beak and eyes being red. They
are full of feathers on their bodies, and their hinder parts
are like those of a seal, wherewith they cut the water.
The Spaniard calls these fowls paxaros ninos. They
weigh most commonly about six or seven pounds, being
about one foot, a little more or less, in length. Our com-
mander. Captain Sharp, had so much dexterity as to strike
two of them. In the evening we set also our mainsail ;
the wind now coming to S. of W.
Sunday, November 13th. All last night we had a
fresh wind between S.W. and W.N.W. with sometimes
mists of small rain. In the evening we enjoyed a fine
leading gale at W.N.W. together with both clear and
wholesome weather. We made a S.E. way, and by it
forty-two leagues and two thirds. This day an observa-
tion gave us lat. 56° 55' S. We still experienced a great
S.W. current. In the afternoon of this day we steered
E.S.E. and in the evening had whiffling winds.
November 14th. Both last night and this morning
we had cloudy weather. About eight it cleared up. My
reckoning was a S.E. by E. way, and by it thirty-two
leagues. Our observation gave us lat. 57° 50' S. This
day we could perceive land, and at noon were due W.
from it. In the evening we stood E. by S:
November 15th. All the past night was very cloudy.
We judged now that we should be close in with the land
we had seen the day before, but the morning being come
we could see none. In the nigfht much snow fell, and in
the day we had great sleets thereof, the weather being
very cold and cloudy. I reckoned an E.S.E. way, and
hereby twenty-nine leagues and two thirds, moreover,
that our lat. was 58° 25' S. The wind was now so fresh
at N., that we were forced to lie under our two courses
and spritsail.
November i6th. Most of this time we had still rain
and snow, but now no night at all, though the weather
IN SEARCH OF THE MAGELLAN STRAITS. 481
was dark. The wind was various, but from midnight
before this day the wind was at S.E. and S.S.E. We
now lay E.N.E. I reckoned a N.E. by E. way, and
twenty-three leagues. About four in the afternoon two
of our fore shrouds' bolts broke, but were presently
mended. This afternoon also we saw a very large whale.
In the evening we handed in our foretop sail, and lay
under our pair of courses and sprit sail, the evening being
very clear.
November 17th. In the past night there was a very
hard frost. At four this morning we saw two or three
islands of ice at the distance of two or three leagues to
the S. of us. Soon after this, we saw several others, the
biggest of them being at least two leagues round. By
observation, lat. 58' 23' S. We had now a vehement
current to the S. At noon I saw many others of these
islands of ice afore-mentioned, of which some were so
long that we could scarce see the end of them, and ex-
tended about ten or twelve fathom above water. The
weather in the meanwhile was very clear, and the wind
cold.^ I found variation of the needle eighteen degrees
to the N.E.
November i8th. All last night was very fair. I must
call it night ; for otherwise it was not dark at all. The
sea was very smooth, and the wind at N. and N.N.W.
I reckoned a N.E. by N. way, and by the same twenty-
two leagues. At ten it grew dead calm, which held all
the afternoon of this day. But at night we had a wind
again at N. and N. by E.
November 19th. This day was cloudy with snow, and
a frosty night preceding it. The wind now was so fresh
at N. that we were forced to take in our topsails, and
lie all day under our courses and spritsail. We made by
an E.S.E. way eighteen leagues and two thirds.
November 20th. We had a cloudy night, together
1 It is impossible to ascertain precisely when they doubled the Horn,
but probably about this date.
VOL. II. Ï Ï
482 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
with mizzling rain and snow. This morning fell so great
a foo^, that we could not see from stem to stern of our
ship. From ten o'clock last night we had also calm,
and very cold weather. But what was worse than all this,
we were now kept to a very short allowance of our sorry
victuals, our provisions growing very scanty with us.
About ten this morning we had a very small breeze at N.
Several of our men were not able to endure the cold,
so fierce it was, whereby they were forced to lie and
keep themselves as close as they could. We made an
E. way, and by the same sixteen leagues. This day at
noon I reckoned myself to be E. from the gulf, whence
we last departed, two hundred and five leagues and two
thirds.
Monday, November 21st. Last evening we caught a
small and white land fowl, and saw two or three more ;
and also this morning. This sight afforded us good
hopes we were not far distant from some coast or other,
yet none could we see in all this long and tedious voyage.
In the night past we had a calm, and all this morning a
great fog with much snow and rain. We reckoned an E.
by N. way, and ten leagues. At one in the afternoon we
had a fresh gale that sprang up at E., and at E. by N.
November 22nd. Most part of this day was calm.
In the meanwhile we could observe our. ship to drive
E. My reckoning was an E.N.E. way, and thereby
thirteen leagues and one third. At one in the afternoon
we had a small gale at W.S.W., our course being N.N.E.
and N.E. by N.
November 23rd. This day we had a gale at N.W.
and freshening still more and more ; so that we were
forced to take in our topsails and spritsail. The wind
was not a settled gale, but often varied from point to
point. At noon it came at N.E. and our course was then
N.N.W. By a N. way we reckoned sixteen leagues.
November 24th. Both last night and this morning
was foggy weather, with some calms between-times. But
IN SEARCH OF THE MAGELLAN STRAITS. 483
at eight in the morning the sun brolve out, though not-
withstanding the day was not clear. By a N.N.E, way
we reckoned fifteen leagues. This morning the wind
came about to E., and by noon it was again at N.E.
We had a clear evening and a fresh gale.
November 25th. All last night we had a fresh wind at
E, and E.N.E., insomuch, that at eight in the morning
we took in our topsails. But at noon the wind was not
so fresh as it had been before. I reckoned a N.N.W.
half W. way, and by the same twenty leagues.
November 26th. Last night the wind was not alto-
gether so fresh as before ; but this morning it was again
very high. The weather was both dark and cloudy, and
brought now and then rain and snow. We made a
N.N.E. way, and hereby thirty leagues. The wind all
along E. by S. and E.S.E. In the evening we had fair
weather again. We experienced for the last ten days a
great Western sea, and saw in the same time several
seals.
Sunday, November 27th. All the past night we en-
joyed a fresh gale and clear weather. I reckoned thirty-
six leagues by a N.E. by N. way. By observation, lat.
52° 48' S. And I judged myself to be E. from the gulf
two hundred and eighty-five leagues. In the evening
of this day we had a very exact sight of the sun, and
found above 30° variation of the needle : whence ought
to be concluded that it is very difficult to direct a course
of navigation in these parts. For in the space of only
twenty-five leagues sailing we have experienced eight or
nine degrees difference of variation, by a good Dutch
azimuth compass.
November 28th. All last night we had a fresh wind
at E.S.E. Towards morning we had but little wind,
all the day being hazy weather. This day we saw a
whole flight of land fowls, of which sort we killed one
before, as was mentioned above. This sight gave us
occasion to believe that, neither then nor at this present.
484 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
were we far distant from land, and yet we descried none
in the residue of this whole voyage. We made by a
N.N.E. way thirty-three leagues. Yesterday in the
evening we set a new spritsail, and about three this morn-
ing we also set our main sail. At one in the afternoon
the wind came about N.E. and N.N.E. which in the
evening blew very fresh, with cloudy weather.
November 29th. The night proved very cloudy, and
the wind blew very fresh at E.N.E. and N.E. by E.
This morning it was at E., with both snow and hail.
Towards noon the weather cleared up, and we found by
an observation taken lat. 49'' 45' S. Our reckoning was
a N. way, and thirty leagues. This day we had a short
E. sea, and withal a very cold evening. I took the sun,
and hereby I found variation 26° 30' to the N. E. This
night the wind came about W. and W.N.W., continuing
so all the night.
November 30th. This day the wind was N. and
N.N.E., with some clouds hovering in the sky. At this
time we had already almost four hours of night. The
morning of this day was very fair and clear. Hereupon,
to give myself satisfaction in the point, fearing the truth
of Spanish books, I worked the true amplitude of the
sun, and found his variation to be 26° 25' to the N.E.,
being very conformable to what I had both read and ex-
perimented before. Hereabouts also we experienced a
current to N. Moreover, this day we saw much rock-
weed, which renewed our hopes once more of seeing
land. We reckoned a N.E. way, and by the same
twenty-two leagues. By an observation made we found
lat. 48° 53' S. This day also we saw several of those
fowl-fish afore described called paxaros-jiinos, and these
of a larger size than any we had seen before. In the
afternoon the wind came about at N.N.E. whereby we
stood N.W. by W., with a fresh gale and smooth water.
The weather now began to grow warmer than hitherto,
and the evening of this day was clear.
IN SEARCH OF THE MAGELLAN STRAITS. 485
Tuesday, December ist. The latter part of last night
was very cloudy, and also sometimes rainy. About mid-
night we had a furious and violent tornado, forcing us in
a moment to hand in our topsails. At five in the morn-
ing we set them again, and at eleven we had another
tornado, forcing us to hand our topsails the second time.
We made a N.N.E. two thirds E. way, and thereby
thirteen leagues and two thirds. The afternoon of this
stormy day proved very fair, and the wind came to
W.S.W., our course being N.E. by N. In the evening
the wind freshened, with cloudy weather.
December 2nd. Last night we experienced a very
furious whirlwind, which, notwithstanding, it pleased
God, did pass about the length of our ship, to W. of us.
However, we handed in our topsails, and hauled up our
lowsails, in the brails. After the whirlwind came a fresh
storm of large hail stones, in the night, and several
tornados ; but, God be thanked, they all came large of
our ship. We now made great way under a forecourse
and spritsail. At four o'clock this morning our foresail
split, whereby we were forced to lower our foreyard. At
half an hour aften ten we hoisted it again with a furious
S.W. wind. We made a N.E. by E. way, and by the
same forty-seven leagues and a half. By observation
we now had lat. 46° 54' S. We reefed our foresail in
consequence of the violence of the wind. But in the
evening this rather increased, and we had a very great
sea. Our standing rigging, through the fury of this gale,
gave way in several places, but was soon mended again.
December 3rd. The wind all last night was very
fresh, with several flaws both of wind and rain at S.W.
and S.W. by S. We enjoyed now very warm weather.
This morning we set our foretop sail. Our reckoning
gave us a N.E. half E. way and forty-five leagues. We
found lat. by observation 45° 28' S. This day at noon a
large shoal of young porpoises came about our ship, and
played up and down.
486 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
December 4th. All last night we had a fresh gale at
W.S.W. The night was clear, only that now and then
we had a small cloud affording some rain. In the morn-
ing from four o'clock till eight it rained ; but then it
cleared up again, with a S.W. wind and a very smooth
sea. We made by a N.E. one quarter N. way, thirty-
nine leagues. By observation we found lat. 44° 01' S.
At noon the wind came to S.S.W., our course then being
N.N.E. This day we agreed among ourselves, having
the consent of our commander, to share the eight chests
of money, which as yet were remaining unshared. Yes-
terday in the evening we let out the reef of our foresail,
and hoisted up our foreyard. This evening I found
variation 17° N.E.
Monday, December 5th. All last night a clear night,
and this a fair day, with a fresh wind at S.S.W, We
reckoned a N.E. 5° N. way, and by the same forty-two
leagues. An observation gave us lat. 42° 29' S. This
afternoon we shared of the chests above-mentioned three
hundred pieces of eight each man. I now reckoned
myself to be E from my departure four hundred and
seventy-one leagues and one third. At night again we
shared twenty-two pieces-of-eight more to each.
December 6th. We had a clear starlight night the
last, and a fair morning this day, with a fresh gale at S.W.
At noon we took in our foretop sail. We reckoned
a N.E. half N. way, and hereby fifty leagues and two
thirds. An observation taken afforded us 40° 31' S.
This evening was cloudy.
December 7th. The night was both windy and cloudy.
At one in the morning we took in our topsails, and at
three handed our spritsail, and so we scudded away be-
fore the wind, which now was very fresh at West. This
morning a gust of wind came and tore our mainsail into
a hundred pieces, which made us put away before the
wind, till we could provide for that accident. My reckon-
ing was a N.E. three quarters E. way, and by the same
IN SEARCH OF THE MAGELLAN STRAITS. 487
thirty-three leagues. By observation we found lat. 39°
2,Y S. We had now a great sea, and a fresh wind.
At three in the afternoon we set another foresail, the first
being blown to pieces. Moreover, at the same time, we
furled our spritsail. At five the wind came at W.S.W.
with very bad weather. This day our w^orthy commander,
Captain Sharp, had very certain intelligence given him,
that on Christmas Day, which was now at hand, the
company, or at least a great part thereof, had a design to
shoot him ; he having appointed that day some time since
to be merry. Hereupon he made us share the wine
amongst us, being persuaded they would scarce attempt
any such thing in their sobriety. The wine we shared
fell out to three jars to each mess. That night the wind
increased.
December 8th. Last night was both cloudy and
windy, the wind often varying between N.W. and S.W.
This morning it varied between W. and N.W. by W.
About noon this day we brought a new mainsail to the
yard, but did not set it then, because there blew too
much wind. I reckoned a N.E. half N. way, and by
the same thirty leagues. By observation, lat. 38° 29' S.
In the afternoon we had one or two squalls of wind and
rain ; but the violence of both fell astern of us. In the
evening it blew again very hard. I observed this day
the rising and setting of the sun, and found the exact
variation to be 12° 15' N.E.
December 9th. The night was starry, but withal
very windy. About the break of day the wind came to
N.W., and at seven we set our foretop sail, and stood
N.N.E. with not much wind. We made since our last
reckoning a N.E. quarter E. way, and twenty-nine
lea^rues. We found by observation lat. if 30' S. The
1 "
sea was much fallen, but our ship now began to complam
of several leaks, through our tedious and long voyage.
This afternoon we hoisted up our mainyard and set up
backstays and main swifter, whose ring-bolt gave way
488 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
but was mended. In the evening of this day we had but
little wind.
December loth. The night was very clear, but till
ten o'clock this forenoon we had no wind. Then a small
breeze sprang up at N. and N. by E. We made an
E.N.E. one third N. way, and hereby twenty-one leagues.
An observation gave us lat. 37° oi' S. In the afternoon
of this day our chief surgeon cut off the foot of a negro
boy, which was perished with cold. Now it was like to
be bad weather again. Hereupon we furled our topsails,
and lay under a pair of courses. But in the evening we
lay under a foresail and mizzen, with misty weather.
Sunday, December i ith. All last night we had a fresh
wind at N. and sometimes at N.N.W. The weather was
very cloudy with drizzling rain. We made an E. way,
and thereby twenty-five leagues. This day brought a
great sea. About ten in the morning one of our main
shrouds gave way. In the evening fell some small rain.
December 12th. All last night we had misty rain and
but little wind ; yea, in the morning a perfect calm. At
noon came up a small gale at E.S.E. and S.E., bringing
with it cloudy weather. We reckoned a N.E. by E. way,
and by the same eighteen leagues. Yesterday died the
negro boy whose leg w^as cut off by our surgeon, as was
mentioned the day before. This afternoon also died
another negro, somewhat bigger than the former, named
Chepillo. The boy's name was Beafero. All this even-
ing but small wind.
December 13th. All night the wind was at E.S.E.,
our course being N.N.E. At three in the morning it
came about at S.S.W. and at nine at E. by N. I
reckoned a N.E. by N. way, and fifteen leagues. The
weather was hazy. In the afternoon the wind was at
N.E. our course being N.N.W. We enjoyed now a
very smooth sea, and saw multitudes of grampuses,
whales and porpoises every day as we sailed along.
December 14th. Last evening was cloudy, as also
IN SEARCH OF THE MAGELLAN STRAITS. 489
the night foggy. Hereupon we took in our topsails.
At half an hour after three this morning, we stood N.E.
the wind being then at N.N.W. At five we put out our
topsails again. At seven of the morning we saw a turtle
floating upon the sea. We reckoned a N.N.E. way.
This day's observation afforded us 34° 32' S. At this
time we had very hot weather, and great dews in the
night. My whole easting I reckoned to be now six
hundred and seventy-seven leagues and one third.
December 15th. Last night was fine with a great
dew. The wind in the interim was between N. and
N.W. I reckoned a N.E. half E. way, and by the same
thirty-one leagues. We had an observation that gave us
lat. 'i^'^° 46' S. At noon the wind cameaboutat N.N.W.
our course being N.E. We had this day a very clear
evening, and at the same time a fresh wind.
December i6th. We had a fair night and wind at
N.N.W. and N.W. by N. This morning I took the sun
at its rising, and found N.E. variation 20° 30'. My
reckoning was a N.N.E. way, and thirty-six leagues and
one third. By observation I found lat. 32° 09' S. At
noon this day the wind came about to N.W.
December 17th. Most part of last night the wind
was at N.W. as before. But towards morning a fine and
easy gale sprang up at W.N.W. This morning we saw
several dolphins playing upon the sea, which made us
hope they would at last befriend us and suddenly show
us some land or other. We reckoned a N.E. by N. one
third N. way, and by the same twenty-five leagues. An
observation gave us lat. 31° 04'. A fair evening.
December i8th. We had a clear night, together with
a smooth gale at N.W., which this morning was at W.
by S. We had now a smooth sea for several days past.
Our reckoning was twenty-five leagues, by a N.E. by N.
way. By observation we perceived lat. 29° 48' S.
December 19th. A clear night and a fresh breeze at
S.S.W. and S.W. by E., lasting until nine in the morn-
490 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
ing. Then sprang up a wind at S.E. by E. I reckoned
this day a K.N.E, half E. way, and upon the same thirty
leagues. By observation, lat. 28° 29' S. The day was
very fair, and a smooth sea, with weather that was very
hot. My whole easting I reckoned now to be seven
hundred and sixty leagues. This evening I found varia-
tion 02^ 50' N.E.
CHAPTER XXV.
The Buccaneers continue their navigation, zvithout seeing any
land, till they arrive at the Caribbean Islands in the West
Indies. They give away their ship to some of their com-
panions that were poor, and disperse for several countries.
The author of this Journal arrives in England.
December 20th, 1681. The night before this day was
somewhat cloudy, but the weather was fair and the wind
but Httle. At noon the wind came about N. by E., our
course being W.N.W. We made a N.N.W. way, and
thereby as I reckoned twenty two leagues. By an obser-
vation made we took lat. 27° 25' S. The evening of this
day was cloudy, and now and then there fell a shower of
rain.
December 21st. At eight o'clock last night the wmd
came N.W. by N., but with such dark weather that
we were forced to take in our top-sails. The night
was somewhat rainy, and the weather this morning calm
and rainy. About ten we had a small breeze at N.W.
We reckoned a N. by E. way, and by the same sixteen
leagues. The afternoon of this day was calm and still.
December 22nd. We had a fair and clear night
which produced this day a smooth sea and extremely hot
weather, and very little wind near the sun ; so that no
observation was made.
December 23rd. The night was very fair. At mid-
night, or thereabouts, a fresh gale sprang up at S.E. and
E.S.E., which sometime was E. This freshened by
degrees. We had in the day very hot and clear weather.
By a N. way I reckoned fifteen leagues.
492 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
December 24th. Last night we had both a fresh gale
and a clear night. The wind was at E. by S. We
reckoned a N.E. by E. way, and by it thirty-one
leagues.
Sunday, December 25th. This day being Christmas
day, for celebration of that great festival we killed yester-
day in the evening a sow. This sow we had brought
from the Gulf of Nicoya, being then a sucking pig of
three weeks old, more or less, but now weighed about
fourscore and ten pounds. With this hog's flesh we made
our Christmas dinner, being the only flesh we had eaten
ever since we turned away our prizes under the equinoc-
tial, and left the island of Plata. We had this day several
fiaws of wind and some rain ; but the weather otherwise
was pretty clear. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and thirty-
three leagues by the same. It was now also extremely
hot weather, as we signified before.
December 26th. We had this day several gusts of
wind, which forced us to stand by our top-sails. Yet
were they but very short, and all the rest of the while
we enjoyed an indifferent fresh gale at E. and E. by S.
We reckoned a N. by E. way, and twenty-eight leagues.
December 27th. We had fair weather, and a fresh
wind at E. and E. by S. I reckoned a N. by E. way,
and upon the same thirty-two leagues. The evening of
this day was cloudy.
December 28th. Last night was cloudy, with a fresh
wind. We reckoned a N.E. way, and by the same
forty-six leagues. We found by observation, lat. 15° 30'
S. My whole easting I reckoned this day to be eight
hundred and twenty-five leagues. Now we saw much
flying fish, with some dolphins, bonitos, and albicores ;
but they will not take the hook.
December 29th. All last night was cloudy, with a
fresh wind between E. and E.S.E. The weather all the
afternoon was hazy. I reckoned a N. by E. way, and
hereupon forty leagues and one third. In the afternoon
CONTINUED NAVIGATION. 493.
we had a S.E. by E. wind, which blew very fresh. The
evening was clear. At sunset I found variation to N. W.
04° 19'.
December 30th. Last night was cloudy. Towards
morning the wind came about at E. At six it came
E.S.E. and at ten to S.E. by S. We made a N. by
E. way, and forty-three leagues. By observation, lat.
1 1° 03' S. The evening of this day was clear.
December 31st. We had a cloudy night, but the
morning was hazy. We came now to a strict allowance
of only three good pints of water each day. We made
a N. by E. way, lat. by observation 08° 55' S. In the
afternoon we had an E.S.E. and S.E. by E. wind.
My whole easting I reckoned now to be eight hundred
and eighty four leagues and one third. At noon we stood
away N.W.
Sunday, January ist, 1682. All last night was cloudy,
as this day also, with some showers of rain. We made
a N.W. one eighth N. way, and forty leagues. In the
afternoon came about a fresh wind at S.E. and E.S.E.
January 2nd. The weather this day was both dull
and cloudy. We reckoned a N.W. one quarter N. way,
and by the same thirty-two leagues. By observation, lat.
06° 06' S. The wind came pretty fresh at S.E.
January 3rd. We had several squalls of wind, and
some rain. But withal a fresh wind at S.E. and E.S.E.
Our reckoning was a N.W. one quarter N. way, and
thirty-four leagues. The afternoon was clear, but the
evening cloudy.
January 4th. All last night was very cloudy, but this
forenoon it cleared up. Yesterday we put abroad our
maintop-sail, studding-sails, but took them in at night.
At four this morning we set our larboard studding-sail,
and before noon fitted up top-gallant masts and yards.
We made a N.W. way, and by it forty leagues and two
thirds. By observation, lat. 03° 09' S. This afternoon
also we set our topgallant-sail, being forced to make out
494 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
all its running rigging. The wind was pretty fresh at
S.E. and S.E. by E.
January 5th. Most part of the past night was clear
and starlight, though with some rain towards the morning.
This being come, we put out our top-gallant sail, and
both our top-sail, studding-sails. At noon likewise we
put up our fore-top-gallant mast and yard. We caught
an albicore this day, weighing about one hundred and
twenty pounds. The wind was at S.E. by S. and S.S.E.
We made a N.W. way, and reckoned thereby thirty-five
leagues. By observation, lat. 02 "" 03' S. We had now
mighty hot weather.
January 6th. Yesterday in the evening we caught
another albicore, which weighed only eight or nine
pounds. We made a N.W. way, and reckoned thirty-
five leagues as before. By observation, lat. 00'' 49' S.
The evening of this day was very clear.
January 7th. The wind was variable between S.S.E.
and S.S.W., though not altogether so fresh as before.
Our reckoning was a N.W. one quarter N. way, and
thirty-six leagues by the same. This day an observation
gave us lat. 00° 32' N. of the equinoctial, which now we
had passed again. In the afternoon of this day we caught
another albicore, which weighed more than the first we
took, that is, between one hundred and thirty-five and
one hundred and forty pounds. But little wind stirring
this afternoon.
January 8th. Last evening we had little better than a
calm. At nine this morning we had a fresh wind at
S.S.E. with dark weather, so that we thought it con-
venient to take in our maintop-sail. But at noon we set
it again, and also our larboard top-studding-sail, with
both top-gallant sails. We made a N.W. way, and by
it thirty-four leagues. By observation, lat. 01° 55' N.
We had now extremely hot weather, and a very small
allowance of water.
January 9th. Last night we took in top-sails all
CONTINUED NAVIGATION. 495
night, the wind then whiffling between S. and W. We
had notwithstanding for the most part very little wind.
The morning of this day was rainy, and thereupon with
good diligence we saved a bumpkin of water. There
was now a great rippling sea, rising very high ; and it is
reported that sometimes and somewhere hereabouts is to
be seen an enchanted island ; which others say, and dare
assert, that they have sailed over. I reckoned a N.W.
by N, one quarter N. way, and twenty-five leagues.
This afternoon we had very dark and calm weather,
looking as if we should have much rain. Now, reckon-
ing up my meridian, I found myself E. from my depar-
ture seven hundred and two leagues. In the evening we
had very rainy weather and a cockling sea.
January loth. All last night was cloudy. About
midnight sprang up a small breeze varying all round the
compass. At five this morning we had a breeze at S.E.
and a very clear sky, which afterwards continued to
freshen, with the same clearness as before. We made a
N.W. by N. one quarter N. way, and by the same two
leagues and two thirds. By clear observation, lat. 03' 16'
N. At four this evening the wind was at E.S.E., the
weather being violent hot ; insomuch that our allowance
of water was tedious to us for its shortness. At the same
time we had an indifferent smooth sea from the E.
January i ith. All last night we had little or no wind.
But about two in the morning the wind freshened again
at E.N.E., and brought both a clear and hot day. We
made twenty-three leagues by a N.W. one quarter W.
way. This day's observation gave us lat. 04" 06' N.
In the afternoon we had a shower of rain, and afterwards
a fresh wind at E.N.E. But the evening grew dull.
January 12th. Last night we had two or three squalls
of wind, and some showers of rain. In the meanwhile
the wind blew fresh at N.E. and N.E. by E., as it also
continued to do in the day. I reckoned a N.W. way,
and forty-four leagues and one third. Our observation
496 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
this day gav^e us 05° 49' N. Yesterday and to-day we
set our maintop sail. Now I could not find much varia-
tion of the needle.
January 13th. We had a fresh gale all last night, but
more northerly than before ; for now it was N.E. by
N. We reckoned a W.N.W. way, and thereupon
leagues and two-thirds. An observation showed, lat. 06"
41' N. We had a N.N.E. sea and very clear weather.
January 14th. We had a clear night, and a fresh wind
at E.N.E. We made a N.W. one fifth W. way, and
thirty-eight leagues. By observation, lat. 07° 46' N.
We had a smooth sea ; and now we were come to only
three horns of water a day, which made in all but a quart
allowance for each man. The evening was clear, and we
had a fresh wind.
Sunday, January 15th. Last night was clear, and the
wind fresh at E.N.E., and again at N.E. by E. very
fresh. At about eleven o'clock at night there died one of
our companions, named William Stephens. It was com-
monly believed that he poisoned himself with mancanilla
in Golfo Dulce, for he never had been in health since
that time. This forenoon was cloudy. We reckoned
forty-four leagues and a N.W. way. An observation
gave us this day 09" 18' N. All last night we kept out
our top-gallant sails. We saw hereabouts many flying
fish, being very large in size. This morning also we
threw overboard our dead man, and gave him two French
vollies and one English one. I found now again very
small variation.
January i6th. We had a clear night, and a very
fresh wind at N.E. and E.N.E., with a long, homing
sea. My reckoning was a N.W. one seventh W. way,
and thereby forty-eight leagues and one-third. The
observation made this day gave us lat. 10° 48' N. I
reckoned myself now E. from my departure five hundred
and fifty-three leagues. We had a very cloudy even-
ing.
COATINUED NAVIGATION. 497
January 17th. All last night we enjoyed a fresh wind,
and so this day also, at N.E. by N. We made a N.W.
half W. way, and thereupon forty-seven leagues and one-
third. By observation we found lat. 12° 19' N. We
had now a long north sea. At noon this day we steered
away N.N.W. The day was very hot, but the night
both cool and dewy.
January i8th. All last night was both cloudy and
windy. At six this morning our sprit sail topmast broke.
I reckoned a W.N.W. way, and forty-eight leagues by
the same. We found by observation, lat. 13° 12' N. At
noon we steered away W., the wind being at N.E. fresh,
with a clear evening.
January 19th. We had a clear night, and a fresh
wind at E.N.E., which sometimes came in pushes. Our
reckoning was a W. half S. way, and by the same forty-
six leagues. W^e found by observation lat. 13° 01' N.
Yesterday in the evening we put up a new sprit sail top-
mast ; with a fine, smooth gale at N.E. by E.
January 20th. Last night was clear, and not very
fresh, but at daybreak it freshened again. Last night we
saw a great shoal of fish ; whereof we caught none, by
reason the porpoises frightened them from us, as they
ofttimes had done before. Yesterday in the evening
also we saw a man-of-war fowl, and that gave us good
hopes we should e'er long see land. These hopes, and
the great desires we had to end our voyage, gave us
occasion this day to put in, or stake down, each man of
our company a piece of eight for a reward to him that
should first discover land. We reckoned a W. one-sixth
N. way, and by it thirty-eight leagues. An observation
gave us this day lat. 13° 11' N. The wind was at N.E.
and E.N.E. This day we passed over many ripplings,
and also saw many multitudes of fish ; but the porpoises
did always hinder us from having any good of them.
January 21st. We made a W. way, and reckoned
lorty-seven leagues. By observation we found lat. 13°
VOL. II. K K
498 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
07 N. The wind was at E.N.E., and thence came a
long sea. The evening was very clear.
January 22nd. We had a fair and a clear day, the
wind being at E. We reckoned a W. by N. one-third
W. way, and forty leagues. An observation showed us
lat. 13° 17' N. We had a clear evening, and a fresh
wind at E.N.E.
January 23rd. This day was both clear and hot, with
a fresh wind at E.N.E. My reckoning was a W. way,
and forty-six leagues. Our observation this day afforded
us lat. 13° 15' N. In the evening we had some rain.
January 24th. This day brought us likewise clear
weather, such as the day before. I reckoned a W. way,
and forty leagues and one-third. By observation we
found lat. 13° 12' N. The afternoon was cloudy, and
had some rain, the wind freshening at E.N.E. and at E.
by N. I reckoned now that I was E. from my depar-
ture three hundred and eleven leagues. We had a cloudy
evening.
January 25th. Both last night and this morning the
weather was cloudy. This morning we saw several
tropical birds of divers sorts. Our reckoning was a W.
three-quarters N. way, and forty-three leagues. We
found by observation lat. 13° 29' N. This afternoon we
saw a booby flying close aboard the horizon. The
weather was hazy. But now we began to look out sharp
on all sides for land, expecting to see it every minute. 1
reckoned myself to be E . of my departure two hundred
and sixty-eight leagues.
January 26th. Last night was indifferent clear. Yet
notwithstanding, this morning we had a smart shower of
rain, and it was very windy. Hereupon we furled our
sprit sail, the weather being very hazy to W. We
reckoned a W. way, and thereby forty-six leagues and
one-third. By observation, lat. 13° 17' N. At noon this
day we had a very fierce tornado and rain together ; but
a clear afternoon. We had a high E.N.E, sea, and saw
LAND SIGHTED. 499
multitudes of flying-fish, and amongst these, two or three
boobies. The evening was hazy.
January 27th. All last night we had a fresh wind,
and clear weather. This morning our foretop mast back-
stay gave way, and at daybreak the star-board sheet of
our foretop sail broke. We had several tornadoes this
day, and dark weather. Our reckoning was a W. way,
and forty-eight leagues by the same. We had a clear
evening and a dark night. This day also a certain
bird, called a noddy, came on board us, which we took
for a certain token that we were not now very far from
land.
Saturday, January 28th. We had a very clear night.
About an hour before day one of our company happened
to descry land, which proved to be the Island of Barba-
dos, at S.S.W. from us, and at two leagues and a half
distance, more or less. Hereupon we clapped on a wind.
N, and by W. At daybreak we were only four leagues
distant from Chalky Mount, at which time we stood S.W.
by S. As we sailed we saw several ships at anchor in
Spikes Road. Soon after a shallop passed by, between
us and the shore, but would not come within call of us.
Hereupon we stood in, within a mile of the shore, and
made a wiff to a pinnace which we saw coming out of
the road afore- mentioned. She came close aboard us,
and as it should seem, was the barge of one of his
Majesty's frigates, the Richmond, then lying at the Bridge-
town at anchor. They told us of peace at home, but
would not come on board us, though often invited there-
to. Neither dared we be so bold as to put in there at
Barbados ; for hearing of a frigate lying there, we feared
lest the said frigate should seize us for privateers, and
for having acted in all our voyage without commission.
Thus we stood away thence for the Island of Antigua.
Here I cannot easily express the infinite joy we were
possessed with this day to see our own countrymen
again. They told us that a ship, which we saw in the
500 THE BUCCANEERS OE AMERICA.
offing to leeward of the island, was a Bristol-man, and an
interloper ; but we feared that same vessel to be the
frigate afore- mentioned. I reckoned a way of twenty-five
leagues, so that I was now by my account to eastward of
my departure one hundred and fifty-one leagues. Now
we stood N. by W., and by observation found lat. 13°
17' N., we being then N.W. from the body of the island
of Barbados between seven and eight leagues. This
afternoon we freed the negro who was our shoemaker by
trade, giving him his liberty for the good service he
had done us in all the course of this voyage. We gave
also to our good commander, Captain Sharp, a mulatto
boy, as a free gift of the whole company, to wait upon
him, in token of the respect we all were owing to him,
for the safety of our conduct through so many dangerous
adventures. This being done, we shared some small
parcels of money, that had not as yet been touched of our
former prizes ; and this dividend amounted to twenty-
four pieces-of-eight each man.
At one o'clock this day from our fore-yard we descried
the island of St. Lucia, being one of the Western
Islands, not far distant from that of Barbados. I had
omitted to tell a passage which happened in our ship, on
Thursday last, which was the 26th day of this month, and
just two days before we made the island of Barbados.
On that day, therefore, a little Spanish shock-dog, which
we had found in our last wine-prize, taken under the
equinoctial and had kept alive till now, was sold at the
mast by public cry for forty pieces-of-eight, his owner
saying that all he could get for him should be spent upon
the company at a public merriment. Our commander,
Captain Sharp, bought the dog, with intention to eat
him, in case we did not see land very soon. This money,
therefore, with one hundred pieces-of-eight more, which
our boatswain, carpenter, and quartermaster had refused
to take at this last dividend, for some quarrel they had
against the sharers thereof, was all laid up in store till we
ARRIVAL AT THE CARIBBEAN ISLANDS. 501
came to land, with the intent of spending it ashore, at a
common feast or drinking bout. At sunset the island
of St. Lucia bore W.S.W. from us, and was at ten
leagues distance. Also the island of Martinique bore
N.W. by W. of us at twelve or thirteen leagues distance.
We had this day a very clear evening.
Sunday, January 29th. We had a clear night and a
fresh wind at E. by N. and at E.N.E. Our reckoning
was a N.N.W. half W. way, and hereby forty-six leagues.
By observation we took lat. 15^ 46' N. At noon this
day we saw the island named La Desirade, or the De-
sired Island, which then bore N.W. from us, and seemed
to be at eight leagues distance, more or less. At six
o'clock in the evening we saw likewise Mariegalante.
another of the Caribbee Islands, at S.W. by W. from us,
and that of Guadaloupe, streaking itself in several hum-
mocks of land, both W. and N. ; as also La Desirade
above-mentioned at S.E., which from there shows like
table-land, and at each end has a low point running
out. At six this evening it was W.S.W., and at five
or six leagues distance from us. At the same time we
saw the island of Montserrat, at a great distance from
our ship, and making three round hummocks close to-
gether. This evening likewise we caught an albicore of
twenty pound weight.
Monday, January 30th. We had a fair night all the
last past, and a fresh wind. Hereupon, all night we
hauled up our main sail in brails, standing at the same
time N. by W., with the wind at E.N.E. At midnight
we stood N.W. At three in the morning we lay by until
five. Then we stood away W.N.W. until six, and at that
hour we stood W. At eight o'clock we saw the island of
Antigua, called by us Antego, to the S. of us, making
three round hummocks of land, and a long high hill to
N. Hereupon we stood W.S.W. for it. At noon we
found lat. \f N., the island being then just W. from us.
We came about to the S. of the island, and sent a
502 THE BUCCANEERS OF AMERICA.
canoe on shore to get tobacco and other necessaries that
we wanted, as also to ask leave of the Governor to come
into the port. The gentry of the place and common
people were very willing and desirous to receive us. But
on Wednesday, February ist, the governor flatly denied
us entry ; at which all the gentry were much grieved,
and showed themselves very kind to us.^ Hereupon we
agreed among ourselves to give away, and leave the ship
to them of our company who had no money left of all
their purchase in this voyage, having lost it all at play ;
and then to divide ourselves into two ships, which were
now bound for England. Thus I myself and thirteen
more of our company went on board Captain Robert
Porteen's ship, called the Lisbon Merchant, and set sail
from Antigua on February nth, and landed at Dart-
mouth in England, March 26th, anno 1682.
^ Sharp and others were tried in England on their return, at the
instance of the Spanish Ambassador, for piracy in the South Seas, but
escaped. On the charge of taking the Rosario and kilHng her captain
it was successfully pleaded in defence that as the Spaniards fired first
the pirates were justified in defending themselves. Three of the same
crew were tried at Jamaica, of whom one was hanged on his plea of
guilty, the other two being acquitted in default of evidence.
INDEX.
Abelcose tree, 27.
Acajou, 8, 25.
Achioc, 251.
Acoma tree, 25.
Agreements among the Bucca-
neers, 40, 41, 189.
Aguja Point, 424.
Alcatraces, 19.
Alleston, Capt., 276.
Alexander, J., drowned, 429.
Alligator — see Crocodile.
Aloes, 7, 25.
Alta Gracia, 17.
Anana, 8.
Androeas, Capt., 277, 287, 313.
Antigua, arrival, 501.
Antonio, Capt., 279, 287, 313.
Apricot, 23.
Argandona, Don T. de, 356, 387.
Arica, xxiii., 366 ; attack on, 409-
412 ; map, 415.
Arrows, Indian, 245, 247.
Articles — see Agreements.
Aso Pueblo d', 18.
Bachelors' Delight, xxiv.
Bacones, 8.
Ballona Gulf, 289, 296.
Balsa, 345, 352.
Baltazar, Don, 356, 357.
Banana, 44 ; wine, 66.
Baptism, crossing line by French,
2, 4 ; by Dutch, 3.
Barbacoa, 326.
Barahona, Don J. de, 305.
Barbados, 499.
Bark log — see Balsa.
Barracoa, 131.
T, J- Michael de, 84.
Bayame, 131.
Belona — see Ballona.
Bete rouge, 27.
Bilby tree, 400.
Binkes, Jacob, 265 ; Cayana, 267 ;
Tobago, 270; death, 272.
Bitumen, 107.
Blanco, Cape, 346, 351, 434.
Bleevelt Bay, 246.
Bliniac, Comte de, 269, 271.
Boar, 8 ; dog, 34.
Boca del Dragon, 243 ; del Tore,
239. 275-
Borrica Point, 434.
Boucan, viii., x.
Bournano, Capt., 275, 276.
Brasiliano, Roche, origin, 69 ;
exploits, 70-72.
Brazil wood, 25.
Brethren of coast — see Bucca-
neers.
British Honduras, xi.
Brodeley, Capt., 198.
Buccaneers, derivation, i., ix. ;
mode of fighting, xiii. ; causes
of decay, xv. ; partners, xi.,
59, 62 ; origin and customs,
39 ; hunters, 40 ; planters,
41; piracy, 54; provisions,
58 ; agreements, xi., 59,
62 ; shares, 60 ; wounds, 62,
189.
Bull, Mr., 302.
Bullock, Mr., 447.
Bustos, Don A. de, 174.
504
INDEX.
Cabbage palm, 21 ; paper, ib.; Juan
Fernandez, 400.
Cabreros, 39.
Cagadores de nioscas, 29.
Calarodes, 174.
Caldero, 427.
Camarones River, 406.
Cammock, Wm., 392.
Campeche, xvii., 74; wood, no.
Campo, Don E. de, 124; letter,
168.
Candle wood, 7.
Cannis, 369.
Cano, I., 427.
Canoes, 25.
Carabaxal, Don D. de, 305.
Caracas, 266.
Caramite tree, 24.
Carasoles, 8.
Carpenter birds | „
Carpinteros j ^ '
Cassava, 43.
Cassia, 25.
Cattle, 38.
Cayana, 267 ; taken, 269.
Cayboa, 317 ; mutiny, 321.
Cayman — see Crocodile.
Cayos, 132.
Cazeres, F. de, 128.
Cedars, 25.
Celebes, xxvi.
Centipedes, 29.
Chagre, 198; defence, 199-202.
Chandelle, Bois de, 7.
Chandy Point, 305.
Chapelet palm, 22.
Chappel, Jas, 449.
Chepillo, 301.
Chepo, 275.
China root, 7.
Christoval, Don, 356, 357.
Ciavone, Capt., 270.
Citrons, 20.
Coca, 406-8.
Cochinillas, 28.
Colan, 457.
Coma, 49.
Comana, 181.
Commissions, 53.
Comrades, 40.
Cook, Capt. E., 276, 301, 319, 321.
399-
Cook, Wm., 399; died, 417.
Coquimbo, 385 ; map, 389.
Corrientes, Cape, 131.
Cow, sea, 243,
Cowley, xxviii.
Cox, Capt. John, 322, 338, 369,
398-
Coxon, Capt., xxiii., 276, 287, 302.
Crab, 9 ; lemon, 20.
Crickets, 28.
Crocodiles, 30, 32, 256, 321.
Crows, 39.
Cuba, 131.
Curagoa, 259.
Cygnet, The, xxiv., xxv., xxvi.
D.
Dampier, W., xxiii., xxiv., 425.
Darien Indians, 276; king, 279;
king's daughter, 286.
Date tree, 20, 21.
Davis, John, xxiv.-xxvii. ; Nica-
ragua, 74 ; St. Augustine, 76.
Desirade, La, 501.
Dog, 34-37; sale of, 500.
Donna Maria, Cape, 19.
Drake's Isle — see Plata.
Duke of York Isles, 466, 473.
Dulce Gulf, 436, 440.
E.
Rlemi gum, 7, 25.
English Gulf, 477.
Espada Point, 19.
Espinosa — see Prickle palm.
„ Don — see Campo.
Espiritu Santo, 131.
Esquemeling, John, birth, xxviii.,
xxxv. ; voyage, i ; sold, 14 ;
pirate, 15.
Estancias, 312.
Estreès, Comte d', Cayana, 268,
270 ; Tobago, 272.
Faisanes, 246.
Fall, John, 398.
INDEX.
505
False Wild Harbour, 396.
Faral de Plantanos, 300.
Fire-flies, 28; ship, 170.
Fly, species, 27, 28 ; catcher, 29.
Francois, Pierre, 62-64.
Frank palm, 21.
French in Hispaniola, manners
39 ; planters revolt, 46
quarrel with English, 138
with Morgan, 150-153.
Friar killed, 349.
G.
Gabaret, Msr., 269.
Gabriel, Josephe, 329.
Galapagos, xxv.
Gallo, 332 ; surprise, 350.
Galeno, Capt. J., 128.
Galleon, Panama, 226.
Genipa-tree ink, 24.
Genoese factory, Panama, 224.
Gibraltar, 89 ; L'Ollonais, 93-98 ;
Morgan, 159-166.
Gimbes, 46.
Glow-worm — see Fire-flies.
Goat-keeper bird, 39; key, 350.
Goave, St. J. de, 18.
Godolphin treaty, xxxi.
Gold mine, 112; Darien, xxiv.,
279 ; Gorgona, 327.
Golden Island, 277.
Gorgona, 326-7-8, 331.
Gorgonilla, 333.
Gracias a Dies, Cape, 249.
Grammont, xxii.
Granada, xxvii.
Grand, Pierre le, 54-56.
Grillones — see Crickets.
Grogniet, Capt., xxv.-xxvii.
Guanadillas, 260.
Guarda costas, vii.
(iuasco, 418, 420.
Guayaquil, xxiv., xxvi., xxvii., 346,
action, ib.
Guaiacum, 7, 18, 25.
Guines agudos, 44.
Gum Elemi — see Elemi.
Guyones, Cape, 432.
Guzman, Don J. P. de, 124.
H.
Hacha, Rio de la, 186.
Hansel, Capt., 181.
Harris, Capt. Peter, 275-6, 301 ;
killed, 310.
Havana, La, 131.
Hilliard, John, 398.
Hilo, 364; taken, 368-372; map,
374 ; retaken, 422.
Hispaniola, 16; French in, 46;
Dutch, 47 ; rebellion, 48.
Honduras, British, x.
Horadada Peha, 454.
Horn, Cape, 481.
Horses, 37.
Horse, Mors de, 454.
I.
Indians' treatment, 36 ; Maracaibo
tree-dwellers, 88 ; Yucatan,
108 ; infant marriage, 109 ;
Las Pertas, 113; cannibals,
44 ; Boca del Toro, 239 ; del
Drago, 243 ; Gracias a Dios,
249 ; Darien, 276, 437 ; Mos-
quito, 341 ; Dulce, 438 ; Duke
of York Isles, 469.
Indigo, 46.
Ink — see Genipa.
Iquique, 405-407.
J.
Jamaica, 257, 259.
Juan Fernandez, xxiii., xxiv., 393 ;
mutiny, 399; action, 401.
Juan Diaz, Rio de, 366.
K.
Katalina, S^ xviii.
Kidnappers, 49.
King of Darien, 279, 286, 313.
,, Charles' Harbour, 441.
Knight, Capt. W., xxv., xxvi.
Lacumba, 422.
Lady, Spanish, 230, 235.
;o6
INDEX.
Lampsius, Adr. and Corn., Tobago,
267.
Lapina, 346.
Latanier palm, 22.
Lavelia, xxvi.
Lemons — see Limes.
Leon, XXV.
L'Escayer, xxv.
Lesi, Msr., Cayana, 268.
Lexa, Rio, xxv.
Leyva, Don J. R. de, 128.
Lignum Sanctum — see Guaiacum.
Lima merchant's ship, 339 ; fleet,
348.
Limes, 20.
Lisbon merchant. The, 500.
Lobos, Cape, 19.
Logwood, no ; cutters, x.
L'OUonais, origin, 79 ; wrecked,
80; De los Cayos, 81 ; Mara-
caibo, 86-93 j Gibraltar, 93-
98 ; cruelties, 92, 103 ; P°
Cavallo, 102 ; takes ship, in;
left by men, 113 ; death, 116.
Lopez, Don D., 449.
M.
Macket, Capt., 276.
Macoa, 106.
Madre de Dios, 477.
Magellan clouds, 360, 471 ; straits,
477-
Magniot, 8.
Maintenon, Lieut., 266.
Maiz, 43.
Malabrigo Bay, 424.
Mamayn 7 ^
Mammee )
Manganilla ") ^^ ^
Manchineel ) 5' o- ^ 49 •
Mandioca, 43.
Manglares, 443.
Mansvelt, 74, 121, 122.
Manta, 336, 450.
Mapou, 25.
Maracaibo, 86; L'OUonais, qi ;
Morgan, 157.
Marcy, C, 369, 433
Mariegalante, 501.
Martinique, 501.
Mata Ricos, 131.
Merida, 89.
Mestizos, 18.
Millipedes, 29.
Mindanao, xxvi.
Miracle, 357.
Mirick, 44.
Miscelaw, 282.
Monkey, 246.
Montbars, xviii.
Monte de Christo, 336.
Montgomery, Robt., 356.
Montserrat, 501.
Moreno, Juan, 352, 356, 357.
Moreno, Moro, 424,
Mosquito Indians, 341.
N.
Nata, 314.
Negroes, Mosquito, 250, 254.
Nevis, xvii.
New Cape Blanco, 433.
Nicaragua, xvii., xxv., 74.
Nicoya Gulf, xxiv., 427, 433.
Nicholas, The, xxiv.
Nicobar Islands, xxvi.
O.
Ocoa, 153.
Ogeron, Msr., Tortuga, 13, 35 ;
Cura^oa, 260, 261 ; Porto
Rico, 264 ; Trinidad, 266.
Old man killed, 407.
Old Providence, xviii.
Otoque, 316.
Paita, 353, 454; map, 457.
Palm, 21 ; wine, 22.
Palmetto, 8.
Panama, 122 ; Morgan, 208 ; Cox-
on, 304 ; action, 305 ; Saw-
kins, 316 ; map, 317.
Paper-palm, 21.
Paquayes, 8.
Pardelas, 396.
Parina, 352.
Parrots, 38.
Partners — see Buccaneers.
Passao Cape, 335, 338, 446, 447.
Passeur, Msr. Le, 11.
INDEX.
507
Patache, The, 348.
Pearls, Rancherias, 63 ; Cayboa,
317-
Peralta, Don F. de, 305, 322, 326,
356, 379-
Perico, 304, 313.
Perlas, Las, Indians, 113.
Pheasants, 246.
Picard, Pierre le, 112.
Pigeons, 8, 39.
Pilot, Maracaibo, 173 ; Gabriel,
329; Moreno, 352.
Pine-apple, 8.
Pintadas, 38.
Pirate — see Buccaneers.
Pitch Lake, 117.
Place, Msr. de la, 79.
Plata, Isle de la, xxiii., xxiv , 337-
343 ; mutiny, 425, 487 ;
plot, 452.
Plate, ditto.
Ponce, Admiral, 453.
Porto Bello, 141, 143, 145.
„ Rico, Ogeron, 264.
Portugues, Bart., 65.
Potato, 8, 43.
Prickle palm, 23.
Providence, Old, xviii. : New, xix.
Puebla Nueva, 317.
Puerto del Principe, 134; Marrano,
131-
Puis, A. de, 86.
Q-
Quebrada, 409.
Quibo, XV., xvii.
Quicara, 323.
Quito, 346.
R.
Racoven, 115.
Rancherias, 63.
Raqueltes, 105.
Ravens — see Crows.
Revenge, The, xxiv.
Richmond, The, 499.
Ringrose, Basil, xxvi., xxviii., 293,
297, 298 ; Hilo, 369 ; Co-
quimbo, 385.
• Rojados — see Bete rouge.
Rosary Palm, 22.
Rosario, The, 448, 502.
Row, Capt., 276.
St. Catherine, Mansvelt, 74 ; Mor-
gan, 191.
St. Christopher )
Kitts ) 9'
Faucher, 269.
Helena Point, 344.
Laurence, 293, 336.
Lucia, 500.
Nicholas, 19.
Sama, Mora de, 365.
Samana, Cape, 19.
Samballas, no, 276.
Sanchez, Don S., 159.
Sandal wood, 7.
Sand fly, 27.
San Domingo, 16.
Francisco, 334, 448.
Mateo, 334, 443.
Miguel Gulf, 277, 291.
Pedro, 444.
Rosario, xxiv., 448.
Santa Cruz, 131.
„ Maria, 131, 277, 285.
Santiago, 17, 131, 334; River,
445-
Saunders wood, 7.
Savona, 17, 155.
Sawkins, Capt. R., xxiii., 276, 306,
314; President of Panama,
310; killed, 318; dice, 400.
Scolopendria, 29.
Scorpions, 29.
Scot, Lewis, 74.
Sea cow — see Manati.
„ lions — see Walrus.
Seals, 397.
Selkirk, 400.
Serena, La, 380, 386 ; map, 384.
Servants — see Slaves.
Sharp, Capt. Bart., xxiii, xxiv., 276,
301. 314, 318; Hilo, 370,
390, 411 ; Chira, 428, 487,
500, 502.
Sharp's Island— j^t'(? Gorgona.
Shergall, H., 466.
Silver, xxiv.
;o8
INDEX.
Simon, Sieur, 122.
Slaves, cruelty to, 50.
Sloth, 329.
Snakes, 28, 337.
Solango, 344, 452.
Sourdis, Chev., 2.
Spider, 29, 156.
Sprenger, Capt., 306.
Stevens, Will., 496.
Sugar, 42 ; works, 369.
Swan, Capt., xxiv.
Tarapaca, Mora, 376.
Tavoga. 314.
Tiburon, 10.
Timor, xxvi.
Tobacco, 41, 45.
Tobago, 267, 272.
Tocamora, 275.
Torongas — see Limes.
Tortoise, 17, 20, 61, 106, 324,
341-
Tortuga, 6, 9, 10, 13.
Townley, Capt., xxv., xxvi, xxvii.
Trinidad town, 131 ; island, 266.
,, La Santissima, 309, 313,
349-
Tucames, 444.
Tumbes miracle, 351.
V.
Vaca, Isla de la, 150.
Vacadas, 312.
Vanclein, M., 112.
Van der Graef, 270.
„ Dongen, 270.
„ Vin, 103.
Vanero, 432.
Velas, Punta de, 435.
Veraguas, 112.
Veycon, 44.
Vigilias, 86.
Vinosa — see Wine Palm.
W.
Wafer, L., xxiii., xxvi., 425.
Walrus, 396.
Watling, Capt. John, 399, 405,
411.
West India Co., French, i. .
William, Mosquito Indian, 400.
Wine palm, 23 ; potato, 43 ;
banana, 44.
Wood pullets — see Pintadas.
X.
Xagoa, 131.
Ximenez, J., 5, 126.
Y.
Yannas, 8.
Ycao, 26.
Zuera, Rio de, 245.
Biifler & Tanner. The Sclwood Printing Works, Frome, and London.
/.
University of California
SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY
Return this material to the library
from which it was borrowed.
ttfiitilidt^
REC'D LD-URL
J>.V.|U i
m^i^
It ,--
1819
S£P 0 1 1998
2SNhEKLOAH
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11